‘Must see’ videos that explain the latest dystopian events

This post presents links to the latest videos that explain recent events driving our world towards totalitarianism, genocide and a dystopian future, but other events that project a future where ‘good’ beats ‘evil’.

21 July 2024.  Well known and respected website host and interviewer MelK interviews Colonel Douglas Macgregor about numerous aspects of the USA, past and present.  Macgregor, now CEO of Our Country Our Choice (ourcountryourchoice.com), describes in detail how the US is run by incompetent people who have almost ruined the country over half a century. The senseless wars, ruinous financial systems and overt bullying of many countries ignore the wishes of the US citizens.  Donald Trump achieved much but was misled in several key areas leading to bad choices. A complete change in regime and governance is essential to restore real democracy. New Mel K & Douglas Macgregor | Truth & Consequences: Changing Course to Save the Republic | Prophecy | Before It’s News (beforeitsnews.com)

============================

12 July 2024.    The Australia Corporation. Many people know that in 1973, the Australian government changed Australia from not a sovereign Commonwealth country to a corporation.  This was done in contravention of the Australian Constitution which requires any changes to be agreed upon by a full referendum that did not happen.  So Australia is now governed as a Corporation registered in New York, USA.  Therefore no supposed law since 1973 is legal.  Members of the Australian government sign allegiance to the supposed Queen of Australia, not Queen Elizabeth of England (or Charles III).  The White Rabbit (sobriquet) explains this and more better than most in the video.  She has been on the sharp end of many attacks and attempted assassinations. THE WHITE RABBIT – Australia: A Conspiracy of Silence (bitchute.com)

===============================

2 July 2024. Danny Haiphong interviews Scott Ritter who explains how Russia has changed dramatically under the leadership of President Vladimir Putin, advancing the country from a basket-case that followed the demise of the Soviet Union driven by clandestine people from the West. Russia is now one of the most successful countries in the world with high economic growth, amongst the highest-rated presidents, their highly-regarded Russian Orthodox Church and fast-increasing standard of living. The most extraordinary fact is that each time the US and allies take measures against Russia it results in major improvements for Russia’s economics, trading and finance as well as Russia’s standing with most countries in the world that have or plan to join the BRICS+ group.  Bing Videos

====================================

19 June 2024. Douglas MacGregor Unravels: President Putin’s Pushed NATO & Ukraine governments into their biggest nightmare ever.  The biggest losers are the great majority of Ukrainian citizens, millions of that have fled the country.  Russia does not want to take over Western Ukraine, simply remove the Nazi and corrupt influences and ensure the Ukrainians in Eastern Ukraine are allowed to join Russia, as they voted for. It is incongruous that the US and many European politicians still still support the corrupt Zelenski regime. Douglas MacGregor Unravels: Putin’s POWERFUL SLAP Pushed NATO & Ukraine Into BIGGEST Nightmare Ever (youtube.com)

===========================

7 June 2024:  This 7-minute interview describes the incredible success of the new President of El Salvador who genuinely represent the people of El Salvador.  At the end of Tucker Carlson’s interview, the President states the first item on his 3-part plan is to “seek God’s  wisdom”.     President of El Salvador just told Tucker that MS-13 participates in Satanic child sacrifice rituals | SOTN: Alternative News, Analysis & Commentary (stateofthenation.co)

=============================

4 April 2024. THE INDOCTRINATED BRAIN – TUCKER CARLSON INTERVIEWS – DR. MICHAEL NEHLS. A 45-minutes video The Indoctrinated Brain – Tucker Carlson Interviews – Dr. Michael Nehls (bitchute.com). This is a must-view interview covering subjects including neuroinflammation, the mental immune system, new nerve cells, brain fog, the need for a high level of Vitamin D, maintaining your Lithium level and Nehls’ Unified Theory of Alzheimer’s.  The book introduction on Amazon (his book The Indoctrinated Brain is available on Kindle) explains:  Global War on the Human Brain. Throughout the world, mental capacity is declining, especially among young people, while depression rates are rising dramatically. Meanwhile, one in forty men and women suffers from Alzheimer’s, and the age of onset is falling rapidly. But the causes are not being eliminated, quite the opposite. Can this just be coincidence? The Indoctrinated Brain introduces a largely unknown, powerful neurobiological mechanism whose externally induced dysfunction underlies these catastrophic developments. 
Michael Nehls, medical doctor and internationally renowned molecular geneticist, lays out a shattering chain of circumstantial evidence indicating that behind these numerous negative influences lies a targeted, masterfully executed attack on our individuality. He points out how the raging wars against viruses, climate change, or over national borders are—more likely intended than not—fundamentally providing the platform for such an offensive against the human brain that is steadily changing our being and is aimed at depriving us of our ability to think for ourselves. 
But it is not too late. By exposing these brain-damaging processes and describing countermeasures that anyone can take, Nehls brings light and hope to this fateful chapter in human history. Nothing less will be decided than the question of whether our species can retain its humanity and its creative power or whether it will lose them irretrievably.

29 March 2024.   London Real interviews Dr Steven Greer about a wide range of technologies, politics and secrecy surrounding space vehicles, free energy (zero point energy), anti-gravity and related aspects.  How most of the highest level politicians are not ‘read in’ (informed) about what these highly secretive corporations are doing and have been doing for the last 80 years, and how Ben Rich, head of the Lockheed Skunkworks said on his deathbed ‘we’ve been able to return ET home for decades’. Dr Greer is amongst the most credible people  in the world on these subjects:  The Truth About UFOs, Alien Technology & Extraterrestrial Contact – Dr Steven Greer (youtube.com)

27 March 2024.  A 23-minute interview with Colonel Douglas MacGregor, one of the most credible sources with regard to the war in Ukraine, updates the terror attack by heavily armed gunmen on the Crocus City Hall concert venue last Friday night. Claimed to have been carried out by Islamic State, overwhelming evidence shows the attackers were just mercenaries acting on behalf of Ukrainian forces that are, in turn, controlled by the CIA and UK’s MI6.  Col Doug MacGregor update on terrorism in Russia – www.cairnsnews.org

11 March 2024.  A must-see interview with Benjamin Fulford by Nino when Ben explains several world-changing events that are expected to occur shortly, quite likely starting March 15 with a massive earthquake off the California coast or even on land that will wipe out much of the Silicon Valley IT companies.  A total change to a new financial structure is expected too, possibly starting 15 March.  This aligns with expectations for a Quantum Financial System including a debt jubilee, a new Internet system and gold/asset-backed currencies replacing all fiat currencies.  Benjamin Fulford California Earthquake Nino Interview – Weekly Geo-Political News and Analysis

7 March 2024.    Interview by Clayton Morris, Redacted, with George Galloway who sensationally won a by-election in Britain, beating both the government and opposition parties by unheard-of margins.  Even the second place was taken by a virtually unknown.  This reinforces that the great majority of British people no longer support the two major parties in their drives for war against Russia, support for Israel and push for toxic injections.  GEORGE GALLOWAY WINS BACK PARLIAMANT SEAT—SENDS CRUSHING BLOW TO WEF RATS IN UK | SOTN: Alternative News, Analysis & Commentary (stateofthenation.co)

5 March 2024.  Scott Ritter and Judge Napolitano discuss NATO, Germany, France and the UK’s involvement in Ukraine and the ethics of targeting civilian infrastructure. In particular, they discuss the sensational revelation discussed in a meeting leaked to and revealed by Russia of German military discussing attacking the Crimean bridge with German missiles – a clear act of war as well as terrorism. A must-listen episode for anyone following the Ukraine and Israel crises. (302) Scott Ritter: How close are we to global confrontation? – YouTube

1 March 2024.  Another Tucker Carlson interview – this time a critical salutary 45-minute interview with a lady who grew up through the Mao Chinese Cultural Revolution.  She describes how the US (she does not describe the similar conditions evident in many other Western countries) started being indoctrinated from the 1960s gradually towards a cultural revolution based on Communist/Marxist principles and methods.  Similar to China the drive is from the top elitist intent on grabbing power through subtle indoctrination and deleting history. This is a very scary video.  The full details are in her book referred to in the video.  Tucker Carlson on X: “Ep. 77 The Cultural Revolution is here. Just ask Xi Van Fleet. She’s lived it twice. https://t.co/5xFS0T5hA9” / X (twitter.com)  and Tucker Carlson On ‘X’ – Episode 77 (Video) (rumormillnews.com)

22 February 2024. Tucker Carlson is interviewed at a Middle East conference about his interview with President Putin and related factors, including the lack of democracy in the US.  His Putin interview was seen by over 200 million within 48 hours. Tucker Carlson: “I’m Exposing the Whole Thing, Even if it Gets Me Killed” | Alternative | Before It’s News (beforeitsnews.com)

10 February 2024.  Scott Ritter visited Russia in May 2023 and at Christmas and secured a unique 2-hour interview with Russian President Vladimir Putin.  Ritter is a highly-qualified ex-military professional and is amongst a handful of people who understand Russia and the Russian soul. Putin and his Foreign Minister Lavrov are now recognised by many countries as the two leading diplomats in the world today.  If one looks around we can see that the US and West have no equals. This 6-minute video explains the massive importance of this interview and should be compulsory listening, as well as the interview itself, for all people who have any interest in how our world can and should evolve, in particular every politician. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Bf1X4spqmNg  . Interview transcript PDF: Carlson and Putin Interview

10 February 2024. As background to the Carlson/Putin video it is important to recall the advent of the extreme US plan to achieve world dominance with the Project for the New American Century. This was released in September 2020 – exactly one year before the Twin Towers destruction 911 which was forecasted in the wording of the plan.  The plan included taking out 7 countries in 5 years.   The Desperate Failing Plan for a New American Century (rumble.com)

9 February 2024. The long-awaited interview – Tucker Carlson interviews Russian President Putin, 2 hours.  Anyone who listens to this with an open mind and without past prejudice should view President Putin as one of the best leaders in the world in company with Singapore’s Lee Kuan Yew.  No doubt those with typical Western indoctrination will be very negative. Exclusive: Tucker Carlson Interviews Vladimir Putin (youtube.com) .

8 February 2024.  US ex-military expert Scott Ritter says ‘The+ former Fox News talk show host-turned independent media phenomenon, Tucker Carlson, is in Moscow, where he has committed the mortal sin of interviewing Russian President Vladimir Putin. The interview is scheduled to air at 6 pm eastern time on Thursday, February 8. Let there be no doubt—Tucker Carlson has pulled off one of the most memorable journalistic accomplishments in modern history, and when the interview does air, it will—literally and figuratively—break the internet.  Tucker Madness is Good for America – petersenior42@gmail.com – Gmail (google.com)

7 February 2024.  US highest-rating media host Tucker Carlson has been in Moscow for at least 4 days, sparking rumours that he planned to interview the Russian president. He confirmed his intention in the video, which has received over 260,000 likes.  Carlson said “Western governments, by contrast, will certainly do their best to censor this video on other less principled platforms, because that’s what they do – they are afraid of information they can’t control,” encouraging Americans to watch the interview in order to educate themselves on the “history-altering developments” unfolding in Russia and Ukraine.

  1. Carlson reveals Musk’s Putin interview pledge — RT World News
  2. Tucker Carlson Explains Why He Is Interviewing Putin: “Most Americans Are Not Informed… We’re Here Because We Love The US” | ZeroHedge
  3. Tucker drops BOMBSHELL about his Putin interview, NSA is PISSED | Redacted with Clayton Morris 2024 | Prophecy | Before It’s News (beforeitsnews.com)

24 January 2024. Tucker Carlson interviews Ed Dowd about Covid: ‘We have a national security crisis: the employed of our country are dropping dead and getting disabled at a rate that is beyond the general population’. Edward Dowd: “Something HORRIBLE Is Going On but No One Wants To Talk About It” | EU | Before It’s News (beforeitsnews.com)

24 January 2024. This 13-min video contrasts the philosophical views of Vladimir Putin, a defender of social values, v. the morally corrupt New World Order: – Russia Wipes out Ukrainian Air Defense Positions in Odessa With Soviet P-35B Missiles – Source | VT Foreign Policy

17 January 2024.  Kerry Cassidy interviews the maker of a film that describes in great detail how the John F Kennedy assassination was a fake – JFK was not assassinated but actually faked his own death.  Many examples are described such as the ‘squib’  used – a packet that contains fake blood that Jackie Kennedy leant forward to retrieve after the faked gunshots (that did not feature on the recording of the event).  New Kerry Cassidy & Jay Weidner: What’s Coming Next – January Current Events 1/16/2Q24 | Prophecy | Before It’s News (beforeitsnews.com)

12 November 2023. Patriot Underground interviews SGAnon who explains a wide range of events, plans and expectations regarding the world-wide battle between Evil and Good, including aspects of the Deep State: New SG Anon & Patriot Underground: Critical Update – Sleeper Activation, White Hat & DS Infiltration & Geopolitical Maneuvering, Underground War, De-Dollarization | Prophecy | Before It’s News (beforeitsnews.com)

8 December 2023.  An amazing 91-minute interview in which Tucker Carlson agrees fully with most of Alex Jones’ revelations. Jones offered insight into the encroaching New World Order, which he explained was a globalist scheme to merge world governments and essentially desecrate American sovereignty. His comments centered on putting the puzzle pieces of U.S. federal corruption together with power players like the United Nations and how Americans’ own bodies have been put in jeopardy by things like the sinister prospective Pandemic Treaty. Jones also explained how many major events he forecasted correctly such as 911.  Watched by many millions to date on numerous alternative news channels – but not, of course, on any MSM: Tucker Carlson’s interview with Alex Jones goes viral (rsbnetwork.com)

11 November 2023. Scott Ritter explained the realities of the Israel/Hamas situation covering aspects that no one else has either realised or presented. This is a must-see.  Scott Ritter: “Why Israel is FINISHED! Prepare for MILLIONS to LEAVE to the WEST!” – YouTube

13 October 2023.  This hour-long video presentation by Matthew Ehret is by far the most comprehensive and accurate account of the current situation and past history of and surrounding Israel.  The supplementary reading adds much worthy material to the main video. Understanding the Geopolitical Dynamics Shaping the Middle East (From Khazaria to Present) (rumble.com)

9 October 2023. This 42-minute video presents David Icke’s explanations of what is happening with the war in Israel, how it came about and the overall rationale.  This is essential viewing and totally different – of course – from the ‘official’ story. David Icke – what’s REALLY happening in Israel – David Icke

A wider context is present in parts one and two of Reiner Fuellmich’s interviews with David Icke – all essential viewing: New Dr. Reiner Fuellmich & David Icke – The Real Dangers – Part 1 and Part 2 | Prophecy | Before It’s News (beforeitsnews.com)

30 August 2023. Numerous articles and videos present compelling evidence that the horrendous destruction of Lahaina on the Hawaiin Island of Maui was not a natural fire, rather it was a pre-planned attack using Directed Energy Weapons (DEW) and other means to ruin this quaint village and ensure as many people as possible died. At this time over 1,000 are still not accounted for. The following articles and videos present the evidence:

A comprehensive overview of a wide range of related factors by Kerry Cassidy.  Kerry is a very knowledgeable psych who has interviewed a huge number of credible ‘whistle-blowers’ over 18+ years.  Her views are very controversial but history has recorded she is invariably correct.  Starts at the 14-minute point: KERRY’S UPDATE: MOROCCO TRIP SAGA & US UPDATE, MAUI, WHITE HATS – PROJECT CAMELOT PORTAL

Another view showing the weird black fence being erected around  Lahaina –  Thoughts on our circumstances…: What the hell is going on in Maui and specifically in Lahaina? (abeldanger.blogspot.com)

This is one of the best summaries of the Lahaina horror story.  There is much more on Dave Hodges thecommonsenseshow.com including how Lahaina is one of the key US military surveillance and weapons bases. STUNNING REVELATIONS EMERGING FROM MAUI! | The Common Sense Show. Drone Footage the day after https://youtu.be/7PSYNqZqAVs – note, in particular, the numerous examples of untouched buildings and areas, eg 2 churches, many millionaire mansions and a plush new housing area, surrounded by devastation, including cars that resemble the streets of ‘toasted’ cars after 911 (eg the aluminium wheels melted). None of this can possibly happen naturally. Survivor’s Story, interesting comments https://www.youtube.com/live/FWAQOn3s9fw?feature=share. (32) Shocking Eye Witness of Lahaina Maui Fire from Front Street Police Blocked Off the Exits – Yo NB check the many videos noted on the right of the screen. https://wattsupwiththat.com/2023/08/16/the-real-cause-of-the-maui-wildfire-disaster/uTube – Whilst accurate, this clearly is just one element, as shown in many other videos, but NOT the whole story as suggested. Aloha DEW: Lahaina, Maui Hit by Directed Energy Weapons – Video #20 (rumble.com).   A broad cover of aspects that made no sense, and dodgy answered from officials – BURNED ALIVE! Elon Musk Demands Prosecution for Maui Massacre (Video) | SOTN: Alternative News, Analysis & Commentary (stateofthenation.co) .   Another comprehensive summary on SOTN: OPERATION MAUI DEW (video) | SOTN: Alternative News, Analysis & Commentary (stateofthenation.co)

============================

23 August 2023. Tucker Carlson interviews Colonel Douglas MacGregor about the war in Ukraine and relates this to the lies told by Western politicians and media on the subject.  They also cover the horrendous corruption in the US. But more citizens are at long last waking up.  (32) Tucker Carlson Talks To Colonel Douglas Macgregor About The Ukraine War – YouTube

30 July 2023 Col Douglas MacGregor explains how and why the US governments and military-industrial complex have been trying to change the world into a Marxist utopia for over half a century, and why they are currently trying to use Ukraine as a puppet to proxy to beat Russia into submission.  This is failing catastrophically, as all will realise very shortly.   (16) Douglas Macgregor: Russian Army DISBANDED! – YouTube

26/27 July 2023. This is one assessment of the attempted coup in Russia.  No doubt orchestrated by the UK MI6 and US CIA together with the Ukrainian Neo-Nazi government and oligarchs.  President Putin will overcome: Civil War in Russia? Wagner Troops Rebellion – Scott Ritter w/ Judge Napolitano (Video) (rumormillnews.com) .

Col Douglas Macgregor has a somewhat different view.  He thinks Prigozhin was trying to warn Putin that he needed to take more and firmer action and the apparent insurrection was not for real. They both agree only about 4,000 of Prigozhin’s men were marching towards Moscow and they all rapidly changed their minds. (22) Douglas Macgregor – The Offensive Will Continue. – YouTube

However, the most likely story is this – hilarious! It’s in major media that US authorities ‘knew in advance’ about the Russian ‘coup’ events, and were briefing some Congresspeople on it the week before. https://www.zerohedge.com/geopolitical/us-intelligence-knew-days-advance-wagner-rebellion-briefed-congress Prigozhin’s Wagner was regularly receiving Ukraine troops who were surrendering. It is a common suggestion now, that under a ‘white flag’, Prigozhin was approached by Western intelligence services, and offered more than a billion dollars in cash, to run a coup against Moscow, with the majority paid when Wagner was halfway to Moscow. The suggestion goes on to say, that Prigozhin informed his old friend Putin, and after the money was delivered, the ‘coup’ was called off … and Prigozhin & Putin have split the money.

=======================

15 June 2023. The world-famous investigator of all things to do with UFOs, in particular the appalling cover-ups and illegal technology developments by military industrial corporations, are exposed in this compelling  300-hour press conference. In the second, video Redacted host Clayton Morris provides a summary of the key points including the failed experiment in Antarctica that caused the massive earthquake in Christchurch, New Zealand.  (17) Monday, June 12, 2023! Dr. Greer’s Groundbreaking National Press Club Event! FREE to Watch! – YouTube .

Breaking! UFO Whistleblowers Drop Bombshell on D.C.! – Redacted News | Military | Before It’s News (beforeitsnews.com)

=======================

6 June 2023. The reality of the so-called Tiananmen Square massacre together with one of the most comprehensive and accurate backgrounds – ‘The new century of serfs and lords’. The deep state of China is mapped out around disgraced Communist Party chairman Zhao Ziyang and his nest of technocratic fifth columnists who tried to turn China into a slave colony under the thumb of the Trilateral Commission, CIA and other social engineers. Several of the  Tiananmen aspects were revealed by Julian Assange. The Tiananmen Square Hoax: Massacre or Failed Color Revolution? – Truth Comes to Light

==========================

5 June 2023. The most recent and best analysis demonstrating that the Japanese Hiroshima and Nagasaki bombs were not atomic or nuclear, but an appalling deception by the US:   (11) How to Fake the Atomic Bombs – by Sasha Latypova (substack.com)

===========================

22 May 2023. A very informative 27-minute interview with Juan O’ Savin (many people think he is John F Kennedy Jnr. who did not die in an air accident in 1999).  Juan clearly has an exceptional knowledge of world affairs, in particular the US, with respect to the appalling amount of corruption as well as the giant strides the Patriots are taking to remove this evil. Juan O’ Savin: HUGE Intel May 21 – Tribunals, Tribunals, Tribunals! (Video) | Alternative | Before It’s News (beforeitsnews.com)

=============================

20 May 2023. Here’s the full video of Dr David Martin’s recent testimony before EU Parliament about the history of bioweapons experiments using coronaviruses going back as far as 1965 and how COVID is but the latest episode in the long, premeditated march towards the lockdowns and the forced injections that were deployed against humanity: Dr David Martin to EU Parliament: Corona Virus Is a Bioweapon & Greatest Crime Against Humanity in World History – Forbidden Knowledge TV

==========================

11 May 2023.  Dr Scott Bennett is one of the most knowledgeable and credible specialists on US and related matters concerning politics, military and treasonous activities. Many articles explaining a wide range of past and current events are covered on the website Dr Bennett contributes to this excellent website: Welcome to Global Freedom TV!

This video present Scott Bennett’s recent views on the massive battle between the New World Order, Kadashian Mafia, US Democrats, UN, WHO and others against the forces for good (Patriots, White Hats etc.)

Breaking: US Army Psychological Warfare Officer Scott Bennett Issues Emergency Border Collapse Warning! – Alex Jones | War and Conflict | Before It’s News (beforeitsnews.com)

Also: Scott Bennett: White Hat Exposes All Truths (Video) | Alternative | Before It’s News (beforeitsnews.com)

==============================

11 May 2023. A four-minute video that explains the past evils of the British royal families, in particular the evil views, colleagues and statements from King Charles III: ??KING CHARLES & THE PLANS TO THROW THE POPULATION BACK TO THE 17TH CENTURY?? (bitchute.com)

===============================

4 May 2023 – Scott Ritter Extra Ep. 66: Ask the Inspector (Live from Irkutsk).  Scott Ritter describes what life and views are really about in Russia – the opposite of the lies and propaganda Western people read in their MSM.   Scott Ritter Extra Ep. 66: Ask the Inspector (Live from Irkutsk) – YouTube

================================

4 May 2023. Dr. Reiner Fuellmich conducts an exclusive interview with Barrie Trower, one of the best-known experts in the field of microwave radiation and frequencies, which have been researched and used as weapons in intelligence agencies since the early 1950s. Barrie Trower, a former career soldier in the Royal Navy and intelligence officer with MI5 and MI6 is a scientist and has also been a university lecturer. His knowledge in the field of microwave and 5G radiation is of considerable explosive nature and he feels obliged to bring it to the public, which, just like other whistleblowers, has already put him in life-threatening situations.

5G – Microwave as a Weapon – Part 1

https://rumble.com/v29987k-5g-microwave-as-a-weapon.html

In the second episode of ICIC titled “5G – Microwaves as a Weapon”, Dr. Reiner Fuellmich continues the revealing conversation with Barrie Trower, former career soldier in the Royal Navy and intelligence officer with MI5 and MI6 and one of the best known experts in the field of microwave radiation and frequencies. They delve into deeper areas of the uses of microwaves, frequencies, 5G, and biological and chemical weapons hidden from the gullible and unsuspecting public.

5G u Microwave as a Weapon – Part 2

https://rumble.com/v2a3cvq-5g-microwave-as-a-weapon-part-2.html

===================================

10 April 2023. An extremely moving and erudite 20-minute speech that explains that allowing others to take responsibility, as Himmler did during WWII, does not remove actual responsibility, as demonstrated during the Nuremberg trials. National Citizens Inquiry (NCI | CeNC) on Twitter: “#NCI Opening Statements | Day 3 Toronto Mr. Buckley’s opening remarks on Day 3 of the #Toronto hearings are a wake-up call to the potential dangers of losing personal responsibility and accountability. Are we being manipulated and controlled in Canada? Is our beloved nation… https://t.co/zEC14I3OL7” / Twitter .  

For more see the website (20+) National Citizens Inquiry | Facebook

===========================

19 Mar 2023: Editor’s note: this 105-minute interview is one of the most interesting videos I’ve ever watched. Jean Claude and Janine interview Australia One leader Riccardo Bosi covering many aspects of the world situation and the basis of good and evil as well as a thought-provoking tarot reading for Bosi: AustraliaOne Party – Jean-Claude and Tarot by Janine Interview Riccardo Bosi (rumble.com)

===============================

19 Mar 2023:  Jean Claude (Jean-Claude@BeyondMystic (rumble.com) ) interviews Clif High and Rafi Farber about the current financial  and financial situation, including the coming financial crash and reversal of ‘woke’ism’. New Clif High: Trump Arrest Imminent! The End Game – The Last Round & Rafi Farber & Jean-Claude@BeyondMystic | Prophecy | Before It’s News (beforeitsnews.com)

==============================

13 Mar 2023: More on the bio-weapon horror story.  Russian military chief presents evidence that US Department of Defence and many Western bio-weapon laboratories are producing more deadly products – New Maria Zeee & Aussie Cossack: The Russian Military Just Dropped Huge Truth Bombs on the Entire World! You Will Be Shocked! | Prophecy | Before It’s News (beforeitsnews.com)

=============================

12 Mar 2023: Mel K interviews Australian Maria Zeee to discuss how the Australian Government has driven the country towards a dystopian future using the Covid19 fraud as a pretence, focusing on the weaponisation of the World  Health Organisation:   Mel K & Maria Zeee | The Weaponization of the WHO | 3-9-23 – The Mel K Show

‘PC’, ‘Woke’ Orwellian censorship – 1984, official lies, media lies, ‘socialism’, death of freedom

Many from the ‘Left’, progressives, Cultural Marxists and activists keep trying to stymie democracy and the individual with their shrill, often illogical, Orwellian and ideological views and variations of mind control.  Orwell’s 1984 Ministry of Truth is alive and well. The following articles provide evidence.

Links to more articles follow the four below

A Brutal Russian Take on Zionism

A Brutal Russian Take on ZionismFrom Henry Makow, HenryMakow.com, 11 July 2024

 

The real issue is Jewish Power posing both as Right and Left, nationalist and globalist, Zionist and Communist. 

In 1991, Vladimir Stepin wrote: “The Jews must have, and will have, undivided, absolute power over the whole world. The only point is that the money and the power, but particularly the power, will be achieved soundlessly, without attracting attention, and without occupying the leading roles until the very end.”

This is why resistance — “anti-Semitism” — is banned.

“We have already…possessed the minds of the goy communities…[they are] looking through the spectacles we are setting astride their noses.” (Protocols of Zion, 12)

from Feb 22, 2019

The Nature of Zionism (1991)

by Vladimir Stepin

(Excerpts by henrymakow.com) 

The foundations of Zionism were formulated in ancient times, some three thousand years ago, and they are:

  1. The Jews are God’s chosen people.
  2. All other peoples are merely two-legged animals (goys).
  3. The Jews have both the right and the obligation to rule the world.

The second and third points of this three-in-one formula actually follow from the first. The formula, which was the brainchild of an undoubtedly talented politician, was among the foundations of the religion of Judaism (see the Book of Deuteronomy in the Old Testament).

At that time people understood very well that if one is to lend force to one’s intentions, one must express them as religious ideas. And one must also strengthen not only the religion but also its influence on people. …

 

Another point is that the power of this formula lies in that it legitimizes and sanctifies the idea of robbing other nations. Why need we care about two-legged animals? If we are the chosen people and it is our inalienable right, and even our duty, to rule other peoples, then God himself ordered us to grow rich at their expense, as the saying goes.

In this way, nationalism is placed on a material basis. Rob and rule! Rule and rob! Money and power! From the time the above-mentioned formula begins to operate, this becomes both a means and an end, but it nevertheless also becomes a more important means, a means for attaining the main objective contained in the third item of the formula: the Jews must have, and will have, undivided, absolute power over the whole world. The only point is that the money and the power, but particularly the power, will be achieved soundlessly, without attracting attention, and without occupying the leading roles until the very end.

ZIONISTS SET UP CONCENTRATION CAMPS FOR NON-JEWS ACCUSED OF ANTISEMITISM WHICH THEY ORGANIZED

During the civil war in Russia, the Zionists also performed another task. Using some units of the Red Army – Trotsky was the chairman of the country’s Revolutionary Military Council – they organized the Jewish pogrom in Seversk. The result of this was the “Law on Those Involved in Pogroms” of 27 July 1918.

In accordance with this law, a monstrous Zionist terror raged in Russia for ten years: a person accused of antisemitism was, without any argument being allowed, declared to be involved in pogroms and placed against the wall to be shot. Not only anti-Zionists, but the best representatives of the intelligentsia of Russia, could be accused of being antisemitic, and so too could anyone one felt like accusing of it. People saw who was exercising power in Russia and expressed their discontent with it. 90% of the members of the Cheka – the Soviet security organ, 1918-1922 – were Zionists.

Apart from the law on those involved in pogroms, the Zionists practised genocide against the ethnic groups inhabiting Russia, and they did so by accusing people of counter-revolutionary activities, sabotage, and so on, irrespective of whether or not the people in question really had conducted such activities. It was standard practice merely to put them against the wall to be shot.

The major operations conducted by the Zionists included setting up a system of prison camps. Skilfully using as a pretext the interests of discipline and orderliness, Trotsky and Dzershinzky organized the concentration camps in 1918. These were monstrous machinery for exterminating the people of Russia, machinery of oppression and intimidation, machinery of undivided power.

[MAKOW- If I were a betting man, I’d say Zionists put Hitler into power.]

MONEY IS POWER

The Zionists’ money is their most important tool. Money is power – that is a well- known truth. But does everyone know that in the USA, for example, over 70% of the capital belongs to Zionists, and that their capital prevails all over the world? They have been accumulating it for centuries. The gold of all times and nations is amassed in the vaults of their banks. Both in the past and today, the Zionists’ finances have not only served the basic function of finance, namely the principle that money brings more money, but have also been …used to finance one measure or another, to provide loans, to organize conquests, wars and coups, to bribe persons in office, to bribe and finance leaders, groups, parties, to hire armies and bands, to develop trade and industry, to raise matters up or to bring them to destruction – all depending on the tasks being pursued by the Zionists.

In this connection, the corrupting power of money is colossal. A person who has become keen on the idea of accumulating money in order to obtain some benefits or other is already to some extent in the clutches of Zion. By operating with benefits and money, the Zionists can easily make such a person do the things they require: making jobs available, carrying out measures necessary to the Zionists, exerting pressure on unwelcome persons, taking part in financial machinations, and the like. When such a person enters into financial contact with Zion, he quickly understands its strength and bases himself on it. It is not difficult to continue to work on such a person in the spirit required by Zion and turn him into a reliable and obedient tool of Zionism.

FREEMASONRY

Zion has many arms, and one of them is Freemasonry. Freemasonry practically came into being along with Zionism and is its fellow-traveller.

The Freemasons fulfill approximately the same role for Zionism as the Jesuits do for Roman Catholicism. The early Freemasons were the builders of the Temple of Solomon. Large numbers of secret Freemasonic lodges have at all times served as a means of fooling people by promising to build a better world, a world of goodness, charity, equality and justice, but in actual fact as a means of enticing people into the nets of Zion, of placing them under Zion’s command and, through those people, directing countries and events. There is a distinction between Jewish and Gentile Freemasonic lodges and organizations.

The Gentile ones are of course lower in rank, but it is precisely through them that Zion exercises direct control. Influential politicians, public figures, scholars, persons active in literature and art, military men, members of the administrative machinery, and the like, are drawn into the Gentile lodges and organizations, and it is through such people that Zion’s decisions are put into effect.

Freemasonry is strong. But it is still only one of the arms. The head is Zion. Freemasonry must be combated. But the main blow ought to be dealt against Zionism, which controls Freemasonry. At the same time, one should bear in mind that, even without Freemasonry, Zion, by using its own strength, has achieved, is achieving and will achieve its own objectives if it is not stopped.

Related– The Zionist Protection Racket    

Global Zionism Exposed: Fourth Beast Rising – YouTube

 

Note — Leyba Davidovich Trotsky, whose real name was David Bronstein, said: “We must turn Russia into a desert populated by white negroes upon whom we shall impose a tyranny such as the most terrible Eastern despots never dreamt of. The only difference is that this will be a left-wing tyranny, not a right-wing tyranny. It will be a red tyranny and not a white one.”

“We mean the word ‘red’ literally because we shall shed such floods of blood as will make all the human losses suffered in the capitalist wars quake and pale by comparison. The biggest bankers across the ocean will work in the closest possible contact with us. If we win the revolution, we shall establish the power of Zionism upon the wreckage of the revolution’s funeral, and we shall become a power before which the whole world will sink to its knees. We shall show what real power is. By means of terror and bloodbaths, we shall reduce the Russian intelligentsia to a state of complete stupefaction and idiocy and to an animal existence… At the moment, our young men in their leather jackets, who are the sons of watchmakers from Odessa, Orsha, Gomel and Vinnitsa, know how to hate everything Russian! What pleasure they take in physically destroying the Russian intelligentsia – officers, academics and writers!…”

 

Taken from the “Memoirs” of Aron Simanovich, a jeweller at the court of the Tsar’s Imperial Majesty.

 

From the newspaper “Russkoye slovo”, No. 1.

=============================================

What Nobody Told You About Julian Assange

What Nobody Told You About Julian Assange  David Sorensen, StopWorldControl.com. 26 June 2024

Editor’s note: this very important article is easier to read in the PDF document from the link above. This document includes several graphics.

 

The news is roaring around the world: Julian Assange, the man who lifted the lid on the unspeakable crimes of the US Deep State, and revealed them to humanity through WikiLeaks, has been released from prison, after five years of being in solitary confinement.

 

Julian Assange singlehandedly kickstarted the greatest awakening of the human race since the beginning of time, by revealing to the entire world how the US government is so evil, it is hard to comprehend. The WikiLeaks files revealed for example how Hilary Clinton and Barak Obama are involved in systematic child abuse, among countless other crimes.

 

See for example this email communication between Stratfor employees, talking about children being brought in to the White House by Obama for a ‘party’. The words ‘pizza’ and ‘hot dogs’ were revealed by the FBI to be code words for girls and boys.

 

 

According to WikiLeaks the company Stratfor is an intelligence agency that provides confidential intelligence services to large corporations, such as Bhopal’s Dow Chemical Co., Lockheed Martin, Northrop Grumman, Raytheon and government agencies, including the US Department of Homeland Security, the US Marines and the US Defense Intelligence Agency.

 

The leaked emails reveal how they participate in parties involving children. 

 

After releasing this kind of information to the world, it is nothing less than a miracle that Julian is still alive. This raises a significant question, concerning what really happened to him. Was he truly arrested by the cabal, or was he being protected by the good side?

In every real world scenario these kinds of men are executed by the Deep State, and the official story to the public usually reads ‘suicide’. That he is alive and well, and even was set free, speaks volumes to those who don’t have their ears stuffed.

 

 

What is even more significant, is that there is post by the high level military operation entities, who sign their intel drops with the letter ‘Q’, that says ‘June Julian Assange’. Or in short JUNE JA.

This means they knew years ago that Assange would be set free again in the month of June. 

 

Was Julian Assange 

Really In Prison?

 

 

As I am writing this, I decided to check something, and to my amazement I find a Q post that literally says Julian Assange has always been protected. That is a direct confirmation of what I felt in my gut. It’s quite amazing that this comes to me during the very seconds that I am writing this.

 

 

This means that for the public Julian Assange was finally released from prison, but in reality he is finally being released from his protection… to continue his mission.

That signals several things that are highly encouraging. First of all it means that a lethal threat to his life has been eliminated. In other words: entities who would previously have been able to kill him, are no longer around. That is incredibly hope giving. The good side would never release Assange from protection, if there was still a risk that he would be murdered.

 

Could it be that Q managed to take out MS13, the worldwide network of murderers, used by the cabal to take out their opponents? Q did say that MS13 was their priority! (See Q drop 6, Oct. 29, 2017)

That would explain why we are still alive, as well as millions of other brave truth speakers worldwide. A decade ago we would all have been dead by now… Something indescribably profound is shifting in our world, and we haven’t seen anything yet!

Another element of powerful hope in the release of Julian Assange is that he is not being released to work as a lonely journalist again, but this time he is supported by the largest military intelligence operation of all time, to take down the evil in our world. This is extremely exciting….

Of course, for the eyes of the public, he will continue to be presented as a lone journalist, but those who have brains to think, eyes to see and a spirit to sense, will know that something far greater is going on, beyond the view of the masses.

 

Is There Really An Operation To Save The World?

 

 

I have explained in great detail in the past how there is hope for this world, as there is an unprecedented divine military intelligence operation ongoing, globally, led by deeply devoted followers of Jesus Christ, who have been working for decades to save humanity from the satanic cabal. See this post about Q.

Many of us are so severely infested with negativity, that our minds and hearts have no ability to believe that something so good could even exist. But I can say with all sincerity, that I have been observing their actions the past years, and I am fully convinced that this operation is legit.

Here are a few examples of what they are accomplishing:

 

 

Left the original Vladimir Putin, a traitor of Russia and WEF criminal. Right the man who replaced him, and who powerfully opposes the WEF and the globalists.

 

 

Back in 2012 the criminal puppet of the World Economic Forum, Vladimir Putin, who was selling out Russia to the satanic elites, was removed and replaced a few months later by a man who is in every way his exact opposite. A fierce enemy of the elites, and a devoted Christian, the new ‘Putin’ started exposing the satanism of the Western leaders, and opposed their agenda of LGBTQA+, transgenderism and pedophilia.

The man who currently plays the role of Putin invaded one of the central operation centers of the cabal in Ukraine, which was a hub for child trafficking, bioweapons, drug dealing, organ trading, and money laundering, as well as horrors I cannot even describe here, as you wouldn’t believe it.

The invasion of Ukraine by ‘Putin’ is such a threat to the world of the satanic elites, that they are still trying to get it back, by sending innumerable troops, weapons and funds from almost every nation of the world to Ukraine. They are in total panic, and George Soros said publicly the fall of Ukraine will be the end of their civilization. That says it all.

You can read more about the truth about Ukraine in our report, which caused us to be censored by the highest authorities of the internet who demanded the removal of our website… because of this report!

 

 

The military intelligence operation has also been exposing to the entire world how deeply nefarious and totally criminal the CIA, FBI, DOD, DOJ, FDA, CDC, and all other three letter agencies are. They have systematically been unveiling the intensity of the corruption of the entire US government, not just to wake up the American people but to effectively wake up the entire world.

 

Thanks to this highly effective military operation there are now hundreds of millions of people, in every nation of the world, fully aware of the unspeakable evil of their governments.

They also have been exposing how wicked the news media is, opening the eyes of billions worldwide to the reality of mind control through criminal news media. As a result millions are thinking for themselves again, instead of blindly absorbing every lie from the news.

And these are just a few examples. I can say a thousand times more. But I just want to provide some examples. It is therefore utterly irrational and a sign of either severe dishonesty or extreme brainwashing to deny this obvious operation, that is strategically saving humanity from the worst evil in all of history.

 

Most Successful Military Operation In History

 

 

The greatest accomplishment of this Christian military intelligence operation at the highest level worldwide, is that they woke up countless millions of people, and activated them to become citizen soldiers, who expose the deceptions, and wake up humanity.

This operation started in 2017 and has been the most successful military operation in all of history, as they managed to train and deploy many of humanities most intelligent, creative and bright civilians, who started exposing every work of evil to the human race.

 

The docuseries The Fall of the Cabal is a central example of this. The maker of these documentaries and our dear friend Janet Ossebaard lost her life, as the forces of darkness managed to infiltrate her life on the most personal and intimate level, and drained her to the point of suicide. But Janet heard the clarion call of Q, and created the worlds most powerful documentaries, that exposed every aspect of the satanic works of the Deep State and Cabal, to hundreds of millions of people.

 

You can see the entire series The Fall of the Cabal on our website.

The release of Julian Assange is a milestone in the history of mankind and it’s once again a clear part of this magnificent divine operation to save our world form the grip of satan.

Some Christians say this cannot be, as they know Jesus Christ is the One saving humanity. But they forget that He said we are His body, He dwells inside of us, and works through us to accomplish this deliverance.

 

Join Hands And Stand As One

 

 

This does not mean there is no war raging, in full force. The Satanic elites are still trying frantically to submit all of mankind to their diabolical tyranny, and they are preparing a new plandemic, global famine, vaccine mandates, lockdowns, climate disasters, cyber attacks, large scale blackouts, food poisoning and so much more. But we are not alone in our battle against this great evil.

 

I ask all who read this to please stop standing at the sidelines, and do whatever you can to be part of this army worldwide of hundreds of millions of people who stand up against the forces of darkness, and join hands to stand as one, with all our differences in culture, faith, and opinions.

We can lay it all down, and say: we are ONE against this monster. Don’t fall for the many strategies to divide us. 

 

Have a heart of grace and unity towards all who stand with you. Don’t fight the wrong enemy. Stand together against this demonic force that is out to destroy all of us.

I believe a major victory will become obvious in the near future. We will use the next plandemic to expose them even more and wake up humanity more than ever. We keep revealing blazing truth, to hundreds of millions of people.

Please stand with us through this most critical time in all of human history. We will witness the end of the reign of evil and the birth of a new era, where the love of our Creator will increasingly become the very foundation of all human existence.

Don’t fight this, but be part of it.

If you can, then please support our mission, as it is truly needed. Together we will see things happen that we never dreamed to witness during our lifetime. Support us here.

Pray for us, support us please, and keep spreading our documentaries and reports to the world.

David Sorensen

StopWorldControl.com

========================

We Approach ‘State’ Singularity

We Approach ‘State’ Singularity  From Zerohedge, 19 June 2024

Authored by Bruce Pardy via The Brownstone Institute,

Many citizens of the West believe that they live in free societies, or something close…

But as time goes on, public authorities increasingly insist on having a say in everything…

People cannot build things on their own land without permits. They cannot run businesses without approvals and inspections. They cannot give advice without professional designations. They cannot educate their children outside of state-mandated curricula. They cannot hire employees without triggering a myriad of workplace and tax requirements. They cannot produce and sell milk, cheese, or eggs without a license. They cannot earn money, spend money, or hold property without being taxed, and then taxed again. 

Jeffrey Tucker recently described three layers of omnipotent managerial technocracy. 

  • The deep state, he suggested, consists of powerful and secretive central government agencies in the security, intelligence, law enforcement, and financial sectors.
  • The middle state is a myriad of ubiquitous administrative bodies – agencies, regulators, commissions, departments, municipalities, and many more – run by a permanent bureaucracy.
  • The shallow state is a plethora of consumer-facing private or semi-private corporations, including banks, Big Media, and huge commercial retail companies, which governments support, protect, subsidize, and pervert. The three layers work together.

For instance, in the financial sector, as Tucker illustrates, the deep state’s Federal Reserve pulls the powerful strings, the middle state’s financial and monetary regulators enforce myriad rules and policies, and the shallow state’s “private” titans like BlackRock and Goldman Sachs dominate commercial activity. It’s a system, Tucker writes, “designed to be impenetrable, permanent, and ever more invasive.”

We are approaching state singularity: the moment when state and society become indistinguishable. 

In physics, a “singularity” is a single point in space-time. Inside black holes, gravity crushes volume to zero and mass density is infinite. In computer science, “technological singularity” is unitary artificial superintelligence. At the singularity, everything becomes one thing. Data points converge. Normal laws do not apply.

At state singularity, the state becomes society and society is a product of the state.

Legal norms and expectations become irrelevant. The state’s mandate is to do as it judges best – since everything and everyone are expressions of its vision. Powers are not separated between the state’s branches – the legislature, the executive, the bureaucracy, and the courts. Instead, they all do whatever they deem necessary. The bureaucracy legislates. Courts develop policy. Legislatures conduct hearings and prosecute cases. Government agencies change policies at will. The rule of law may be acknowledged as important in principle while it is rejected in practice.

State singularity is the ultimate collectivism. It resembles old-style fascism and communism, but it is neither. Fascist states enforce an idea, often nationalist in sentiment (“The motherland for the superior race”), and recruit private actors, especially corporations, to the cause. Communist regimes champion the working class and outlaw private property (“Workers of the world unite”). Singularity, in contrast, is not propelled by an idea other than singularity itself. To justify its own hegemony, the state champions a variety of other causes. In the modern era, social justice, climate change, transgender rights, feminism, economic reform, and many more have served to extend the state’s reach. Problems are rarely solved, but that is not the reason for taking them up.

State singularity develops gradually and insidiously. Whereas fascist, communist, and other centralized power regimes often result from deliberate political revolution, in the West omnipotent managerial technocracy has grown, spread, and infiltrated the nooks and crannies of social life without sudden political upheaval. Like a form of institutional Darwinism, public agencies, no matter their formal purpose, seek to persist, expand, and reproduce.

At the singularity, all solutions to all problems lie with government in its various forms. More, never less, programs, rules, initiatives, and structures are the answer. Like black holes, state singularities absorb and crush every other thing. Corporations serve state interests and participate in managing the economy. Singularities destroy voluntary community organizations by occupying the space and placing obstacles in the way. Both the left and the right seek to harness state power to craft society in their image.

In a singularity, one cannot propose to eliminate government. Doing so would be contrary to prevailing ideology and vested interests, but more fundamentally, the idea would be incomprehensible.

And not just to officials. Citizens dissatisfied with the services they receive want more service and better policy. When schools sexualize their children, they demand changes to the curriculum instead of the end of public schools. When monetary policy makes houses expensive, they demand government programs to make them cheap instead of the end of central banks. When government procurement is revealed to be corrupt, they demand accountability mechanisms instead of a smaller government. State singularity is found not just in the structures of government but in the minds of the people.

Modern states have capacities they have never had before. Technological advances are providing them with the ability to monitor spaces, supervise activities, collect information, and require compliance everywhere all the time. In the collectivist regimes of old, governments knew only what human eyes and ears could tell them. Soviet authorities were tyrannical, but they could not instantaneously monitor your cell phone, bank account, fridge, car, medications, and speech.

We are not at the singularity yet. But have we crossed the event horizon? At a black hole, the event horizon is the point of no return. Gravity becomes irresistible. No matter or energy, including light, can escape the pull to the singularity at the core of the abyss.

Our event horizon beckons. We cannot evade it by merely slowing down on the path that we are on. Liberation requires escape velocity in the other direction.  

===================

Democracy won’t work whilst most media lean far left

Democracy won’t work whilst most media lean far left  By Dr Muriel Newman, NZCPR Founding Director, 27 September 2023

As the election closes in, there appears to be an overwhelming mood for change.

New Zealanders have had enough. The chickens are coming home to roost for Labour as disgruntled voters, sick and tired of the incompetence, the lies and deceit, search for alternatives.

Election campaigns can be noisy affairs, and this one is no different. Given the unprecedented manner in which Labour has crushed democratic rights and imposed their destructive agenda onto the country, protesters are out in force, expressing their concerns directly to those who are seeking their vote.

But is it really any worse than it’s ever been?

In the nine years I was in Parliament and the four election campaigns I was involved in, shouting, yelling, heckling, pushing, and shoving, were all part of the rough and tumble of politics.

It wasn’t out of the ordinary to have to break through lines of protestors to get into an event, and I well remember giving one speech to an audience, where the barrage from opponents was so loud, even I couldn’t hear the address!

What seems to be different this time around, is that the media are also copping the wrath of a disgruntled public. And it’s not hard to see why.

When Jacinda Ardern was elected leader of Labour just before the 2017 election, the gushing media coverage was so extreme it was given a name: “Jacindamania”. From that point on, any semblance of media impartiality was swept aside, exposing the strong political bias of mainstream journalists.

That bias was revealed by journalists themselves in the “Worlds of Journalism Study 2.0. Journalists in Aotearoa/New Zealand” published last October by Massey University. In this third such survey undertaken by the Worlds of Journalism Study group – a collaboration of academics from more than 120 countries – a snapshot of the 1600 journalists who work in print, digital and broadcast media, is provided.

Almost 60 percent of the workforce are women, 10 percent are Maori, and as far as age is concerned, the profession is split between those in the younger 25 to 30 age group, and older 50 to 65 year-olds.

When it comes to political bias, the results are definitive – journalists overwhelmingly identify as left wing: “There are very few strongly right-wing journalists, but a substantial number of moderately or strongly left-wingers.”

The survey reveals 5 percent describe themselves as “extreme left” and 15 percent as “hard left”. Of the rest, 22 percent say they are “left”, 20 percent are “mild left”, and 23 percent are “middle left”, while 6 percent identify as “middle right”, 4 percent “mild right”, and only around 1 percent all up say they are “right”, “hard right” or “extreme right”.

In other words, nine out of ten New Zealand journalists are socialists, with one in three hard-core. Only one in ten journalists claim to have no socialist inclinations.

When it comes to ethics, the survey shows there’s been a significant shift in attitude, with journalist support for adhering to their professional code of ethics dropping 28 percent since the last survey in 2015.

And when it comes to the role of journalists, there is now a growing disconnect between what the public expects from the media and what journalists believe their role to be.

While the public wants journalists to report the news in an unbiased manner, presenting both sides of the argument on contentious issues so they can make up their own minds, that’s no longer how most journalists see it.

They regard ‘educating the audience’ as their most important role, followed by ‘countering disinformation’. But in some cases, this has led to a concerning development: hard-core left-wing journalists describing information they disagree with as “fake news” or “disinformation” in order to discredit those with alternative views.

Journalists still regard monitoring and scrutinising political leaders as important, but letting people express their views has declined significantly. Also dropping is the notion of ‘being a detached observer’ and ‘providing analysis of current affairs’.

The role that rose the most sharply, albeit from a low level, was ‘supporting government policy’.

In other words, the gulf that has opened up between what the public has traditionally expected from the media and what the media themselves believe their role to be, is no doubt responsible for the decline in public interest in the mainstream news.

Making things worse is the fact that journalists overwhelmingly believe the Treaty of Waitangi should be a key part of their reporting.

The survey, which was carried out just after Stuff announced its absurd apology to Maori for its historic news coverage – and other organisations such as Radio New Zealand and TVNZ had started to become more ‘inclusive’ – says this: “Asked to what extent did the Treaty apply to what they wrote, almost a third (31%) said it applied to everything. Another 43% said it applied to most things, such as any stories that involve legislation or politics, culture or society in which the treaty is referenced. A minority (16 percent) thought it only related to some things, such as stories for Maori about Maori issues, while 2% thought it had no relevance to journalism.”

It’s no wonder the media are seen to be increasingly out of step with society.

This week’s NZCPR Guest Commentator, freelance journalist and former newspaper editor Karl du Fresne, believes these developments are the consequence of the transfer of journalism training from the newsroom to the lecture room:

“Earlier generations of journalists learned on the job from other journalists. Many of my contemporaries came from working-class backgrounds. They didn’t go to university and were proud to regard journalism as a trade rather than profession. The importance of neutrality, fairness and balance was drummed into them. They had no delusions of grandeur.

“But from the 1970s on, journalism was subjected to academic capture. Budding journalists were inculcated with a highly politicised vision of journalism’s purpose. They were encouraged to acquire degrees that were often based on esoteric theories far removed from the simple, practical concerns of good journalism. Over time, that has had the fatal effect of creating a widening gap between journalists and the communities they claim to serve. Even more dangerously, it has led journalists to think they are wiser and smarter than the people who buy newspapers and watch the TV news, and even morally superior to them. As the Marxist American journalist Batyar Ungar-Sargon puts it, they climbed up the status ladder and became part of the elite.”

To make matters worse, most mainstream media organisations accepted handouts from Labour’s $55 million Public Interest Journalism Fund, and as a result, became echo chambers for government propaganda. This was especially the case with regards to promoting Labour’s fraudulent Treaty ‘partnership’ claim that underpinned their whole unmandated race-based He Puapua agenda.

With tens of millions of dollars of additional taxpayers’ money also poured into the media through Government advertising and sponsorship, it’s no wonder the public became worried the media had been ‘bought off’ and could no longer be trusted as a reliable source of information.

There have been stand-out pockets, of course – mainstream journalists who continued to speak the truth and hold the Government to account – but they are few and far between. As a result, alternative media channels have emerged to fill the vacuum.

As Karl says, people no longer look to our mainstream journalistic institutions to reflect the society they live in. “The crucial nexus between media institutions and the community they purport to serve has been strained to breaking point. In fact the media often seem implacably opposed to the society they live in and determined to re-shape it, whether people want it or not.”

With journalists now advocating politics rather than merely reporting it, it’s little wonder that they are now being berated with the same contempt the public has for politicians.

While thankfully the media lovefest with Jacinda Ardern began to wane before she actually left Parliament, the impact of her incompetent leadership on our society has been devastating.

More than anything, what Labour’s time in office has taught us is that for our democracy to function properly, we need balanced journalism.

And if anyone needs further explanation, look no further than Three Waters.

Three Waters was the brainchild of Local Government Minister Nanaia Mahuta, and her Maori Caucus colleagues. Their primary motivation was to pass control of fresh water to Maori, but to dress it up as necessary reform for the public good.

If journalists had been doing their job of holding the government to account, the policy would have never withstood their scrutiny.

Let me explain.

Water supplies in New Zealand have traditionally been regulated by the Ministry of Health. Their annual water quality audits showed excellent results – as did the regular surveillance reports from the Institute of Environmental Science and Research (ESR).

But to create an imperative for reform on the scale Labour needed, a water quality crisis had to be created.

Minister Mahuta did this by resurrecting a report that had been prepared for Helen Clark’s Labour Government in 2006. ESR scientist Andrew Ball had been contracted to provide information on the incidence of endemic waterborne gastro-intestinal disease in New Zealand. While he found no real problem with water quality – “the size of most outbreaks is small, averaging nine cases per outbreak in 2000-2004, and is smaller than any other countries for which data are available” – there was insufficient local data to calculate the incidence of endemic disease.

As a result, Dr Ball used UK statistics to estimate between 18,000 and 34,000 infections a year in New Zealand, but he qualified his findings with a disclaimer: “The reliability of this method is questioned by the author.”

In other words, even he knew these estimates were not accurate.

Unfazed, Minister Mahuta used that old report to claim – as a mantra – that the main reason for the Three Waters reforms was that “At least 34,000 New Zealanders become ill from drinking tap water every year.”

We exposed the Minister’s claims as rubbish, knowing that if 34,000 people each year got sick from drinking tap water, we would all know about it because the issue would never be out of the news headlines.

The recent water contamination problem in Queenstown, where 30 or more people are reported to have become ill from drinking tap water, which dominated the news for days, has demonstrated what a huge lie the Minister’s 34,000 claim has been.

And the point is this – if the media had questioned the Minister about her ridiculous claim instead of regurgitating her lies, the whole senseless Three Waters scheme would never have got off the ground – saving the country billions of dollars that will have been utterly and completely wasted once the scheme is cancelled by the new government.

The Ardern legacy is about to come to an end and a new government will need to set about correcting a multitude of wrongs. But the media should also reflect on the status of its industry and what it needs to do to restore public trust. The damage done is such that restoring their reputation will be no small task.

Predominantly journalists need to go back to their role as neutral observers and reporters of the news. And with regards to contentious issues, they need to return to providing a balance of perspectives so that their audience has reliable information on which to make up their own mind.

In particular, they need to recognise the dreadful division within our country that Labour has created – with their assistance – and they need to help rebuild our society and heal the harm.

In summary, we don’t need the media to advocate political agendas  – we have politicians for that. But what we do need is balance and truth in the news. Is that too much to ask?

======================

CULTURAL INJUSTICE, HOW NEW ZEALAND IS APPLYING APARTHEID


CULTURAL INJUSTICE^J HOW NEW ZEALAND IS APPLYING APARTHEID  By Dr Muriel Newman, NZCPR, 6 August 2023

Two separate shootings in Auckland over the last three days that have left two people dead and one critically injured are the second and third serious gun incidents in the city in just over two weeks. They follow the shooting rampage of Matu Reid, who killed two co-workers and injured ten others, before taking his own life.

These events are indicative of the rise in crime that has become such a major problem for our society.

Broadcaster Peter Williams has some numbers: “ In the three months to the end of April, there were 45,046 retail crimes reported. Police attended 1 in 10 of them and made 1041 arrests. If you run a shop and get burgled, you have just a one in ten chance of the police coming and only a 2.3 percent chance that an alleged offender will be arrested.”

These damning figures are contributing to the growing sense of lawlessness that’s now enveloping New Zealand. This anxiety was picked up in a May survey of 1,000 people published by the Herald. It shows two-thirds of Kiwis are more concerned they may become a victim of crime today than they were five years ago.

The most revealing statistic is the diverging trend between reported crimes which increased 33 percent between 2017 and 2022, and the 26 percent decline in Police arrests, the 25 percent drop in convictions, and the 38 percent fall in prison sentences.

These are very significant numbers. Quite simply, Labour’s soft on crime policy is failing to keep New Zealanders safe.

Furthermore, the system is full of paradoxes. Here’s one.

In 2021, a farmer, found guilty of breaching Regional Council Resource Management Act consents, received a three-month prison sentence.

Meanwhile in 2023, 24-year-old Matu Reid, who attacked his girlfriend so brutally that she needed hospitalisation, ended up with a community sentence – in spite of already being under supervision for a previous violence offence and being assessed by his probation officer as being at high risk of causing harm to others.

How is it that our justice system could deliver such inconsistency: A man who was no risk at all to the safety of others was thrown in jail, while a violent offender was released into the community, where he was able to access a pump-action shotgun and kill his workmates after being sacked from his job?

To address this, let’s first look into some of Labour’s changes to the justice system – starting with Corrections.

According to briefing papers to the incoming Labour Government in 2017, on any given day the Department of Corrections managed around 10,400 offenders in prison and 30,000 in the community.

Offenders receiving a Court sentence of two years or less are eligible to serve their time in the community doing between 40 and 400 hours of unpaid community work. Those whose offending is at the more serious end of the scale are subjected to more intensive supervision, including electronic monitoring, curfews, and home detention.

When it came to the ethnicity of prisoners, the Corrections’ report stated, “Maori have made approximately half of our prison population for at least the last 30 years.”

Prison statistics show that in September 2017, Maori comprised 50.7 percent of inmates, Europeans were 31.6 percent, and Pacific Islanders were 11.1 percent.

By late 2019, when prison numbers had fallen slightly to 10,040 and the proportion of Maori had increased to 51.9 percent, the Minister of Corrections Kelvin Davis announced an ambitious new strategy, Hokai Rangi, to reduce the number of Maori in prison: “The ultimate objective is to lower the proportion of Maori in Corrections’ care to a level that matches the Maori share of the general population.”

In other words, he wanted to reduce the numbers of Maori in prison from 52 percent down to 16 percent!

When questioned by Q+A’s Jack Tame, Kelvin Davis claimed racism is the reason there are so many Maori in prison: “I believe there are parts of the system that are extremely racist.”

When asked what parts of the system are the most racist, the Minister said you just need to look at the numbers: “Why is it that Maori are over-represented? They’re prosecuted for similar crimes that other people aren’t.”

But when Jack Tame said that’s because Maori are committing these crimes, Kelvin Davis responded, “We can go back and talk about how history has impacted on outcomes for Maori… but Hokai Rangi is about looking at the Corrections system and making sure it works and is effective for our people.”

Hokai Rangi, which was co-designed by iwi, adopted a “Maori world view” and promoted co-governance. It transformed Corrections “from a system based on Western schools of thought in its operating approach to one that prioritises and elevates matauranga Maori.”

According to the Minister, the strategy, to be implemented over the five years from 2019 to 2024, would focus on accountability: “Action-planning and measurement, so that we can track our progress, is fundamental to this strategy, as is a commitment to weave accountability for outcomes throughout the Department at all levels.”

While progress reports remain virtually impossible to find, the latest April 2023 Corrections statistics show a dramatic 18 percent fall in the prison population to 8,513, but a rise in the proportion of Maori to 52.7 percent!

This rapid reduction in prison numbers has fuelled concerns that Labour’s ‘soft on crime’ changes are responsible for the increase in crime. Not only that, but the fingerprints of iwi and Labour’s Maori Caucus are not just over Corrections, but the Police as well.

Broadcaster Kate Hawkesby highlights this in her outline of what happened to a tourist who was the victim of a serious unprovoked assault by a nightclub bouncer:

“The Police turned up, were shown video footage, CCTV footage, they spoke to everyone concerned, they had everything there right in front of them including the culprit. Did they make an arrest? They did not.

“The Police at the time were unsure what to do; they said they needed to ‘think about it’. The next day, many questions were asked, including why no charges had been laid. They’d be ‘following it up in due course’ they said.

“Witness statements were made, reports filed – and then silence…

“Then, seven whole months after the event, a police spokesperson got in touch with an update. The bouncer had been offered… an ‘Iwi Community Panel – where the participant is given the choice of attending a panel hearing or going to Court. Panels are made up of three community people. They are not judges or lawyers. Their job is to decide what should happen as a result of the offence.’

“The offender had to ‘meet some outcomes’ the police spokesperson said. What outcomes? Who knows. Who’s checking he meets them? As far as the police were concerned, it’d been ‘dealt with’. They’d handed it over to the community panel. Case closed.”

As Kate says, a violent attack that sent a tourist to hospital resulted in no arrests, no charges, no court, no sentence – only a chat with a community panel of iwi.

Given the lack of consequences, will this offender be deterred from reoffending? Unlikely.

Will this tourist come back to New Zealand? Definitely not.

Labour’s soft on crime approach is clearly harming our country!

The Police panel that ‘dealt’ with this criminal was a ‘Te Pae Oranga Iwi Community Panel’, which operates in ‘partnership’ with iwi.

According to the Police website, “Te Pae Oranga means to talk, listen and become well. It uses tikanga and kaupapa Maori and restorative justice practices…”

They say, “It can be more effective than prosecuting someone, as more serious options can do more harm than good: having a criminal conviction can have long-lasting consequences. A criminal conviction makes it harder for an offender to get their lives back on track.”

They maintain “Te Pae Oranga is not a soft option”.

Kate Hawkesby’s tourist would disagree!

It seems the Police have now become “an inclusive partner for Iwi Maori”.

The Police Commissioner has established a 21-member Maori Focus Forum that not only co-designs policing strategy for dealing with Maori offenders, but also plays a “governance role”.

The end result of this partnership with iwi is that Police “live up to the joint expectations of those partners, to improve long term wellbeing for Maori who come to Police attention.”

In other words, Maori justice is all about the offender – ensuring they have a positive outcome. There is little regard for the victim.

As a result, offenders who are Maori now have a different pathway – one that looks past the victim to embrace the culture of the offender.

This is dangerous.

The paradox that led to Matu Reid being released into the community points to other failings in the criminal justice system.

In his sentencing notes the District Court’s Judge Bonnar explained the process: “[W]hen I decide on the final sentence for you, Mr Reid, I am going to set a starting point for the strangulation charge. I am then going to take account of the other charges, and then consider what credits I can apply because of things in your favour.”

The Judge determined the appropriate sentence for Matu Reid’s assault on his partner was two years and three months’ imprisonment. Given the violence, the vulnerability of the victim, and the fact that he was under supervision at the time of the offending, the sentence was lifted to three years.

The credits applied were a nine-month discount for pleading guilty, and a seven-month discount for having a ‘troubled background’ – as set out in a cultural report prepared under section 27 of the Sentencing Act 2002. That brought the sentence down to 20 months – under the two-year limit for a custodial sentence.

The Department of Corrections’ Prison Operations Manual provides guidance to Judges for the length of sentences: an offender is eligible for parole after serving one-third of a sentence of more than two-years, and is eligible for release after serving half of a sentence of two years or less.

In the Judge’s words, “A 20 month sentence of imprisonment would… equate to a 10 month sentence of home detention. However, I also take into account the time that you spent remanded in custody on these charges… five and a half months or so. Therefore, I am going to apply a further five-month credit on the home detention sentence. That reduces the total sentence, Mr Reid, to one of five months’ home detention.”

If Matu Reid had not been given a seven-month discount for his troubled background, he would have ended up in jail, and he and his two victims would still be alive.

Cultural reports have now become a multi-million-dollar industry. In just five years the number has exploded from eight a year to almost 2,500 last year, costing taxpayers over $6.5 million!

There are now calls for taxpayer funding for these reports to be removed and for the discounts that can be applied by Judges to be limited to exceptional circumstances only.

‘Maori law’ is not only in Corrections and Policing. An expectation is now emanating from our highest court that tikanga, or Maori custom, can  be regarded as law. This week’s NZCPR Guest Commentator, King’s Counsel Gary Judd, disagrees:

“In the Ellis case, a majority of the New Zealand Supreme Court stated that tikanga was ‘the first law’ of New Zealand… [but] ‘tikanga’ cannot be the ‘first’ law because it is not ‘law’ at all…

“The ‘tikanga’ the judgment endorses as ‘first law’ is a set of beliefs, principles of a spiritual nature, a way of life…  Beliefs and principles of a spiritual nature are not law. The way of life of some is not part of the law of the land.”

Labour has fundamentally undermined New Zealand’s criminal justice system since coming to power in 2017. The consequences are plain for all to see. It’s fixation with making the Maori incarceration statistics more ‘equitable’ is dangerous. New Zealanders have a right to feel safe, and they must demand better from whoever becomes the government on October 14.

TIKANGA IS NOT LAW
By Gary Judd KC

“Let it be clear: as New Zealand’s Bill of Rights affirms, everyone has the right to freedom of thought, conscience, religion, and belief, including the right to adopt and to hold opinions without interference.

“Everyone also has the right to freedom of expression, including the freedom to seek, receive, and impart information and opinion of any kind in any form.

“Further, every person has the right to manifest that person’s religion or belief in worship, observance, practice, teaching, either individually or in community with others, and either in public or in private.

“Therefore, anyone who subscribes to tikanga beliefs, and wishes to manifest them, is perfectly entitled to do so, without interference. Only when beliefs produce actions harmful to others do questions arise whether the law should intervene. The intervention, which then may occur, is not because of the beliefs but because of the harmful actions.

“Just as there should be no interference with the adoption and holding of tikanga beliefs, so also there should be no interference with others’ freedom of thought, conscience, religion, and belief. This latter interference may occur when people in positions of power seek to impose tikanga beliefs on those who do not hold them.

“The point is simply this: tikanga is not law because beliefs as such cannot be law. Calling tikanga something which patently it is not, not only offends reason but undermines the value of what it actually is…”

*To read the full article please visit the NZCPR.com website:

=====================================

Archbishop Vigano accuses the Vatican of corruption

 

Archbishop Vigano accuses the Vatican of corruption  From Forbidden Knowledge, 13 July 2023

 

Archbishop Carlo Maria Viganò served as the Apostolic Nuncio to the United States from 2011 to 2016. He has since become a Vatican whistleblower, starting with the Vatican leaks scandal of 2012, exposing financial corruption and the blackmailing of homosexual clergy by individuals outside the Church. In a 2018 letter, Viganò accused Pope Francis and other church leaders of covering up sexual abuse allegations against former cardinal Theodore McCarrick.

 

In recent years, he has railed against the World Economic Forum’s Great Reset, which is identical to the United Nation’s Agenda 2030, urging a global response to this global threat in the creation of an anti-Globalist alliance to “free humanity from a totalitarian regime that brings together in itself the horrors of the worst dictatorships of all time.”

 

***

 

TRANSCRIPT

 

Dear friends,

 

For two years now, we have been witnessing a global coup d’état, in which a financial and ideological elite has succeeded in seizing control of part of the national government, public and private institutions, the media, the judiciary, politicians and religious leaders.

 

All of these without distinction have become enslaved to these new masters, who ensure power, money and social affirmation to their accomplices.

 

Fundamental rights, which up until yesterday were presented as invaluable have been trampled underfoot in the name of an “emergency”. Today, a “health emergency”, tomorrow, an “ecological emergency” and after that, an “internet emergency”.

 

This global coup d’état deprives citizens of any possibility of defense, since the legislative, executive and judicial powers are accomplished in the violation of law, justice and the purpose for which they exist.

 

It is a global coup d’état, because this criminal attack against citizens extends to the whole world, with very rare exception.

It is a world war, where the enemies are all of us – even those who unwittingly have not yet understood the significance of what is happening.

 

It is a war fought not with weapons but with illegitimate rules, wicked economic policies and intolerable limitations of natural rights.

 

Supranational organizations, financing large measure by the conspirator of this crude attack are interfering in the government of individual nations and in the lives, relationships and health of billions of people.

 

They are doing it for money, certainly – but even more so, in order to centralize power so as to establish a planetary dictatorship. It is the Great Reset of the World Economic Forum, the Agenda 2030 of the United Nations. It is the plan of the New World Order, in which a universal republic enslaves everyone and a “religion of humanity” cancels faith in Christ.

 

In the face of this global coup d’état, it is necessary to form an international, anti-globalist alliance, which gathers all those who want to oppose the dictatorship, who have no intention of becoming slaves to a faceless power, who are not willing to cancel their own identity, their own individuality, their own religious faith.

 

If the attack is global, the defense must also be global. I call upon rulers, politicians and religious leaders, intellectuals and all people of good will, inviting them to unite in an alliance that launches an anti-globalist manifesto, refuting point by point the errors and deviation of this dystopia of the New World Order and proposing concrete alternatives for a political program inspired by the common good, the moral principles of Christianity, traditional values, the protection of life and the natural family, the protection of business and work, the promotion of education and research and respect for Creation.

 

This anti-globalist alliance will have to bring together the nations that intend to escape the infernal yoke of tyranny and affirm their own sovereignty, forming agreements of mutual collaboration with nations and people who share their principles and the common yearning for freedom, justice and goodness.

 

It will have to denounce the crimes of the elite, identify those responsible, denounce them to international tribunals and limit their excessive power and harmful influence.

 

It will have to prevent the actions of the lobbies, above all by fighting against the corruption of state officials and those who work in the information industry and by freezing the capital used to destabilize the social order.

 

In nations where the government is subservient to the elite, they will be able to establish popular resistance movements and communities of national liberation, including representatives of all sectors of society who propose a radical reform of politics inspired by the common good and firmly opposed to the neo-Malthusian project of the Globalist agenda.

 

I invite all those who want to defend a traditional Christian society, to meet together in an international forum, to be able to be held as soon as possible, in which representatives of various nations come together to present a serious, concrete and clear proposal.

 

My appeal is made to political leaders and to rulers who care about good of their citizens, leaving aside your system of political parties and the logic imposed by a system enslaved to power and money.

 

I call the Christian nations, together from East to West, inviting heads of state and the healthy forces of institutions; the economy, labor, university, healthcare, information to join a common project: disrupting the old system and putting aside the hostilities that are designed by the enemies of humanity, in the name of Divide et Impera.

 

We do not accept our adversaries’ rules, because they are made precisely to prevent us from reacting and organizing an effective and unseizable position. I call upon nations and their citizens to align themselves under the Cross of our Lord, Jesus Christ, the only King and Savior, the Prince of Peace, In Hoc Signo Vinces.

 

Let us found this anti-Globalist alliance. Let us give. It is a simple and clear program and let us free humanity from a totalitarian regime that brings together in itself the horrors of the worst dictatorships of all time.

 

If we continue to delay, if we do not understand the threat that looms over us all, if we do not react by organizing ourselves into a firm and courageous resistance, this infernal regime that is establishing itself everywhere will not be able to be stopped.

 

And may your Mighty God assist us and protect us.

===============================

George Bernard Shaw, the Fabian Society and a ‘Brave New World’

 

George Bernard Shaw^J the Fabian Society and a ‘Brave New World’  By Rhoda Wilson, 22 June 2023

 

There are over 7,000 members of the Fabian Society. It boasts being “the future of the left since 1884.” Members past and present include Tony Blair, Ed Miliband, Keir Starmer and Sadiq Khan.  Khan, who is not only London’s mayor but also the chair of C40 Cities, served as chair of the Fabian Society in 2008-10.

The Fabian Society’s website states that it has been affiliated with the Labour Party throughout the party’s history and is the only original founder that “remains affiliated in unchanged form.”

After Tony Blair’s landslide victory in 1997, over 200 Fabians sat in the House of Commons, including many of the cabinet.  After the 2015 election and the election of Jeremy Corbyn as Labour leader the role of the society as a pluralist, non-factional forum within the Labour movement came to the fore.  Labour’s defeat at the 2019 election saw the party turn back towards its Fabian roots. 

So, what are the Fabian Society’s roots?

It was established in 1884 by a coterie of British eugenicists and Malthusians to promote a new social order designed to mould society into a new, mechanised order run by a managerial elite of “social scientists” from the top down.

Among its early members was George Bernard Shaw who became the leading spirit of the Society.  Shaw also advocated for the killing of those who could not justify their existence to a “properly appointed board” – a similar albeit darker vision of the social credit system our rights and freedoms are threatened with today.

Bottom of Form

Fabian Socialists are Statist, they are absolutely authoritarian in their philosophy, Avangelista wrote. Their long-term goal has always been a socialist dictatorship with the imposition of a legalistic society where the individual is simply a part of the collective.

The idea of social justice is the biggest selling point and perhaps the easiest to peddle to the people. To give a recent example, in her 2018 book ‘Why Women Have Better Sex Under Socialism’, Kristen Ghodsee freely quotes from the works of Fabian socialist George Bernard Shaw to bolster her argument that capitalism is inherently sexist. Based on Shaw’s analysis, Ghodsee concludes that capitalism makes slaves out of women who, under socialism, would supposedly be happy and free.

The Fabian plan for a gradual socialist revolution was as definitive as it possibly could be, to say it has been a conspiracy is simplistic in the extreme. It instituted a widespread educational program for its leadership and its minions, as time progressed, it opened schools, such as the London School of Economics, and the New School of Social Research.

One stroke of genius was that instead of advocating a Socialist State, they assisted in the implementation of the Welfare State which is merely a few steps away from a purely Socialistic State.

In 1942, Stuart Chase, in his book ‘The Road We Are Traveling’, spelt out the system the Fabians had in mind:

  • Strong, centralised government.
  • Powerful Executive at the expense of Parliaments or Congress and the Judicial.
  • Government-controlled banking, credit and securities exchange.
  • Government control over employment.
  • Unemployment insurance, old age pensions.
  • Universal medical care, food and housing programs.
  • Access to unlimited government borrowing.
  • A managed monetary system.
  • Government control over foreign trade.
  • Government control over natural energy sources, transportation and agricultural production.
  • Government regulation of labour.
  • Youth camps devoted to health discipline, community service and ideological teaching consistent with those of the authorities.
  • Heavy progressive taxation.

Read more: A Fabian Socialist Dream Come True, Avangelista, 6 September 2012

An example of the Fabian ideology that we are currently facing is a digital currency coupled with a digital identity that will apportion rewards based on your value to society.  This is essentially an extension of the Fabian mindset into the world of financial transactions and monetary evaluations.  Fabians believed that some form of socioeconomic tribunal would be needed in order for each citizen to be quantified according to their “worth” to society.  The Chinese social credit score is a variant of that same concept.

This is the stained-glass window from the Beatrice Webb House in Surrey, England, former headquarters of the Fabian Society.  “It was designed by George Bernard Shaw and depicts Sidney Webb and Shaw striking the Earth with hammers to “REMOULD IT NEARER TO THE HEART’S DESIRE,” a line from Omar Khayyam. Note the wolf in sheep’s clothing in the Fabian crest above the globe. Source: A Fabian Socialist Dream Come True  In 2006, the Fabian window was installed in a library at LSE and unveiled by Tony Blair.  Source: Hammering out a new world – the Fabian Window at LSE

The Fabians wanted to fulfil the goal of a New World Order of the Hermetics, but they believed that people would change with reforms, not a revolution as Marx had claimed. In fact, as they wanted to establish socialism under capital control, they aimed to impose socialism not only on the working class but also on the capitalists. To achieve this goal of changing society, they would advise governments, especially in the field of education, and change society through them.

Read more: Fabian Society: Roots, theory and practice of socialist think tank, Daily Sabah, 4 February 2022

It is said that if the Fabians had a more famous dystopia than ‘Brave New World’, it was George Orwell’s ‘Nineteen Eighty-Four’ or ‘1984’.  Thirty years after writing his 1932 book ‘Brave New World’, Aldous Huxley gave a speech at Berkeley which some say is an admission by Huxley that Brave New World was a blueprint rather than merely a fictional novel.  This idea seems to be supported by a letter Huxley sent to Orwell in 1949 in conjunction with the purpose for which Huxley was in America.

Brave New World depicted a society characterised by medicated contentment, a widely accepted, eugenics-supported caste system and a government-enforced obsession with consumerism. 1984 depicts a state where daring to think differently is rewarded with torture, where people are monitored every second of the day, and where party propaganda trumps free speech and thought.

Huxley’s letter to Orwell stated:

The philosophy of the ruling minority in Nineteen Eighty-Four is a sadism which has been carried to its logical conclusion by going beyond sex and denying it.

Whether in actual fact the policy of the boot-on-the-face can go on indefinitely seems doubtful.

My own belief is that the ruling oligarchy will find less arduous and wasteful ways of governing and of satisfying its lust for power, and these ways will resemble those which I described in Brave New World.

Huxley was not positing whether 1984 or Brave New World would happen, he was arguing which of the two forms the future scientific dictatorship would take.  He reiterated this message in his 1962 Berkeley Speech.

Huxley’s move from the UK to America was not happenstance.  According to Marilyn Ferguson in her book ‘The Aquarian Conspiracy’, in the 1930s Huxley was sent to the US by the British government “as the case officer for an operation to prepare the United States for the mass dissemination of drugs … In effect, Huxley and [others] laid the foundations during the late 1930s and the 1940s for the later LSD culture.” Over the years Huxley was involved in dubious activities including the use of LSD to “brainwash influential people” and being in contact with the president of Sandoz, who was fulfilling a CIA contract for MK-Ultra, consisting of large quantities of LSD.

Further resources:

George Bernard ShawFabians and Eugenics

What is tricky about eugenics for those who like to call themselves progressives, is that most of its adherents came from the political left.

In 2019, The Guardian published an article that the great founding fathers of British socialism had dreams almost as vile as those of the Nazis. Eugenics, The Guardian stated, is the dirty little secret of the British left. The names of the first champions read like a roll call of British socialism’s best and brightest: Sidney and Beatrice Webb, George Bernard Shaw, Harold Laski, John Maynard Keynes, Marie Stopes, the New Statesman and the Manchester Guardian.

Many on the left of politics signed up for the Eugenics Society, which in the 1930s rivalled the Fabians as the fashionable salon of London socialism. HG Wells could not contain his enthusiasm, hailing eugenics as the first step toward the removal “of detrimental types and characteristics” and the “fostering of desirable types” in their place.

Further reading: Eugenics: the skeleton that rattles loudest in the left’s closet, The Guardian, 17 February 2012

Eugenics wasn’t the only distasteful society that some of these socialists belonged to.  Many were also members of the Fabian Society.  Both Wells and Shaw were Fabians who disdained the raggedness of the working class and sought in eugenics a means to attain socialism through gradualist reforms while supporting British imperialism. They were forerunners to the contemporary Labour Party.

George Bernard Shaw (26 July 1856 – 2 November 1950), known at his insistence simply as Bernard Shaw, was an Irish playwright, critic, polemicist and political activist. His influence on Western theatre, culture and politics extended from the 1880s to his death and beyond. He wrote more than sixty plays. With a range incorporating both contemporary satire and historical allegory, Shaw became the leading dramatist of his generation and in 1925 was awarded the Nobel Prize in Literature.

He belonged to the Protestant “ascendancy”– the landed Irish gentry. In the 1880s, Shaw became a vegetarian, a socialist, a spellbinding orator, a polemicist, a playwright and a Fabian.

In 1884 he became the leading spirit of the Fabian Society and the force behind the newly founded Society.  Shaw involved himself in every aspect of its activities, most visibly as editor of one of the classics of British socialism, Fabian Essays in Socialism (1889), to which he also contributed two sections.

Shaw not only passionately hated liberty but for decades he was a staunch proponent of genocide, refusing to soften his views even after the full horror of the Nazi death camps during World War II was brought to light.  While many have forgotten Shaw’s views, many others have brushed off his statements as mere “satire.”

Further reading:  The Real George Bernard Shaw – Fabian Socialist and Hitlerian Advocate of Mass Murder

In a 1931 newsreel, Shaw advocated for the state to murder people who can’t justify their value to the state, and thus, their right to live.  This clip is included at the end of a video compilation of statements made by Shaw which you can watch HERE.

It was also included in a 2010 special edition of the Glenn Beck programme on Fox News titled ‘The Revolutionary Holocaust: Live Free or Die’.  To give the clip some context you can watch the Glenn Beck programme HERE or uploaded in parts HERE and read the transcript HERE.  In the lead-up to the 1931 newsreel clip, Beck said:

The fathers of communism, Marx, and Engels, believed that societies would evolve from capitalism to socialism. But they acknowledged that there were still what they called primitive societies that hadn’t even evolved into capitalists yet. They called them racial trash.

As the revolution happens, the classes and the races, too weak to master the new conditions of life, must give way. There was only one thing left for those too far behind in the process of societal evolution. “The chief mission of all other races and peoples, large and small, is to perish in the revolutionary holocaust.”

Up until the horrors of Hitler, prominent socialist supporters discuss these ideas out in the open. Nobel Prize winner, Fabian socialist and prominent Soviet supporter, George Bernard Shaw … And this was actually somewhat subtle for Shaw.

The Revolutionary Holocaust: Live Free or Die, Glenn Beck, Fox News, 22 January 2010

In the 1931 newsreel, speaking about capital punishment, Shaw quickly turned to his eugenic viewpoint:

“There’s an extraordinary number of people whom I want to kill … It must be evident to all of you, you must all know half a dozen people at least, who are no use in this world.

“And I think it would be a good thing to make everybody come before a properly appointed board just as he might come before the income tax commissioners and say every 5 years or every 7 years, just put them there, and say, sir or madam, now will you be kind enough to justify your existence?

“If you can’t justify your existence; if you’re not pulling your weight in the social boat; if you are not producing as much as you consume or perhaps a little more, then clearly we cannot use the big organisation of our society for the purpose of keeping you alive, because your life does not benefit us, and it can’t be of very much use to yourself.”

“George Bernard Shaw reopens capital punishment controversy,” 5 March 1931 (1 min)

His words are not satire.  In a 1948 article on capital punishment, Shaw wrote:

There is a considerable class of persons who become criminals because they cannot fend for themselves, but who under tutelage, superintendence, and provided sustenance are self-supporting and even profitable citizens … Reorganise their lives for them; and do not prate foolishly about their liberty … it may be asked whether they are to be allowed not only to read the newspapers but also to marry and breed … the ungovernables, the ferocious, the conscienceless, the idiots, the self-centred myops and morons, what of them? Do not punish them. Kill, kill, kill, kill, kill them.

Capital Punishment, George Bernard Shaw, June 1948

And in the preface of his play ‘On the Rocks’, Shaw wrote:

Extermination must be put on a scientific basis if it is ever to be carried out humanely and apologetically as well as thoroughly … That killing is a necessity is beyond question by any thoughtful person … what we are confronted with now is a growing perception that if we desire a certain type of civilization and culture we must exterminate the sort of people who do not fit into it.

On the Rocks, Preface, George Bernard Shaw, 1932

Featured image: Eugenics, George Bernard Shaw and the need for a dramatic reckoning (left), Fabian Society coat of arms, a wolf in sheep’s clothing (right)

 

==================

A Devastating Exposé of America’s Colleges

A Devastating Exposé of America’s Colleges  By George Leef, 6 June 2023

A new book examines ideological infiltration by brainwashing radicals.

It has become so generally known that the Left has infiltrated our colleges and universities that people seldom bother to produce the evidence of it. Without evidence, many who would like to see a return to depoliticized campuses tend to forget how bad things have become. We need a loud alarm bell to arouse us.

Professor Stanley K. Ridgley has written just the book we need: Brutal Minds: The Dark World of Left-Wing Brainwashing in Our Universities. In it, Ridgley, who teaches at Drexel University, blows the whistle on the ugly phenomenon of using college to turn students into zealots who despise America. In the book, we learn about the organizations that are behind this covert operation and the tactics they use. If you are inclined to think that the Left’s control over our educational institutions is regrettable but not a matter of great concern, Brutal Minds is essential reading.

Here’s how Ridgley describes his book: “It’s a tale of how one of history’s great institutions—the American university—is undergoing an infiltration by an army of mediocrities whose goal is to destroy it as an institution of knowledge creation and replace it with an authoritarian organ of ideology and propaganda.”

The American university is undergoing an infiltration by an army of mediocrities.

The word “mediocrities” is carefully chosen. Ridgley shows that the faculty and administrators who are so adamant about imposing their utopian vision of “transformative education” are overwhelmingly the products of our schools of education. Ed schools, long known for their weak students, low standards, and susceptibility to academic fads, have in the last few decades been taken over by a cadre of Marxists who see only bad in America. Worse yet, they have built a pipeline that sends their graduates into faculty and administrative positions in our educational institutions.

Professor Sherry Watt of the University of Iowa is a good example of those academicians. She propounds her Privileged Identity Exploration model, which, Ridgley writes, “prescribes a psychological attack on persons with ‘privileged identities’ in her classes.” Why do that? Because, in her view, many American students have erroneous views about race that must be demolished before they can become “allies” in the fight for “equity.”

Some of the brainwashers are found in once-respectable academic programs. Ridgley points to Katherine Thorsteinson, a then-doctoral candidate in Cornell’s English department, as an example. In her writing course, she focused on the supposed evils of “white privilege,” declaring that “discomfort and confusion can actually be important for the racial (un)learning process, particularly for white students.” Students who need to learn how to write well are subjected to her obsession with race. A few, with enough “discomfort” thrown at them, might be won over to her views; none, probably, learn very much about good writing.

Most of the brainwashing, however, is not done in regular courses but, rather, in the ubiquitous “student affairs” offices. In years gone by, colleges had a few low-level employees to handle student life outside of academics, such as organizing a karaoke night. They still do such mundane tasks but during the last 30 years or so have decided to take on a new responsibility they call the “co-curriculum.” Ridgley explains, “The co-curriculum is the embodiment of the bureaucrats’ belief that they should be involved in all aspects of students’ lives outside the classroom.”

And they aren’t much interested in the old-fashioned extracurricular activities. They’re intent on using every bit of influence they have to get students to see things through a “social justice” lens. It’s because of this new preoccupation with teaching (as if student affairs bureaucrats were actual scholars) that we now find students having to participate in activities like the Privilege Walk and the Oppression Game.

Most brainwashing is done not in regular courses but in ubiquitous “student affairs” offices.

Incidentally, student affairs offices were never given this responsibility. They just declared it was theirs.

Most of the people hired into these positions have bright, shiny, education-school credentials, often master’s degrees or even doctorates. Earning those credentials, Ridgley makes clear, calls for little more than mouthing the right clichés about social problems. No true research is called for, and the standards are so flimsy that even the weakest student gets his or her degree. One student, for example, wrote about the problem of white privilege in comic books. This kind of faux education appeals to people who “see a route to professional advancement with only a minimum of actual expertise demanded.”

Once the eager educator-wannabees obtain their campus jobs, there are two organizations ready to help them maximize their impact with students: the American College Personnel Association (ACPA) and the National Association of Student Personnel Administrators (NASPA). Both organizations are controlled by “progressives” who advocate using student affairs offices to promote their ideology.

Here, for example, is an eye-opening statement that Ridgley drew from a NASPA handbook:

Student affairs provide the theoretical foundation and practical strategies to effectively foster the development of social justice allies, specifically addressing pedagogical issues relating to negotiating sexual orientation, gender, disability and race. We outline critical pedagogical strategies for meeting community resistance in a manner that increases potential for enlisting them in the battle for social justice and equity.

ACPA is just as toxic. Ridgley points to its 2019 document entitled “A Bold Vision Forward: A Framework for the Strategic Imperative for Racial Justice and Decolonization.” Pure leftist ideology.

ACPA and NASPA sponsor conferences and workshops and publish what Ridgley calls “cargo cult” journals, consisting of tendentious articles with a veneer of academic authenticity achieved by citing similar works published by like-minded writers. Here’s a sample of such scholarship:

A critical cultural perspective helps student affairs practitioners understand the power of culture and, in so doing, enables them to dismantle oppressive cultural conditions.

The student affairs agenda is usually hidden behind innocuous phrases like “learning about race,” but there’s no mistaking the cultural Marxism that “practitioners” are expected to push.

Sometimes, the brainwashers overplay their hands and get called out. That is what happened at the University of Delaware. In January 2007, two student affairs staffers unveiled their Curricular Model (CM), which was meant to augment the actual coursework of students with additional learning the staffers regarded as essential. To their consternation, however, details about their project got out and ignited a protest.

Ridgley writes the following about this controversy:

It was exposed as a crude thought-reform effort of psychological coercion aimed at undergraduates. It turns out that almost 200 trainers at Delaware had been indoctrinated in a “Diversity Facilitation Training” session directed by Shaktri Butler, whose material is a mash-up of discredited pseudoscience, prejudice, and racialist Newspeak.

Delaware’s CM included mandatory dorm-based programs where white students were browbeaten with accusations until they confessed their undeserved privilege in society.

Although race is the lead card in this game, the deeper objective is to get students to embrace the full socialist agenda.

The opposition was severe enough that the university’s president had to shut the program down, meekly saying that it went too far. But that was just a slight setback for the student affairs radicals, who learned to operate more covertly. Their programs are now more widespread and more circumspect.

Although race is the lead card in this game, the deeper objective is to get students to embrace the full socialist agenda. As our author correctly observes, the “social justice” mindset leads to complete governmental social and economic control. In this, the student affairs minions are playing the role of the “useful idiots” who have so often helped to pave the way for tyrannical governments.

Ridgley concludes with helpful pointers to students and their families so they can recognize what’s facing them on campus. He argues that public officials need to pay attention to the subversion of true education in their schools and stop funding it.

Brutal Minds should make you angry at the way our educational “leaders” have permitted colleges and universities to be infiltrated by fake academics pushing poisonous beliefs on gullible students.

George Leef is director of editorial content at the James G. Martin Center for Academic Renewal.

=====================

PwC a victim of woke capitalism scam

Cracks in woke capitalism  Nick Cater, The Australian, 5 June 2023

PwC’s global revenue topped $US50bn ($75bn) last year, more than the gross domestic product of Latvia or Bahrain but slightly below Slovenia. Not bad for a corporation where profit has become a dirty word.

PwC Australia acting chief executive Kristin Stubbins last week blamed the scandal that ended the career of her former boss last month on “a culture of aggressive marketing” that had “allowed profit to be placed over purpose”.

Leaving to one side whether the term “inappropriate behaviour” adequately describes the disclosure of confidential government tax information to clients, Stubbins’s open letter of contrition raises an interesting question: if the profit motive is a distraction, what exactly was PwC put on Earth to do? The mission, to which she alludes, is articulated in PwC’s global statement of purpose: “To build trust in society and solve important problems”.

Like other corporations that adopted the wokenomic business model, PwC has transitioned from a market-driven entity to one that identifies as a not-for-profit dedicated to a nobler cause than delivering a return to investors. “Our high standards of ethical behaviour are fundamental to everything we do,” it states in its official corporate documents. “Our values define who we are, what we stand for, and how we behave.”

The embarrassment sweeping PwC’s local division is a manifestation of the global crisis in woke capitalism. The claim of higher ethical standards has been exposed as a sham. No amount of rainbow-washing will remove the stain from PwC’s reputation.

The business case for LGBT+ inclusion was set out in a recent report by PwC. It estimated the global spending power of LGBT+ consumers to be more than $5 trillion. The “Ally Marketplace” of consumers who identify as fellow travellers with the LGBT+ community was eight to 10 times bigger.

READ MORE: Virtue signallers like PwC need to live up to their posturing | PwC tax scandal a wake-up call | Sayers breaks his silence on PwC scandal | Parliament to ratchet up pressure on bruised PwC

It claimed 78 per cent of LGBT+ people and their friends, family and relatives would switch to brands known to be LGBT+ friendly. More than 80 per cent of LGBT+ and non-LGBT+ millennials say an employer’s diversity and inclusion policies are an important factor when deciding whether to work for them.

PwC Australia has followed its own advice to the letter as a sponsor of last November’s Australian LGBTQ Inclusion conference in Melbourne. Former CEO Tom Seymour used his platform in the conference’s brochure to boast of PwC’s “inclusive culture which embraces differences – one that allows us to live our values every day, be ourselves and to feel empowered to realise and discover our potential”.

Perhaps this frivolous diversity gibberish did come from the heart and was not cut and pasted from countless other statements assuring us of PwC’s faithfulness to the official religion of our day. Or perhaps it meant nothing more than the removable rainbow tattoos worn by those who feel the need to show they care.

Either way, the cracks are appearing in woke corporatism, highlighted by a consumer backlash that has taken tens of billions of dollars off the value of US shares. Anheuser-Busch’s market value has fallen by $US27bn since April 1, the day Dylan Mulvaney, a man who identifies as a woman, announced his partnership with Bud Lite. Jared Dinges, beverage analyst at JPMorgan Chase, said: “We believe there is a subset of American consumers who will not drink a Bud Lite for the foreseeable future … we do not expect the lost sales to be recovered in fiscal year 2024.” An Anheuser-Busch spokesman said: “We want Bud Lite customers back, therefore Bud Lite is not going to get involved with political issues moving forward.”

Target in the US has lost $US13bn in market value since May 17 when it released its Pride collection of children’s clothing, which includes “tuck-friendly” female swimwear and other products. Other items in the collection include “gender fluid” mugs, “queer all year” calendars and books for children aged 2-8 titled “Bye Bye, Binary”, “Pride 1,2,3” and “I’m not a girl”.

Disney Corporation’s share price was already sliding when it was hit by a boycott in February last year provoked by its public opposition to a Florida law banning the teaching of sexual orientation and gender identity to children between kindergarten and third grade. It undoubtedly contributed, however, to the $US125bn loss in Disney’s market value in the past 16 months and the decision to sack 7000 workers in March.

It is alarming that a company the size of PwC failed to see the cracks in the woke corporate business model that have been apparent from the start. The “subset of American consumers” refusing Bud Lite is not as small as they imagine, and neither are their necks necessarily red. Shareholders of Anheuser-Busch, Target and Disney have every right to be angry that boards did not apply due diligence before partnering with a movement pursuing radical social goals.

Trans activists have done a remarkable job of portraying themselves as the bearer of the civil rights torch handed down through the ages. If directors had fulfilled their obligation to guard their shareholders against risk, however, it would not be hard to discover the radical, neo-Marxist, postmodernist motives of the activists and the threat they pose to our institutions, including the family.

Vivek Ramaswamy blew the lid on virtue-seeking capitalism two years ago in his book Woke, Inc: Inside the Social Justice Scam. “Here’s how it works,” he wrote, “pretend like you care about something other than profit and power, precisely to gain more of each.” The mistakes by Anheuser-Busch and Target suggest it is a short-term trick. The public will only put up with hypocrisy for so long, as PwC’s tumbling reputation attests.

The five rules of values-driven behaviour that PwC claims raises its company to a higher ethical plane have been rendered meaningless by the breach-of-trust scandal embracing the company.

As he tends his geranium bed Seymour might have cause to regret he didn’t pay more attention to the rule urging employees to “act as if our personal reputations were at stake”. We’ll leave it to his former colleagues to say how closely he followed rules two to four, “care”, “work together” and “reimagine the possible”. Seymour, however, can hardly be accused of failing to live up to PwC’s imperative that employees should “make a difference”, even if it wasn’t in the manner intended.

Nick Cater is senior fellow at Menzies Research Centre.

NICK CATER 

 

COLUMNIST

Nick Cater is executive director of the Menzies Research Centre and a columnist with The Australian. He is a former editor of The Weekend Australian and a former deputy editor of The Sunday Telegraph. He is author … Read more

 

=================================

The Coming War — Time to Speak Up

 

The Coming War — Time to Speak Up  By John Pilger, from Consortium News, 2 May 2023

Silences filled with a consensus of propaganda contaminate almost everything we read, see and hear. War by media is now a key task of so-called mainstream journalism.  

In 1935, the Congress of American Writers was held in New York City, followed by another two years later. They called on “the hundreds of poets, novelists, dramatists, critics, short story writers and journalists” to discuss the “rapid crumbling of capitalism” and the beckoning of another war. They were electric events which, according to one account, were attended by 3,500 members of the public with more than a thousand turned away.

Arthur Miller, Myra Page, Lillian Hellman, Dashiell Hammett warned that fascism was rising, often disguised, and the responsibility lay with writers and journalists to speak out. Telegrams of support from Thomas Mann, John Steinbeck, Ernest Hemingway, C Day Lewis, Upton Sinclair and Albert Einstein were read out.

The journalist and novelist Martha Gellhorn spoke up for the homeless and unemployed, and “all of us under the shadow of violent great power.”

Martha, who became a close friend, told me later over her customary glass of Famous Grouse and soda:

“The responsibility I felt as a journalist was immense. I had witnessed the injustices and suffering delivered by the Depression, and I knew, we all knew, what was coming if silences were not broken.”

Her words echo across the silences today: they are silences filled with a consensus of propaganda that contaminates almost everything we read, see and hear.  Let me give you one example:

On March 7, the two oldest newspapers in Australia, the Sydney Morning Herald and The Age, published several pages on “the looming threat” of China. They coloured the Pacific Ocean red. Chinese eyes were martial, on the march and menacing. The Yellow Peril was about to fall down as if by the weight of gravity.

No logical reason was given for an attack on Australia by China. A “panel of experts” presented no credible evidence: one of them is a former director of the Australian Strategic Policy Institute, a front for the Defence Department in Canberra, the Pentagon in Washington, the governments of Britain, Japan and Taiwan and the West’s war industry.

“Beijing could strike within three years,” they warned. “We are not ready.” Billions of dollars are to be spent on American nuclear submarines, but that, it seems, is not enough.”‘Australia’s holiday from history is over”: whatever that might mean.

There is no threat to Australia, none. The faraway “lucky” country has no enemies, least of all China, its largest trading partner. Yet China-bashing that draws on Australia’s long history of racism towards Asia has become something of a sport for the self-ordained “experts.” What do Chinese-Australians make of this? Many are confused and fearful.

The authors of this grotesque piece of dog-whistling and obsequiousness to American power are Peter Hartcher and Matthew Knott, “national security reporters” I think they are called. I remember Hartcher from his Israeli government-paid jaunts. The other one, Knott, is a mouthpiece for the suits in Canberra.  Neither has ever seen a war zone and its extremes of human degradation and suffering.

“How did it come to this?” Martha Gellhorn would say if she were here. “Where on earth are the voices saying no? Where is the comradeship?”

Post-Modernism in Charge

The voices are heard in the samizdat of this website and others. In literature, the likes of John Steinbeck, Carson McCullers, George Orwell are obsolete. Post-modernism is in charge now. Liberalism has pulled up its political ladder. A once somnolent social democracy, Australia, has enacted a web of new laws protecting secretive, authoritarian power and preventing the right to know. Whistleblowers are outlaws, to be tried in secret. An especially sinister law bans “foreign interference” by those who work for foreign companies. What does this mean?

Democracy is notional now; there is the all-powerful elite of the corporation merged with the state and the demands of “identity.” American admirals are paid thousands of dollars a day by the Australian tax payer for “advice.” Right across the West, our political imagination has been pacified by PR and distracted by the intrigues of corrupt, ultra low-rent politicians: a Boris Johnson or a Donald Trump or a Sleepy Joe or a Volodymyr Zelensky.

No writers’ congress in 2023 worries about “crumbling capitalism” and the lethal provocations of “our” leaders. The most infamous of these, Tony Blair, a prima facie criminal under the Nuremberg Standard, is free and rich. Julian Assange, who dared journalists to prove their readers had a right to know, is in his second decade of incarceration.

The rise of fascism in Europe is uncontroversial. Or “neo-Nazism” or “extreme nationalism,” as you prefer. Ukraine as modern Europe’s fascist beehive has seen the re-emergence of the cult of Stepan Bandera, the passionate anti-Semite and mass murderer who lauded Hitler’s “Jewish policy,” which left 1.5 million Ukrainian Jews slaughtered. “We will lay your heads at Hitler’s feet,” a Banderist pamphlet proclaimed to Ukrainian Jews.

 

Stepan Bandera torchlight parade in Kiev, Jan. 1, 2020. (A1/Wikimedia Commons)

Today, Bandera is hero-worshipped in western Ukraine and scores of statues of him and his fellow-fascists have been paid for by the EU and the U.S., replacing those of Russian cultural giants and others who liberated Ukraine from the original Nazis.

In 2014, neo Nazis played a key role in an American bankrolled coup against the elected president, Viktor Yanukovych, who was accused of being “pro-Moscow.” The coup regime included prominent “extreme nationalists” — Nazis in all but name.

At first, this was reported at length by the BBC and the European and American media. In 2019, Time magazine featured the “white supremacist militias” active in Ukraine. NBC News reported, “Ukraine’s Nazi problem is real.” The immolation of trade unionists in Odessa was filmed and documented.

Spearheaded by the Azov regiment, whose insignia, the “Wolfsangel,” was made infamous by the German SS, Ukraine’s military invaded the eastern, Russian-speaking Donbass region. According to the United Nations 14,000 in the east were killed. Seven years later, with the Minsk peace conferences sabotaged by the West, as Angela Merkel confessed, the Red Army invaded.

This version of events was not reported in the West. To even utter it is to bring down abuse about being a “Putin apologist,” regardless whether the writer (such as myself) has condemned the Russian invasion. Understanding the extreme provocation that a NATO-armed borderland, Ukraine, the same borderland through which Hitler invaded, presented to Moscow, is anathema.

Journalists who travelled to the Donbass were silenced or even hounded in their own country. German journalist Patrik Baab lost his job and a young German freelance reporter, Alina Lipp, had her bank account sequestered.

Silence of Intimidation 

In Britain, the silence of the liberal intelligentsia is the silence of intimidation. State-sponsored issues like Ukraine and Israel are to be avoided if you want to keep a campus job or a teaching tenure. What happened to former Labour Leader Jeremy Corbyn in 2019 is repeated on campuses where opponents of apartheid Israel are casually smeared as anti-Semitic.

Professor David Miller, ironically the country’s leading authority on modern propaganda, was sacked by Bristol University for suggesting publicly that Israel’s “assets” in Britain and its political lobbying exerted a disproportionate influence worldwide — a fact for which the evidence is voluminous.

The university hired a leading QC to investigate the case independently. His report exonerated Miller on the “important issue of academic freedom of expression” and found “Professor Miller’s comments did not constitute unlawful speech.” Yet Bristol sacked him. The message is clear: no matter what outrage it perpetrates, Israel has immunity and its critics are to be punished.

A few years ago, Terry Eagleton, then professor of English literature at Manchester University, reckoned that “for the first time in two centuries, there is no eminent British poet, playwright or novelist prepared to question the foundations of the Western way of life.”

No Shelley spoke for the poor, no Blake for utopian dreams, no Byron damned the corruption of the ruling class, no Thomas Carlyle and John Ruskin revealed the moral disaster of capitalism. William Morris, Oscar Wilde, HG Wells, George Bernard Shaw had no equivalents today. Harold Pinter was alive then, “the last to raise his voice,” wrote Eagleton.

Where did post-modernism — the rejection of actual politics and authentic dissent — come from? The publication in 1970 of Charles Reich’s bestselling book, The Greening of America, offers a clue.  America then was in a state of upheaval; Richard Nixon was in the White House, a civil resistance, known as “the movement,” had burst out of the margins of society in the midst of a war that touched almost everybody. In alliance with the civil rights movement, it presented the most serious challenge to Washington’s power for a century.

On the cover of Reich’s book were these words: “There is a revolution coming. It will not be like revolutions of the past. It will originate with the individual.”

At the time I was a correspondent in the United States and recall the overnight elevation to guru status of Reich, a young Yale academic. The New Yorker had sensationally serialised his book, whose message was that the “political action and truth-telling” of the 1960s had failed and only “culture and introspection” would change the world. It felt as if hippydom was claiming the consumer classes.  And in one sense it was.

Within a few years, the cult of “me-ism” had all but overwhelmed many people’s sense of acting together, of social justice and internationalism. Class, gender and race were separated. The personal was the political and the media was the message. Make money, it said.

As for “the movement,” its hope and songs, the years of Ronald Reagan and Bill Clinton put an end to all that. The police were now in open war with black people; Clinton’s notorious welfare bills broke world records in the number of mostly blacks they sent to jail.

When 9/11 happened, the fabrication of new “threats” on “America’s frontier” (as the Project for a New American Century called the world) completed the political disorientation of those who, 20 years earlier, would have formed a vehement opposition.

In the years since, America has gone to war with the world. According to a largely ignored report by the Physicians for Social Responsibility, Physicians for Global Survival and the Nobel Prize-winning International Physicians for the Prevention of Nuclear War, the number killed in America’s “war on terror” was ‘at least’ 1.3 million in Afghanistan, Iraq and Pakistan.

This figure does not include the dead of U.S.-led and fuelled wars in Yemen, Libya, Syria, Somalia and beyond. The true figure, said the report, “could well be in excess of 2 million [or] approximately 10 times greater than that of which the public, experts and decision makers are aware and [is] propagated by the media and major NGOS.”

“At least” one million were killed in Iraq, say the physicians, or 5 percent of the population.

No One Knows How Many Killed 

The enormity of this violence and suffering seems to have no place in the Western consciousness. “No one knows how many” is the media refrain. Blair and George W. Bush — and Straw and Cheney and Powell and Rumsfeld et al — were never in danger of prosecution. Blair’s propaganda maestro, Alistair Campbell, is celebrated as a “media personality.”

In 2003, I filmed an interview in Washington with Charles Lewis, the acclaimed investigative journalist. We discussed the invasion of Iraq a few months earlier. I asked him, “What if the constitutionally freest media in the world had seriously challenged George W. Bush and Donald Rumsfeld and investigated their claims, instead of spreading what turned out to be crude propaganda?”

He replied. “If we journalists had done our job, there is a very, very good chance we would have not gone to war in Iraq.”

I put the same question to Dan Rather, the famous CBS anchor, who gave me the same answer.  David Rose of the Observer, who had promoted Saddam Hussein’s “threat,” and Rageh Omaar, then the BBC’s Iraq correspondent, gave me the same answer. Rose’s admirable contrition at having been “duped,” spoke for many reporters bereft of his courage to say so.

Their point is worth repeating. Had journalists done their job, had they questioned and investigated the propaganda instead of amplifying it, a million Iraqi men, women and children might be alive today; millions might not have fled their homes; the sectarian war between Sunni and Shia might not have ignited, and Islamic State might not have existed.

Cast that truth across the rapacious wars since 1945 ignited by the United States and its “allies” and the conclusion is breathtaking. Is this ever raised in journalism schools?

Today, war by media is a key task of so-called mainstream journalism, reminiscent of that described by a Nuremberg prosecutor in 1945:

“Before each major aggression, with some few exceptions based on expediency, they initiated a press campaign calculated to weaken their victims and to prepare the German people psychologically… In the propaganda system… it was the daily press and the radio that were the most important weapons.”

One of the persistent strands in American political life is a cultish extremism that approaches fascism. Although Trump was credited with this, it was during Barack Obama’s two terms that American foreign policy flirted seriously with fascism. This was almost never reported.

“I believe in American exceptionalism with every fibre of my being,” said Obama, who expanded a favourite presidential pastime, bombing, and death squads known as “special operations” as no other president had done since the first Cold War.

According to a Council on Foreign Relations survey, in 2016 Obama dropped 26,171 bombs. That is 72 bombs every day. He bombed the poorest people and people of colour: in Afghanistan, Libya, Yemen, Somalia, Syria, Iraq, Pakistan.

Every Tuesday — reported The New York Times — he personally selected those who would be murdered by hellfire missiles fired from drones. Weddings, funerals, shepherds were attacked, along with those attempting to collect the body parts festooning the “terrorist target.”

A leading Republican senator, Lindsey Graham, estimated, approvingly, that Obama’s drones had killed 4,700 people. “Sometimes you hit innocent people and I hate that,” he said, but we’ve taken out some very senior members of Al Qaeda.’

In 2011, Obama told the media that the Libyan President Muammar Gaddafi was planning “genocide” against his own people. “We knew…,” he said, “that if we waited one more day, Benghazi, a city the size of Charlotte [North Carolina], could suffer a massacre that would have reverberated across the region and stained the conscience of the world.”

This was a lie. The only “threat” was the coming defeat of fanatical Islamists by Libyan government forces. With his plans for a revival of independent pan-Africanism, an African bank and African currency, all of it funded by Libyan oil, Gaddafi was cast as an enemy of Western colonialism on the continent in which Libya was the second most modern state.

Destroying Gaddafi’s “threat” and his modern state was the aim. Backed by the U.S., Britain and France, NATO launched 9,700 sorties against Libya. A third were aimed at infrastructure and civilian targets, reported the UN. Uranium warheads were used; the cities of Misurata and Sirte were carpet-bombed. The Red Cross identified mass graves, and Unicef reported that “most [of the children killed] were under the age of ten.”

When Hillary Clinton, Obama’s secretary of state, was told that Gaddafi had been captured by the insurrectionists and sodomised with a knife, she laughed and said to the camera: “We came, we saw, he died!”

On 14 September 2016, the House of Commons Foreign Affairs Committee in London reported the conclusion of a year-long study into the NATO attack on Libya which it described as an “array of lies” — including the Benghazi massacre story.

The NATO bombing plunged Libya into a humanitarian disaster, killing thousands of people and displacing hundreds of thousands more, transforming Libya from the African country with the highest standard of living into a war-torn failed state.

Under Obama, the U.S. extended secret “special forces” operations to 138 countries, or 70 percent of the world’s population. The first African-American president launched what amounted to a full-scale invasion of Africa.

Reminiscent of the Scramble for Africa in the 19th century, the U.S. African Command (Africom) has since built a network of supplicants among collaborative African regimes eager for American bribes and armaments. Africom’s “soldier to soldier” doctrine embeds U.S. officers at every level of command from general to warrant officer. Only pith helmets are missing.

It is as if Africa’s proud history of liberation, from Patrice Lumumba to Nelson Mandela, has been consigned to oblivion by a new white master’s black colonial elite. This elite’s “historic mission,” warned the knowing Frantz Fanon, is the promotion of “a capitalism rampant though camouflaged.”

In the year NATO invaded Libya, 2011, Obama announced what became known as the “pivot to Asia.” Almost two-thirds of U.S. naval forces would be transferred to the Asia-Pacific to “confront the threat from China,” in the words of his defence secretary.

There was no threat from China; there was a threat to China from the United States; some 400 American military bases formed an arc along the rim of China’s industrial heartlands, which a Pentagon official described approvingly as a “noose.”

At the same time, Obama placed missiles in Eastern Europe aimed at Russia. It was the beatified recipient of the Nobel Peace Prize who increased spending on nuclear warheads to a level higher than that of any U.S. administration since the Cold War – having promised, in an emotional speech in the centre of Prague in 2009, to “help rid the world of nuclear weapons.”

Obama and his administration knew full well that the coup his assistant secretary of state, Victoria Nuland, was sent to oversee against the government of Ukraine in 2014 would provoke a Russian response and probably lead to war. And so it has.

I am writing this on 30 April, the anniversary of the last day of the longest war of the 20th century, in Vietnam, which I reported. I was very young when I arrived in Saigon and I learned a great deal. I learned to recognise the distinctive drone of the engines of giant B-52s, which dropped their carnage from above the clouds and spared nothing and no one; I learned not to turn away when faced with a charred tree festooned with human parts; I learned to value kindness as never before; I learned that Joseph Heller was right in his masterly Catch-22: that war was not suited to sane people; and I learned about “our” propaganda.

All through that war, the propaganda said a victorious Vietnam would spread its communist disease to the rest of Asia, allowing the Great Yellow Peril to its north to sweep down. Countries would fall like “dominoes.”

Ho Chi Minh’s Vietnam was victorious, and none of the above happened. Instead, Vietnamese civilisation blossomed, remarkably, in spite of the price they paid: 3 million dead. The maimed, the deformed, the addicted, the poisoned, the lost.

If the current propagandists get their war with China, this will be a fraction of what is to come. Speak up.

John Pilger has twice won Britain’s highest award for journalism and has been International Reporter of the Year, News Reporter of the Year and Descriptive Writer of the Year. He has made 61 documentary films and has won an Emmy, a BAFTA and the Royal Television Society prize. His Cambodia Year Zero is named as one of the ten most important films of the 20th century. He can be contacted at www.johnpilger.com

The views expressed are solely those of the author and may or may not reflect those of Consortium News.

==========================

Australia Could Use a Machiavelli

 

Australia Could Use a Machiavelli  By Gary Furnell, Quadrant Online, 11 April 2023

 

Niccolò Machiavelli’s name is mud. Any scribbler vilifying a dodgy politician or lying lobbyist will reach for the poisoned descriptor Machiavellian. It suggests everything devious and cynical.

When I bought a copy of The Prince—Machiavelli’s most famous work—I braced myself, anticipating counsels of devilish sophistry on every page. But The Prince is far better than I imagined. Perhaps I was fortunate to read the Penguin Classics translation by Tim Parks with his illuminating introduction. Parks explores The Prince and Machiavelli’s scandalous reputation. Published in Italy in 1532 after Machiavelli’s death, it was placed on Pope Paul IV’s Index of Prohibited Books in 1559. Then time and chance intervened; they, Machiavelli had understood, multiplied the unpredictable. The Protestant Reformation and Catholicism’s Counter-Reformation were splintering Europe. Religious propaganda abounded, helped by that useful invention, the printing press. And Machiavelli garnered headlines: The Prince was lambasted by Protestants as a prime example of Catholic degeneracy, Italian trickery. This polemic—lasting for centuries—cemented Machiavelli’s wretched reputation and secured his fame.

And The Prince does counsel—when there’s no other option—cruel expedient action, including driving out the entire population from conquered territory if they’re rebellious. Other passages advise a ruler lacking qualities to at least appear to possess them. Machiavelli admired wise and august rulers, but most rulers are mediocre people. They need to sham virtues they lack. Machiavelli didn’t delight in these charades, but he acknowledged their usefulness at times. In his judgment, honesty is best—but politics is a shoddy business and it’s better to deceive occasionally than to lose power.

The Prince refers to God’s judgment, which rulers should fear. Machiavelli seems sincere, but he didn’t share his mother’s piety or his brother’s priestly vocation. Their father preferred the Roman Stoics. Unfortunately Niccolò’s habits compounded his bad reputation: he was a womaniser and whoremonger; he wrote tales of improbable seductions; he craved status and power.

He established prominence as a Florentine diplomat and soldier, but lost his position with a change of regime. Imprisoned and tortured, he later regained favour, only to be again dismissed. He turned to reading and writing during these turbulent years, studying history to learn how previous rulers came to power, kept and used it—or lost it. He had an insider’s knowledge of Florence’s unstable republic, its wars and intrigues with other Italian and foreign states. He travelled to European courts on diplomatic missions. He fought wars. His wide experience guided his writing. He hoped The Prince would commend him to Florence’s new rulers: the Medici clan. He wanted his political acumen seen and rewarded with high position. Instead, unsummoned to serve, he died at his rural estate in 1527 aged fifty-eight.

We might discount The Prince because of Machiavelli’s awful reputation. But he wrote amid unstable governments, “barbarous occupation”, frequent wars, political conspiracies and civil strife. Further, his purpose was not to theorise about an ideal realm but to detail what he saw, what he knew, what really happened. He considered different states and their different conditions. His approach was empirical, almost proto-existentialist: this is how people who want power—or have power—act, and by studying their actions and the consequences we can extract guiding principles.

We may note the widespread success of Western democracies—delivering prosperity and basic freedoms—and consider Machiavelli’s advice relevant only to a darker, undemocratic time. But the lessons of The Prince are many and valuable. If Australia finds itself in a real crisis—not a Covid crisis or climate change crisis—when our freedom, our homes and lives are threatened by aggressors, then we’ll wish we had read and absorbed the best of Machiavelli’s advice. In a sense, he wrote a book during violent times for violent times.

As a political player, Machiavelli had two immense advantages over the current crop of Australian politicians. First, he had fought wars and seen the terrible consequences of military and foreign policy blunders: people were slaughtered, the countryside and towns were devastated and occupying forces were callous. Machiavelli had skin in the game. Most state and federal politicians—and their bureaucrats—don’t have skin in the game. They don’t risk their lives; they don’t suffer painful consequences for destructive policy mistakes. They still get generous pensions and cosy appointments. There’s no compelling inducement to realism. If they err, they’re not imprisoned and their joints wrenched apart, as Machiavelli endured. We would get far more prudent policies if our leaders faced severe punishments for their dreadful decisions.

A second advantage Machiavelli had over most Australian politicians and bureaucrats—and this is related to Machiavelli’s realism—was his Augustinian rather than Pelagian anthropology. Machiavelli knew that human sinfulness had better be taken into account. Everywhere people were self-seeking, proud, anxious, impulsive, short-sighted, fearful, opportunistic, ambitious, envious and inconstant. No one person—even the most evil—displayed all of these characteristics all the time, but they were lurking in every human heart and no one wise dared to overlook them. Pelagian anthropology acknowledges human sin but discounts its constant distorting power. Pelagians imagine that people and society are perfectible—able to be their best if given the right incentives by shrewd leaders. This is unrealistic. For example, our welfare and health systems are broadly Pelagian and consequently have inadequate protections against clients’ rorting, laziness, entitlement and self-destructive folly. Machiavelli would not have made this mistake.

Machiavelli condemns rulers seeking popularity through extravagant spending. It’s a short cut to sure ruin. The strategy appeals to rulers, but it’s a calamity for the nation and harms the lavish leadership. They’ll either have to raise taxes or withdraw their generosity or both. None of these actions will be popular; they risk being overthrown. Machiavelli observes:

If you’re determined to have people think of you as generous, you’ll have to be lavish in every possible way; naturally, a ruler who follows this policy will soon use up all his wealth to the point that, if he wants to keep his reputation, he’ll have to impose special taxes and do everything a ruler can to raise cash. His people will start to hate him and no one will respect him now he has no money. Since his generosity will have damaged the majority and benefited only a few, he’ll be vulnerable to the first bad news, and the first real danger may well topple him. When he realises this and tries to change his ways, he’ll immediately be accused of meanness.

Since a ruler can’t be generous and show it without putting himself at risk, if he’s sensible he won’t mind getting a reputation for meanness. With time, when people see that his penny-pinching means he doesn’t need to raise taxes and can defend the country against attack and embark on campaigns without putting a burden on his people, he’ll increasingly be seen as generous—generous to those he takes nothing from, which is to say almost everybody, and mean to those who get nothing from him, which is to say very few.

This is germane to Australia, where every election features a cash-splash from aspiring rulers. They rarely address debt, the urgent need for frugality with public money or the government’s responsibility to allocate funds prudently. Parsimony is unmentionable. Every newsletter from my federal and state MPs highlights increased entitlements, a multitude of funding commitments and grants. There’s no mention of government debt or cost-cutting measures. Recently, my state MP proudly announced spending for companion dogs to console people stressed in court.

The ruler’s parsimony has the great benefit of saving money for adequate defence forces, since defending the country is any government’s first priority. Constant penny-pinching in other areas provides funds for a well-equipped and trained military—without impoverishing the nation. A country burdened by reckless spending—and mounting debt—has already surrendered its capacity for self-reliance and independent action. It’s vulnerable, without ready cash to build defences and deter enemies. Alas, like Australia, they need alliances.

Florence was a small state surrounded by unstable or ambitious neighbours. France and Spain were the closest large powers; sometimes their policies were friendly, at other times hostile. In this tumult Machiavelli sought to discover the best strategies for Florence. There was no simple option.

Alliances appear attractive and confer some benefits, but alliances are problematic. A nation’s affairs are complicated by the demands of allies. And allies may not be trustworthy; almost certainly they’ll have different aims and priorities. Self-determination is compromised, sometimes to a disastrous degree. For example, an ally may take action which you’re under obligation to support, but support may be remote or even antagonistic to your own interests. Moreover, in war, if you win with an ally, you’ll have to share the spoils. Also, you may have created a more powerful partner and you’ll find yourself doing their bidding. If you lose a war alongside an ally, you’re on your own. Your ally will now be confronting the belligerent victor and have its own problems. If your ally loses a war, you’re still its friend and under obligation to help. At best, together your luck may turn.

Machiavelli called allies auxiliary armies. They’re not under your command and they have independent aims:

Auxiliary armies—that is, when you ask a powerful ruler to send military help to defend your town—are likewise useless … Auxiliaries may be efficient and useful when it comes to achieving their own ends, but they are almost always counter-productive for those who invite them in, because if they lose, you lose too, and if they win, you are at their mercy.

So, sensible rulers have always avoided using auxiliaries and mercenaries, relying instead on their own men and even preferring to lose with their own troops than to win with others, on the principle that a victory won with foreign armies is not a real victory at all.

Machiavelli valued a strong military always standing ready. Neglect was stupid; the unprepared ruler would be hated for his negligence if his people were conquered. Luck and changing circumstances are a constant in life and of course it’s hard to discern what might happen and plan for it, but war is so common and catastrophic there’s no excuse for being unprepared for battle. Machiavelli weighed luck and circumstances versus fate and free will, and concluded that humans have sufficient free will to make important decisions and be held respons­ible. No ruler can claim that failure in battle-readiness was fate or bad luck. He—or she—bears the blame.

One of Machiavelli’s priorities was to establish a Florentine army and militia. They could be relied on to fight with vigour because they were fighting for their own interests. In addition, they were familiar with their own territory; they knew their leaders and were ready to embrace their aims. Motivation and local knowledge were crucial to success:

No state is secure without its own army; if it hasn’t got men to defend it determinedly and loyally in a crisis, it is simply relying on luck. Those who understand these things have always thought and said: There is nothing so weak and unstable as a reputation for power that is not backed up by its own army. And having your own army means having a force made up of subjects, or citizens, or men dependent on you …

A ruler then must never stop thinking about war and preparing for war and he must do it even more in peacetime than in war itself … Another thing a ruler must do to exercise his mind is read history, in particular accounts of great leaders and their achievements. He should look at their wartime strategies and study the reasons for their victories and defeats so as to avoid the failures and imitate the successes.

Machiavelli preferred defensive wars; protecting one’s homeland was paramount. He knew that campaigns in foreign territory might be necessary at times but they were very complicated and the result could be ruinous. Offensive wars were best avoided because the invaders were not just fighting the enemy army—the entire population was against them. Even if the invaders were victorious, pacifying conquered territory was a long, damaging struggle. It required a powerful occupying force, or establishing dominant colonies or evicting the resident population. Uncertainty ruled these enterprises. Bloodshed, many troubled years and a depleted or empty treasury were certainties. One wonders if foreign policy boffins in Washington or Canberra have read The Prince.

A wise ruler looked after the interests of the common people rather than the nobles. It was simple mathematics: common people outnumber nobles. Plus, plots against the ruler come from the nobles. The commoners aren’t much interested in politics or especially ambitious. They’re content with sensible laws and freedom from tyranny so they can get on with their lives. Given these minimums, they’ll respect the ruler and fight for the status quo when the country is attacked. When treated fairly, commoners formed the most stable basis for government. The nobles had more complicated, often destabilising aspirations which needed to be watched and curtailed by the ruler, without causing undue antagonism. In Australia the equivalent of nobles might be leaders of party factions, senior bureaucrats, big business operators, union bosses, strident activists and the agents of international bodies like the UN, WHO and the IMF. They want rulers to rule for them, not for the people:

So long as he has the people on his side a ruler needn’t worry about conspiracies, but when they are against him he’ll have to watch everybody’s every move. Sensible rulers and well-run states have always done all they can not to drive the nobles to despair and to keep the people happy and satisfied; indeed, this is one of the ruler’s most important tasks.

A class of the common people that a ruler needs to encourage particularly are the merchants, entrepreneurs, small business owners and tradespeople. They—not the nobles—were the primary generators of employment, skills, wealth and innovation. Taxes and regulations should not be punitive:

A ruler must show that he admires achievement in others, giving work to men of ability and rewarding people who excel in this or that craft. What’s more, he should reassure his subjects that they can go calmly about their business as merchants or farmers, or whatever other trade they practise, without worrying that if they increase their wealth they’ll be in danger of having it taken away from them, or if they start up a business they’ll be punitively taxed. On the contrary, a ruler should offer incentives to people who want to do this sort of thing and to whoever plans to bring prosperity to his city or state.

The ruler’s trust and favour towards the common people even extends to arming rather than disarming them. Machiavelli insisted this was good sense. In war, a large number of people across the country familiar with weapons is a great advantage. A ruler who disarmed the people signalled his distrust of them and left himself without the benefit of their prowess. Perhaps it’s time for Australia to consider volunteer local defence forces, coached by the regular army in light infantry and insurgent tactics. Machiavelli reasoned:

When you’re the one giving people arms, those arms become yours; men who were potentially hostile to you become loyal, while those subjects already loyal become your supporters rather than just your subjects. It’s true you can’t arm everyone, but in favouring some you can feel safer about the others too. Seeing that they’ve been preferred, the men you’ve armed will be under an obligation to you. The others won’t be resentful, understanding that the people facing danger for you and binding their lives to you will inevitably deserve the greater rewards. But when you take arms away from people, then you start to upset them; you show you don’t trust them because you’re frightened or cagey. Either way, they’ll begin to hate you.

This sort of policy needs a determined ruler, but any other type of ruler is weak. People appreciate clear, sensible policies; they grow impatient with equivocation and confusion. Ambiguity in a ruler is self-destructive. In particular, if a ruler has to take harsh or unpopular action it must be done early in his rule, firmly implemented and thus completed quickly, allowing equilibrium and popularity to return. Assuming the policy was necessary, the benefits will show, the memory of distress fade and the ruler gain respect. But if done ambiguously, the pain and confusion will linger and the ruler will lose support. Rulers must be adaptable and discern the different responses required for different situations, but procrastination or mealy-mouthed neutrality is self-defeating.

The Prince is a short book, but its principles have many qualifications because politics and society are forbiddingly complex. It’s possible another reader might extract different lessons which would amend or refine the principles I’ve highlighted. Hopefully, every reader will avoid using Machiavelli’s name as an insult. It’s a slander on a man with faults, but who also was so scrupulous with his employer’s money that when investigated by Florentine officials for possible embezzlement, they discovered that they owed Machiavelli money for unclaimed expenses. His deviousness has been exaggerated, his honour and good sense unfairly impugned. The Prince is necessary reading for anyone interested or associated with politics.

Gary Furnell is a former librarian. His recent book The Hardest Path is the Easiest: Exploring the Wisdom Literature with Pascal, Burke, Kierkegaard and Chesterton is published by Connor Court.

=====================

How the elite indoctrinate us

How the elite indoctrinate us  By WantToKnow.info , 8 April 2023

Editor’s note: Some of the links have already been ‘unlinked’.  This invariably happens when an article is too close to exposing the ‘official’ version.

Regular readers of WantToKnow.info know that the vast majority of people are regularly deceived and manipulated by the major media and government on a variety of vital topics. Yet few who have gone down the rabbit hole realize how they themselves are also being manipulated, polarized and radicalized by sophisticated secret operations of what we can call the power elite.

Obsessed with power and control, this power elite have many billions of dollars at their disposal to forward their hidden agendas and keep them out of the public eye. Yet it’s important not to paint the power elite as a unified force or as a small group of evil men bent on controlling the world. They are split into factions which compete with each other for power and control. And some factions are more benevolent than others. Yet when something occurs which might expose their manipulative tactics, all factions quickly close ranks to keep the public from learning about their immense, hidden power.

One key area on which the power elite have spent billions is behavior modification, i.e. the manipulation of human behavior. In intelligence circles, this is referred to as psychological operations or PSYOPS, though the Pentagon is now using the innocuous term “Military Information Support Operations” or MISO, believing the term psyops has been given a bad rap.

Whether it’s MISO or PSYOPS, the sophisticated tactics developed are used in the battle for the minds of both the general public and those who are aware of the major manipulations going on behind the scenes. And the amounts spent are staggering. Here’s a quote from a 2009 NBC News/Associated Press article  article titled “Pentagon Sets Sights on Public Opinion”:

“The Pentagon is steadily and dramatically increasing the money it spends to win what it calls ‘the human terrain’ of world public opinion. In the process, it is raising concerns of spreading propaganda at home in violation of federal law. Over the past five years, the money the military spends on winning hearts and minds at home and abroad has grown by 63 percent, to at least $4.7 billion this year. About $489 million … goes into what is known as psychological operations.”

Consider that in addition to the Pentagon, the CIA, FBI, NSA, and other intelligence agencies around the world all have their own hefty psyops budgets. That adds up to literally billions of dollars every year spent on influencing and manipulating human behavior, whether it be individuals, organizations, or entire nations. How many experts can be hired with that kind of money? How many agent provocateurs can be paid to infiltrate movements which are counter to the elite’s hidden agendas?

It’s vitally important to the power elite that the public never finds out about the many gross and subtle violations of law and ethics they commit in pursuit of their goals. Thus the billions spent on manipulating human behavior, much of which is channeled into keeping their agendas secret. That said, those involved fully expect that there will be leaks of information. To keep anyone from finding anything near the whole truth, a vast trove of tactics have been developed under the rubric of PSYOPS.

Among the core tactics used are:

  1. Control the narrative
    2. Push polarization
    3. Infiltrate, dominate, and incite violence
    4. Marginalize and radicalize those who know the truth
  2. Control the narrative

A highly effective way to keep key unwanted topics from public scrutiny is to control the information that is made available to the public through news reports and social media. With vast resources at their disposal, the power elite are able to place undercover operatives in key choke positions in both the major media and social media. The powerful individual in a media corporation who decides what gets published and what gets nixed is one such key position. If the elite don’t want a certain topic to gain public attention, they instruct these operatives to nix any of these stories.

Created in 1952, the existence of the National Security Agency was kept secret for decades as the choke positions in all media knew that they were not to allow any stories about it. Only decades later was its existence revealed. This 2002 CNN article states: “So clandestine is the NSA’s operations that people in the intelligence loop even joke that NSA really stands for ‘no such agency.'” The existence of the psychic spy program was also kept out of all media for decades and actively denied until after the official program was shut down in 1995. Those who claimed either of these existed were harshly ridiculed and even labeled “conspiracy theorists.”

Another glaring example of how this works can be seen in this ABC News article titled “U.S. Military Wanted to Provoke War With Cuba” and published May 1, 2001. It states:

“In the early 1960s, America’s top military leaders reportedly drafted plans to kill innocent people and commit acts of terrorism in U.S. cities to create public support for a war against Cuba. … ‘We could blow up a U.S. ship in Guantanamo Bay and blame Cuba,’ and, ‘casualty lists in U.S. newspapers would cause a helpful wave of national indignation.’”

This stunning news should have spread like wildfire in all major media and drawn intense public scrutiny.  But that never happened. No media other than ABC reported on this astounding story of blatant manipulation by the top generals at the Pentagon. How is that possible? The author of the story, James Bamford, was an award-winning producer at ABC who had enough clout and was above the intelligence choke point, so that he managed to get this sensational news published. Yet using their operatives in all other media, the power elite made sure that not one other news organization picked up on this bombshell story, effectively controlling the narrative.

I discovered another unusual method of controlling the narrative in my work as a language interpreter with the U.S. Department of State. We were welcome to take our esteemed foreign visitors to any major media office in the country, but when one guest wanted to visit the infamous tabloid National Inquirer, we were told “no visitors allowed.” It turns out this tabloid is actually a CIA front. With outrageous features stories like Justice Scalia being murdered by a hooker or Khloe Kardashian’s boobs going bust, a big story that might blow the cover of an elite agenda can be quickly published in the Inquirer so that anyone else who covers the story will be ridiculed as parroting a trashy tabloid.

When key information revealing the elite’s agenda does leak out, another powerful control mechanism used is to have stories published in the media ridiculing any who report on this leak. Consider the hundreds of respected doctors who had great success treating COVID with inexpensive treatments. This threatened the huge profits of Big Pharma and the elite’s control agenda. These once-respected doctors were harshly ridiculed and even shamed by the media. And their work was censored by almost all social media. YouTube even removed two videos of U.S. Senate hearings discussing these treatments.

Yet another potent tactic used to control the narrative is the deployment of thousands of fake social media accounts. These fictitious accounts are used to distract the public from any news revealing the power elite’s agenda and to counter, ridicule, and disparage any who are posting these revelations. Lackeys of the power elite are paid full time to use these fake accounts to slam any who question the official narrative and to promote strict adherence to what the elite want us to believe.

  1. Push Polarization

The elite know very well that the more polarized any group or organization becomes, the less effective they are and the easier it is to manipulate them. Divide and conquer has been used successfully for millennia by countless global leaders to keep the public from knowing who is really pulling the strings. Time and again, polarization has been very effectively used to split entire nations (red vs. blue) and to split any movement which opposes the elite agenda.

Using their key choke positions in the media, the elite focus on getting polarizing articles and information into the media. And knowing that adversity and polarization attract more readers, most reporters go right along with this agenda. How often do you see articles presenting both sides of a story and inviting conscious thoughtful dialogue where both sides of a debate are respected?

The red/blue and conservative/liberal divisions are obvious examples of the many polarizations exploited to their fullest to keep people fighting against each other. Yet more subtle polarization can be crafted or exploited in any organization working to expose the elite agenda. The 9/11 movement became so caught up in arguing the relatively minor issue of whether or not a plane actually hit the Pentagon that huge amounts of time and energy were poured into this one topic. This has fractured what could have been a much more potent movement. And you can bet that there were elite operatives egging on both sides to fan the flames of this rift.

Very few people and organizations realize the extent to which they are being manipulated into polarized positions by powerful puppet masters who don’t want us to know about their nefarious activities. How much does it serve any of us to fall into polarized viewpoints? How might our world change if ever increasing numbers chose to focus less on the us vs. them paradigm and more on inviting compassion and mutual understanding of our differences?

  1. Infiltrate, dominate, and incite violence

The control-obsessed elite track closely any groups working to expose their agendas. They take very sophisticated measures spending many millions of dollars to infiltrate and eventually dominate any movement which starts exposing their hidden agendas.  In this way, the elite are able to exert powerful influence on almost any organization that poses a threat to their agenda.

As soon as an organization or movement opposing the elite’s agenda grows large enough to reach their radar, they take action. Brilliant, charismatic operatives are tasked with learning about and then infiltrating the organization. Before long, as those in the organization see their skills and intelligence, these infiltrators rise to leadership positions as they initially pretend to powerfully support the organization’s goals while secretly reporting back to their bosses about the plans of the movement. Yet once established in their positions of leadership, they subtly steer the movement away from its original goals. They identify any potential fissures and use their leadership roles both to dominate and to polarize the movement as much as possible.

A very effective method these provocateurs use to polarize an organization or movement is to steer its members towards violence. They know that once an organization is perceived by the public as being violent, they will suffer a great loss of support. Violence also serves to polarize the targeted group. The more radical elements of the organization, usually a small but vocal minority, will join in this call for violence, while most others advocate non-violent means of change. This is how many movements founded on nonviolent principles eventually lose public support as they become increasingly fractured and ineffectual.

A prime example of this is the Occupy Wall Street moment, described in Wikipedia as “a 59-day left-wing populist movement against economic inequality and the influence of money in politics.” The U.K.’s respected Guardian ran a penetrating article titled “Revealed: how the FBI coordinated the crackdown on Occupy.” Here’s a quote from this incisive piece:

“New documents show that the violent crackdown on Occupy last fall … was not just coordinated at the level of the FBI, the Department of Homeland Security, and local police. The crackdown, which involved, as you may recall, violent arrests, group disruption, canister missiles to the skulls of protesters – was coordinated with the big banks themselves.”

Another excellent article lays out the long history of successful infiltration and polarization of once-powerful movements by undercover operatives and the media’s reluctance to report on this even when the evidence is clear. Consider the likely possibility that every major movement and organization working towards social justice and exposing corruption has been infiltrated and damaged using these tactics.

As these undercover agents are very well trained at their craft, it’s very hard to know with certainty who might have infiltrated an organization. If a leader gradually shows a clear shift towards polarization and inciting violence, that is a strong indicator that they might be a provocateur. Yet accusing someone of being an infiltrator can cause even more chaos and polarization. So the best tactic for those who care about the organization is not to accuse anyone of being an infiltrator, but rather to expose and isolate any who are pushing polarization and promoting violence, as whether or not they are an infiltrator, anyone who starts advocating for these may end up harming the organization.

The fact that Manchurian Candidates – spies who don’t consciously know they are spies – are sometimes used as infiltrators can make matters even more challenging to unravel. Organizations working for positive change would be wise to avoid doing a witch hunt for infiltrators, which can do more damage than good, and focus instead on identifying and resisting any tendencies towards violence and polarization.

  1. Marginalize and radicalize those who know the truth

This is one tactic that gets very little attention among those who have considerable knowledge of the hidden agendas of the power elite. Many millions are spent by the elite every year to marginalize and radicalize those who have uncovered their dirty deeds. Elements inside and outside of the military and government intelligence agencies pour millions of dollars into clandestine operations to manipulate those who have taken the red pill into believing that things are even more outrageous and crazy than they really are. The more radical a person or group becomes, the more likely they are to be marginalized and ridiculed by the general public.

The control-obsessed elite know well that ever greater numbers of people are awakening to their hidden agendas. And they know that a key method to counter this is to manipulate the paths people follow as they go down the rabbit hole. Experts on the elite payroll study the many paths that lead to understanding the secret agendas of the elite and how best to inject into them tasty morsels of real truth mixed with cleverly disguised falsehoods meant to radicalize those who ingest them. The best disinformation is often 80 to 90% true and verifiable, but it’s the remaining 10 to 20% that people then assume is reliable which can push them to unbelievable extremes. 

Elite operatives might claim to be whistleblowers as they purposely offer up real, valuable new information which can be verified. This convinces most people that what they are saying must be true. But then they add other outrageous claims which appear true but actually cleverly lead their readers into more radical beliefs that were actually propagated by the psyops teams.

As an example, those who begin to find out the hidden agendas behind 9/11, secret mind control programs, or high level sex trafficking organizations will run across many claims that Israel and the Mossad are behind it all. They will find verifiable evidence, some of which has been planted, proving Israeli involvement. But then further claims are made suggesting that Jews are the masterminds behind it all, when careful research will show that the Israeli faction of the cabal is but one of numerous elite groups involved. When those who take the bait then try to convince their friends it was the Jews or Zionists who were behind 9/11 or any other conspiracy, they are very likely to be written off as antisemites and “conspiracy theorists.”

Whenever any new aspect of the elite agenda is uncovered or even has the potential to be uncovered, entire squads quickly get to work creating sophisticated disinformation offering a coherent story filled with verifiable facts mixed with cleverly disguised falsehoods meant to marginalize those who ingest them. The more they can get people polarized and believing in outrageous conspiracies that they have created, the more these people will be ignored and discredited by those who haven’t taken the red pill.

The spooks have a great time working in teams to come up with outlandish conspiracy claims and to make them believable with a mix of real new information anyone can verify and disinformation which puts a spin on it that is much worse and less believable than the actual situation. They are masters at manipulating truth-seekers such that they end up marginalized and radicalized. Those who explore deep into NESARA and the allegedly huge gold stocks of the dragon family will find prime examples of how conspiracies can be manipulated and gain great traction using the above tactics.

So any time you are exploring new information put out on some conspiracy-focused website, don’t just believe what you read. Even if many others are claiming the information is true, think about whether it might have been planted there to lead you astray. Take some time to investigate and verify the most eye-catching “facts” and avoid jumping to conclusions. Reality is almost always more complex and nuanced than most would ever imagine.

Final Words

The best way to deal with all of the tactics mentioned here is to first be aware of when there is an official narrative being pushed by media and government and ask hard questions. Resist the temptation to believe too strongly any side of a story, which can easily lead to more polarization in our world. Focus instead on identifying and understanding the motivations of all sides of any issue.

And whenever you notice leaders in any movement intent on creating polarization or promoting violence, be courageous in pointing out their behavior and rallying those around you to inspire collaboration and effective, nonviolent means of change.

This information might leave you feeling a bit depressed or hopeless, yet I’d like to leave you with some inspiring information as a balance to the manipulative tactics of the elite. Though those obsessed with power and control will go to great lengths to keep the public from finding out about their corrupt activities, they also do their best to keep highly inspiring movements and organizations from gaining media coverage.

You may never have heard of profoundly transformative global organizations like Challenge DayMAPS, and IANDS. Yet they are among hundreds of thousands of outstanding organizations out there dedicated to creating a world of greater peace and harmony that rarely get significant media coverage. They are inspiring many millions around the globe to be the change we want to see.

And then there are the amazing, almost superhuman powers that lie innate within all of us which also get surprisingly little media coverage. The CIA spent many millions on training psychic spies who had incredible success through their remote viewing (RV) program, yet they don’t want you to know about this. The RV program, ESP studies, and children with psychic superpowers are only a sampling of intriguing topics which show that physical reality is much more malleable than most would believe, and all of us have incredibly latent powers that can be activated and trained.

For those interested in such matters, I most highly recommend an awesome book by top intelligence author Annie Jacobsen revealing how the elite are quite fascinated with superhuman capabilities, yet keep this tightly under wraps. Don’t miss her landmark book Phenomena: The Secret History of the U.S. Government’s Investigations into Extrasensory Perception and Psychokinesis.

There are always reasons for hope, especially when each one of us chooses not to buy into the doom and gloom scenarios propagated by many members of the power elite. We can choose to spread hope and be the change in building a more loving, harmonious world. So don’t forget in your research into deep corruption to balance this with research into the profound powers that lie hidden within and spread the hope and inspiration that is always available when we tap into the infinite well of wisdom available deep inside of every one of us.

By focusing on changing the world at the grass roots level and linking up with the many organizations and communities around the globe already working to transform our world, we are building a cohesive net around the world which can catch the pieces of the old empire as it falls apart. We are the ones we’ve been waiting for.

Remember the quote by Buckminster Fuller:

You never change things by fighting the existing reality. To change something, build a new model that makes the existing model obsolete.

With best wishes for a transformed world,
Fred Burks for PEERS and WantToKnow.info
Former White House interpreter and whistleblower

======================

Insouciant Americans Didn’t Notice the Revolution that Stole their Country

Insouciant Americans Didn’t Notice the Revolution that Stole their Country  By Paul Craig Roberts, 2 January 2023

Florida Governor DeSantis, seeing that Florida’s universities are suppressing free expression with speech control and normalizing sexual perversity while demonizing normality succeeded in having laws passed against the substitution of indoctrination for education.  But the Woke left rule Florida’s Universities, Not Florida Law.

Florida Universities Ignore State Law Against Indoctrinating White Students with the Beliefs they Are Racists and the Constitution Is a Tool of White Oppression of Blacks.

Universities have developed what Cornell Law School Professor William Jacobson calls “systemic repression.”  By hiring Woke activists as professors and mandating Woke policies, administrators  have created a culture that allows no room for dissent against the demonization of white ethnicities as racists and the denunciation of Western civilization as a monument to white supremacy.  In most American universities it is no longer possible for students to be enculturated into the Western tradition.  A history major learns that history consists of a series of crimes by white people against people of color.  An English major learns African and South American novelists.  The voices that connect Americans to their tradition are not heard.

It is the same everywhere. America’s universities are now knives at America’s throat.  They are centers of anti-American revolution, not centers of learning. Two generations of young have been deracinated.  The break in the transmission of the culture is likely fatal to the continued existence of Western civilization

Read this article — https://www.theepochtimes.com/mkt_app/students-speak-out-on-anti-white-anti-christian-anti-american-culture-at-florida-university_4937887.html?utm_source=News&src_src=News&utm_campaign=breaking-2022-12-25-2&src_cmp=breaking-2022-12-25-2&utm_medium=email&est=eG6%2FKDx0yYU6H%2BwC6BXzq5D3hPJhWOHb9xryNl3dbnS6FKFDhyRBtw%3D%3D— and you will understand that if the universities are not closed, the United States will be overthrown.

Stanford University has compiled a list of “Harmful Language.”  Among the impermissible words is “American.” https://ijr.com/american-listed-harmful-language-stanford/?utm_source=Email&utm_medium=ijr-weekly&utm_campaign=ijr-2&utm_content=firefly  

Laugh. Ha Ha.  It is so silly.  No, it is not silly.  It is deadly serious.  While everyone was asleep a revolution has occurred.  The revolutionists have the government, the FBI, the CIA, the military, the media, the universities, the public schools, the bar associations, the medical profession.  Soon they will have digital money, and then it is all over without a shot fired.

Victor Davis Hanson asks “Are Universities Doomed?” https://amgreatness.com/2022/12/22/are-universities-doomed/

As centers of learning, yes, but they are flourishing as propaganda centers for destroying Western civilization.  A question more to the point is: are we doomed by ceasing to pass  on the Western tradition?

In the universities sexual perversity is normalized and protected, but normal heterosexuals are “toxic masculinity.”  Being a white heterosexual male in an American university today is a horrible dehumanizing experience.  His feminist professor views him as a rapist. His black professor views him as a racist. His homosexual or transgendered professor views him as homophobic or transphobic.  His belief system is attacked from all directions.  He suffers the discrimination that blacks and feminists claim to suffer.  He is graded not on merit but on his acceptance of the indoctrination that has taken the place of education. If he is careless with his speech and doesn’t learn the new pronouns or rolls his eyes at some absurd professorial pronouncement, he is toast.

If he manages to graduate, he is disadvantaged in the job market and in his career should one materialize.  All private and public employers are committed to diversity and proportional representation in the work force. White male employment and promotion is on hold until blacks, women, and other “preferred minorities” have caught up. We now have a caste system in which white males are the lowest caste.

Consequently, Hanson reports “nationwide undergraduate enrollment has dropped by more than 650,000 students in a single year.” White males account for 71 percent of the drop in enrollment. Females now compose 60 percent of university students.  The traditional family based on the male’s income has passed into history.

University budgets and the extremely high tuition are no longer used to hire the best professors to produce the best education.  The money is used to hire Soviet-style commissars to police unacceptable speech, unacceptable pronouns, unacceptable thoughts, to protect feminist from “toxic masculinity,” to protect blacks and “peoples of color” from white racism.  Victor Davis Hanson reports:

“At Yale University, administrative positions have soared over 150 percent in the last two decades. But the number of professors increased by just 10 percent. In a new low/high, Stanford recently enrolled 16,937 undergraduate and graduate students, but lists 15,750 administrative positions—in near one-to-one fashion.

“In the past, such costly praetorian bloat would have sparked a faculty rebellion. Not now. The new six-figure salaried “diversity, equity, and inclusion” commissars are feared and exempt from criticism.

“Since 2020, the old proportional-representation admissions quotas have expanded into weird ‘reparatory’ admissions. Purported ‘marginalized populations’ have often been admitted at levels greater than percentages in the general population.”

Consequently, admission tests and performance grading are damned as biased and antithetical to diversity.

“To accommodate radical diversity reengineering, the only demographic deemed expendable are white males. Their plunging numbers on campus, especially from the working class, are now much less than their percentages in the general population.”

Stanford University’s projected profile of its class of 2025 is a student body that is only 23 percent white, although white people are 60 percent of the US population.

To accommodate the aristocratic elevation of non-whites, admission requirements are being abolished.  To prevent failures and comparison of the  performance of the races, grades are being abolished. Deans’ lists and distinctions such as cum laude are being abolished.

The universities are clearly committed to turning out graduates who are alienated from traditional America and who have no appreciative knowledge of Western civilization.  Only tyranny can result from the deracination of a people who are enmeshed in Identity Politics.

======

A CLIMATE OF AUTHORITARIANISM  IN NEW ZEALAND


A CLIMATE OF AUTHORITARIANISM IN NEW ZEALAND  By Dr Muriel Newman, NZCPR, 21 September 2022

The pandemic traffic light system has gone.

Masks have gone.

Mandates have gone.

Life is going back to normal.

Or so we have been led to believe.

But that’s not the whole truth.

By Government decree, you are still required to isolate for 7 days if you contract Covid-19 – but not if you catch the flu.

Masks must still be worn in some places including medical establishments and rest homes.

And mandates can still be applied under ‘health and safety’ guidelines, so the professional bodies regulating doctors, dentists, and nurses, for example, can still exclude the unvaccinated.

In Jacinda Ardern’s New Zealand, if you stood against her Government’s coercion, you may never be able to practice your profession again.

Nor will we ever be free of the threat of authoritarianism. It not only hangs over us as a precedent, but sinister new levels of surveillance are now in place. It’s the norm for the ‘misinformation’ police to monitor what we say, and who we associate with. And anyone daring to challenge Labour’s agenda – by speaking out against co-governance and He Puapua or the mantra that climate change is a man-made crisis – risks public vilification.

If we look back to the Prime Minister’s Speech from the Throne following her 2020 election victory, radical change was signalled: “The scale and pace of the recovery offers an opportunity to reshape the way things are done in New Zealand, to innovate and improve our position and our economy.”

She promised to build back ‘better’: “New Zealand’s response to COVID would be insufficient if it were to simply return us to the way we were before the virus. Recovering and rebuilding entails determined and connected action by government. That action can, and will, be used to reshape the economy to be more productive, more sustainable, and more equitable… We can be better than we were. This government’s mission is to make it so.”

Jacinda Ardern identified the ‘global climate crisis’ as a priority: “The Government is committed to the shift away from fossil fuels in order to build a new low-carbon future.

Like the pandemic strategy, her Net Zero climate change response is being driven on a global scale – not only by the United Nations, and a myriad of environmental groups, but also powerful lobby groups like the World Economic Forum.

In fact a sophisticated campaign for radical action is being orchestrated by a world-wide ‘army’ of climate activists. Many have been trained by former US Vice President and World Economic Forum Trustee Al Gore – the architect of the alarmist film “An Inconvenient Truth”.

That 2006 masterclass in climate propaganda, claimed that by now there would a 20-foot sea level rise and 100 million climate refugees.

The passage of time has not only confirmed just how absurd Al Gore’s predictions were, but also how wrong all of the alarmist projections over the last 30 years have been.

Jacinda Ardern is, of course, no stranger to the World Economic Forum. In 2014, six years after entering our New Zealand Parliament as the President of the communist movement the International Union of Socialist Youth – a position she continued to hold for a further 15 months after becoming an MP – she was selected as a WEF Young Global Leader.

As she explained to the world’s elite attending the 2019 WEF annual meeting in Davos, Switzerland, she’s using her time in office to entrench their agenda into our legislative and regulatory framework in such a way that it will lead to permanent change: “This needs to be something that we embed in our national cycles, in our political cycles, and in our actions and it needs to endure beyond us as individuals.”

One such WEF initiative is the use of “wellbeing” to replace GDP as a measure of economic progress. Another, of course, is the campaign for Net Zero.

Just as fear was used by the Prime Minister to convince the population of the need to comply with unprecedented Covid restrictions, so too she’s using fear of a man-made climate ‘crisis’, to create the urgency and justification for massive government intervention.

On 2 December 2020 Jacinda Ardern moved a ‘Declaration of Climate Emergency’ motion in Parliament, alleging New Zealand is in the grip of a climate emergency: “In order to avoid a disastrous 1.5 degree Celsius rise in global temperatures and beyond—a rise that would see increased risk to human health and livelihood, civil unrest, mass drought, disease, loss of lands and homes, increased fires, increased tropical storms, mass human displacement, and globally exhausted resources—we must act with urgency to ensure global emissions fall to net zero by 2050.”

Her motion passed by 76 votes to 43, with Labour, the Greens, and the Maori Party voting in support, while National and ACT were opposed.

The Prime Minister’s fearmongering appears to be working.

With the media promoting an endless doomsday narrative, most New Zealanders appear either indifferent or accepting of climate regulations – even those that will undermine our economy and cause living standards to fall.

Nor do they seem concerned that the apocalyptic predictions are fabricated.

Looking back through history, the truth about the climate is plain to see. Planet Earth has been on its current warming path since it emerged from the peak of the Little Ice Age around 1700, when ice pageants were held on the River Thames. Before that, around 1000 AD during the Medieval Warm period, Vikings farmed Greenland. Earlier still were the Dark Ages, a cool period around 500 AD, and before that, the Roman Warm period – and so it goes on.

During its more than 4-billion-year history, the planet has been far warmer and far cooler than it is today. And carbon dioxide, the gas the activists claim is ‘pollution’ and responsible for the planet heating up, has, for much of that time, been present in the atmosphere in far greater concentrations than today.

The reality is that warming and cooling are part of the natural cycle of planet Earth. These cycles are driven by the sun, winds, clouds, ocean currents, and a myriad of other complex factors – but not carbon dioxide, which is known as a ‘trace gas’ because it is present in the atmosphere in such minute quantities.

Yet climate activists have captured the narrative and are scaring the public into thinking the world is going to end – unless the government takes control of the economy and imposes regulations that will cripple our productive sector.

It’s a truly bizarre situation – especially when China, Russia, and India, which are responsible for most of the world’s carbon emissions, are only paying lip service to the West’s obsession with climate change, while continuing to build coal fired power stations at pace to satisfy their energy needs.

By adopting the United Nations’ radical Net Zero goal, Jacinda Ardern plans to make New Zealand ever more reliant on “green energy” – energy that is, in fact, neither ‘green’ nor reliable.

Not only does the construction of wind and solar farms use vast amounts of fossil fuels for mining, transportation, and construction, but some parts of the supply chain – including cobalt mining for solar panels and the batteries that power electric cars – use child labour. Yet the politicians – and the environmental movement – continue to laud such products, conveniently turning a blind eye to the inconvenient truth of their manufacture.

Brushing aside the fearmongering rhetoric, Net Zero is a totalitarian plan to enforce UN mandates onto New Zealand that will destroy the viability of farming – along with many other industries that rely on the fossil fuels.

This week’s NZCPR Guest Commentator, former National Party Minister Barry Brill, the Chairman of the New Zealand Climate Science Coalition, has analysed the situation we are in and points out some glaring anomalies:

“The 2022 Budget took more taxes from working New Zealanders than any before in history, and at a time when real wages were plummeting at record rates.

“Why?

“So that Labour Ministers could spend billions of extra dollars on their vanity project – the quest to lead the world in Climate Change spending; so as to realise the advertised ‘nuclear-free moment of the Prime Minister’s generation’.”

Unfortunately for New Zealand, Jacinda Ardern’s climate policy is all about profile – being seen as a world leader in climate change.

And sadly, the huge economic sacrifice she wants New Zealanders to make will achieve nothing – as Barry points out: “Our greenhouse gas emissions are less than one-fifth of 1% of the global total. They are a fraction of a drop in a bucket. They can make no conceivable difference to future global average temperatures.”

He highlights how harsh the PM’s restrictions actually are: “Our current emissions-reduction pledge is FIVE (5) times greater than the global average. The mean 2030 figure for 193 countries is 9%, while New Zealand’s figure is 50%.”

Barry also points out, that if our politicians were honest, they would admit that because New Zealand is a rural country with vast areas of forests and grasslands, all of our so-called ‘human induced’ carbon emissions would be completely absorbed many times over by our plant life, leaving no excess emissions at all: “New Zealand has already over-achieved the Net Zero target. Right now, our country is a net carbon sink, and the vegetation in our National Parks alone absorbs more than four times our annual human-related emissions… Alas, as a result of artificial, poorly-negotiated rules, our pre-1990 native forests are ignored in counting our National Inventory for UN purposes. But the scientific fact remains that, while politics sees us as a net emitter, science sees us as a net sink.”

In his article Barry outlines 20 reasons why New Zealanders should no longer tolerate the PM spending precious taxpayer dollars on her vanity project – “to lead the world in climate policy”.

Isn’t it time we collectively pushed back against this dangerous obsession – one that is wasting precious taxpayer funding that should be invested in health, education, and other policies to build a better future?

In light of the fearmongering that Kiwis are being continually bombarded with, there are two simple facts that need to be understood.

The first is that anyone calling carbon dioxide a “pollutant” is either a climate activist or is totally uninformed about science.

Carbon dioxide is the gas of life. It is essential for photosynthesis, which allows plants to trap the sun’s energy and convert it into the food that all living things need to survive.

And the second fact is that throughout most of the Earth’s history, the planet has had carbon dioxide levels significantly higher than they are today – up to 20 times higher – and since it did not cause catastrophic warming back then, it’s not going to do so now.

The reality is that nature controls the climate, not politicians. The most sensible thing we can do is learn to adapt – as humans have always done throughout history.

In fact, a new paper from the INFN, an Italian national research institute, has analysed extreme weather events from around the world, including floods, droughts, and cyclones. The scientists found that in spite of all the hype and predictions of a climate Armageddon, there has been no appreciable change in the intensity or frequency of extreme weather events: “None of these response indicators show a clear positive trend of extreme events… On the basis of observational data, the climate crisis that, according to many sources, we are experiencing today, is not evident yet.”

The reality is that for politicians, like Jacinda Ardern, the ‘climate crisis’ is a convenient vehicle to manipulate the public into accepting revolutionary change towards a more controlled society.

Surely, it’s time for the public and opposition politicians to call out the climate crisis as a political device that’s being used by socialist politicians to exert more control over the lives of others.

======================

Coup d’etat in all but name: NZ’s descent to ethno-nationalism

Coup d’etat in all but name. NZ’s descent to ethno-nationalism  By Elizabeth Rata, The Australian, 11 August 2022

New Zealand is on a long descent from our remarkable 170-year legacy of democratic governance into a tribal form of ethno-nationalism, aided by our government, our education system and a compliant media.

Unrecognised as such at the time, the descent began nearly 40 years ago, when the 1985 Treaty of Waitangi Amendment Act set in motion a radical constitutional agenda, whose aim was to shift the country from democracy to tribalism.

Over the last four decades, a corporate tribal elite has privatised public resources, acquired political power, and attained governance entitlements. Activist judges have created treatyism – a new interpretation of the Treaty of Waitangi – as a “governance partnership,” while intellectuals supply the supporting racialised “two world views” ideology which is now permeating society.

Traditional waka crews perform a haka on Waitangi Day. Activist judges have created treatyism – a new interpretation of the Treaty of Waitangi – as a ‘governance partnership’.

In his book The Open Society, philosopher Karl Popper identifies those who would take us back to the past, to that closed tribal society from which we are all descended. He describes how throughout history those who “could only make themselves leaders of the perennial revolt against freedom”, those “incapable of leading a new way” will return us to what he called “cultivated tribalism”.

It is this colossal failure of vision for a democratic future that has taken New Zealand to the crossroads. Democracy is one path ahead; ethno-nationalism is the other.

Treatyism’s success can be seen in how comprehensively “partnership”, “decolonisation”, “co-governance” – whatever term is used – is inserted into all NZ’s government institutions, into the universities, and into the law. It is an ideology that tells how we are to understand our country’s history and how we are to envisage its future.

A reconstruction of the signing of the Treaty of Waitangi showing Maori chiefT?mati W?ka Nene signing in front of James Busby and Captain William Hobson. Picture: NZ History.

READ MORE:Revolution in NZ education|Ardern’s recipe for privilege by an inherited tribal elite|NZ children face education tragedy|Democracies can die, Ardern warns. She should know

The 1840 Treaty of Waitangi was, like all human products, of its time and place. One aim, shared by British and Maori signatories alike, was to establish the rule of law by imposing British sovereignty through British governance. Sovereignty and governance go together as two sides of the same coin, with intertwined meaning. In the decades which followed, the treaty lost relevance in the new colonial society. This is the case with all historical treaties.

Revived in the 1970s as the symbol of a cultural renaissance, the treaty was captured by retribalists in the 1980s to serve as the ideological manifesto for the envisaged order – a reconstituted New Zealand. It was given a “spirit” to take it above and beyond its historical location so that it could mean whatever retribalists say it means.

This treatyist ideology successfully promotes the false claim of partnership between the government and Maori tribes. However there is a deeper, more insidious strategy propelling us to tribal ethno-nationalism – the collapse of the separation between the economic and political spheres.

The separation of the economic from the political is absolutely essential for democracy. When economic interests and political ambitions are merged there is no accountability to the people; consider all those totalitarian leaders whose power gives wealth and whose wealth gives power – a merger broken only when (and if) the people revolt.

A woman waves the New Zealand flag at the Treaty Grounds on Waitangi Day. Picture: Getty Images.

When the combination of reactionary politics and wealth accumulation is justified by “myths of past perfection”, we have what I call the neotribal capitalist version of the wealth-power merger.

The corporate Maori tribes of NZ have already acquired considerable governance entitlements; the next and final step is tribal sovereignty. It’s a coup d’etat in all but name, accomplished not by force but by ideology.

Given the enormous success of retribalism is it too late to reclaim New Zealand from the relentless march to blood and soil ethno-nationalism?

That depends upon our willingness to understand, value, and restore democracy – that remarkable and still uncommon form of government described in Abraham Lincoln’s famous words as “government of the people, by the people, for the people”.

Its three pillars are interdependent; the citizen, who has a duty to society but also personal interests arising from kin, cultural and other social loyalties; the state, simultaneously the capitalist state generating economic wealth and inequality and the secular democratic state, guaranteeing political equality and regulating wealth distribution; and, lastly, the nation, unified in facing the future, yet diverse in its past.

Democracy is peaceful battle within and between each of these three pillars. This bloodless conflict is only possible when individuals are partially loyal – that is, they have contradictory loyalties simultaneously. They identify as a family member, a member of an ancestral group, a tribe, a religion, or an identity group defined by sexuality, while at the same time loyal to a diverse society and to its governing system that is not personal.

These two different loyalties – one a deeply personal identity, the other a rational commitment to an idea – is why democracy is so difficult. It is much easier to fall back into loyalties of emotion, not reason.

Prince Charles at the Waitangi Treaty Grounds. Picture: Getty Images.

After all, from different, even conflicting interests how do we decide where our loyalty lies – is it to New Zealand? To an identity group? An ancestral group? To those “who look like us”?

It is a question that someone in a tribal society, an autocratic society, a religious society would not have to ask, or be permitted to ask, because the answer is already provided.

Traditional tribal societies allowed one identity, fixed by birth status and kinship ties – not open to individual choice. Loyalty was non-negotiable because total loyalty ensured the group’s survival.

Autocratic regimes impose total loyalty – not for the survival of all, but for the elite, and this loyalty is imposed by might and by ideological indoctrination.

The ease and attraction of such total loyalty favours ethno-nationalism; it is profoundly anti-modern and anti-democratic, yet also profoundly seductive.

And New Zealand is being seduced by it. Already, our education system is indoctrinating children into retribalism via the so-called “decolonisation” and “indigenisation” of the curriculum. But decolonisation will destroy the very means by which each generation acquires reasoned knowledge, and in so doing, the ability to reason – which in turn provides the rationalism to counter the irrationalism of total loyalty.

By undermining the secular academic curriculum – that which creates the reasoning mind – we are destroying the partially loyal individual. Our fate – to be left with those capable only of mindless total loyalty.

When citizens abdicate their democratic duty, when the media abandons its responsibilities, when judges become political activists, when academics are intolerant of open inquiry, and when governments are subverted by an ideology – that is when a corporate tribal elite emerges to encircle the commons, to privatise what belongs to the public, to us the people, and to govern not in our interests but for themselves. In this way wealth and power are merged.

Tribalism and democracy are incompatible. We can’t have both. If we wish to keep New Zealand as a liberal democratic nation then, as we derive our citizen rights from the nation-state, so we have a duty to ensure that the nation-state which awards those rights, remains democratic and able to do so.

Elizabeth Rata is a professor of education at the University of Auckland. This article is an edited version of a speech entitled ‘In Defence of Democracy’ given at the New Zealand ACT Party Annual Conference.

================

This is how people are deceived

 

This is how people are deceived  By Dustin Broadbery, 12 May 2022

 

CIA Director, William Casey is reputed to have said to Ronald Reagan ‘We’ll know our disinformation is complete when everything the American public believes is false.’

Fast forward thirty years, and there’s no piece of fiction the masses will not swallow.

From Woke to COVID to the war in Ukraine, people no longer make their own ideological pilgrimages to the truth – the truth is served oven-ready by their political betters.

Nowadays, there’s little distinction between the two hemispheres: reality and illusion. It’s not so much that people have been robbed of their ability to decipher between these two, it’s that facts have been reoriented into fiction and fiction into facts. It’s a degradation of epistemology so momentous, that people don’t even know that they don’t know that they don’t know what’s happening.   To quote one former anarchist.

In the grand scheme of things, humanity has perjured themselves and life as we know it has morphed into a sort of science-fiction, soap-opera with few common ancestors to reality. Even right-thinking folks require the equivalent of a cerebral chainsaw to hollow out the slew of implausible narratives into something remotely resembling reality. It goes beyond fiction to predictive programming. They’re not just deceiving you; they’re showing you that they’re deceiving you.

What is neither here nor there to the deceived is the track record of their deceivers. Before the ink dried on the newsprint proclaiming the crisis in-waiting, the falsifications of COVID were buried under the falsehoods of war, Zelensky’s standing ovation at Westminster knocked Pfizer data’s release off the rostrum and those formerly joined at the hip to COVID got hitched to their Ukrainian brides.

This entire fiasco holds water because what people think they know for sure, that just ain’t so, is a consensus. A preponderance of fabrications, falsehoods and false prophets governs the spiritual milieu. People worship the prosaic and glorify artifice. Our moral choices are guided by platitude and not virtue, anecdote and not evidence.

To complicate matters, what was formerly held sacred has become profane and what was formerly profane has become sacred, to quote Robert Sepehr. 

There’s a war raging, alright, but you will find its theatre of operations inside the human psyche. It is a war on consciousness, an atrophy of culture and its stark consequences is the spiritual malaise of humanity.

Freemasons, for one, understood that information was power. Concealing beyond the prying eyes of the lower orders, the esoteric mysteries of the universe.

Then as now, it’s not enough for these people to hold a monopoly over knowledge, they must deprive everyone else of its illumination, or go one further and spread ignorance. It goes beyond censoring counterarguments to fomenting falsehoods, It’s not so much societal breakdown but self-immolation. People are being misinformed and stupefied and sent out as agents of disinformation to further deconstruct what’s left of an already deconstructed reality.

To make matters worse, precisely zero lessons have been learned these past two years. People flounder from one crisis to the next. Walk aimlessly from quarantine camp to air-raid shelter into whichever direction their political higher-ups point them, to deride whoever is nominated as the scourge of society, de jour. The great national pastime is to gather at the pillories and hurl cabbages at anti-vaxxers, Russians, (insert your antihero: here).

THE INFOWAR

If all this sounds remarkably like an info-war, then it probably is.

The battle for hearts and minds has moved online. Our divine spark of life is being overhauled to data. Something of divine proportions compels us to the internet, to data – our daily bread (and circuses), our digital avatars living richer, more meaningful lives than their truant owners.

What ceases to be worth the candle is the epistemology of our data.

It doesn’t matter which side of the fence you’re on – a card carrying member of the great awakening or useful idiot on the lockdown left, you’re still part of the same problem. You have been taken hostage by a series of narratives laid on with a shovel by the predator class and designed for the sole purpose of keeping you rapt and not informed, sedentary and not spirited. In the world of algorithms everyone is created equal, and data is just data, there’s no morality to it.

These events play out as a nail-biting whodunnit, but the reality is, they’re not supposed to be solved. There’s no answers nor restitution, it’s your awareness and not your belief systems which is being harvested.

What these hellhounds want is for you to pick your side, choose your battle, but make sure your battlelines are social media, and that you’re not throwing Molotov cocktails at the Tower of Babel.

Everyone has a dog in the fight. Particularly, those baying for the blood of the unvaccinated or calling for violence against Russians, who do so, according to Voltaire, because those who can make you believe in absurdities, can make you commit atrocities.

It’s quite simple really. If a person’s psyche is under siege and they don’t designate an enemy to scapegoat, they might get wise to who’s really attacking them, and that simply wouldn’t do.

In this theatre of the absurd people acclimatise to fiction because it’s easier than confronting uncomfortable truths. But under these fertile conditions any version of reality, no matter how precarious, will wash. That’s where the Great Reset enters the fray.

Once you desecrate a person’s moralistic and cultural maps of the world, their place in it becomes increasingly untenable. People lose touch with reality and what it means to be human. The ensuing crisis of identity leaves them susceptible to hostile takeover. Amongst other things that could possibly go wrong is the eventual microchipping of the population and brain machine interfaces.

PREDICTIVE PROGRAMMING

But there are even stranger things brewing. Predictive Programming is the theory of a hidden hand operating the levers of reality. A sort of reality adjustment bureau obfuscating real world events through film, literature, and media manipulation. The fundamental principle here is psychological conditioning that reduces people’s resistance to the acceptance of planned future events and encourages them to swap concrete reality structures for static constructs, until eventually, our inherited world view is replaced by mythos and archetypes.

That we are living through the objectification of the predator class is no moot point. That’s their messiah complex imprinted onto the collective consciousness and projected back onto the real world. By their own volition, the masses are breathing life into these grotesqueries and blotting the social fabric.

REVELATION OF THE METHOD

But it runs even deeper than predictive programming. Some call this Revelation of the Method.

According to Michael Hoffman: first they suppress the counterargument, and when the most opportune time arrives, they reveal aspects of what’s really happened, but in a limited hangout sort of way.

We were told the vaccines were harmless, until Pfizer debased their own safety claims, but not before the entire world had been vaccinated. Lockdown Apologists across the corporate media are now almost unanimous that lockdowns do more harm than good. This is no arbitrary volte-face, but rather a carefully planned sequence of disclosures when the time is ripe.

Michael Hoffman suggests that the ruling elite are giving notice of their supremacy. Declaring themselves virtuoso criminal masterminds, above the law and beyond reproach. But most of all, they are telling you, in no uncertain terms, that you are without recourse, these events are beyond your control, as is your own destiny for that matter. Eventually a sense of apathy and abulia engulfs humanity, demoralising us to the point of conceding defeat to a system we are powerless to change.

Not that you would ever have restitution. The house is not designed to do its own housekeeping. Buried deep within their rule of law, is a hidden constitution that states: nothing happens without your consent. In this version of contract law, once the truth is hidden in plain sight, you have agreed to it. There exists someplace an unsigned contract with your unsworn oath on it.

In the end, we’re all victims of the same masterstroke, whether keyboard evangelist or state-apologist, everyone is being royally screwed, and it’s not so much that they’re laughing at you, it’s that you’re laughing at yourself.

Dustin Broadbery is a writer and researcher from London trying to make sense of the New Normal these past two years. Particularly the ethical and legal issues around lockdowns and mandates, the history and roadmap to today’s biosecurity state, and the key players and institutions involved in the globalised takeover of our commons. You can find his work at www.thecogent.org, or follow him on twitter @TheCogent1

================

The Codex, Fluoride, Auschwitz, Monsanto Connection

The Codex^J Fluoride^J Auschwitz^J Monsanto Connection  By Barbara H. Peterson, August 2010. Article added 27 April 2022

Editor’s note: click on link above to view PDF copy that includes several graphics.  Note too the following article ‘Were we lied to about water fluoridation?’

Farm Wars

What do Codex Alimentarius with its official food standards, the fluoridation of our water and food supply, genocide at the Auschwitz concentration camp, and Monsanto, the company responsible for genetically altering the world’s food supply all have in common? Is there a connection that binds these seemingly diverse organizations together? Yes, there is. In fact, they are so inextricably bound that separating them is all but impossible.

Let’s start at the beginning with Auschwitz and connect the dots.

Auschwitz

Auschwitz was known for its “network of concentration and extermination camps built and operated in Polish areas annexed by Nazi Germany during the Second World War. It was the largest of the German concentration camps (Wikipedia).”

Auschwitz also had a factory called I. G. Auschwitz:

I.G. Auschwitz, founded in Kattowitz on April 7, 1941, was intended to be the largest chemical factory in Eastern Europe and at the same time a building block in the process of “Germanizing” the region. According to the plan, the production facilities were to supply the Eastern European market with plastics in peacetime, following their use for wartime production. In addition to German skilled workers and forced laborers from all over Europe, increasing numbers of prisoners from the Auschwitz concentration camp were deployed at the gigantic construction site in Auschwitz. In 1942 I.G. Auschwitz built its own corporate concentration camp, Buna/Monowitz. (Wollheim Memorial)

In fact, I.G. Auschwitz was designed from the very first to be an extremely complex chemical factory, producing, besides Buna, high-performance fuels (including aviation gasoline and fuel oil for naval use), various plastics, synthetic fibers, stabilizing agents, resins, methanol, nitrogen, and pharmaceuticals. (Wollheim Memorial)

I.G. Farben, which consisted of BASF, Bayer, and Hoechst (now known as Aventis), owned I.G. Auschwitz. A man called Frits ter Meer was on the I.G. Farben Managing Board from its foundation, and was responsible for I.G. Auschwitz. I. G. Auschwitz had a cozy relationship with the Auschwitz concentration camp, in that it used forced labor of the prisoners to work in its factory, and also used them as guinea pigs.

Under Frits ter Meers direction, I.G. Farben used a fluoridation program to control the population at the Auschwitz concentration camp in any given area through the mass medication of drinking water supplies.“By this method they could control the population in whole areas, reduce population by water medication (fluoride) that would produce sterility in women, and so on.” (ShopUSI)

Frits ter Meer was ultimately convicted at Nuremberg of plundering and slavery, but his sentence was commuted due to friends in high places. Fritz then went on to become one of the architects of the Codex Alimentarius Commission in 1962/3.

Codex Alimentarius

Codex was created by the Food and Agriculture Organization (FAO) and World Health Organization (WHO) of the United Nations (UN). According to the Codex official site:

The Codex Alimentarius Commission was created in 1963 by FAO and WHO to develop food standards, guidelines and related texts such as codes of practice under the Joint FAO/WHO Food Standards Programme. The main purposes of this Programme are protecting health of the consumers and ensuring fair trade practices in the food trade, and promoting coordination of all food standards work undertaken by international governmental and non-governmental organizations.(Codex Alimentarius)

The Codex Alimentarius Commission implements the Joint FAO/WHO Food Standards Program, the purpose of which is to protect the health of consumers and to ensure fair practices in the food trade.(Organic Consumers)

In other words, under the auspices of “protecting the public health and ensuring fair trade practices,” the Joint FAO/WHO Food Standards Program is implemented by the Codex Alimentarius Commission. The FAO and WHO set the standards, and the Codex Commission implements them. All members of the UN are obligated to comply with these standards.

So, what does Codex have to do with fluoridation, and just how could a mass fluoridation program be implemented without our knowledge or consent under Codex guidelines?

The answer is – WHO has already determined that fluoride should be included in our food and water supply because it is “necessary for public health:”

Many countries that are currently undergoing nutrition transition do not have adequate exposure to fluoride. There should be promotion of adequate fluoride exposure via appropriate vehicles, for example, affordable toothpaste, water, salt and milk. It is the responsibility of national health authorities to ensure implementation of feasible fluoride programmes for their country. Research into the outcome of alternative community fluoride programmes should be encouraged.

Here is the reference document:

Diet, Nutrition, and the Prevention of Chronic Diseases PDF

A 1994 World Health Organization expert committee suggested a level of fluoride from 0.5 to 1.0 mg/L (milligrams per litre) (Wikipedia)

Currently, compliance with WHO’s directive of the fluoridation of water, salt, and milk varies from country to country. Water fluoridation has been introduced by varying degrees in many countries. View each country HERE. An interesting fact to note is that drinking water is not fluoridated in any part of Germany. Is it mere coincidence that one of the founders of the Codex Alimentarius Commission just happened to be in charge of the fluoridation program at Auschwitz, and that Germany is somehow exempt from fluoridation? Or, maybe they know something that we don’t.

The Public Fluoridation Deception

Most are aware of the water fluoridation program that has been foisted upon us as a “treatment for dental disease” and cure for cavities. This is proven propaganda and has been disputed in the EPA’s own documents, which list fluoride as a contaminant, as well as in countless other professional publications. Yet, the mass water fluoridation program continues, causing food and liquids that use this contaminated water to contain fluoride also.

According to our own CDC Department of Health and Human Services:

fluoridated water is diffused throughout the population as residents of non-fluoridated communities increasingly consume foods and beverages processed and bottled in fluoridated communities. Thus, many individuals residing in non-fluoridated communities have benefited from fluoridation policies.”

This is called “Building Capacity to Fluoridate.” (CDC)

So you see, our country is complying with the UN/WHO/FAO/Codex fluoridation policy and we the people don’t even know it. Just like the prisoners at Auschwitz most likely didn’t know that they were being subjected to a fluoridation program and being poisoned with their water until it was too late. If food is produced using fluoridated water, then it contains fluoride. All you have to do is contaminate the water, and the food issue takes care of itself.

The following chart shows just how “in compliance” the U.S. is: Percent of U.S. Population Receiving Fluoride

And if some of you are still wondering if we are really following Codex mandates, wonder no more. Many do not know this, but ‘Codex’ already consists of around 300 official food standards, some of which have been in ‘global effect’ since as long ago as 1966 (Rath Foundation). So it shouldn’t come as a big surprise to find out that fluoridation is just another facet of this program.

The Monsanto Connection

Monsanto, Cargill, BASF, Bayer, and Aventis (or I.G. Farben) are all in partnership under the banner of Crop Science. They are partnered in various ways, such as:

BASF Plant Science and Monsanto to expand their collaboration in maximizing crop yield.

Monsanto, Bayer team up on herbicide tolerance

Mergers and acquisitions

Monsanto and Cargill team up

Monsanto and Cargill are in a 50/50 joint venture partnership. Monsanto makes the seeds, which make the crops, and Cargill makes the fertilizer. Cargill also just happens to be responsible for 70-75% of the hazardous waste hydrofluosilicic acid used in fluoridation programs. (Fluoride Action Network)

The U.S. government considers the basic chemical composition of hydrofluosilicic acid, a toxic waste, and fluoride to be the same when dumped in the water supply:

Due to the obviously intriguing aspect of this “waste disposal policy”, there has naturally been quite a bit of curiosity concerning the safety of this public health practice. Apparently, however, there are no government safety studies currently available on fluosilicic acid. This is because the government is basing their fluoridation policy on the assumption that there is no chemical difference, after dilution into the water supply, between pharmaceutical grade sodium fluoride and the industrial grade hydrofluosilicic acid.(Fluoride Action Network)

Oregon, which is very low on the compliance list with only 19.4% fluoridation, is attempting to increase that level considerably. In 2007,HB 3099, the Oregon water fluoridation bill, would have required community water suppliers serving more than 10,000 people to “optimally fluoridate.” Fortunately, it was not passed. If passed, it would have increased the fluoride levels in Oregon to 68%. Good for Cargill and Monsanto, bad for us.

Reasons Not to Fluoridate

The following partial list is compiled from Fluoride Alert:

Fluoride is a cumulative poison.

Chromosome damage

Kidneys

Brain

Alzheimers

Rats dosed prenatally demonstrated hyperactive behavior. Those dosed postnatally demonstrated hypoactivity (i.e. under activity or “couch potato” syndrome)

Lowering of IQ

Early onset of puberty

Affects thyroid gland

Arthritis

Cancer

Infertility

Harms bones – brittle

It is up to us to stand up and say no to mass water fluoridation. If someone wants fluoride, then let him/her take it. I have no problem with that. But to forcibly administer this poison to an unsuspecting and unwilling populace without prior knowledge or consent is criminal. We are not Auschwitz prisoners….yet.

© 2010 Barbara H. Peterson

======================

Were We Lied To About Water Fluoridation?

Were We Lied To About Water Fluoridation  By The Daily Skeptic, 10 April 2022

The addition of a fluoride, such as hexafluorosilicic acid or disodium hexafluorosilicate, to public water supplies has been recommended in a joint statement by the four Chief Medical Officers of the U.K. The Government’s Health and Care Bill, which has reached its final stages in Parliament, includes a small section to facilitate water fluoridation, which is now expected to be spread throughout the U.K.

Although water is already fluoridated in a few parts of the U.K. (mainly Birmingham), for nearly forty years no new schemes have been implemented since local opposition has managed to defeat them all. The Government is now determined to impose its wishes.

A recent press release said that “higher levels of fluoride are associated with improved dental health outcomes”, and that the “Health and Care Bill will cut bureaucracy and make it simpler to expand water fluoridation schemes”. The Bill’s explanatory notes state: “Research shows that water fluoridation is an effective public health intervention to improve oral health for both children and adults and reduces oral health inequalities.”

For about 70 years it has been claimed that fluoridation reduces dental decay, and that it is safe. Although there is abundant evidence showing that in fact it is neither effective nor safe, the proponents of fluoridation have long had the advantage of far greater funding than that available to sceptics.

Trials of fluoridation started in 1945 in the U.S. and Canada but, before any had been completed, and without any comprehensive health studies, fluoridation was endorsed as safe and effective by the U.S. Public Health Service. The American Dental and Medical Associations soon added their approval, as later did their equivalents in the U.K.

The original trials were studied by Dr. Philip Sutton in Australia who graduated with honours in Dental Science. Asked to examine them, he found they were of low quality, full of errors and omissions.

In Austria, Rudolf Ziegelbecker also studied the original fluoridation trials and found they did not show what had been claimed. Professor Erich Naumann, Director of the German Federal Health Office, said of him:

“Your results have been accepted everywhere in Germany with the greatest interest and have increased the grave doubts against drinking water fluoridation.” Prof. Naumann added: “It is regrettable that the existing data on water fluoridation had not been examined earlier using mathematical-statistical methods. Otherwise the myth of drinking water fluoridation would have already dissolved into air long ago.”

In the U.K., pilot schemes started in the mid-1950s in four areas, all of which sooner or later abandoned the practice: Andover (1955-58), part of Anglesey (1955-92), Kilmarnock (1956-62), and Watford (1956-89). In 1957, Dr. Geoffrey Dobbs wrote in New Scientist that they “are now officially described as demonstrations of the benefits of fluoridation, not experiments, so the results are a foregone conclusion” and their purpose quite openly “promotional”.

He added that the studies would gain enormously in value if those responsible were willing to submit them to impartial scientific assessment.

When the UK pilot studies started, it was officially stated that they should include “full medical and dental examinations at all ages”, but no medical examinations were done, and neither short-term nor long-term possible harms were explored. This lack of concern continues, with a general failure in fluoridated countries to monitor fluoride exposure or side effects.

In 2000, a major report by the Centre for Reviews and Dissemination at the University of York concluded that, despite many studies over 50 years, “We were unable to discover any reliable good-quality evidence in the fluoridation literature world-wide”. Even among the 26 better studies on fluoridation and tooth decay, not one was evaluated as “high quality, with bias unlikely”.

In 2015, a Cochrane review added: “There is very little contemporary evidence, meeting the review’s inclusion criteria, that has evaluated the effectiveness of water fluoridation for the prevention of caries.”

When Israel ended fluoridation in 2014-15, partly because of health concerns, its Ministry of Health pointed out that WHO data indicated no significant difference in the level of tooth decay between countries that fluoridate and those that do not fluoridate.

A trial in Hastings in New Zealand was apparently so successful that it was widely reported as a classic case of the benefit of fluoridation, with tooth decay reduced by at least half.

However, when New Zealand passed freedom-of-information legislation, two university researchers were able to access the original records, which revealed that the published results were fraudulent.

One of those involved in running the trials was asked for an explanation but he did not even try to justify the published results.

Not only is there a great absence of good quality evidence that fluoridation significantly reduces tooth decay, there has, especially in recent years, been growing evidence that it is harmful.

In 2006, a major report by the U.S. National Research Council said that fluoride exposure is plausibly associated with neurotoxicity, gastrointestinal problems, endocrine problems and other ailments. It was also unable to rule out an increased risk of cancer and of Down’s syndrome in children.

In 2017, a team of experts in Chile, supported by the Medical College of Chile, concluded that fluoridation is ineffectual and harmful.

Fluoride occurs naturally in a few water supplies, but so does arsenic. A recent study from Sweden shows an increased prevalence of hip fracture in post-menopausal women associated with long-term exposure to natural fluoride at levels in water in the same range as used in some parts of the U.K. for artificial fluoridation.

About half a century passed before the declassification of hundreds of U.S. Government documents provided clues to the real reason for fluoridation. Much meticulous research by an award-winning investigative journalist, Christopher Bryson, resulted in his thoroughly documented book, The Fluoride Deception, showing beyond doubt the extensive fraud involved.

Bryson’s research revealed the strong connection between fluoridation and the Manhattan Project to create the first atomic bombs. Huge amounts of fluorine were used to extract the isotope of uranium needed. Workers suffered hundreds of chemical injuries, mostly from the gas uranium hexafluoride.

In 1943 and 1944, farmers reported workers made ill, crops blighted and livestock injured, with some cows so crippled they could not stand. When the war was over, farmers in New Jersey sued DuPont and the Manhattan Project for fluoride damage. In response the Government mobilised officials and scientists to defeat the farmers.

In 1946, the United States had begun full-scale production of atomic bombs, and the New Jersey farmers’ legal action was seen as a threat, because of the potential for enormous damages and a public relations problem, with more trouble likely if they won. The farmers’ legal action was blocked by the Government’s refusal to reveal how much hydrogen fluoride DuPont had vented into the atmosphere.

Dr. Harold Hodge defended the nuclear programme against the legal threat from farmers. He had the idea of calming the public’s fears by talking about the usefulness of fluorine in tooth health. In January 1944, a secret conference on fluoride metabolism took place in New York. Organised by President Roosevelt’s science adviser, James Conant, documents from it are among the first that connect the atomic bomb programme to water fluoridation and to the Public Health Service.

Manhattan Project scientists were ordered to help the contractors. They also played a prominent role in the fluoridation of the public water supply in Newburgh, New York, an experiment that began in May 1945. In 1947 the U.S. Atomic Energy Commission took over from the Manhattan Project.

Dr. Harold Hodge, the Project’s senior wartime toxicologist, became the leading promoter of fluoridation. He announced it was so safe that it would take a massive dose of fluoride to cause harm. (Some 25 years later, in 1979, he quietly admitted in an obscure paper that he had been wrong.)

A Committee to Protect Our Children’s Teeth was formed, with powerful links to U.S. military-industrial interests and their determined effort to escape liability for fluoride pollution. The aim was to transform the public image of fluoride from that of a dangerous pollutant to a beneficial prophylactic medicine.

This aim was achieved with the help of Edward Bernays, an expert in the use of psychological techniques to achieve “manipulation of the organised habits and opinions of the masses” and “the engineering of consent”. Bernays advised the avoidance of debate: fluoridation was to be presented as indisputably beneficial; only the ignorant could object to it.

Reviews of Bryson’s book included one in the scientific journal Nature, noting that he “raises the stakes by reporting a great deal of relevant and often alarming research”, and describing the book as “thought-provoking and worthwhile”.

Publishers Weekly wrote: “Bryson marshals an impressive amount of research to demonstrate fluoride’s harmfulness, the ties between leading fluoride researchers and the corporations who funded and benefited from their research, and what he says is the duplicity with which fluoridation was sold to the people.”

Chemical & Engineering News stated: “We are left with compelling evidence that powerful interests with high financial stakes have colluded to prematurely close honest discussion and investigation into fluoride toxicity.”

Bryson found that, while the American Dental Association had previously opposed fluoridation, it changed its tune after receiving a large donation from an industrialist with a stake in the commercial use of fluoride.

A study of workers at a chemical company in Cleveland was used to promote the idea that fluoride reduces tooth decay. It said workers exposed to fluoride had fewer cavities than those not exposed to it. The report helped to shift public opinion. The secret version of the report, discovered decades later, stated that most of the men had few or no teeth, and that corrosion affected such teeth as they had.

As early as 1951 a confidential gathering of State Dental Directors in the U.S. was advised by Dr. Frank Bull, “We have told the public it works, so we can’t go back on that”. If it was difficult then, it must be very difficult now for prestigious dental and medical organisations to admit that the assurances of effectiveness and safety they have given for so long were at best mistaken and at worst fraudulent.

Among the various methods used to suppress adverse evidence and dissent have been mocking, silencing, sacking and denigration of scientists who threatened the official story. One of the earliest to suffer was Dr. George Waldbott, an eminent U.S. physician who was viciously maligned after reporting fifty cases of people made ill by fluoridated water, as established by double-blind tests.

Dr. John Colquhoun, a former supporter of fluoridation in New Zealand, was Chief Dental Officer for Auckland when he discovered and reported that fluoride was damaging children’s teeth. This was not what the authorities wanted to hear and he was sacked.

Dr. William Marcus was Senior Science Adviser in the Office of Drinking Water in the Environmental Protection Agency. He was sacked when he warned that research by the famous Battelle Institute showed that some forms of cancer could be caused by fluoride.

Dr. Phyllis Mullenix was the Chief Toxicologist at the prestigious Forsyth Dental Center, who discovered that fluoride is a neurotoxin that can adversely affect the brain. Following publication of her peer-reviewed study, U.S. Government pressure resulted in her being sacked and the institute’s toxicology department closed.

Often those whose research gave results unfavourable to fluoridation found that medical journals were hostile. Dr. Albert Schatz was a co-discoverer of streptomycin, the first effective drug for tuberculosis. When he found that infants in Chile had much higher death rates in fluoridated areas he sent a report in 1965 to the editor of the Journal of the American Dental Association who returned it unread.

The reluctance of many medical journals to publish adverse findings on fluoride resulted in the foundation of the International Society for Fluoride Research and its quarterly journal Fluoride. However, MEDLINE, the bibliographic database published by the U.S. National Library of Medicine, declined to index the peer-reviewed journal’s contents.

Dr. Richard Foulkes chaired a committee that recommended fluoridation in British Columbia. Later, a friend urged him to do his own research, after which he changed his mind and said: “My initial belief was based on information given to me by those in authority rather than on the basis of my examination of the facts.”

Dr. Hardy Limeback was Head of Preventive Dentistry at the University of Toronto when in 1999 he apologised for having promoted fluoridation. “I did not realise the toxicity of fluoride,” he said. “I had taken the word of the public health dentists, the public health physicians, the USPHS, the USCDC, the ADA, the CDA that fluoride was safe and effective without actually investigating it myself”.

It used to be claimed that fluoride works on the teeth from within and therefore that pregnant mothers should take fluoride for the sake of unborn children’s teeth. Now it is said that fluoride’s main effect is from the outside (topical, not systemic). Therefore, there is no need to imbibe it.

Water fluoridation is a blunderbuss that hits far more than the intended target. About a third to a half of fluoride that is ingested remains in the body where it accumulates, not only in the teeth and bones but also in the kidneyspineal gland and the cardiovascular system. Kidney patients are particularly at risk from fluoridation.

The dose of fluoride a person gets in water is haphazard since people consume widely differing amounts. Bottle-fed babies get very much more fluoride than breast-fed ones, and the American Dental Association conceded in 2006, with little publicity, that “using water that has no or low levels of fluoride” should be considered when preparing formula milk for infants. However, neither an ordinary water filter nor boiling can remove fluoride.

Recent research also finds that fluoride damages children’s brains. For example, studies show a loss of IQ and increased symptoms of ADHD in offspring when pregnant women are exposed to fluoride at doses commonly experienced in fluoridated communities in Canada.

Leading scientists concerned about fluoride’s toxicity, and willing to speak out, include Dr. Philippe Grandjean (Harvard University: “Fluoride is causing a greater overall loss of IQ points today than lead, arsenic or mercury”); Dr. Kathleen Thiessen (“The principal hazard at issue from exposure to fluoridation chemicals is IQ loss”); Professor David Bellinger (Harvard Medical School: “It’s actually very similar to the effect size that’s seen with childhood exposure to lead”); Professor Bruce Lanphear (“Fluoride exposure during early brain development diminishes the intellectual abilities in young children”); and Dr. Howard Hu (“Fluoride is a developmental neurotoxicant at levels of exposure seen in the general population in water-fluoridated communities”).

No less important is the fact that fluoridation is treatment without consent. People without the resources needed to obtain alternative supplies of water for drinking and cooking are chemically treated, in effect compulsorily.

See more here: dailysceptic.org

======================

NZ Prime Minister leading NZ to extreme socialism

NZ Prime Minister leading NZ to extreme socialism  By Muriel Newman, NZCPR, 23 December 2021

Without a doubt, 2021 has been a very disturbing year as we faced the reality that our Prime Minister is leading New Zealand down a pathway of extreme socialism.

Many people are now realising that Jacinda Ardern is not the benevolent caring soul she portrays, but instead is heavily influenced by the extreme socialist thinking of the United Nations and the World Economic Forum.

We now know she is introducing the UN’s Agenda 2030 into our everyday lives – not because she told us she was doing so, but because she revealed her plans to an elite audience overseas.

Particularly troubling is her implementation of He Puapua, the agenda of her Maori caucus for iwi control of the country. It was not disclosed during the 2020 general election campaign and Jacinda Ardern has no mandate to impose this radical plan to replace one of the world’s oldest democracies with tribal rule by 2040. Exposing He Puapua has been a turning point and we are pleased the NZCPR was able to play such a pivotal role.

Under the guise of implementing the UN’s Declaration of the Rights of Indigenous Peoples, the Prime Minister is orchestrating a massive transfer of power – an effective takeover of New Zealand’s democratic system of government by iwi leaders. Using the façade of “co-governance” a powerful tribal minority is being given 50 percent control and veto rights over all other New Zealanders. The ultimate goal is to establish an elite tribal aristocracy, that bestows privilege on those of Maori descent, relegating everyone else to second-class status.

While the PM deliberately kept He Puapua hidden throughout 2020, once she realised she had the power to govern alone, the agenda for Maori supremacy is being fast-tracked.

Nothing is safe. Our language is being corrupted with Maori words and phrases replacing English in communications, place names, and even the name of the country. History is being re-written and school children are being indoctrinated with a Maori World View. Tribal custom (tikanga) is replacing the common law in the legal system. Our democratic right to oppose Maori wards on councils has been abolished opening the door for the tribal control of local government. Under the Pae Ora Bill, our community-based District Health Boards are being replaced with new centralised agencies controlled by Maori which will prioritise race over clinical need. And now under Three Waters, billions of dollars of ratepayer funded council infrastructure and assets will be confiscated and transferred to agencies controlled by the tribal elite.

Iwi are attempting to take over policing – through roadblocks and other public access bans, they want control of child protection services to prevent abused Maori children from being cared for by non-Maori families, they want ownership of the Conservation Estate, and influence over Resource Management Act decision-making.

The rationale for this extraordinary takeover is that Maori are Treaty partners with the Crown and so should have 50 percent of control of the country. But even though it is constitutionally impossible for the Crown to enter into a partnership with her subjects, the PM not only continues to promote this fiction as the truth, but she has prevented the media from investigating it, by making the promotion of the Treaty ‘partnership’ a condition of access to her $55 million Public Interest Journalism Fund.

This fund is a shocking pay-off that has turned the mainstream media into a mouthpiece for government propaganda – a situation that is completely unacceptable in a modern democracy which relies on the media to hold the government to account.

Jacinda Ardern is proud of ‘capturing’ the media, as she explained to an international audience of world leaders at a virtual Summit for Democracy hosted by US President Joe Biden on December 10: “In New Zealand we saw that Covid-19 was affecting traditional media models, already under pressure. We’ve also seen the spread of misinformation on Covid-19 particularly through social media. We had to act, so we made it a priority to establish a Public Interest Journalism Fund to help our media to continue to produce stories that keep New Zealanders informed. Underpinning this action is a recognition that a vibrant and trusted media sector is a vital component of a healthy democracy especially during times of crisis.”

The PM does not seem to realise that through her actions, she has almost single-handedly destroyed the credibility of New Zealand’s once great Fourth Estate, by offering government handouts that require the promotion of propaganda as a condition of acceptance. In some countries, what is going on here would be regarded as corruption and those orchestrating it would be indicted.

In fact, never in the history of New Zealand have once-popular media outlets become so despised by the public as they are now.

The key themes of President Biden’s summit included strengthening democracy against authoritarianism, and promoting respect for human rights.

Anyone listening to Jacinda Ardern telling world leaders that “democracy underpinned by human rights is essential to our identity as a nation”, would imagine her to be a true champion of democracy and human rights.

But her actions tell a different story.

The Prime Minister is attempting to replace democracy with authoritarian tribal rule, as she delivers control of our country to the unelected and unaccountable representatives of multi-million dollar private sector iwi corporations, one co-governance deal at a time.

Not only that, but her management of Covid-19 has crushed human rights in an unprecedented manner never experienced in New Zealand before. Her harsh lockdowns have cost lives and livelihoods, and her vaccine mandates – coming on top of an election promise not to make vaccination compulsory – has had a devastating impact on families and businesses, and all for no good reason, since testing and the use of protective equipment could have been required instead.

That Jacinda Ardern can ignore the devastation caused by her decisions, and gloat on the world stage about how great her achievements are, demonstrates the essential truth of the saying, “Power corrupts, and absolute power corrupts absolutely”.

Fortunately, New Zealanders collectively are fighting back, and thank you so much to all of our NZCPR readers for your wonderful efforts in joining in the campaigns and helping to spread the message. In just one year support for Labour has fallen in the polls from 50 percent on election night to around 36 percent. Opposition parties are now within striking distance of gaining a majority, and it seems highly unlikely that Labour would ever again be able to govern alone.

Looking ahead, there is a lot of water to go under the bridge before the next election, and we will face massive challenges as Labour presses ahead with its extremist agenda and makes the most of having majority rule.

One such challenge will be an implementation plan for He Puapua, developed by iwi leaders at the behest of the Government.

To achieve Maori sovereignty by 2040, He Puapua not only requires the recognition of Treaty partnerships, but two other major constitutional changes are also needed: the first is to introduce ‘tikanga’ into our law, and the second is to include the Treaty of Waitangi in a new written constitution.

Through one of our campaigns, the NZCPR is challenging a High Court ruling that tikanga trumps the common law to the Court of Appeal, and while the case relates to the coastal claims process, it has wider implications for the Rule of Law.

Furthermore, in 2011, the NZCPR led a successful campaign against the Maori Party’s attempt to introduce a new Treaty-based constitution for New Zealand. It was a battle that we could not afford to lose, since such a new written constitution would put Judges in charge of law-making and entrench and prioritise Maori rights above all others, with any challenge to that status deemed unconstitutional and ruled out.

Since a working group of iwi leaders has already developed a draft Treaty-based constitution for New Zealand, it is possible that they may try to use He Puapua and Labour’s majority rule to force it through. If that is indeed their plan for next year, then another major campaign will be needed!

It is in this climate of increasing oppression, that the NZCPR enters our sixteenth year of operation, driven by a philosophy so eloquently expressed by former US President Thomas Jefferson: “An informed citizenry is at the heart of a dynamic democracy”.

As you know, to retain our independence, the NZCPR is funded solely by donations from readers and Christmas is a make-or-break time for us – it’s when we find out whether our readers will back us for another year so we can continue producing our weekly newsletters and running our important campaigns. With no other sources of funding, our future is in your hands.

======================

Another example of the Western system of justice: The execution of Julian Assange

Another example of the Western system of justice. The execution of Julian Assange  By Chris Hedges, RT, 14 December 2021

 Chris Hedges is a Pulitzer Prize-winning journalist and host of RT’s On Contact, a weekly interview series on US foreign policy, economic realities and civil liberties in American society. He’s the author of 14 books, including several New York Times best-sellers.

He exposed empire as a criminal enterprise. He documented its lies, its callous disregard for human life, its rampant corruption, and its innumerable war crimes. But, as history shows, empires kill those who inflict deep wounds.

Let us name Julian Assange’s executioners. Joe Biden. Boris Johnson. Scott Morrison. Theresa May. Lenin Moreno. Donald Trump. Barack Obama. Mike Pompeo. Hillary Clinton. Lord Chief Justice Ian Burnett and Lord Justice Timothy Victor Holroyde. Crown Prosecutors James Lewis QC, Clair Dobbin QC and Joel Smith. District Judge Vanessa Baraitser. Assistant US Attorney in the Eastern District of Virginia Gordon Kromberg. William Burns, the director of the CIA. Ken McCallum, the director general of MI5.

Let us acknowledge that the goal of these executioners, who discussed kidnapping and assassinating Assange, has always been his annihilation. That Assange, who is in precarious physical and psychological health, and who suffered a stroke during court video proceedings on October 27, has been condemned to death should not come as a surprise. The 10 years he has been detained, seven in the Ecuadorian Embassy in London and nearly three in the high-security Belmarsh prison, were accompanied by a lack of sunlight and exercise, and unrelenting threats, pressure, anxiety and stress. “His eyes were out of sync, his right eyelid would not close, his memory was blurry,” his fiancée Stella Moris said of the stroke.

His steady deterioration has led to hallucinations and depression. He takes antidepressant medication and the antipsychotic quetiapine. He has been observed pacing his cell until he collapses, punching himself in the face and banging his head against the wall. He has spent weeks in the medical wing of Belmarsh. Prison authorities found “half of a razor blade” hidden under his socks. He has repeatedly called the suicide hotline run by the Samaritans because he has thought about killing himself “hundreds of times a day.” The executioners have not yet completed their grim work.

Toussaint L’Ouverture, who led the Haitian independence movement, the only successful slave revolt in human history, was physically destroyed in the same manner, locked by the French in an unheated and cramped prison cell and left to die of exhaustion, malnutrition, apoplexy, pneumonia and probably tuberculosis.

Assange committed empire’s greatest sin. He exposed it as a criminal enterprise. He documented its lies, callous disregard for human life, rampant corruption and innumerable war crimes. Republican or Democrat. Conservative or Labour. Trump or Biden. It does not matter. The goons who oversee the empire sing from the same Satanic songbook. Empires always kill those who inflict deep and serious wounds.

Rome’s long persecution of the Carthaginian general Hannibal, forcing him in the end to commit suicide, and the razing of Carthage repeats itself in epic after epic. Crazy Horse. Patrice Lumumba. Malcolm X. Ernesto “Che” Guevara. Sukarno. Ngo Dinh Diem. Fred Hampton. Salvador Allende. If you cannot be bought off, if you will not be intimidated into silence, you will be killed.

The obsessive CIA attempts to assassinate Fidel Castro, which, because none succeeded, have a Keystone Cop incompetence to them, included contracting Sam Giancana, Al Capone’s successor in Chicago, along with Miami mobster Santo Trafficante Jr., to kill the Cuban leader, attempting to poison Castro’s cigars with a botulinum toxin, providing Castro with a tubercle bacilli-infected scuba-diving suit, booby-trapping a conch shell on the sea floor where he often dived, slipping botulism-toxin pills in one of his drinks, and using a pen outfitted with a hypodermic needle to poison him.

The current cabal of assassins hides behind a judicial burlesque overseen in London by portly judges in gowns and white horse-hair wigs mouthing legal Alice-in-Wonderland absurdities. It is a dark reprise of Gilbert and Sullivan’s ‘Mikado’, with the Lord High Executioner drawing up lists of people “who would not be missed.”

I watched the latest instalment of the Assange show trial via video link on Friday. I listened to the reading of the ruling granting the appeal by the United States to extradite him. Assange’s lawyers have two weeks to appeal to the Supreme Court, which they are expected to do. I am not optimistic.

Friday’s ruling was devoid of legal analysis. It fully accepted the conclusions of the lower-court judge about increased risk of suicide and inhumane prison conditions in the United States. But the ruling argued that US Diplomatic Note no. 74, given to the court on February 5, 2021, which offered “assurances” that Assange would be well treated, overrode the lower court’s conclusions. It was a remarkable legal non sequitur. The ruling would not have gotten a passing grade in a first-semester law school course. But legal erudition is not the point. The judicial railroading of Assange, which has eviscerated one legal norm after another, has, as Franz Kafka wrote, turned “lying into a universal principle.”

 Chris Hedges: The Assange case is the most important battle for press freedom in our time

The decision to grant the extradition was based on four “assurances” given to the court by the US government. The two-judge appellate panel ruled that the “assurances” “entirely answer the concerns which caused the judge [in the lower court] to discharge Mr. Assange.” The “assurances” promise that Assange will not be subject to special administrative measures (SAMs), which keep prisoners in extreme isolation and allow the government to monitor conversations with lawyers, overruling attorney-client privilege; can, if the government in his native Australia agrees, serve out his sentence there; will receive adequate clinical and psychological care; and, pre-trial and post trial, will not be held in the administrative maximum facility (ADX) in Florence, Colorado.

“There is no reason why this court should not accept the assurances as meaning what they say,” the judges wrote. “There is no basis for assuming that the USA has not given the assurances in good faith.” And, with these rhetorical feints, the judges signed Assange’s death warrant.

None of the “assurances” offered by Biden’s Department of Justice (DoJ) are worth the paper they’re written on. All come with escape clauses. None are legally binding. Should Assange do “something subsequent to the offering of these assurances that meets the tests for the imposition of SAMs or designation to ADX,” he will be subject to these coercive measures. And you can be assured that any incident, no matter how trivial, will be used, if Assange is extradited, as an excuse to toss him into the mouth of the dragon.

Should Australia, which has marched in lockstep with the US in the persecution of their citizen, not agree to his transfer, he will remain for the rest of his life in a US prison. But so what? If Australia does not request a transfer it “cannot be a cause for criticism of the USA, or a reason for regarding the assurances as inadequate to meet the judge’s concerns,” the ruling read. And even if that were not the case, it would take Assange 10 to 15 years to appeal his sentence all the way up to the Supreme Court, which would be more than enough time for the state assassins to finish him off.

I’m not sure how to respond to assurance number four, stating that Assange will not be held pre-trial in ADX Florence. No one is held pre-trial in ADX Florence. But it sounds reassuring, so I guess those in the Biden DoJ who crafted the diplomatic note added it.

ADX Florence is not the only supermax prison in the United States that might house Assange, of course. He could be shipped out to one of our other Guantanamo-like facilities. Daniel Hale, the former US Air Force intelligence analyst currently imprisoned for releasing top-secret documents that exposed widespread civilian casualties caused by US drone strikes, has been held since October in a communications management unit (CMU) at USP Marion, a federal penitentiary in Marion, Illinois. CMUs are highly restrictive cells that replicate the near-total isolation imposed by SAMs.

READ MORE: Assange suffered stroke in UK prison – fiancee

Ironically, the High Court ruling came as Secretary of State Antony Blinken announced at the virtual Summit for Democracy that the Biden administration would provide new funding to protect reporters targeted because of their work and support independent international journalism. Blinken’s “assurances” that the Biden administration would defend a free press, at the very moment the administration was demanding Assange’s extradition, is a glaring example of the rank hypocrisy and mendacity that makes the Democrats, as journalist Glen Ford used to say, “not the lesser evil, but the more effective evil.”

Assange is charged in the US under 17 counts of the Espionage Act and one count of hacking into a government computer. The charges could see him sentenced to 175 years in prison, even though he is not a US citizen and WikiLeaks is not a US-based publication. If he is found guilty, it will effectively criminalize the investigative work of all journalists and publishers, anywhere in the world and of any nationality, who possess classified documents to shine a light on the inner workings of power. This mortal assault on the press will have been orchestrated, we must not forget, by a Democratic administration. It will set a legal precedent that will delight other totalitarian regimes and autocrats who, emboldened by the United States, will gleefully seize journalists and publishers, no matter where they are located, who publish inconvenient truths.

There is no legal basis to hold Assange in prison. There is no legal basis to try him, a foreign national, under the Espionage Act. The CIA spied on him while he was in the Ecuadorian Embassy through a Spanish company, UC Global, contracted to provide embassy security. This spying included recording the privileged conversations between Assange and his lawyers. This fact alone invalidates any future trial.

After seven years in a cramped room without sunlight in the embassy, Assange has been held for nearly three years in a high-security prison in London. As UN Special Rapporteur on Torture Nils Melzer has testified, that’s so the state can continue the relentless abuse and torture it knows will lead to his psychological and physical disintegration. The persecution of Assange is designed to send a message to anyone who might consider exposing the corruption, dishonesty and depravity that defines the black heart of our global elites.

Dean Yates can tell you what US “assurances” are worth. He was the Reuters bureau chief in Baghdad on the morning of July 12, 2007 when his Iraqi colleagues Namir Noor-Eldeen and Saeed Chmagh were killed, along with nine other men, by US Army Apache gunships. Two children were seriously wounded. The US government spent three years lying to Yates, Reuters, and the rest of the world about the killings, although the army had video evidence of the massacre taken by the Apaches during the attack. The video, known as the Collateral Murder video, was leaked in 2010 by Chelsea Manning to Assange. For the first time, here was proof that those killed were not, as the army had repeatedly insisted, engaged in a firefight. It exposed the lies spun by the US that it could not locate the video footage and had never attempted to cover up the killings.

Watch my full interview with Yates here:

The Spanish courts can tell you what US “assurances” are worth. Spain was given an assurance that its citizen David Mendoza Herrarte, if extradited to the US to face trial on drug trafficking charges, could serve his prison sentence in his homeland. But, for six years, the DoJ repeatedly refused Spanish transfer requests, relenting only when the Spanish Supreme Court intervened.

The people in Afghanistan can tell you what US “assurances” are worth. US military, intelligence, and diplomatic officials knew for 18 years that the war in Afghanistan was a quagmire, yet they publicly stated, over and over, that the military intervention was making steady progress.

The people in Iraq can tell you what US “assurances” are worth. They were invaded and subject to a brutal war based on fabricated evidence about weapons of mass destruction.

The people of Iran can tell you what US “assurances” are worth. The United States, in the 1981 Algiers Accords, promised not to interfere in Iran’s internal affairs and then funded and backed the People’s Mujahedin Organization of Iran, a terrorist group based in Iraq and dedicated to overthrowing the Iranian regime.

The thousands of people tortured in US global black sites can tell you what US “assurances” are worth. CIA officers, when questioned by the Senate Select Committee on Intelligence about the widespread use of torture, secretly destroyed video tapes of interrogations while insisting there had been no “destruction of evidence.”

The numbers of treaties, agreements, deals, promises, and “assurances” made by the US around the globe and subsequently violated are too numerous to list. Hundreds of treaties signed with Native American tribes, alone, have been ignored by the US government.

Assange, at tremendous personal cost, warned us. He gave us the truth. Now the ruling class is crucifying him for this truth. And with his crucifixion, the dim lights of our democracy go dark.

This article was first published on Scheerpost

======================

The UN’s COP26 is a grotesque and decadent spectacle

The UN COP26 is a grotesque and decadent spectacle  By Barry Brill, 18 November 2021

Editor’s note: Click on link above to view graphics in the original article.

We are witnessing Versailles levels of extravagance and hypocrisy. From every corner of the globe, the super-rich, the powerful and the full of puffed-up virtue are gathered in Glasgow to pontificate to the rest of us about how much we are harming the planet with all our waste and hubris.

They’ve arrived in their fleets of private jets to bemoan the scourge of air-industry emissions. They are tucking in to five-star meals in between wondering out loud if the little people should eat less meat. They’ll rest their weary, virtuous heads on plump, silk pillows after long days of discussing how to rein in the material aspirations of the masses.

It is perhaps the most nauseating display of oligarchical conceit of recent times.

The foregoing is unapologetically uplifted from a recent thundering editorial in Spiked. Brendan O’Neill captures the odious dishonesty of the world’s privileged and powerful as they strut their virtue in a groupthink orgy of piety. I recommend that you read it all.

One by one these elitists are competing to heighten the hysteria … “one minute to midnight” … “code red for the planet”… “an existential threat to humanity”… “greatest moral challenge of our time” … “last best hope for the world” … and on … and on … and on.

Hundreds of highly-paid PR flacks in dozens of countries have sweated out these histrionic phrases. The world’s billionaires and high potentates have then humbly volunteered to deliver the gold-plated words personally to Glasgow by private jet and chauffeured limousine.  And to be seen there.

But why are 400 private jets parked at airports serving Glasgow? Honestly? Why not deliver the words by email – or even by video if the media need visuals?  What do they achieve by their swaggering  physical presence? After all, everybody knows that this entire convention is a pretentious charade.

Nobody at the convention hall in Glasgow really needs to be convinced that climate action is a good thing. The hall is an echo-chamber of like-minded enthusiasts.

A committee of 25,000 is never going to make any worthwhile decision that was not pre-approved long before the convention began.

It is all theatre. But it is a very expensive performance, and – with Scotland reporting 400 new infections each day – it is a potentially dangerous performance for over 100 countries. All attendees are exempted from Scotland’s vaccine passport scheme. (“All animals are equal but some are more equal than others” – Orwell).

The private jets alone will blast 13,000 tonnes of CO2 into the atmosphere, and their ostentatious presence has  been branded “rank climate hypocrisy” and the “nadir of carbon inequality”. But they are no more than the visible tip of an iceberg. Many of their mega-rich owners – Bloomberg, Bejos, Fink, Gates, Soros, Schwab, the Rockefellers, the Rothschilds – are pouring many more billions into lobbying governments everywhere for their favoured climate policies.

There are literally tens of thousands of professional climate activists working on a full-time basis and drawing wages funded by these “philanthropists”. They make up the bulk of the non-delegates at the Glasgow convention. What hope does common sense or moderation have in the face of such an army of propagandists?

Francis Menton believes that, on balance, it’s a good thing we have these annual COPs, saying:

I can think of no other comparable activities that put on such dramatic and widely-viewed display the immeasurable foolishness and hubris of our political overlords.

Menton points out that no less than 25 COPs have previously ordered the world to reduce its omissions. They succeeded in delivering the dismal track record shown in this graph:

While every smug and sanctimonious member of the climate elite can readily churn out 10,000 words about the benefits of “net zero carbon by 2050”, none ever seem to mention the costs. Or who is to pay those costs. [Clue: it’s not them.]

Both New Zealand and UK governments have released modelling as to the likely costs. While admitting that “nobody knows”, the models suggest a figure of about US$11,000 per household per year. Contrast this with the 68% of Americans who tell opinion surveyors that they are not prepared to pay more than $10 per month to ameliorate climate change.

Where is the self-awareness of elites who instruct us to “do what we say not what we do”:

  • Al Gore, who predicts 20-foot rises in sea levels has bought a 9-bathroom beach front villa in Montecito, California;
  • Barack Obama, who declared “the moment when the rise of the oceans beganto slow” has acquired a waterfront mansion on Martha’s Vineyard;
  • When John Kerry recently flew in his family’s private jetto Obama’s 60th birthday party, it was the 16th private-jet jaunt his family has taken this year
  • The Prime Minister of the Maldives, who mimed an underwater cabinet meeting, built an international airport less than 2 metres above mean sea level;
  • In the knowledge that limiting population is a key tenet of climate alarmists, Boris Johnson is about to have his seventh child;
  • Jeff Bezos flew into Glasgow in his Gulfstream jet after attending Bill Gates 66th birthday party in the Mediterranean. At the party50 guests were choppered from private yachts to a beach;
  • The Cop26climate summit president Alok Sharma drives a diesel car. His spokeswoman, Allegra Stratton said she did not “fancy” an electric car “just yet”;

Closer to home, the New Zealand Green Party MPs fly more kilometres than the MPs of any other party. Minister James Shaw flew no less than 14 bureaucrats to Glasgow (in business class) for no known benefits to taxpayers – shouldering aside hapless MIQ applicants who have been queueing for months to return to their homeland.

I conclude as I began with Spiked:

This is a movement that allows the descendants of incredibly wealthy banking families to tell the rest of us to wear a cardie rather than turn on the central heating and which invites literal princes to make sad faces about all the flying and meat-eating the oiks are engaging in.

I said it was a modern version of Versailles, but actually it’s worse than that. At least daft bint Marie Antoinette wanted the lower orders to eat cake (she just didn’t realise they didn’t have any). This new lot actively campaigns against the consumption of the 21st-century equivalent of cake – meat, heat, easy travel. ‘Dont let them eat cake’ is the cry of the eco-aristocrat.

====================

Climate Derangement Syndrome At COP26

Climate Derangement Syndrome At COP26  By spiked-online.com, 12  November 2021

It’s not any change in our climate that poses the greatest threat to humanity, it is the hysteria surrounding it that does.

Climate change is going to be worse than the Holocaust. It will give rise to a global epidemic of gang rape. There’ll be murder, war, slaughter. Your friends will die. Your children, too. The carbon-fuelled heating of the planet will bring ‘human life as we know it’ crashing to a violent, fiery end. It will be nothing less than doomsday.

These are just some of the hysterical claims that have been made in the discussion around COP26. As world leaders private-jetted their way to Glasgow for the latest UN gabfest on how to save the planet from mankind’s dirt, hubris and avarice, there was a severe outbreak of Climate Derangement Syndrome.

Prime ministers, bishops, princes and noisy greens all tried to outdo each other with their apocalyptic warnings. It has been a grim competition of catastrophes, an orgy of hyperbolic prophecies that wouldn’t look out of place in the Book of Revelation.

It all kicked off months before COP26 opened. When the IPCC published its latest report in August, delirious scribes across the Western world were reaching for their thesauruses in order that they might drive home to dim readers just how nightmarish the future promises to be. It’s ‘code red!’ for humanity, they all insisted, uniformly.

If we don’t get a handle on carbon emissions soon, ‘our future climate could well become some kind of hell on Earth’, said Tim Palmer of Oxford University. The planet is on fire and it’s our fault – we’re ‘guilty as hell’, declared the Guardian, coming off like a crackpot millenarian preacher.

Every unpleasant weather event was laid at the feet of dastardly mankind. ‘With raging wildfires, floods and pandemics, it seems like End Times – and it’s our own damned fault’, said one writer.

This feverish holding-up of the IPCC report as some kind of God-like indictment of mankind set the stage for the derangement we have seen around COP26. The Archbishop of Canterbury, the supposed moral anchor of the nation, set the tone with his perverse insistence that the consequences of climate change will overshadow even the greatest crime in history – the Holocaust.

It will be a genocide ‘on an infinitely greater scale’, he said. He has since apologised for this shameful marshalling of the horrors of the Holocaust to the moany middle-class cause of going green.

Boris Johnson, who just a few years ago was writing newspaper columns slamming eco-hysteria, says climate change is a doomsday clock counting down to a ‘detonation that will end human life as we know it’. If we don’t cut carbon emissions, it will soon be ‘too late for our children’, he said, the clear implication being that climate change will gift the next generation a Mad Max-style wasteland in which life will barely be worth living.

‘It’s one minute to midnight’, said Boris. Actually, chirped the Archbishop of Canterbury, ‘the clock has run out’. Make your minds up – is it apocalypse now or apocalypse very soon?

Time has ‘quite literally run out’, said Prince Charles. He says we need to take a ‘war-like footing’ on climate change. Climate change is ‘another form of wartime’ and we may soon have to ration things like air travel, said famed globe-trotter Joanna Lumley. If COP26 fails, it will be a ‘death sentence’ for humankind, said UN secretary-general Antonio Guterres. ‘We’re digging our own graves’, he warned.

Of course it fell to the middle-class death cult Extinction Rebellion to spell out what the globalist elites largely only hint at. Cameron Ford, the viral spokesperson for XR-offshoot Insulate Britain, said in an interview with Owen Jones that climate change will mean running out of food and ‘societal collapse’.

And then? ‘You’ll see slaughter. You’ll see rape. You’ll see murder.’ It gets worse, believe it or not. ‘[Our] friends and our siblings and our children – we will lose everything we love.’ Shorter version: everyone will die.

Owen Jones made no pushback whatsoever against these lunatic, utterly unscientific claims.

Then it was revealed that XR’s very own Nostradamus – its famously batty co-founder Roger Hallam – has been feverishly predicting the descent of humanity into a barbarous living hell. An unearthed document he wrote last year while he was in jail on suspicion of conspiracy to commit criminal damage, cheerily titled ‘Advice to Young People, as you Face Annihilation’, painted a picture of the future that would give John the Elder a run for his money.

We will see ‘the collapse of our society’, says Hallam. And like all the best mad prophets, he knows exactly what will happen next. ‘A gang of boys will break into your house demanding food. They will see your mother, your sister, your girlfriend, and they will gang rape her on the kitchen table. They will force you to watch, laughing at you. At the end, they will accuse you of enjoying it. They’ll take a cigarette and burn out your eyes with it. You will not be able to see anything again. This is the reality of climate change.’

You have been warned. You’d better start recycling.

It might feel tempting to write off Hallam’s demented prophesising as just another outburst from a man so odd that even the eco-loons of XR have distanced themselves from him.

But in truth he is only adding flesh to the bones of the elites’ own Climate Derangement Syndrome. When people like Hallam and Ford foretell slaughter and rape and the burning out of eyes in a future world ravaged to dust by carbon emissions, they’re merely putting pornographic colour to the elite consensus that climate change will be a Holocaust-level event in which millions will die.

There isn’t a cigarette paper’s difference between the Archbishop of Canterbury’s prophecy of a climate calamity worse than the Holocaust and Cameron Ford’s millenarian intonements about slaughter, rape and murder. Show me a meaningful distinction between Professor Tim Palmer’s prediction of ‘hell on Earth’ and Roger Hallam’s prison visions of hell on Earth.

We need to talk about this. We need to talk about Climate Derangement Syndrome and how frankly batshit crazy it has become. More to the point, we need to talk about how dangerous this way of thinking is to reason, freedom and the future prosperity of humankind.

Indeed, it isn’t climate change that threatens to undo the great gains of human civilisation – it’s the hysteria about climate change.

The first thing to note about Climate Derangement Syndrome, whether it’s coming from the posh road-blockers of Insulate Britain, Clarence House or the Church of England, is that it has nothing whatsoever to do with science.

This eco-hysteria single-handedly shatters the myth that contemporary environmentalism is a science-driven movement, merely concerned with acting upon the warnings contained in graphs and models drawn up by climatologists.

Show me the piece of scientific research that says a gang of boys will rape your mother if we don’t achieve Net Zero by 2030. Where’s the peer-reviewed study that pinpoints the moment when slaughter, rape and genocide will occur if our governments fail to cut back on fossil fuels?

Of course no such studies exist.

These malarial visions of future horrors spring from the realm of fantasy, not science.

They are the misanthropic prejudices of the depressed middle classes, not scientific projections. They emerge from the well of existential dread in which the contemporary elites wallow, not from cool, calm modelling. And the truth is that this has long been the case with climate-change alarmism.

‘Science’ is the garb thrown on what in reality is the End Times foreboding of this new millennium’s morally at-sea elites. ‘Climate change’ is the all-encompassing idea of doom through which the Western bourgeoisie expresses its sense of moral, political and economic exhaustion.

All the recent talk of doomsday and genocide captures the extent to which the issue of climate change has been catastrophised to an extraordinary degree, how it has been transformed from a perfectly manageable problem into an apocalypse modernity brought upon itself; from a scientific theory about mankind’s impact on the planet into certain, unquestionable proof of the folly of the industrial era; from one challenge among many facing humankind in the 21st century into an indictment of the entire human species.

In short, from a technical conundrum into a God-like revelation of the wickedness of greedy, industrious mankind.

Climate Derangement Syndrome is at root a revolt against modernity.

It is a reactionary, romantic, nostalgic cry of angst against the incredible world of production and consumption mankind has created over the past 200 years.

This is why some at COP26 openly denounced the Industrial Revolution. First came Greta Thunberg, the prophetess of doom of contemporary environmentalism.

She angrily denounced the British government as ‘climate villains’. The UK, she said, is largely responsible for the horrors of climate change – this ‘more or less… started in the UK since that’s where the Industrial Revolution started, [where] we started to burn coal’.

Shamefully, Boris Johnson echoed Greta’s regressive brickbats against the Industrial Revolution. In his COP speech he pointed out that Glasgow was the place where the steam engine, ‘produced by burning coal’, was born. That, he said, was ‘the doomsday machine’ that led us to the dire predicament we find ourselves in now.

This sneering at the Industrial Revolution is without question the most offensive and ridiculous thing Boris has ever said.

To hear the elected leader of the UK describe the UK’s extraordinary contributions to industrialisation as the first stirrings of ‘doomsday’ feels genuinely depressing.

Brits should not feel ashamed of the Industrial Revolution, as Boris and Greta and eco-hairshirts suggest we should.

We should feel immense pride at this radical overhaul of the processes of production and transportation.

The Industrial Revolution was arguably the most important event in human history.

Its positive impact on life expectancy, knowledge, liberty and equality, not only in the UK but also around the world, is almost incalculable.

It was the Industrial Revolution that dragged the populace away from the brutal, back-breaking serfdom of the land into the mad, teeming cities of London, Manchester, Sheffield, Glasgow. It revolutionised how we worked, how we lived, how we conceived of ourselves.

It was the cradle of solidarity and struggle and demands for voting rights, employment rights, educational rights. It is not a coincidence that life expectancy was depressingly short for all of human history until the Industrial Revolution, when it started its stunning and steady rise.

Without this revolution, most of us would still be tied to the land, never venturing further than the farm fence, unable to read, dead by 35.

That’s the idyll eco-regressives fantasise about? These people are as historically illiterate as they are pseudo-scientific.

The COP26 mockery of the Industrial Revolution – more than that, the depiction of that revolution as the starting pistol of the coming climatic genocide – shines a harsh light on what is motoring today’s green hysteria. Not steam or coal, that’s for sure. No, it’s the elites’ loss of faith in modernity and in the human project more broadly.

This is why climate-change hysteria is a far larger problem for humankind than climate change itself. As Bjorn Lomborg recently explained on spiked, climate change is a ‘middling problem’. It is the derangement over climate change, the painting of it as an End Times event we probably deserve, that truly disrupts and undermines our civilisation.

With its misanthropic disdain for human behaviour and aspirations, with its revisionist treatment of the birth of modernity as essentially a crime against Mother Earth, with its incessant demands for reining in economic growth, and with its censorious branding of anyone who questions any part of the regressive green agenda as a ‘climate-change denier’, climate-change alarmism is an express menace to growth, democracy, freedom of speech and the right to dream of an even more prosperous future for all.

Prince Charles is right that we need to get on a ‘war footing’. Not against climate change, though.

Rather, against this ceaseless diminishment of humanity’s achievements and the baleful, untrue claim that modern man is a plague on the planet.

This manmade apocalypticism threatens to upend the remarkable civilisation we have created far more than a bit of carbon does.

See more here: spiked-online.com

=======================

Previous articles

    • the-snobbish-nastiness-and-division-perpetuated-by-gender-studies-experts  By Janet Albrechtsen, The Australian, 16 November 2016
    • at-last-the-pontificating-media-elites-are-trumped  By Nick Cater, The Australian, 15 November 2016
    • trigger-warning-freedom-of-speech-not-welcome  Editorial, The Australian, 8 October
    • lies-and-propaganda-of-the-supranational-elites  By Jennifer Oriel, The Australian, 31 October 2016
    • taxpayer-funded-activism-undermining-the-nation  The Australian editorial, 24 October 2016
    • the-war-on-free-speech-has-just-begun  By Mark Steyn, The Australian, 19 October
    • cultural-totalitarianism-of-the-postmodern-era-did-the-impossible-it-changed-the-very-nature-of-man-and-woman  By Alexander Maistrovoy, 17  October 2016
    • offended-left-claims-exclusive-right-to-freedom-of-expression  By Gerard Henderson, The Australian, 15 October 2016
    • road-to-tyranny-is-paved-with-leftie-assumptions  By Maurice Newman, The Australian, 27 September 2016
    • protecting-americas-children-from-police-state-goons-bureaucratic-idiots-mercenary-creeps  By John Whitehead via The Rutherford Institute, 22 September 2016
    • free-speech-inimical-to-lefts-stifling-orthodoxies  By Janet Albrechtsen, The Australian, 21 September 2016
    • swamped-by-outdated-multicultural-model  By Nick Cater, The Australian, 20 September 2016
    • egressive-left-puts-bigotry-and-militant-islam-on-a-pedestal  By Peter Baldwin, previously a minister in the Hawke and Keating Labor governments.  The Australian, 17 September 2016
    • pauling-hansons-first-speech-in-the-senate-14-september-2016
    • Parents allowed tough love  By Julian Tomlinson, Cairns Post, 1 September 2016
    • George Soros evil influence on Western politics  By Jennifer Oriel, The Australian, 22 August 2016
    • What Became of the Left  Paul Craig Roberts, Institute for Political Economy, 20 August 2016
    • 21st-century Left waging new war on free speech  By Jennifer Oriel, The Australian, 15 August 2015
    • Denial of speech is one step towards totalitarianism  By Nick Cater, The Australian, 25 July 2016
    • Generation Snowflake  By Julian Tomlinson, Cairns Post, 21 July 2016
    • A march against democracy  By Tom Slater, Spikes Online, 10 July 2016
    • Australia’s unprotected rebel against the political elites  By Grace Collier, The Australian, 9 July 2016
    • Australia’s politics in disarray  By Maurice Newman, The Australian, 7 July 2016
    • Censorship is not education  By Julian Tomlinson – the Cairns Post, 30 June 2016
    • Brexit, this is what democracy feels like  By Brendan O’Neill, Spiked Online, 25 June
    • No offence – but harden up!  By Julian Tomlinson – the Cairns Post, 23 June 2016
    • The Brazen Left’s Bid to Kill Quadrant By Jeremy Sammut, Quadrant Online, 1 June
    • How to raise boys and avoid PC nonsense  By Julian Tomlinson – the Cairns Post, 26 May 2016
    • The Greens, sirens of socialism  By Nick Cater, The Australian, 3 May 2016
    • Leftists for the EU, the radical wing of the oligarchy  By Brendon O”Neill, Spiked Online, 23 April 2016
    • A new authoritarianism has descended  By Neil Brown, The Spectator, 11 April 2016
    • Don’t fear the freedom police By Julian Tomlinson, Deputy Editor, Cairns Post, 7 April
    • Australia’s Marxist-LGBTI engineers  By Merv Bendle, Quadrant Online, 2 March 2016
    • Authenticity, the answer to PC pundits  By Janet Albrechtsen, The Australian, 17 February 2016
    • Progressivism’s clash with reality – by Merv Bendle, Quadrant Online 8 February 2016
    • gloriously-unhinged-by-president-trump  By Daryl McCann, Quadrant Online, 20 November 2016
    • cairns-post-editorial-201016  Laws of diminishing returns as the ‘nanny state’ takes over control of our freedom, By Julian Tomlinson, Cairns Post, 20 October 2016
    • The Truth Behind Revolutions  By Alexander Light, HumansAreFree.com; 27 August 2016
    • The counter-revolution against the Deep State  From Inner Circle, 26 August 2016
    • The welfare state fails Aboriginals yet again  By Gary Johns, The Australian, 25 August 2016
  • I quit, the bureaucrats had beaten me By Charles Hugh-Smith, 13 August 2015

Which ‘New World Order’?

Who is planning a ‘New World Order’ (NWO),  in what form, and what progress so far? What weapons are used to try to enforce a particular NWO?  Will it be ‘The Great Reset? Currently, many of the world’s normal practices are falling apart. Links to many more articles follow those below.

Who is behind the agenda for world domination?

Who is behind the agenda for world domination  Posted on May 26, 2024 by State of the Nation, 10 July 2024

Editor’s note: This article details the most comprehensive views of the current world war between Evil and Good forces, in particular the components of the Evil side. The graphics can be viewed better in the linked PDF file as above.

Posted by Stop World Control

When we look at the crazy plans of the World Economic Forum, the World Health Organization and the United Nations, we have to wonder who comes up with this kind of insanity? Especially when we see how pedophilia is being normalized, men are encouraged to dress like women, and toddlers are coerced into having their sex surgically changed, even without their parents’ consent. Where does all this perversion and cruelty come from? In order to find the answer, we must look behind the curtain of the public world theatre.

We must understand that organizations like the World Economic Forum are in reality a storefront for entities who operate behind the scenes.

This was explained during an international Grand Jury composed of eleven lawyers and a judge, during which the official agenda of world domination by financial elites was revealed by expert former agents of the World Health Organization, the United Nations, the US and British Military and Intelligence Agencies. One of the expert witnesses was Alex Thomson, a former officer of Britain’s Signals Intelligence Agency, GCHQ, the partner agency to NSA (National Security Agency, USA). As an intelligence officer, Alex learned about the British strategy for world domination. He testified to the Grand Jury how the world is run by powerful financial entities who never show themselves to the public, and who control the WEF, WHO, UN, IMF, EU, BIS, etc.

Our question is of course: who are these hidden rulers? In order to answer this inquiry, we have to go back in history…

Throughout human history, there have been psychopaths who lusted for world domination – i.e., Egyptian Pharaohs, Roman Emperors, Russian Tsars, European Kings, and so on.

The lust for world domination is a basic reality throughout all of world history. One world empire has succeeded another: the Greek, Persian, Byzantine, Chinese, Roman, Spanish and British world empires, etc.  A popularly held belief today is that this ancient desire to rule the entire world has somehow disappeared – but nothing could be further from the truth. As we have just seen, emerging surveillance and data harvesting technologies allow the installation of worldwide systems of total control that previous tyrants could not even dream of.

For thousands of years, freedom never existed on earth, as the entire world was always ruled by tyrants who oppressed the people. In Europe, these rulers lived in luxurious castles, while the peasants worked hard in the fields. Most of what they produced went to the wealthy tyrants. 

The tyrants offered some level of comfort to the people to prevent them from revolting. A typical strategy is the “bread and circuses” concept: give the masses entertainment and food and they will be quiet. This was true in ancient Rome, as in any other culture. Today we see this on a massive scale, with the expansion of the sports and entertainment industry. The vast majority of the population has no interest in wisdom, knowledge or understanding, but rather choose to sit in front of their TV all night eating cheap industrial food. They are kept at peace with “bread and circuses”.

Over time, the world population grew ever larger, and this posed an increasing threat to the power of the rulers. The more people they must control, the greater the risk of large-scale resistance. So they changed their strategy: instead of operating out in the open, where the masses are fully aware that they are being oppressed by tyrants, they decided to move backstage and give the masses the illusion of being in charge – through elections.

In reality, the rulers never gave up their power; they have simply manipulated elections in order to position their political puppets, who dance on their strings.54

In this way, the same ancient tyrants stay in control, while the people think they are free.  This was confirmed by a former top official from the United Nations, Calin Georgesque, who was an executive director at the UN for 18 years. He explained that real elections are basically non-existent in the world. His expert witness testimony before the International Crimes Investigative Committee can be seen in our documentary, “Secrets of the United Nations“. Abundant further evidence that elections are rigged can be found in this evidence report.

HIDDEN WORLD RULERS

By moving their operations behind the scenes, the rulers could be protected from the wrath of the public. But they also needed to shield themselves from the prosecution of governments, so they created for themselves so-called “sovereign states”. A sovereign state is a small area that is not submitted to the laws of the land, and is, in essence, untouchable.

An example of such a sovereign state, is the Bank for International Settlements, which oversees more than 50 central banks – making it one of the most powerful financial entities in the world.

The BIS became a sovereign, untouchable entity in 1987 through the Headquarters Agreement which was negotiated with the Swiss Federal Council. This agreement includes the following:

?? Full inviolability for all buildings of the BIS, and the land beneath and around them, indifferent to who owns them.

?? Full immunity from criminal and civil prosecution and proceedings for the bank as such.

?? No payment of taxes on transactions and salaries of personnel.

?? No disclosure to governments regarding the activities of the BIS.

?? Not subject to any jurisdiction.

The Bank for International Settlements cannot be prosecuted, doesn’t need to inform the government of its activities, pays no taxes, and is not submitted to any jurisdiction. It can do whatever it wants.

An even more powerful sovereign state is the City of London, an area of one square mile, in the heart of London city.

The City of London is the financial center of the world and the headquarters of the British elites, where hundreds of banks have their offices. It’s not governed by the British government, but on the contrary, reigns supreme over it. The City of London has its own courts and police, is unchallenged in its sovereignty and self-government, and rules over most of the Earth. It is also the headquarters for worldwide Freemasonry, as well as the headquarters for the worldwide money cartel known as “The Crown”. The Crown controls the global financial system and runs the governments of all Commonwealth countries (United Kingdom, Australia, New Zealand, Canada, most of Africa) and many non-Commonwealth ‘Western’ nations as well (i.e., Greece), while their hand of influence even reaches deeply into Latin America and Asia. The Crown traces back to the Vatican.

Surprisingly, the most important sovereign state in the world is the Vatican City State. While to the public the Vatican presents itself as a religious institution, in reality, it is the head of the worldwide financial network.

Most people don’t realize that there is not just one pope, but in fact there are three: the White Pope, the Black Pope and the Grey Pope.  The only one we ever see is the White Pope, but little do we know that he is the lowest of the three popes. In reality, the highest authority is the Grey Pope, who is never seen in public at all – he operates as a perfectly concealed supreme puppet master. While the Vatican presents itself to humanity as the seat of godliness, it is in fact the exact opposite.  As the saying goes: “The best place for the devil to hide is in the church.” The lower-level people who work in the Vatican are clueless to this, just as low-level government officials are oblivious to who truly controls their nation. The rulers ensure that all who work for them on the lower levels are kept in a state of complete ignorance. Only those that begin to ask questions and seek truth will eventually be confronted with more and more corruption, the higher they climb the ladder.

Archbishop Carlo Maria Vigano has exposed sexual abuse and financial corruption in the Vatican. He also warns humanity of their agenda of world domination.

DOWNLOAD VIDEO

The vast majority of humanity – even most political leaders – have no clue that these sovereign states even exist, let alone rule the world. All we know and see are the public personalities – like politicians and businessmen – who are mere puppets of these concealed puppet masters. Their strength is in obscurity. By remaining hidden from the view of humanity, they are able to operate unchecked, without being held accountable by the people.Enter your text here…

A good resource to learn about the agenda for world domination by hidden rulers, is the “Grand Jury Evidence”. This report contains the expert testimonies of former members of the British Intelligence Service, British Navy, US Marine Corps, World Health Organization, United Nations, and the CDC who testified before an international Grand Jury of 11 lawyers and a judge about the agenda for world domination.

Download this PDF. 

WHO ARE THESE RULERS?

Just who are the people in these sovereign states, and who are the entities that work for them in the nations of the world? This worldwide network is generally referred to as the Deep State, Shadow Government, Cabal, The 1%, Satanic Bloodlines, Illuminati, Elites, Royals, Black Nobility, Khazarian Mafia and so on. They consist of ancient royal dynasties and bloodlines that go back hundreds and even thousands of years. To learn more about these nefarious families – who they are, where they come from and how they operate – I recommend the classic work by Fritz Springmeier, “Bloodlines of the Illuminati”. This highly acclaimed reference work is made available as a download on the website of the CIA. It reveals information about the bloodlines in the United States of America who exert their influence worldwide.

The classic works, “Bloodlines of the Illuminati”, volumes 1, 2 & 3, by Fritz Springmeier, are considered authoritative.

Order as paperback:
Buy volume 1
Buy volume 2
Buy volume 3

Download as PDF:
Download volume 1
Download volume 2
Download volume 3

A second authoritative resource that focuses more on the European families, is “The 13 Satanic Bloodlines” by the investigative journalist Robin de Ruiter, who in 2008 accurately predicted the covid pandemic. This four volume work was banned in France, but is published in about 100 other nations and languages.

Download as PDF

Some of the criminal families are Rockefeller, Rothschild, Warburg, DuPont, Russell, Onassis, Collins, Morgan, Kennedy, Van Duyn, Li, Astor, Vanderbilt, Bauer, Whitney, Duke, Oppenheimer, Grey, Sinclair, Schiff, Solvay, Sassoon, Wheeler, Todd, Clinton, Taft, Goldschmidt, Wallenberg, Guggenheim, Bush and many others.

There are also the royal families, like the House of Habsburg, one of the most prominent dynasties in European history who ruled over most of Europe.

Other royal families are the House of Windsor (United Kingdom and the Commonwealth), House of Orange-Nassau (plays a central role in the politics and government of Europe), the House of Schwarzenberg (one of the most prominent European noble houses), etc. Many of these families are genetically connected, as they all hold the belief that they have different genetics than the rest of humanity, and therefore have the right to rule over all of us. It is an established fact that they call the public their “cattle” or “livestock”. To them, humanity is merely a herd of animals that they must manage.

HOUSE OF WINDSOR

HOUSE OF ORANGE-NASSAU

HOUSE OF SCHWARZENBERG

At the helm of all these families is the so-called “head of the snake”, the Black Nobility or the Jesuit / Papal bloodlines, whose headquarters are in the Vatican City State. One of the most prominent ones is the House of Orsini, who are descendants from the Julio-Claudian dynasty of ancient Rome. Much more information about all this can be found in the aforementioned reference works, on the Dutch website Ellaster.nl (translate the pages using Google translate), and on the internet, when using the uncensored search engine Qwant.

THE TOP OF THE PYRAMID

Are the concealed families who operate from within the sovereign states the highest level of the pyramid of power that controls the world?  No. There is more to reveal. This next level of information can be especially challenging for some readers because it is so out of this world – quite literally. In order to help you understand the reality of what you are about to learn, I will first give some basic historic background. When we look at world history, there is one thing that stands out:

In every culture, everywhere on earth, one thing has always been at the heart of every society: the worship of demonic entities.

Ancient Egypt, Babylon, Rome, and Greece were deeply embedded in spiritual practices which usually involved two things: sexual abuse and human sacrifice. This applies to every part of the world, be it Africa, Asia, the Americas, Europe – it is literally worldwide. Christianity and Islam refer to the dark spiritual entity known as Satan (which means opponent or adversary).  But there are also other beings. One prominent spiritual entity that has been worshipped throughout the history of humanity is called Moloch. In different cultures around the world, he is known by various names, such as Melech, Mo-lech, Milcom, Melkom, Molek, Malec, Malik, Melek, Malkum, Melqart, Melkart, Milk, Melqarth, Kronos and Cronus. In Islam, for example, Mo-lech is called Malec or Malik.

The many names confirm the worldwide worship of this demonic entity.

Moloch is depicted as a human with the head of a bull. In ceremonies, statues of this demon were heated with fire, and once the outstretched hands were glowing hot, living babies were placed in them. To suppress the terrified cries of the child being burned alive, loud music was played.

This is basic human history that every one of us should be aware of. When you travel anywhere in the world, the architectural remains of human sacrifice can often be seen at various locations. In South America, the Aztec pyramids, for example, mark the landscape. At the top of these pyramids, humans were sacrificed to dark spiritual forces. In Europe, this was done by the Druids; in Africa by the shamans; in Egypt by the high priests, and so on. Human sacrifice has been at the heart of most cultures around the world.

With the spread of Christianity, this horrific practice was abolished in the public sphere, but it wasn’t eradicated from society. Rather, many servants of the dark realm continued practicing these rituals in secret. And this is where we now come to the top of the pyramid of world power…

In every quality resource about this topic, you will find abundant documentation that, at the supreme level of the power structures, ritual sexual abuse and human sacrifice are still practiced.

One example of this was revealed by Ronald Bernard, a former bankster who worked at a high level of the worldwide financial imperium.

Bernard moved trillions of dollars for the concealed rulers and gained a clear understanding of what happens in these circles. In the video below, he testifies that at the higher levels of the financial elites, most people are members of a religion called Luciferianism. Ronald participated in some of their satanic masses, which involve a lot of alcohol and sex. At some point, he was invited to attend high level meetings in Germany, where children would be sacrificed. He was promised that this would swing wide open the gates to astronomical power and great wealth for him personally. Instead of moving billions for the financial rulers, he would become a billionaire himself. All he had to do was put his conscience in the freezer – at minus 100. This is the motivation behind the cruel practice of human sacrifice:

In return for the offering up of humans (especially babies and children) to demonic forces, the elites receive power and wealth from the dark realm. This explains their extraordinary financial resources and their incredible influence worldwide.

Ronald Bernard refused to partake of this horror and left the world of the ruling financial elites behind. He was tortured to death, then had an NDE (near death experience) and miraculously came back to life in the hospital. After serving the dark realm, Ronald felt that he had been given a second chance to restore the damage he had caused to humanity. He has now dedicated his life to the creation of an alternative financial system, that can help people escape the tyrannical systems of the elites.

The highly revealing eye-witness testimony of Ronald Bernard can be seen in the following video, which has been viewed by about 90 million people worldwide.

<

DOWNLOAD VIDEO

The information shared by Ronald Bernard is confirmed by former directors of the CIA, FBI, police, gendarmerie, military, detectives, eye witnesses, judges, and many surviving victims in our evidence report about sexual abuse and murder by high level officials. I also have in my possession several personal letters from women who escaped the cruel circles of the elites, where they have been raped thousands of times.

Nathalie Augustina was a world-famous fashion model who was mind-controlled by the CIA to be a sex slave for the highest level of the elites: royal families, heads of state, commanders of the military, Hollywood celebrities, etc. She describes her story in a Dutch book written by the aforementioned reporter Robin de Ruiter.

Another (anonymous) surviving victim and eye-witness also sent me several letters. These are highly disturbing to read, but I have decided to include a small portion of them in this report, as these eye-witness accounts reveal a hidden reality that humanity urgently needs to become aware of. Please understand that you may experience cognitive dissonance or Semmelweis effect when seeing this information. These are psychological mechanisms that are subconsciously activated to protect us from new information that challenges our current beliefs.

We hide our head in the sand
because reality is too scary.

want to encourage you to be conscious about this, and not give in to the reflex of rejecting information that is disturbing. This is what sustains these horrors. The reason I share these sensitive details is because this kind of evil can only exist with the ignorance of humanity. Bringing this into the light is the first step to putting an end to this terror.

EYE-WITNESS TESTIMONY

“I grew up in Canada.  The core of this thing is genetics. These bloodline families believe they are genetically superior. Wherever you see people manipulating genetics…. it’s probably them. And wherever you find “royal families” ruling countries…. you’ll find them in abundance.

So… these families worship the fallen angels… that would be Satan, Lucifer, Baphomet, Moloch and Baal. So my childhood was one satanic ritual after another. They are done on specific dates throughout the year…. solstices, equinoxes, full moons, etc. The purpose of the rituals is to gather power for themselves. A typical childhood in this horror will find kids raped a few thousand times by the time they’re 18. We’re talking a satanic cult network that is worldwide. And they make a big chunk of their money trafficking kids.  It’s brutal.

They start the programming in the womb or at birth. They use astrology and numerology… they’re black magic occultists…. they pick your birth date…. they groom you for specific careers.  They attempt to put their people at the top of fields around the world.  But now they’re going for broke. They want a central world government…. in Jerusalem. They want to take down nation states.

Because the torture in the cult is so extreme…. people split and dissociate, so most people are DID… suffering from dissociative identity disorder…. which used to be called multiple personality disorder. Basically you end up with a whole bunch of people or personality fragments inside yourself… because with each torture…. you split.

The result of this is that a lot of people who went through this…. have no memory of it…. and the cult takes advantage of that. They structure the personality so you have personalities that come out at night…. and others that live your day life. People live double lives and don’t realize that. It’s very clever, so the cult gets all sorts of things done at night. They want unfeeling psychopaths who will have no emotion as they do their dirty work. They strip the feelings right out of kids in the cult. They put you through near death experiences….. this opens up the psychic centers and shoots the IQ through the roof. Makes kids very useful to them.

During world war 2… the Nazis developed sophisticated mind control techniques…. and many medical procedures…. Allen Dulles, who was the first director of the CIA (first called the OSS – office of strategic studies), got funding from the US gov’t under Project Paperclip….. he brought a lot of the scientists and doctors over to the US.  Russia took a lot of them also. When they got here… they carried on their work…. but that mind control got integrated into the cult network throughout North America. That’s how I ended up in it. The fact that my grandfather and great uncle were both Grand Masters in the Scottish Rite of Masonry here…. was also why.  I was born into it.

JANIC SMITH
(NOT REAL NAME)

Nothing this lady wrote to me was totally new, as I have read similar revelations in numerous publications, by established investigators who have been warning humanity for decades. I have also seen several videos with testimonies from other people who escaped this dark network of world rulers. That’s how I know this information to be authentic and accurate.

In another personal letter which I received from a different surviving victim, Nathalie Augustina, I read certain details that explain the connection between criminal humans and higher spiritual entities, who use them for an even far more nefarious purpose than just financial corruption and political world power. What Nathalie describes has been revealed in the past by several researchers and whistleblowers, but nevertheless I found it deeply disturbing, as she reveals the substantial reality of evil. It’s one thing to know about the abstract concept of evil; it’s a whole different experience to discover how real the forces of darkness are. They are very well organized and operate in an extremely strategic way.  Here is a segment from Nathalie’s letters to me:

EYE-WITNESS TESTIMONY

“My book is only a fraction of the truth. It is all much worse. I have actually waited until the people are awake enough before telling everything. The people were awakened via the elections in the USA with the illegitimate positioning of pedophile Joe Biden, covid and now Ukraine.

I know the whole world of satanic pedophile head families. I know and have been used and raped by members of the ruling families who are above the Royal Houses. The Dutch fake royal house has as its boss the Habsburg clan and the Vatican. The Rothschilds control all royals financially. Every Royal House must bow before them and give act de presence when summoned.

I was often in Switzerland in DAVOS and Lausanne and Zurich and Geneva. Always during the political meetings of world leaders. There is much more going on on earth than you know or realize. E.g. Klaus Schwab is a pure Habsburg.

The Absolute Ruling Families meet 3 times a year in Davos, Switzerland. These gatherings are closed and heavily secured. This is where the Dinosaur Families meet. One specific group only comes out at night. Never during the day. Daylight is harmful to them. They’re not normal people either. They live hundreds of years, the oldest I met was 830 years old. They do not eat food like humans do. Their medical need is baby blood, until 25 days after the baby is born. The other group takes baby blood and baby meat, nothing but that.”

NATHALIE AUGUSTINA

Anyone who wants to verify this information can watch the videos in this report, download the PDF documents, read the books, and do your own research on the internet using the uncensored search engine Qwant and the video platform BitChute. If you want to learn more about the reality of cannibalism in the dark realm, I invite you to look into our evidence report about abuse by high level officials.

I will offer something here that confirms the cannibalistic nature of the elites. In Hollywood, there have recently been exclusive parties organized by Marina Abramovic. Some photographs from these parties leaked out, and you can see them in the linked report below. Because of their graphic nature, I have concealed them. In order to see the images, click the link. But if you are very sensitive, do not open it.

Click to see images that prove the satanic nature of the elites.

What you see in these images is just the superficial low-level stuff shown to the public. We cannot even imagine what they are doing in secret. The eye-witness testimonies also only briefly lift the veil of this dark realm. Once you know how evil these entities are, it becomes clear why they have no problem imposing the inhumane tyranny promoted by the World Economic Forum and their allies. It is critical that we have the courage to share this information with the world. Enter your text here…

Humanity is not merely suffering from corrupt politicians and bankers, but is under attack by pure evil. At the very top, there are dark spiritual entities that are simply a continuation of ancient practices of demon worship and human sacrifice. 

DISCONNECTING HUMANITY

What we must understand however, is that aside from these dark forces, there is also a Creator who is the giver and origin of all that is good, who is on the side of humanity, to deliver us from evil.

In the past decades, there has been a worldwide, strategic mind control operation against the people of this world, to steer the vast majority away from the Source of all life. When people are disconnected from God, who alone is greater than the realm of evil, they are easier to control and enslave. Spiritually ignorant people are powerless. It is imperative that we wake up from this brainwashed state of induced spiritual blindness and return to the Giver of all life, who can empower and guide us to deliver humanity from the forces of darkness. This has nothing to do with religion, but is as basic to our existence as 1+1=2. We all know there is good and evil. It is, however, not just some vague “energy”, but there exist personal entities, just as we are personal beings. It is absurd to recognize the existence of intense evil, while denying the reality of the realm of life, love, goodness and truth.

PYRAMID OF POWER

The following diagram shows a basic overview of the worldwide power structure of evil and corruption, which has penetrated every aspect of human society. I reveal this in the hope that it will assist in the worldwide downfall of these nefarious networks, since their #1 strength is the ignorance of the population. As long as they can operate beyond the awareness of the public, they can continue unchecked. That’s why I implore all who read this report to please not hesitate to share it, but have the courage to spread it far and wide, as that is what will eventually shatter these networks’ stronghold over humanity. As long as they can operate in total darkness, meaning no one can see them, they can continue their operations unchecked. Once this is brought into the light, meaning the world becomes aware of it, they can no longer hide and will be held accountable for their innumerable crimes against humanity and all of creation.

SEE THE FULL PICTURE

This post is a part of a longer report “The Agenda for World Domination by the World Economic Forum”. There you also find all the references that prove all the above information. If you want to see the full picture, with more evidence, make sure to read the full report.

___
https://stopworldcontrol.com/hidden/

=======================

Medbed Trials by Military White Hats

Medbed Trials by Military White Hats  From Gazetteller.com, June 3, 2024

Top-Secret Medbed Trials by Military White Hats: Secret Deployment Across America Already Healing Lives!

Powerful organizations and institutions are actively attempting to censor Gazetteller.com. We strongly encourage you to share this news with the world.

Hidden in the shadows of top-secret military bases, far from the prying eyes of the public, lies a clandestine operation that could change the world as we know it. The Medbed, a piece of revolutionary space-age technology, is already here.

Deployed in secret across the United States, these devices are under the tight control of the military white hats alliance. They are the guardians of this incredible technology, waiting for the right moment to unveil it to the public. But why the secrecy? And what exactly are they hiding?

The Silent Deployment of Medbeds

Whispers from inside the highest echelons of the military suggest that the Medbeds have been strategically placed in undisclosed locations across the country. These are not mere rumors. Deep within the bowels of Area 51, in the concealed corners of the Cheyenne Mountain Complex, and under the watchful eyes of the most secure military installations, the Medbeds are real and operational.

Sources who have managed to infiltrate these high-security areas report seeing rows upon rows of these advanced medical devices. Soldiers who were severely injured in battle, government agents with terminal illnesses, and even a select few civilians have reportedly undergone the Medbed process, emerging not only healed but transformed.

Must Watch! – The Secret Brain Wave Training You Need Before Using Revolutionary Medbeds!

 

The Secret Trials

Consider the case of Captain John Reynolds, a soldier who was gravely wounded during a classified mission in the Middle East. According to undisclosed sources within the military, Reynolds was airlifted to an undisclosed location where he was treated with a Medbed.

In less than 24 hours, Reynolds not only recovered from his life-threatening injuries but also emerged looking years younger, with enhanced physical capabilities that defy explanation. His transformation was so radical that his own family barely recognized him.

There’s also the story of Sarah Mitchell, a high-ranking intelligence officer diagnosed with terminal cancer. Her prognosis was bleak, with doctors giving her only months to live. However, Mitchell was whisked away to a secret facility where she underwent the Medbed treatment. Astonishingly, she returned completely cancer-free, with her DNA reportedly repaired and her lifespan extended by decades.

Video – The DNA Reparation Frequencies That Make Medbeds So Powerful!

The Dark Side of Extended Lifespan

These incredible stories don’t end with physical rejuvenation. Reports have emerged of people experiencing bizarre side effects after undergoing the Medbed treatment. Colonel Mark Anderson, another insider, shared an unnerving story of his own experience.

After his treatment, not only did his physical age regress, but he began to recover memories from what he believes are his past lives. Anderson described vivid dreams and flashbacks of being a soldier in various historical battles, from the trenches of World War I to the deserts of ancient Mesopotamia.

These recovered memories have left Anderson in a state of psychological turmoil, struggling to differentiate between his current life and those he believes he has lived before. This phenomenon raises alarming questions about the implications of memory recovery and the potential psychological toll it can take on individuals.

The Control of the Military White Hats Alliance

So, who are the military white hats alliance, and why are they controlling this technology? This covert group, comprised of top military officials and select government insiders, is believed to be the last line of defense against the misuse of the Medbed technology. Their mission is to ensure that this powerful tool does not fall into the wrong hands, particularly those of the deep state and other malevolent entities.

The white hats are reportedly conducting rigorous trials and meticulously documenting every aspect of the Medbed’s capabilities. They understand that the technology’s potential for good is matched only by its potential for abuse.

This group is deeply entrenched in a battle against the forces that seek to use the Medbeds for nefarious purposes, such as creating a class of superhumans loyal only to a tyrannical regime.

Urgent! Blood Sugar Fuels Cancer Growth—Critical Steps to Maintain Healthy Levels NOW!

 

The Struggle for Control

The battle for control over the Medbeds is fierce and ongoing. Insiders reveal that there have been several attempts by rogue elements within the government to seize the Medbeds and harness their power for their own gain.

One particularly chilling account involves a covert operation thwarted by the white hats, where a faction within the intelligence community attempted to smuggle a Medbed out of a secure facility. The white hats intercepted the operation, leading to a tense standoff that ended with the rogue agents being detained and the Medbed secured.

The Ultimate Goal

The ultimate goal of the white hats is to eventually introduce the Medbeds to the public in a controlled and responsible manner. They are meticulously planning a rollout that will ensure the technology is used for the benefit of humanity as a whole, rather than for the enrichment of a select few. This process involves not only perfecting the technology but also preparing the public for the radical changes it will bring.

The Dangers of Premature Exposure

The dangers of exposing the Medbed technology prematurely cannot be overstated. The white hats are acutely aware that releasing the Medbeds without proper preparation could lead to societal chaos. The dramatic changes in physical appearance, extended lifespans, and recovery of past life memories could disrupt social order and create unprecedented levels of confusion and conflict.

Must Watch! – The Secret Brain Wave Training You Need Before Using Revolutionary Medbeds!

Imagine the chaos that would ensue if people suddenly began aging backward, becoming physically younger while their peers continued to age normally. Relationships would be strained to the breaking point, with families and friends struggling to adjust to the new reality.

The economic implications are equally staggering, as extended lifespans would fundamentally alter retirement planning, healthcare, and social services.

The Hidden Truth

Despite the white hats’ best efforts, the truth about the Medbeds is slowly leaking out. Insiders are beginning to speak, risking their careers and their lives to bring this information to light. They believe that the public has a right to know about the technology that could change their lives forever.

The Medbeds are real. They are here, and they are under the control of a select few who understand the gravity of the situation. The stories of miraculous recoveries, physical rejuvenation, and the recovery of past life memories are not just the stuff of science fiction—they are happening right now, behind closed doors, under the strictest secrecy.

The White Hats’ Quest for Responsible Disclosure

The white hats are not only protecting the Medbeds from misuse but are also formulating a plan for responsible disclosure. They are acutely aware of the potential for misuse by powerful interests who would exploit the technology for personal gain or to solidify control over populations. Their goal is to ensure that when the time comes, the public is ready to receive and understand the implications of the Medbed technology.

The Role of Media and Public Perception

To achieve this, the white hats are quietly influencing media narratives and public perception. They are working to slowly acclimate people to the idea of advanced medical technology through subtle hints in popular culture, preparing society for the eventual revelation. They understand that an abrupt disclosure would be catastrophic, leading to panic and disorder.

The Case of Jeremy Sullivan

Consider the case of Jeremy Sullivan, a former high-ranking official in a covert government program. Sullivan, who had been diagnosed with an aggressive form of leukemia, was secretly treated with a Medbed.

Not only was his cancer eradicated, but his entire physiology was rejuvenated. Upon returning to his family, Sullivan’s drastic transformation sparked rumors and whispers among his neighbors and colleagues.

Bombshell! Military Deploys Med Beds & Trains for Revolutionary Operations – Inside Tesla’s Life-Changing Med Bed!

Sullivan’s case became a tightly guarded secret, with the white hats ensuring that his story did not leak to the public. However, a few brave insiders have started to speak out, providing detailed accounts of Sullivan’s miraculous recovery and the subsequent cover-up. These revelations are part of a broader effort to prepare the world for the truth about the Medbeds.

The Unseen Forces at Play

Behind the scenes, a war is being waged between the white hats and the dark forces seeking to exploit the Medbed technology. These dark forces, often referred to as the deep state, have long manipulated global events to maintain their grip on power. They see the Medbed as the ultimate tool to control humanity, offering the allure of health and longevity in exchange for absolute obedience.

The White Hats’ Strategy

The white hats, however, are vigilant. They are leveraging their extensive networks within the military and intelligence communities to thwart these nefarious plans. Their strategy involves not only protecting the Medbeds but also discrediting and dismantling the deep state’s influence.

This involves covert operations, strategic alliances, and the dissemination of information to trusted individuals who can help shape public opinion.

The Future Unveiled

As the white hats continue their efforts, the day when the Medbed technology is revealed to the world draws closer. When that day comes, humanity will be faced with a choice: embrace the transformative potential of this technology responsibly or succumb to the chaos that could ensue from its misuse.

Related – The Future Is Now: How MED BEDS Are Transforming Medical Care Worldwide!

The Medbed is not just a piece of advanced technology; it is a catalyst for a new era. It holds the promise of healing, rejuvenation, and a deeper understanding of our past and future. But with this promise comes a responsibility that we, as a society, must be prepared to accept.

Conclusion

The Medbed technology, shrouded in secrecy and controlled by the military white hats alliance, represents both a tremendous opportunity and a significant risk. The stories of miraculous recoveries, age regression, and the recovery of past life memories are not mere fantasies—they are happening now, behind the veil of secrecy maintained by the white hats.

As we stand on the brink of this new era, it is crucial that we understand the gravity of the situation. The white hats are working tirelessly to ensure that the Medbed is introduced in a way that benefits all of humanity. But the struggle for control is fierce, and the stakes could not be higher.

The world must be prepared for the revelation of the Medbeds and the profound changes they will bring. The future is unfolding before us, and the Medbed is at the heart of this transformation. Are we ready to embrace this new reality, or will we be overwhelmed by the chaos of its premature exposure? The choice is ours, and the time to decide is now.

=========================

The Hiroshima Nagasaki ‘Dress Rehearsal’

 

The Hiroshima Nagasaki ‘Dress Rehearsal’  James Corbett Interview with Michel Chossudovsky, 9 May 2024

Michel Chossudovsky of GlobalResearch.ca discusses his recent article: “The Hiroshima Nagasaki ‘Dress Rehearsal’: Oppenheimer and the U.S. War Department’s Secret September 15, 1945 ‘Doomsday Blueprint’ to ‘Wipe the Soviet Union off the Map.’”

 

Discussion includes the original, genocidal plan of the US War Department for a genocidal nuclear slaughter of the Soviets, how that plan has continued to the present day, the existential threat of nuclear holocaust and the prospects for an anti-war movement that can actually stand up to the military-industrial complex.

 

Much of the discussion centres around how most of the ‘official’ history of recent wars, in particular the second World War, is false.  Reality, supported by many documents, presents an entirely different picture where much of what the US and UK leaders focussed should be described as the worst war crimes ever committed, including numerous past and current genocides.

 

Video: Hiroshima-Nagasaki Dress Rehearsal. The Dangers of Nuclear War. Michel Chossudovsky with James Corbett – Global ResearchGlobal Research – Centre for Research on Globalization

===============================

Presumptive Nuclear War, the historic battle for peace and democracy

 

Editor’s note: This article is factual and essentially different from the ‘official’ Western views of history over the last 100 years.  It is indeed very frightening.  Best to download the PDF file to view the several graphics and videos.

“Preemptive Nuclear War”: The Historic Battle for Peace and Democracy. A Third World War Threatens the Future of Humanity

Presumptive Nuclear War^J the historic battle for peace and democracy  By Michel Chossudovsk, 5 March 2024

At no point since the first atomic bomb was dropped on Hiroshima on August 6th, 1945, has humanity been closer to the unthinkable.

 Introduction

At no point since the first atomic bomb was dropped on Hiroshima on August 6th, 1945, has humanity been closer to the unthinkable. All the safeguards of the Cold War era, which categorized the nuclear bomb as “a weapon of last resort”, have been scrapped.

Let us also recall the unspoken history of America’s doctrine pertaining to the conduct of nuclear war. 

Barely six weeks after the bombing of Hiroshima and Nagasaki, the U.S. War Department released a Secret Plan on September 15, 1945 to  bomb 66 cities of the Soviet Union with 204 atomic bombs.

The September 1945 Plan was to “Wipe the Soviet Union off the Map” at a time when the US and the USSR were allies. Confirmed by declassified documents, Hiroshima and Nagasaki served as a “Dress Rehearsal” (see historical details and analysis below). 

Video: The Dangers of Nuclear War: Michel Chossudovsky

Link to Video Here

Comments: Link to Odysee

Putin’s February 2022 Statement

Vladimir Putin’s statement on February 21st, 2022 was a response to US threats to use nuclear weapons on a preemptive basis against Russia, despite Joe Biden’s “reassurance” that the US would not be resorting to “A first strike” nuclear attack against an enemy of America:

“Let me [Putin] explain that U.S. strategic planning documents contain the possibility of a so-called preemptive strike against enemy missile systems. And who is the main enemy for the U.S. and NATO? We know that too. It’s Russia. In NATO documents, our country is officially and directly declared the main threat to North Atlantic security. And Ukraine will serve as a forward springboard for the strike.” (Putin Speech, February 21, 2022, emphasis added)

In July 2021, the Biden administration launched its Nuclear Posture Review (NPR) which was formally announced in October 2022.

The 2022 NPR includes what is described as a “nuclear declaratory policy of the United States”.

The 2022 NPR largely confirms the nuclear options developed by the Obama and Bush administrations predicated on the notion of preemptive nuclear war raised in President Putin’s speech.

The underlying US nuclear doctrine consists in portraying nuclear weapons as a means of “self defense” rather than as a “weapon of mass destruction”.

The NPR does not rule out the possibility of a “first strike” nuclear attack against Russia. According to the US Congress Research Service:

“The NPR [2022] suggests that the United States may use nuclear weapons in circumstances that do not involve potential adversaries’ potential use of nuclear weapons. …The review also asserts that an ‘effective nuclear deterrent is foundational to broader U.S. defense strategy,’ but does not elaborate.  (…)”

“Should deterrence fail, ‘the United States would seek to end any conflict at the lowest level of damage possible on the best achievable terms’— language implying that the United States might use nuclear weapons for purposes other than deterrence.” (CRS Reports. US Congress 2022 NPR, emphasis added)

The Privatization of Nuclear War 

It should be understood, that there are powerful financial interests behind the NPR which are tied into the $1.3  trillion nuclear weapons program initiated under President Obama.

Although the Ukraine conflict has so-far been limited to conventional weapons coupled with “economic warfare”, the use of a large array of sophisticated WMDs including nuclear weapons is on the drawing board of the Pentagon.

Dangerous narrative: The NPR proposes “increased integration of conventional and nuclear planning”, which consists in categorizing tactical nuclear weapons (e.g. B61-11 and 12) as conventional weapons, to be used on a preemptive basis in the conventional war theater (as a means of self defense)

According to the Federation of American Scientists, the total number of nuclear warheads Worldwide is of the order of 13,000.  Russia and the United States “each have around 4,000 warheads in their military stockpiles”.

The Dangers of Nuclear War are Real. Profit Driven. Two Trillion Dollars

Under Joe Biden, public funds allocated to nuclear weapons are slated to increase to 2 trillion by 2030 allegedly as a means to safeguarding peace and national security at taxpayers expense. (How many schools and hospitals could you finance with 2 trillion dollars?):

The United States maintains an arsenal of about 1,700 strategic nuclear warheads deployed on intercontinental ballistic missiles (ICBMs) and submarine-launched ballistic missiles (SLBMs) and at strategic bomber bases. There are an additional estimated 100 non-strategic, or tactical, nuclear weapons at bomber bases in five European countries and about 2,000 nuclear warheads in storage. [see our analysis of B61-11 and B61-12 below]

The Congressional Budget Office (CBO) estimated in May 2021 that the United States will spend a total of $634 billion over the next 10 years to sustain and modernize its nuclear arsenal. (Arms Control)

In this article, I will focus on

  • The Post Cold War shift in US Nuclear Doctrine,
  • A brief review of the History of US-Russia Relations since World War I
  • An Assessment of  the history of nuclear weapons going back to the Manhattan Projectinitiated in 1939 with the participation of both Canada and the United Kingdom.

Most people in America do not know that the Manhattan Project in the immediate wake of bombing of Hiroshima, Nagasaki in August 1945, was intended to formulate a nuclear attack against the USSR, at a time when the Soviet Union and the U.S. were allies. 

What I am referring to is the U.S Blueprint of September 15, 1945 according to which the US War Department planned to drop more than 200 atomic bombs on 66 cities of the Soviet Union. This is not mentioned in the history books. See:

http://blog.nuclearsecrecy.com/wp-content/uploads/2012/05/1945-Atomic-Bomb-Production.pdf 

A Note on the History of US-Russia Relations. The Forgotten War of 1918

From a historical standpoint the US and its Allies have been threatening Russia for more than 104 years starting during World War I with the deployment of US and Allied Forces against Soviet Russia on January 12, 1918, (two months following the November 7, 1917 revolution allegedly in support of Russia’s Imperial Army).

The 1918 US-UK Allied invasion of Russia is a landmark in Russian History, often mistakenly portrayed as being part of a Civil War. 

It lasted for more than two years involving the deployment of more than 200,000 troops of which 11,000 were from the US, 59,000 from the UK. Japan which was an Ally of Britain and America during World War I  dispatched 70,000 troops.

US Troops in Vladivostok, 1918

US Occupation Troops in Vladivostok 1918

US and Allied Troops in Vladivostok in 1918

The Threat of Nuclear War

The US threat of nuclear war against Russia was formulated more than 78 years ago in September 1945, when the US and the Soviet Union were allies. It consisted in a “World War III Blueprint” of nuclear war against the USSR, targeting 66 cities with more than 200 atomic bombs.

This diabolical project under the Manhattan Project was instrumental in triggering the Cold War and the nuclear arms race. (See analysis below).

Chronology

1918-1920:  The first US and allied forces led war against Soviet Russia with more than 10 countries sending troops to fight alongside the White Imperial Russian army. This happened exactly two months after the October Revolution, on January 12, 1918, and it lasted until the early 1920s.

The Manhattan Project initiated in 1939, with the participation of the UK and Canada. Development of the Atomic Bomb.

Operation Barbarossa, June 1941. Nazi Invasion of the Soviet Union. Standard Oil of New Jersey provided oil to Nazi Germany up until 1945

February 1945: The Yalta Conference. The meeting of Roosevelt, Churchill and Stalin.

“Operation Unthinkable”: A Secret attack plan against the Soviet Union formulated by Winston Churchill in the immediate wake of the Yalta conference. It was scrapped in June 1945.

April 12, 1945: The Potsdam Conference. President Harry Truman and Prime Minister Winston Churchill approve the atomic bombing of Japan.

September 15, 1945: A World War III Scenario formulated by the US War Department: A plan to  bomb 66 cities of the Soviet Union with 204 atomic bombs, when the US and USSR were allies. The Secret plan  (declassified in 1975) formulated during WWII, was released less than two weeks after the official end of WWII on September 2, 1945

1949: The Soviet Union announces the testing of its nuclear bomb.

Post Cold War Doctrine: “Preemptive Nuclear War”

The Doctrine of Mutually Assured Destruction (MAD) of the Cold War Era no longer prevails. It was replaced at the outset of the George W. Bush Administration with the Doctrine of Preemptive Nuclear War, namely the use of nuclear weapons as a means of “self-defense”against both nuclear and non-nuclear weapons states.

In early 2002, the text of George W. Bush’s Nuclear Posture Review had already been leaked, several months prior to the release of the September 2002 National Security Strategy (NSS) which defined, “Preemption” as:

“the anticipatory use of force in the face of an imminent attack”. 

Namely as an act of war on the grounds of self-defense

The MAD doctrine was scrapped. The 2001 Nuclear Posture Review not only redefined the use of nuclear weapons, so-called tactical nuclear weapons or bunker buster bombs (mini-nukes) could henceforth be used in the conventional war theater without the authorization of the Commander in Chief, namely the President of the United States.

Seven countries were identified in the 2001 NPR (adopted in 2002) as potential targets for a preemptive nuclear attack 

Discussing “requirements for nuclear strike capabilities,” the report lists Iran, Iraq, Libya, North Korea, and Syria as “among the countries that could be involved in immediate, potential, or unexpected contingencies.”  …

Three of these countries (Iraq, Libya and Syria) have since then been the object of US-led wars. The 2001 NPR also confirmed continued nuclear war preparations against China and Russia.

“The Bush review also indicates that the United States should be prepared to use nuclear weapons against China, citing “the combination of China’s still developing strategic objectives and its ongoing modernization of its nuclear and non-nuclear forces.”

“Finally, although the review repeats Bush administration assertions that Russia is no longer an enemy, it says the United States must be prepared for nuclear contingencies with Russia and notes that, if “U.S. relations with Russia significantly worsen in the future, the U.S. may need to revise its nuclear force levels and posture.” Ultimately, the review concludes that nuclear conflict with Russia is “plausible” but “not expected.” [that. was back in 2002] ( Arms Control) emphasis added.

The Privatization of Nuclear War

With tensions growing in major regions of the World, a new generation of nuclear weapons technology was unfolding making nuclear warfare a very real prospect. And with very little fanfare, the US had embarked on the privatization of nuclear war under a first-strike “preemptive” doctrine. This process went into full swing in the immediate wake of the 2001 Nuclear Posture Review (2001 NPR) adopted by the US Senate in 2002.

On August 6, 2003, on Hiroshima Day, commemorating when the first atomic bomb was dropped on Hiroshima (August 6 1945), a secret meeting was held behind closed doors at Strategic Command Headquarters at the Offutt Air Force Base in Nebraska. Senior executives from the nuclear industry and the military industrial complex were in attendance.

This mingling of defense contractors, scientists and policy-makers was not intended to commemorate Hiroshima. The meeting was intended to set the stage for the development of a new generation of “smaller”, “safer” and “more usable” nuclear weapons, to be used in the “in-theater nuclear wars” of the 21st Century.”

“Nuclear war has become a multibillion dollar undertaking, which fills the pockets of US defense contractors. What is at stake is the outright “privatization of nuclear war”.

Nuclear War against both China and Russia is contemplated

Russia is tagged as  “Plausible” but “Not Expected”. That was back in 2002.

Today at the height of the Ukraine war, a Preemptive Nuclear attack against Russia is on the drawing of the Pentagon. That does not however mean that it will be implemented.

A Nuclear War Cannot be Won?

We recall Reagan’s historic statement: “A nuclear war cannot be won and must never be fought. The only value in our two nations possessing nuclear weapons is to make sure they will never be used.”

Nonetheless, there are powerful voices and lobby groups within the US establishment and the Biden administration that are convinced that “a nuclear war is winnable”.

Flashback to Inter-War Period: Wall Street Finances Hitler’s Election Campaign 

According to Yuri Robsov, Wall Street and the Rockefellers were funding Germany’s war machine as well as Adolf Hitler’s election campaign:

American cooperation with the German military-industrial complex was so intense and pervasive that by 1933 the key sectors of German industry and large banks such as Deutsche Bank, Dresdner Bank, Danat-Bank (Darmstädter und Nationalbank), etc.  were under the control of American financial capital.

The political force that was intended to play a crucial role in Anglo-American plans was being simultaneously prepared. We are talking about the funding of the Nazi party and Adolf Hitler personally.

On January 4th, 1932, a meeting was held between British financier Montagu Norman (Governor of the Bank of England), Adolf Hitler and Franz Von Papen (who became Chancellor a few months later in May 1932) At this meeting, an agreement on the financing of the Nationalsozialistische Deutsche Arbeiterpartei (NSDAP or Nazi Party) was reached.

This meeting was also attended by US policy-makers and the Dulles brothers, something which their biographers do not like to mention.

A year later, on January 14th, 1933, another meeting was held between Adolf Hitler, Germany’s Financier Baron Kurt von Schroeder, Chancellor Franz von Papen and Hitler’s Economic Advisor Wilhelm Keppler took place, where Hitler’s program was fully approved.

It was here that they finally resolved the issue of the transfer of power to the Nazis, and on the 30th of January 1933 Hitler became ChancellorThe implementation of the fourth stage of the strategy thus begun.

World War II: “Operation Barbarossa”

There is ample evidence that both the US and its British ally were intent upon Nazi Germany winning the war on the Eastern Front with a view to destroying the Soviet Union:  

“Stalin and his entourage’s growing suspicions, that the Anglo-American powers hoped the Nazi-Soviet War would last for years, were based on well-founded concerns. This desire had already been expressed in part by Harry S. Truman, future US president, hours after the Wehrmacht had invaded the Soviet Union.

Truman, then a US Senator, said he wanted to see the Soviets and Germans “kill as many as possible” between themselves, an attitude which the New York Times later called “a firm policy”. The Times had previously published Truman’s remarks on 24 June 1941, and as a result his views would most likely not have escaped the Soviets’ attention. (Shane Quinn, Global Research, March 2022)

Hitler’s Operation Barbarossa initiated in June 1941 would have failed from the very outset had it not been for the support of Standard Oil of New Jersey (owned by the Rockefellers) which routinely delivered ample supplies of oil to the Third Reich.

While Germany was able  to transform coal into fuel, this synthetic production was insufficient. Moreover, Romania’s Ploesti oil resources (under Nazi control until 1944) were minimal. Nazi Germany largely depended on oil shipments from US Standard Oil.

Trading with the Enemy legislation (1917) officially implemented following America’s entry into World War II did not  prevent Standard Oil of New Jersey from selling oil to Nazi Germany. This despite the Senate 1942 investigation of US Standard Oil.

While direct US oil shipments were curtailed, Standard Oil would sell US oil through third countries. US oil was shipped to occupied France (officially via Switzerland, and from France it was shipped to Germany: “… The shipments went through Spain, Vichy France’s colonies in the West Indies, and Switzerland.”

Without those oil shipments instrumented by Standard Oil and the Rockefellers, Nazi Germany would not have been able to implement its military agenda. Without fuel, the Third Reich’s eastern front under Operation Barbarossa would most probably not have taken place, saving millions of lives. The Western front including the military occupation of France, Belgium and The Netherlands would no doubt also have been affected.

The USSR actually won the war against Nazi Germany, with 27 million deaths, which in part resulted from the blatant violation of Trading with the Enemy by Standard Oil.

“Operation Unthinkable”: A World War III Scenario Formulated During World War II

A  World War III scenario against the Soviet Union had already been envisaged in early 1945, under what was called  Operation Unthinkable, to be launched prior to the official end of World War II on September 2, 1945.

Roosevelt, Churchill and Stalin met at Yalta in early February 1945 largely with a view to negotiating the post war occupation of Germany and Japan.

Video: Yalta Conference

Meanwhile in the wake of the Yalta Conference, Winston Churchill had contemplated a Secret Plan to wage war against the Soviet Union: .

If you thought the Cold War between East and West reached its peak in the 1950s and 1960s, then think again. 1945 was the year when Europe was the crucible for a Third World War.

The plan called for a massive Allied assault on 1 July 1945 by British, American, Polish and German – yes German – forces against the Red Army. They aimed to push them back out of Soviet-occupied East Germany and Poland, give Stalin and bloody nose, and force him to re-consider his domination of East Europe. … Eventually in June 1945 Churchill’s military advisors cautioned him against implementing the plan, but it still remained a blueprint for a Third World War. …The Americans had just successfully tested an atomic bomb, and there was now the final temptation of obliterating Soviet centres of population”

Churchill’s “Operation Unthinkable” against Soviet Forces in Eastern Europe (see above) was abandoned in June 1945.

During his mandate as Prime Minister (1940-45), Churchill had supported the Manhattan Project. He was a protagonist of nuclear war against the Soviet Union, which had been contemplated under the Manhattan project as early as 1942, when the US and the Soviet Union were allies against Nazi Germany.

A  Blueprint for a Third World War using nuclear weapons against 66 major urban areas of the Soviet Union was officially formulated on September 15, 1945 by the US War Department (see section below).

The Potsdam Conference

Vice President Harry S. Truman was sworn in as president of the United States on April 12, 1945, after the death of Franklin D. Roosevelt, who died unexpectedly of a cerebral hemorrhage.

At the Potsdam meetings, President Truman entered into discussions (July 1945) with Stalin and Churchill: (see image right). The discussions were of a different nature to those of Yalta, specifically with regard to both Truman and Churchill who were both in favour of nuclear warfare:

“[British] PM [Churchill] and I ate alone. Discussed Manhattan (it is a success). Decided to tell Stalin about itStalin had told PM [Churchill] of telegram from Jap emperor asking for peace. Stalin also read his answer to me. It was satisfactory. Believe Japs will fold up before Russia comes in. I am sure they will when Manhattan appears over their homeland. I shall inform Stalin about it at an opportune time. (Truman Diary, July 17, 1945, emphasis added)

What this statement from Truman’s Diary confirms is that Japan would “fold up” and surrender to the US  “before Russia comes in”. Ultimately this was the objective of the atomic bombs dropped on Hiroshima and Nagasaki.

While Stalin was casually informed by Truman regarding the Manhattan Project in July 1945, sources suggest that the Soviet Union was aware of the Manhattan Project as early as 1942. Did Truman tell Stalin that the atom bomb was intended for Japan?

“We met at 11.00am. today.[ That is, Stalin, Churchill and the US president].

But I had a most important session [without Stalin?] with Lord Mountbatten and General Marshall [US joint Chiefs of Staff] before that. [This meeting was not part of the official agendaWe have discovered the most terrible bomb in the history of the world. It may be the fire destruction prophesied in the Euphrates Valley era, after Noah and his fabulous ark. Anyway, we think we have found the way to cause a disintegration of the atom. An experiment in the New Mexico desert was startling – to put it mildly. Thirteen pounds of the explosive caused a crater six hundred feet deep and twelve hundred feet in diameter, knocked over a steel tower a half mile away, and knocked men down ten thousand yards away. The explosion was visible for more than two hundred miles and audible for forty miles and more.

This weapon is to be used against Japan between now and August 10th.I have told the secretary of war, Mr Stimson, to use it so that military objectives and soldiers and sailors are the target and not women and children. Even if Japs are savages, ruthless, merciless and fanatic, we as the leader of the world for the common welfare cannot drop this terrible bomb on the old capital or the new. He and I are in accord. The target will be a purely military one and we will issue a warning statement asking the Japs to surrender and save lives. I’m sure they will not do that, but we will have given them the chance. It is certainly a good thing for the world that Hitler’s crowd or Stalin’s did not discover this atomic bomb. It seems to be the most terrible thing ever discovered, but it can be made the most useful.” (Truman’s Diary, Potsdam meeting on July 18, 1945)

The discussion on the Manhattan Project does not appear in the official minutes of the meetings.

The Infamous “WW III Blueprint” to Wage a Nuclear Attack against the Soviet Union (September 15, 1945)

Barely two weeks after the official end of World War II (September 2, 1945), the US War Department issued  a directive  (September 15, 1945) to “Erase the Soviet Union off the Map” (66 cities with 204 atomic bombs), when the US and USSR were allies, confirmed by declassified documents. (For further details see Chossudovsky, 2017)

According to a secret (declassified) document dated September 15, 1945, “the Pentagon had envisaged blowing up the Soviet Union  with a coordinated nuclear attack directed against major urban areas.

All major cities of the Soviet Union were included in the list of 66 “strategic” targets. The tables below categorize each city in terms of area in square miles and the corresponding number of atomic bombs required to annihilate and kill the inhabitants of selected urban areas.

Six atomic bombs were to be used to destroy each of the larger cities including Moscow, Leningrad, Tashkent, Kiev, Kharkov, Odessa.

The Pentagon estimated that a total of 204 atomic bombs would be required to “Wipe the Soviet Union off the Map”. The targets for a nuclear attack consisted of sixty-six major cities.

One single atomic bomb dropped on Hiroshima resulted in the immediate death of 100,000 people in the first seven seconds. Imagine what would have happened if 204 atomic bombs had been dropped on major cities of the Soviet Union as outlined in a secret U.S. plan formulated during the Second World War.

Hiroshima in the wake of the atomic bomb attack, 6 August 1945

The document outlining this diabolical military agenda had been released in September 1945, barely one month after the bombing of Hiroshima and Nagasaki (6 and 9 August, 1945) and two years before the onset of the Cold War (1947).

The secret plan dated September 15, 1945 (two weeks after the surrender of Japan on September 2, 1945 aboard the USS Missouri, see image below) , however, had been formulated at an earlier period, namely at the height of World War II,  at a time when America and the Soviet Union were close allies.

The Manhattan project was launched in 1939, two years prior to America’s entry into World War II in December 1941. The Kremlin was fully aware of the secret Manhattan project as early as 1942.

Hiroshima and Nagasaki: Dress Rehearsal for Planned Nuclear Attack against the Soviet Union

Were the August 1945 Hiroshima and Nagasaki attacks used by the Pentagon to evaluate the viability of  a much larger attack on the Soviet Union consisting of more than 204 atomic bombs? The key documents to bomb 66 cities of the Soviet Union (15 September 1945) were finalized 5-6 weeks after the Hiroshima and Nagasaki bombings (6, 9 August 1945):

“On September 15, 1945 — just under two weeks after the formal surrender of Japan and the end of World War II — Norstad sent a copy of the estimate to General Leslie Groves, still the head of the Manhattan Project, and the guy who, for the short term anyway, would be in charge of producing whatever bombs the USAAF might want. As you might guess, the classification on this document was high: “TOP SECRET LIMITED,” which was about as high as it went during World War II. (Alex Wellerstein, The First Atomic Stockpile Requirements (September 1945)

The Kremlin was aware of the 1945 plan to bomb sixty-six Soviet cities.

The documents confirm that the US was involved in the “planning of genocide” against the Soviet Union. 

Let’s cut to the chase. How many bombs did the USAAF request of the atomic general, when there were maybe one, maybe twobombs worth of fissile material on hand? At a minimum they wanted 123. Ideally, they’d like 466. This is just a little over a month after the bombings of Hiroshima and Nagasaki.

Of course, in true bureaucratic fashion, they provided a handy-dandy chart (Alex Wellerstein, op. cit)

 

=====================

1984/2024 – The Hidden Hope in Orwell’s Warning.

Editor’s note: download PDF documents, link below, to view several graphics.

1984-2024 The Hidden Hope in Orwell’s Warning  BY PATRICIA HARRITY, 26 JANUARY, 2024

The nation is a surveillance-laden world where history has been rewritten to suit the narrative of leaders who have control over every aspect of life. They retain that control through the use of propaganda, manipulation?of information, and suppression of dissent. Censoring is a valuable tool and even certain words are censored by thought Police, in favour of “Newspeak” but “Don’t you see that the whole aim of Newspeak is to narrow the range of thought? In the end we shall make thought crime literally impossible, because there will be no words in which to express it.” (1984)

This is life in the nation of Oceania, as depicted by George Orwell in his dystopian classic novel “1984?  which was published in 1949. which is very often described as a “cautionary tale.” Orwell utilised the political and historical context of the mid-20th century and through the life of the protagonist, a low-ranking member of the ruling party named Winston Smith, warns of the dangers of authoritarianism and the erosion of personal freedom,

The tale has been spoken about very often in the past few years and memes with Orwell quotes being shared all over the internet such as the perhaps most well known “Big Brother is Watching You.” also “In a Time of Universal Deceit — Telling the Truth Is a Revolutionary Act” and they have alerted us to the many parallels with our nations today, we are living in that world we thought only existed in Orwell’s imagination. and as is said many times in memes “This is 1984!”

You Were Not Mad!

Of course there is not everyone who will agree and will call those of us who choose to tell the truth as crazy conspiracy theorists, but another Orwell 1984 quote covers that “Being in a minority, even in a minority of one, did not make you mad. There was truth and there was untruth, and if you clung to the truth even against the whole world, you were not mad.

Yet, sadly the propaganda machine works hard to constantly reinforce that label, because “if all others accepted the lie which the Party imposed—if all records told the same tale—then the lie passed into history and became truth. ‘Who controls the past’ ran the Party slogan, ‘controls the future: who controls the present controls the past.”

We know this is due to the decades long plan for totalitarian control and power and ”Power is not a means; it is an end. One does not establish a dictatorship in order to safeguard a revolution; one makes the revolution in order to establish the dictatorship. The object of persecution is persecution. The object of torture is torture. The object of power is power. Now you begin to understand me.”

Particularly important to remember these days!!

As you can see this could go on for a while! But as we look at the many similarities between our world today and 1984 which many of us now see as, if not a prophecy, the fictionalising of a real life plan, and it may seem all doom and gloom. However, according to by Paul Cudenec, from Winter Oak, there is “hidden hope,” in amongst Orwell’s warning.

1984/2024 – the Hidden Hope in Orwell’s Warning.

by Paul CudenecWinter Oak

Forty years have now passed since the year in which George Orwell situated his imaginary dystopian society.

The novel Nineteen Eighty-Four was never meant to be a literal prophecy, of course, but, for the first three-and-a-half decades after its publication in 1949, it held a powerful hold on the public imagination, at least in Britain.

When I was growing up in the 1970s, the four figures “1984” were a terrifying byword for the totalitarian future that we all somehow knew was just round the corner, if we didn’t remain vigilant.

I think that Orwell’s book, along with Aldous Huxley’s 1931 novel Brave New World, helped stave off the advent of the kind of world they were both warning us against, by making it abundantly clear that nobody, regardless of political affiliation, welcomed such a future.

The date lost much of its power, of course, when the year came and went. Suddenly 1984 was just part of everyday life – it was the year that your girlfriend left you, that you passed your driving test or that Everton beat Watford in the FA Cup Final.

And although many of us still remained concerned about the prospect of a Big Brother state strengthening its grip, there was no longer the sense of counting grimly down to that fateful year – instead people started looking forward to the bright new future heralded by The Year Two Thousand.

Now, however, the date 1984 has passed back into a semi-abstract condition, especially for all those born after that date, and the title of the book seems much less important than the content, which is all too relevant today.

Some of the outer form of the story is admittedly now rather dated. Re-reading it for the purposes of this article, I was struck by the way in which Orwell is very much describing a bomb-damaged post-war London that had already disappeared by the time I was born and which he imagines being inhabited by a white working class (the “proles”) that has now been largely displaced.

The idea that “one literally never saw” foreigners walking the streets of London [1] would already have sounded a little strange in real-life 1984, let alone today!

I also noticed a bit of a plausibility flaw in the plot, in that Winston Smith, having taken such painstaking care never to be seen talking to his lover Julia in public, merrily brings her with him to meet O’Brien, whom he merely hopes is on his side.

He then blurts out, within seconds of arriving at the official’s home: “We are enemies of the Party”! [2] and goes on to agree to “corrupt the minds of children”, “disseminate venereal diseases” and “throw sulphuric acid in a child’s face” [3] if asked to do so by the underground resistance known as the Brotherhood.

Would anyone really do that?

But these are small quibbles in comparison with the uncanny way in which Orwell foresaw so much of the psychological control and manipulation we are enduring today.

For instance, we can immediately recognise, in the pages of the novel, those who are currently imposing the Great Reset and its United Nations Sustainable Development Goals.

“What kind of people would control this world had been equally obvious. The new aristocracy was made up for the most part of bureaucrats, scientists, technicians, trade-union organisers, publicity experts, sociologists, teachers, journalists, and professional politicians.

“These people, whose origins lay in the salaried middle class and the upper grades of the working class, had been shaped and brought together by the barren world of monopoly industry and centralized government”. [4]

Likewise with the extent to which their control is exerted: “Even the Catholic Church of the Middle Ages was tolerant by modern standards. Part of the reason for this was that in the past no government had the power to keep its citizens under constant surveillance…

“With the development of television, and the technological advance which made it possible to receive and transmit simultaneously on the same instrument, private life came to an end.

“Every citizen, or at least every citizen important enough to be worth watching, could be kept for twenty-four hours a day under the eyes of the police and in the sound of official propaganda…

“The possibility of enforcing not only complete obedience, but complete uniformity of opinion on all subjects, now existed for the first time”. [5]

The globalist agenda of the current criminocracy is also clearly depicted: “The two aims of the Party are to conquer the whole surface of the earth and to extinguish once and for all the possibility of independent thought”. [6]

The three warring zone of Orwell’s multipolar world have ideologies that are only superficially different: “In Oceania, the prevailing philosophy is called Ingsoc, in Eurasia it is called Neo-Bolshevism, and in Eastasia it is called by a Chinese name usually translated as Death-Worship… Actually the three philosophies are barely distinguishable, and the social systems which they support are not distinguishable at all”. [7]

Orwell’s fictional tyrants even indulge in the same long-term date-related planning for their ramping up of control, declaring that by 2050: “The whole climate of thought will be different. In fact there will be no thought, as we understand it now. Orthodoxy means not thinking – not needing to think. Orthodoxy is unconsciousness”. [8]

They are out to abolish natural human life – “all children were to be begotten by artificial insemination (artsem, it was called in Newspeak) and brought up in public institutions” [9] – and are proud of the success of their social distancing project – “we have cut the links between child and parent, and between man and man, and between man and woman”. [10]

Alongside this goes the mobilising of indoctrinated youth to impose the official dogma. “It was almost normal for people over thirty to be frightened of their own children. And with good reason, for hardly a week passed in which The Times did not carry a paragraph describing how some eavesdropping little sneak – ‘child hero’ was the phrase generally used – had overheard some compromising remark and denounced its parents to the Thought Police”. [11]

The myth of Progress plays an important part in maintaining social licence for this fictional totalitarian regime.

“Day and night the telescreens bruised your ears with statistics proving that people to-day had more food, more clothes, better houses, better recreations – that they lived longer, worked shorter hours, were bigger, healthier, stronger, happier, more intelligent, better educated, than the people of fifty years ago. Not a word of it could ever be proved or disproved”. [12]

Central to Ingsoc’s psychological control over the population is the invention and development of Newspeak, a politically-correct jargon aimed at inserting the Party’s worldview into the very terms needed to think and communicate.

To talk and write using words in their original sense was regarded as Oldspeak [13] and thus doubeplusungood [14] and might even lead to an extended stay in a joycamp. [15]

Newspeak serves an important role in the regime’s criminalisation of freedom.

Alongside the well-known Ingsoc concept of thoughtcrime there is also facecrime – “to wear an improper expression on your face (to look incredulous when a victory was announced, for example)”. [16]

Orwell adds: “To do anything that suggested a taste for solitude, even to go for a walk by yourself, was always slightly dangerous. There was a word for it in Newspeak: ownlife, it was called, meaning individualism and eccentricity”. [17]

Alongside the mental techniques of doublethink and crimestop, which I described in a previous article, [18] we find blackwhite – “a loyal willingness to say that black is white when Party discipline demands this” and also “the ability to believe that black is white, and more, to know that black is white, and to forget that one has ever believed the contrary”. [19]

Vaccines are safe and effective. Women can have penises. Critical thinking is dangerous.

Even when old words are not actually abolished, they are stripped of their essential meaning.

Orwell explains: “The word free still existed in Newspeak, but it could only be used in such statements as ‘This dog is free from lice’ or ‘This field is free from weeds’. It could not be used in its old sense of ‘politically free’ or ‘intellectually free’, since political and intellectual freedom no longer existed even as concepts, and were therefore of necessity nameless”. [20]

This manipulation has a real impact in creating a safer and inclusive social space which is free of disinformation, hate speech or any kind of conspiracy theory or denialism: “In Newspeak the expression of unorthodox opinions, above a very low level, was well-nigh impossible”. [21]

One of the most memorable lines from the novel is the Party’s insistence that “who controls the past controls the future: who controls the present controls the past”. [22]

Any inappropriate content that has previously been published has to be sent into oblivion down the memory hole.

“It is intolerable to us that an erroneous thought should exist anywhere in the world”, [23] stresses Inner Party man O’Brien and we learn that no item of news or any expression of opinion which conflicts with the needs of the moment is “ever allowed to remain on record”. [24]

The result is a totally disorientated population. “Everything faded into mist. The past was erased, the erasure was forgotten, the lie became truth”. [25]

“In the end the Party would announce that two and two made five, and you would have to believe it. It was inevitable that they should make that claim sooner or later: the logic of their position demanded it. Not merely the validity of experience, but the very existence of external reality, was tacitly denied by their philosophy. The heresy of heresies was common sense”. [26]

O’Brien’s words take on a certain postmodernist tinge when he insists: “We control matter because we control the mind. Reality is inside the skull… Nothing exists except through human consciousness”. [27]

Above all, the ruling mafia want to conceal the unpalatable reality of their control. “All the beliefs, habits, tastes, emotions, mental attitudes that characterize our time are really designed to sustain the mystique of the Party and prevent the true nature of present-day society from being perceived”. [28]

Fake opposition is another tool used by Ingsoc to trick and crush potential dissidents, in particular the cartoonish figure of arch-subversive Emmanuel Goldstein, author of a book called The Theory and Practice of Oligarchical Collectivism, [29] who has a definite whiff of Karl Marx about him.

Rather than being denied the oxygen of publicity by the regime, as one might expect, his face and words are constantly served up on the telescreens as a hated binary opposite of Ingsoc figurehead Big Brother.

“Goldstein was delivering his usual venomous attack upon the doctrines of the Party – an attack so exaggerated and perverse that a child should have been able to see through it, and yet just plausible enough to fill one with an alarmed feeling that other people, less level-headed than oneself, might be taken in by it”, [30] writes Orwell.

Although Goldstein is “advocating freedom of speech, freedom of the Press, freedom of assembly, freedom of thought”, he does so in “rapid polysyllabic speech which was a sort of parody of the habitual style of the orators of the Party, and even contained Newspeak words: more Newspeak words, indeed, than any Party member would normally use in real life”. [31]

Deliberate and malignant inversion of meaning is as much a part of Orwell’s dystopia as it is of today’s world, most famously with the Party slogan “War is peace. Freedom is slavery. Ignorance is strength”. [32]

Ingsoc and the other similar global ideologies are said to have grown out of philosophies to which they still pay “lip-service”, while reversing their original ideals in “the conscious aim of perpetuating unfreedom and inequality”. [33]

“The Party rejects and vilifies every principle for which the Socialist movement originally stood, and it chooses to do this in the name of Socialism”. [34]

“Even the names of the four Ministries by which we are governed exhibit a sort of impudence in their deliberate reversal of the facts. The Ministry of Peace concerns itself with war, the Ministry of Truth with lies, the Ministry of Love with torture, and the Ministry of Plenty with starvation”. [35]

Combined with this demonic inversion of value comes a malevolent obsession with power, all too familiar to us today.

O’Brien declares: “The Party seeks power entirely for its own sake. We are not interested in the good of others; we are interested solely in power… We know that no one ever seizes power with the intention of relinquishing it. Power is not a means it is an end. One does not establish a dictatorship in order to safeguard a revolution; one makes a revolution in order to establish the dictatorship. The object of persecution is persecution. The object of torture is torture. The object of power is power”. [36]

In another of the chilling phrases for which Nineteen Eighty-Four is so renowned, he adds: “If you want a picture of the future, imagine a boot stamping on a human face – for ever”. [37]

It is important to the regime that its control is so complete that it becomes impossible even to imagine that it could one day come to an end.

O’Brien tells Winston: “If you have ever cherished any dreams of violent insurrection, you must abandon them. There is no way in which the Party can be overthrown. The rule of the Party is for ever. Make that the starting-point of your thoughts”. [38]

The sense of powerlessness imposed by the Party seems to work on Winston, at least with regard to the prospects of his personal micro-rebellion, and he considers it “a law of nature that the individual is always defeated”. [39]

The fact that he ends up betraying his principles under torture in Room 101, denouncing his Julia and conceding that he loves Big Brother, can leave the reader with a heavy and disempowering feeling of defeat and I have long considered this to be a flaw in the book.

But a closer look reveals that there is something else going on there as well, a deep counter-current of hope flowing against the tide of totalitarian repression.

Some of that hope is seen by Winston in the 85% of the population known as the “proles”, even though their gullibility and lack of imagination frustrate him: “They needed only to rise up and shake themselves like a horse shaking off flies. If they chose they could blow the Party to pieces to-morrow morning. Surely sooner or later it must occur to them to do it? And yet – -!” [40]

He also finds encouragement in the ability of someone such as Julia to see through the lies peddled by the regime, despite the towering wall of deceit it has constructed around its activities.

She startles Winston “by saying casually that in her opinion the war was not happening. The rocket bombs which fell daily on London were probably fired by the Government of Oceania itself, ‘just to keep people frightened’.” [41]

The human capacity to see the truth and to remain faithful to it in the most difficult of situations is key to Orwell’s despite-it-all variety of hope.

“Being in a minority, even a minority of one, did not make you mad. There was truth and there was untruth, and if you clung to the truth even against the whole world, you were not mad”. [42]

He also describes an innate feeling of right and wrong which enables us to sense that there is something deeply awry with the society in which we are living.

Winston, reflecting on his own unease, muses: “Was it not a sign that this was not the natural order of things… Why should one feel it to be intolerable unless one had some kind of ancestral memory that things had once been different?” [43]

It is this source of hope beyond the fallible and mortal individual to which Smith tries to cling during his interrogation.

He tells O’Brien: “Somehow you will fail. Something will defeat you. Life will defeat you… I know that you will fail. There is something in the universe – I don’t know, some spirit, some principle – that you will never overcome”. [44]

Orwell, his health fading as he wrote the novel, could project no prospect of immediate change on to his fictional society.

However, he has Winston say to Julia: “I don’t imagine that we can alter anything in our lifetime. But one can imagine little knots of resistance springing up here and there – small groups of people banding themselves together, and gradually growing, and even leaving a few records behind, so that the next generation can carry on where we leave off”. [45]

These are not the words of a man who has surrendered to despair.

But the most important element in this concealed counter-current of Orwellian optimism is something I only noticed in my most recent re-reading.

The appendix, ‘The Principles of Newspeak’, looks back on the Ingsoc period in the past tense, from the vantage point of a more distant future in which the Big Brother nightmare has evidently come to an end and in which some kind of freedom and common sense have been restored.

It remarks, for instance: “Only a person thoroughly grounded in Ingsoc could appreciate the full force of the word bellyfeel, which implied a blind, enthusiastic acceptance difficult to imagine to-day”. [46]

So over the horizon there is a “to-day” in which the “blind, enthusiastic acceptance” of totalitarianism is not only a thing of the past, but even “difficult to imagine”.

Confirming the point, the unknown writer of this pseudo-historical account notes that “the final adoption of Newspeak had been fixed for so late a date as 2050”. [47]

These are the very last words on the last page of the book and Orwell is telling us here, right at the end of his account, that the Ingsoc regime fell before it was able to achieve its long-term agenda of completely erasing human freedom!

The Party could be overturned! The boot didn’t stamp on a human face for ever!

And how was this possible, in the face of the overwhelming full-spectrum control of people’s lives and minds that Orwell describes to such terrifying effect?

It can only have been by people refusing to let go of the truth and having faith in the spirit of the universe that will eventually prevent death from prevailing over life, slavery over freedom, or power over humanity.

Orwell must have written Nineteen Eighty-Four out of desperate, inspired, need to play his part in the struggle against the forces of darkness which lay ahead.

He did what he could and, as I said, for many years his warning helped hold back the advance of tyranny.

Now it’s up to us to take the baton of deep defiance that he is holding out to us, across the decades.

It’s up to us to draw inspiration from our ancestral memory of natural order, to see through the system’s lies, to band together in small groups and form knots of resistance that will keep the tattered flag of freedom flying proudly in the years to come.

We have to do so without any hope that victory will necessarily be achieved in our lifetimes, but must simply aim to do all that is needed in order that, in Orwell’s words, “the next generation can carry on where we leave off”.

On the other hand, who knows?

Maybe the fall of the system is coming sooner than we might think.

Orwell has Winston remark that “the only victory lay in the far future”. [48]

But then he wrote that 75 years ago.

Perhaps that far future is now!

[1] George Orwell, Nineteen Eighty-Four (Harmondsworth: Penguin, 1958), p. 96.
All subsequent page references are to this work.
[2] p. 138.
[3] p. 140.
[4] pp. 164-65.
[5] p. 165.
[6] p. 156.
[7] pp. 158-59.
[8] p. 46.
[9] p. 56.
[10] p. 214.
[11] p. 23.
[12] p. 63.
[13] p. 32.
[14] p. 39.
[15] p. 247.
[16] p. 53.
[17] p. 69.
[18] ‘Marxist doublethink and the disabling of resistance’.
https://winteroak.org.uk/2023/12/19/marxist-doublethink-and-the-disabling-of-resistance/
[19] pp. 169-70.
[20] pp. 241-42.
[21] p. 249.
[22] p. 199.
[23] p. 205.
[24] p. 35.
[25] p. 63.
[26] pp. 67-68.
[27] pp. 212-13.
[28] p. 168.
[29] p. 150.
[30] pp. 13-14.
[31] p. 14.
[32] p. 25.
[33] p. 163.
[34] p. 172.
[35] p. 172.
[36] pp. 211-12.
[37] p. 215.
[38] p. 210.
[39] p. 111.
[40] p. 59.
[41] p. 125.
[42] p. 173.
[43] p. 51.
[44] pp. 216-17.
[45] p. 127.
[46] p. 245.
[47] p. 251.
[48] p. 111.

Source used – Paul Cudenec Substack | Website

===================

Without numerous anti-Semitic fascists, Zionism would not have been possible

 

Editor’s note: This article provides an invaluable background to the current activities in and surrounding Israel.  Check the PDF download to view several graphics.

Without numerous anti-Semitic fascists^J Zionism would not have been possible  BY RHODA WILSON ON DECEMBER 26, 2023

Imperial socialism has always been at the heart of 20th-century fascism, writes Matthew Ehret. Without the force of numerous anti-Semitic fascists throughout the last two centuries, Zionism would have never been possible.

“The role of British intelligence’s hidden hand in shaping the state of Israel, as well as international fascism more broadly, is often ignored,” he said.

Ehret recently wrote an essay titled ‘Sir Henry Kissinger: Midwife to New Babylon’ describing how Henry Kissinger’s 2012 prophecy that “in 10 years, there will be no more Israel” is linked to mystical Babylon.

As his essay is more than most would read in one sitting, we are republishing it in sections over a series of articles, you can read Part 1 HERE.  The following is the section of Ehret’s essay with the same title.  You can read his full essay HERE.

‘Greater Israel’ as a British Imperial Project

By Matthew Ehret

In 1914, the man who later became Israel’s first president, Chaim Weizman, stated:

“Should Palestine fall within the British sphere of influence, and should Britain encourage a Jewish settlement there, as a British dependency, we could have in 20 to 30 years a million Jews there-perhaps more; they would. . . form a very effective guard for the Suez/Canal.”

These words indicated a deeply underappreciated value that leading Jewish Zionists had for the British empire’s plans for global control over a century ago; these Zionists believed the empire could further their own plans for a Jewish state. Lord Shaftesbury’s Zionist project was launched in 1839, the British Empire created the Palestinian Exploration Fund in 1865, and the founder of modern Zionism, Theodor Herzl, joined the cause of convincing the world’s Jews to live in the desert, but the role of British intelligence’s hidden hand in shaping the state of Israel, as well as international fascism more broadly, is often ignored. [1]

It wasn’t ignored by Sir Winston Churchill, then Lord of the British Admiralty during WWI. He wrote forcefully about the international Jewish conspiracy to take over the world on one hand, but he also spoke proudly of Zionism, saying in 1917: “If, as it may well happen, there should be created in our own lifetime by the banks of the Jordan a Jewish state under the protection of the British crown … [it] would be especially in harmony with the truest interests of the British Empire.”

While Churchill could not be said to be a supporter of Hitler’s National Socialism, up until 1935, he loudly proclaimed his admiration for Hitler and also spoke fondly of Mussolini’s Black Shirts. Churchill was also a rampant racist who presided over the mass extermination of “lower races” as displayed in the controlled Bengal famine (killing three million Indians) in 1943. Like most other dominant Round Table leaders of Britain at this time, Churchill was an “imperial socialist,” which has always been at the heart of 20th-century fascism.

Without the force of numerous anti-Semitic fascists throughout the last two centuries, Zionism would have never been possible.

Take as an example the case of Lord Arthur Balfour, a leading strategist of the Rhodes-Milner Round Table Group. Balfour co-authored the Balfour Accords in 1917 alongside Leo Amery, Lord Milner, and Walter Rothschild. It shouldn’t surprise anyone to learn that, like Churchill, Lord Balfour was also a devoted white supremacist, Zionist, and supporter of fascism. Prime Minister Lloyd George, who oversaw the project at this time, was an ardent social imperialist (aka international fascist) who openly praised Nazism alongside another pro-Nazi royal named King Edward VIII.

While Leo Amery was not openly anti-Semitic, his son John was a devoted supporter of British Nazism and Adolph Hitler. His other son, Julian Amery, worked closely with unreconstructed Nazis after World War II as part of Operation Gladio. It was under Julian Amery [2] that Nazis like Otto Skorzeny, Walter Rauft, and Alois Brunner were transplanted to the Middle East and even worked for the Mossad after the CIA played a direct role in establishing that organisation in 1951.

Additionally, Leo Amery was a close collaborator of pro-fascist Zionist leader Vladimir Ze’ev Jabotinsky during the former’s management of British Mandate Palestine (1925-1929) and co-founder of the Jewish Legion, which Jabotinsky went on to control. More than a Zionist, Amery was a believer in Cecil Rhodes’ vision for “a Church of the British Empire.”

Amery stated of his peculiar religion: The Empire is not external to any of the British nation. It is something like the Kingdom of Heaven within ourselves.” (Take note that the term “Kingdom of Heaven” was the name of the Templar Kingdom of Jerusalem, which will play a larger role in this story).

After leading the passage of anti-Jewish immigration laws in England in 1905 that prevented persecuted Russian Jews from coming to the UK, Balfour wrote in 1919 that Zionism would “mitigate the age-long miseries created for Western civilisation by the presence in its midst of a Body which it too long regarded as alien and even hostile, but which it was equally unable to expel or to absorb.”

Balfour saw the creation of Israel as one stone that could kill two birds by 1) providing an excuse to purge the Jews from Europe and 2) creating a perfect weapon for destabilisation in the geopolitical pivot of Halford Mackinder’s Heartland and the cross-section of all major civilisational forces on the earth.

Caption: The Silk Road trade routes of the Han Dynasty were revived again under the Tang Dynasty and have historically played a major role in disrupting systems of global empire by encouraging trade, cooperation, and understanding around diverse cultures (in opposition to the Crusader agenda that has promoted “clash of civilisations” ideologies).

In his book Der Judenstat, Theodor Herzl openly admitted this when he said:

“We should, there, form a portion of the rampart of Europe against Asia, an outpost of civilisation as opposed to barbarism. We should, as a neutral state, remain in contact with all Europe, which would have to guarantee our existence.”

Herzl was clear that like his British Imperial (and typically anti-Semitic pro-fascist sponsors), he envisioned Israel’s borders to extend “from the Brook of Egypt to the Euphrates.”

In the 1890s, Herzl was not yet settled on the specific location of the Jewish national homeland. William Eugene Blackstone, a devotee of John Nelson Darby, leader of a British sect called “The Plymouth Brethren,” sent him a voluminous report justifying Jerusalem as the only location ordained by God. This earned him the title of “the father of Zionism” by American Supreme Court Justice Louis D. Brandeis. In 1891, Blackstone drafted a memorandum dubbed “Palestine for the Jews,” which called for US leadership in establishing a homeland for the persecuted Jews of Russia. The memorandum was signed by 413 prominent Americans, including John D. Rockefeller, J. P. Morgan, Supreme Court Justice Cyrus McCormick, the heads of dozens of major newspapers, the Speaker of the House, and many members of Congress.

Footnotes:

[1] According to evidence available on record, Theodor Herzl was many things, but his own man was likely not one of them. His rise to prominence from a low-level journalist in 1893 to the leader of global Zionism within three years is unprecedented and doesn’t happen without vast institutional patronage. Additionally, his connection to Colonel Goldsmid (head of London’s Maccabee movement) from 1894 to 1904 is one of many important red flags of higher influences interfacing with Herzl. Colonel Goldsmid played a role in the Boer War alongside the new Round Table movement and was also the overseer of the British Empire’s Jewish colonial project in Argentina, which is no small thing. The Jewish colonial projects overseen by the British Empire in Argentina – like the Uganda scheme proposed by Chamberlain later (and submitted by Herzl to the World Zionist Congress in 1903) – was an indirect way of corralling international Jews from across Russia and Europe into controlled zones of British imperial domain that would serve as gateways towards a final Palestinian Zionist infusion. Ultimately, the empire’s success in sparking World War I and undermining the Ottoman Empire sped things up and made these stepping stones unnecessary. The fact that Herzl was also an antisemite who saw great practical use in antisemitism to make Europe and Russia unliveable for the Jews is a big red herring. It places him in conjunction with the intelligence agencies (often occult-theosophical) throughout the secret police operations of the Russian, French, Prussian, and British empires that coordinated the Dreyfuss Affair fiasco in France and the Protocols of Zion forgeries in Russia and their translations across the English world.

[2] In 1954, Egypt and the United Kingdom signed an agreement over the Suez Canal and British military basing rights. It was short-lived. By 1956 Great Britain, France, and Israel concocted a plot against Egypt aimed at toppling Nasser and seizing control of the Suez Canal, a conspiracy that enlisted the Muslim Brotherhood. The British went so far as to hold secret meetings with the Muslim Brotherhood in Geneva. According to author Stephen Dorril, two British intelligence agents, Col. Neil McLean and Julian Amery (Leo Amery’s son), helped MI6 organise a clandestine anti-Nasser opposition. Julian Amery would be directly linked to the Gladio networks. In Stephen Dorril’s book ‘MI6: Fifty Years of Special Operations’ he writes, “They [McLean and Amery] also went so far as to make contact in Geneva…with members of the Muslim Brotherhood, informing only MI6 of this demarche which they kept secret from the rest of the Suez Group [which was planning the military operation via its British bases by the Suez Canal]. Julian Amery forwarded various names to [Britain’s Foreign Secretary].” The full story can be found in Dorril, Stephen. (2000) ‘MI6: Fifty Years of Special Operations’. The Free Press, New York p. 356, 629 and Chung, Cynthia, (2022) ‘Empire on Which the Black Sun Never Set’, Canadian Patriot Press p. 286

Part 3 in our series is the sections of Ehret’s essay titled ‘The Plymouth Brethren Gnostic Overhaul of Christianity’, ‘The 1826 Albury Conferences on Prophecy’, ‘A Jesuit Sleight of Hand Sets the Stage for Zionism’, ‘The Cabalistic Fraud of Apostolic End Times Cults’ and ‘The Fraud of British Israelism’.

About the Author

Matthew Ehret is the Editor-in-Chief of the ‘Canadian Patriot Review’, a Senior Fellow at the American University in Moscow, and Director of ‘The Rising Tide Foundation’. He has authored three volumes of the ‘Untold History of Canada’ book series and four volumes of the ‘Clash of the Two Americas’. He hosts ‘Connecting the Dots’ on TNT Radio, ‘Breaking History’ on Badlands Media, and ‘The Great Game’ on Rogue News.

=========================

BRICS+: Cure for Intellectual Toxicity of Cultural Relativism

BRICS. Cure for Intellectual Toxicity of Cultural Relativism  By Matthew Ehret

The rampant anti-Chinese (and Russian) bias pervasive in today’s society has a lot to do with the fact that people have been conditioned by a very messy world outlook known as “cultural relativism”.

While attractive on the surface due to its promotion of “respect and toleration” for other cultures on the one hand and its condemnation of imperialism on the other, an ugly paradox sits below the surface of such ideology which ironically facilitates modern imperialism’s grip on the world.

The paradox is most easily seen by exposing the core assumption of reasoning that lay at the foundation of all cultural relativist theory which follows:

ASSUMPTION: Because every culture is unique and equally precious, no culture has a right to influence another culture since: A) all influence could only be exerted by force of the stronger upon the weaker and B) if such influence were to occur, it can only be to the detriment of the culture being “influenced”.

CONCLUSION: Cross pollination of cultures can never occur organically as there is nothing intrinsically universal amongst all cultures that can serve as a basis for their poetic, artistic, scientific exchanges. Since all cultural groups contain no universality, “truth” is reduced to the subjective personal experience of each culture. The very definition of “knowledge” and “truth” is thus rendered totally impotent.

An embarrassing moral and political problem thus arises.

Since the “whole” of humanity objectively exists in the form of many people, cultures and nations spread over the surface of the earth in space and time, it is a fact of life that cultures will and must co-exist. The questions then follow: in what form will those cultures co-exist and how will the whole be defined? How can diverse cultures interact with each other in such a way where that each contributes the best of their own discoveries and poetic treasures with their neighbors if there is no such thing as “better or worse” (as everything is relative to personal experience and “feelings”)? How can any harmony of the parts relative to a whole exist if there is no such thing as “truth and beauty” (or inversely “lies and ugliness”)? How can one’s mind cease from turning into reason-free ooze of gender-free societies, woke-ism and post-truth-ism?

Ugly Twins: Cultural Relativism and Imperial Geopolitics

It was blindly asserted by such modern “geopolitical philosophers” as Samuel Huntington and Sir Bernard Lewis whose ideology exerts such powerful influence over western thinking today; humanity could only exist as a sum of infinitely divisible parts within a “multi-cultural mosaic”, at best ignoring each other and tolerating differences but never taking the time to understand or appreciate our sameness.

Huntington famously concluded in his influential book “Clash of Civilizations” that peace on earth is fundamentally impossible since Confucianism, Hinduism, Islam, Christianity and Judaism are all fundamentally incapable of coexisting peacefully due to their distinct ideologies and intrinsic differences. This cynical perspective fundamentally denied each cultures’ parallel characteristics, and common discoveries clothed behind different appearances yet containing the same substance of Love, Justice, Truth, Beauty and morality shaping both the universe and human condition as a living expression of the force guiding the creative unfolding of that universe.

The Reality of Universal Progress

The annoying fact which such thinkers as Huntington and his followers choose to ignore is that the greatest renaissances and rates of progress recorded in the human experience never occurred by distinct cultural groups simply transforming themselves at random, or doing what ones’ ancestors did, but rather all periods of progress were shaped by the cross pollinating of the best ideas of various cultures, never just replacing one set of ideas FOR another, or adding one set of ideas TO another, but rather creating new wholesthat are more than the sum of their parts and containing ever greater degrees of power to creatively discover and communicate truths of those universal principles guiding mankind and nature. This is the proper definition and purpose of “science” and “art” and their effects as technological progress as expressed across ALL cultures.

The explosion in Population growth is not a proof that humanity is a cancer as some misguided modern environmentalists are want to do, but rather that we are a species of constant perfectibility.

This was true when the Greeks Solon, Pythagoras and Plato ventured to North Africa to learn the greatest philosophical and scientific discoveries of their day. It was true when greatest ideas of India and China cross pollinated during the Gupta Period. It was true when African/Greek ideas and modes of thinking were re-discovered and applied by the Jewish, Christian and Arab scholars who organized the great 8th Century Ecumenical Alliance of the Carolingian Empire under the leadership of the Caliph of Baghdad and Charlemagne.

The Forgotten Jewish-Christian-Muslim Alliance and China’s Silk Road

 

MATTHEW EHRET ·
MARCH 16, 2022
Note to reader: This article (and chapter in the upcoming volume 3 of Clash of the Two Americas) is the sequel to the February 4th report Putting the “Jewish Conspiracy” into Perspective, and earlier The 1509 League of Cambrai and BRI Today: How NOT to Repeat History,

 

Read full story

It was again a reality when the Abbasid Dynasty and the later Andalusian Renaissance when Islamic scholars such as Haroun Al-Rashid and Ibn Sina again collected the greatest poetic and scientific works of the east and west to reform the Islamic world. It was also true when those same Greek/African/Arabic works were then transmitted to the Christian world in the form of the 15th century Florentine renaissance whose application saw the greatest rise in the potential population density humanity has ever experienced.

CAPTION: The renaissance principle, whose lawful obedience is so vital for the successful survival of the human species is expressed in every major culture’s history at various periods. Several leading representatives are pictured above (top row): Cardinal Nicholas of Cusa, Rabbi Philo of Alexandria, and the Ibn Sina (bottom row): Confucius, Plato and Gupta Empire Leader Chandragupta I.

The New Silk Road Manifests as the Basis for a New Global Renaissance

Today, a new paradigm has arisen through the multi-cultural BRICS process, Shanghai Cooperation Organization and New Silk Road. This new paradigm is not based on a passive co-existence of parts as they are managed by a Hobbesian Leviathan, but rather on the commitment to common goals and principles of progress which all participating cultures aspire to. The Chinese President laid out these concepts clearly in his August 22, 2023 address at the 15th annual BRICS Summit in South Africa:

As an ancient Chinese philosopher observes, “Change is the nature of the universe.” … Whatever resistance there may be, BRICS, a positive and stable force for good, will continue to grow. We will forge stronger BRICS strategic partnership, expand the “BRICS Plus” model, actively advance membership expansion, deepen solidarity and cooperation with other EMDCs, promote global multipolarity and greater democracy in international relations, and help make the international order more just and equitable. The gathering between BRICS countries and more than 50 other countries in South Africa today is not an exercise of asking countries to take sides, nor an exercise of creating bloc confrontation. Rather, it is an endeavor to expand the architecture of peace and development… China stays committed to an independent foreign policy of peace and the building of a community with a shared future for mankind. As a developing country and a member of the Global South, China breathes the same breath with other developing countries and pursues a shared future with them. China has resolutely upheld the common interests of developing countries… Hegemonism is not in China’s DNA; nor does China have any motivation to engage in major-power competition. China stands firmly on the right side of history, and believes that a just cause should be pursued for the common good.

As I outlined in my recent essay ‘Is the Multipolar Alliance ‘Controlled Opposition’? The Case of Two Green Paradigms’, based on the measurable actions of China’s economic, security, energy and cultural program over the past decade, the words spoken by the Chinese president are not rhetoric.

The concept of humanity as a species of cooperation is the natural state of mankind whenever we allow our creative reason to actively shape the experience of our senses rather than allowing our blind senses to shape our reason. The collective experience of universal history and human progress testify to the fact that this outlook is the natural way human beings survive and grow within the universe whose Creator may be called by many names, yet whose law of moral and creative reason is the same.

Whether one is Confucian, Muslim, Jew, Buddhist, Hindu, or Christian, we are absolutely distinct from the other living beasts due to our capacity to discover, and change the principles of creation making our lives happier, more purposeful and ensuring ever greater peace and security for the generations to come after us.

========================

The Kissinger Report & U.S. Government Policy to Depopulate the Planet

 

The Kissinger Report ^0 U.S. Government Policy to Depopulate the Planet  By Expose, 26 August 2023

Your Government is trying to kill you.

That’s a very bold claim to make.

Even Dr Robert Malone was sceptical about this claim and the various “depopulation agenda” theories involving Covid-19. 

But his mind has changed since receiving an analysis of official documents from a colleague.  The incriminating documents include The Kissinger Report.

“Reading through the comments, observations, and associated documents, I was stunned by the frank, ‘Realpolitik’-based arguments in favour of a US Federal Government global population control/depopulation agenda, as well as the similarities to various activities known to have been performed by the Bill and Melinda Gates Foundation, World Health Organization, United Nations and other non-governmental (and governmental) organisations.

“As far as I am concerned, one must recognise and acknowledge the amazing parallels between preceding population policy and many of the ‘public health’ policies and actions which were implemented in the USA and most western countries (particularly the ‘five eyes’ nations).”

Dr Robert Malone

 

By Dr Robert Malone

Recently, a respected colleague, Gavin DeBecker, sent me an email comprising a lengthy analysis and attached documents concerning (formerly classified) National Security Study Memorandum (NSSM) 200 titled the ‘Kissinger Report. He also provided links to associated supplemental federal government documents including the National Security Directive Memorandum 314 ‘Implications of Worldwide Population Growth for US Security and Overseas Interests, 11/26/75. Gavin is a well-published author, including the pivotal work titled ‘The Gift of Fear : Survival Signals That Protect Us from Violence’, and he had prepared this analysis (below) while preparing a new book. His text, thoughts and analysis are shared by permission of the author.

In considering these documents, it is helpful to keep in mind that Henry Kissinger is a key mentor of Klaus Schwab, was involved (together with the CIA) in originally creating and continues to consult with the World Economic Forum as well as with the CCP/Xi Jinping.

[The short video below is not included in Dr. Malone’s article.  We’ve included it as a brief introduction.  The video features Dr. David Ayoub and Dr. Stan Monteith at the Radio Liberty Conference 2005.  You can watch Dr. Ayoub’s full presentation on Bitchute HERE or Rumble HERE.  Dr. Monteith is no longer with us and his website Radio Liberty no longer exists.  You can find some of his videos HERE.]

Dr. David Ayoub and Stan Monteith on NSSM 200 Govt Depopulation Policy, Radio Liberty Conference 2005 (2 mins)

It all started with a meeting held in June 1973:

Referring to a memorandum written by General Taylor, General Draper and his colleagues presented their views that the population explosion in developing countries was not only a threat to US interests in the economics and in the development of those countries but also, more fundamentally, presented a danger to the United States’ politico military interests.

General Taylor and General Draper asked Ambassador Porter for his advice on how to proceed with the subject. They said they had talked to General Scowcroft in Mr. Kissinger’s office about it in terms of the possibility of a National Security Council (“NSC”) study. General Draper said he had written the President explaining his views that rapid population growth could endanger the concept of a generation of peace and recommending that the President speak out on this subject.

Ambassador Porter said that they were talking to someone who was already converted to this whole idea. He felt that the US population programs were not closely enough connected to the US’s overall aid programs but were handled too separately. He believed there was no use pumping in aid funds and food without closer correlation with population programs.

Ambassador Porter said he thought that the Soviet Union would not be much interested in internal population programmes because, although they were interested in birth control for China, they wanted to fill their own empty space in Siberia. He agreed, however, with General Draper’s argument that the Soviets should be interested, as the US is, in encouraging developing countries to reduce their rates of population growth. Ambassador Porter said he would make a formal proposal to Kissinger to put the matter on the agenda for the President-Brezhnev talks.

Ambassador Porter and Mr. Claxton both observed that it is important to be able to show abroad that we are not asking peoples of other countries to do more than we are doing at home.

General Draper then brought up his concern that the amendments to the AID bill proposed by 22 members of the House Foreign Affairs Committee would be harmful because … as he understood it, the earmarking for population funds which had been essential to the success of the program was being dropped. He said he would testify before the Foreign Affairs Committee the following week and would urge the Committee to leave $125 million earmarked for population programmes alone and to transfer the health subject with $25 million to the food and nutrition section.

Kissinger Report and Subsequent US Population Control Policy:

The classified National Security Study Memorandum (“NSSM”) known as ‘The Kissinger Report’, undertaken at the direction of President Nixon, laid out detailed plans for population reduction in many countries.  These plans became official US policy in 1975.

Note: USAID figures most prominently in the report and was a co-author, along with CIA and Department of State.

The memorandum and subsequent policies developed from the report were observed as a way the United States could use human population reduction to limit the political power of undeveloped nations, ensure the easy extraction of foreign natural resources, prevent young anti-establishment individuals from being born, and to protect American businesses abroad from interference from nations seeking to support their growing populations.

National Security Study Memorandum 200, Wikipedia

The summary of The Kissinger Report stated that:

  1. actions to accommodate continued population growth up to 6 billion by the mid-21st century without massive starvation or total frustration of developmental hopes; and
  2. actions to keep the ultimate level as close as possible to 8 billion rather than permitting it to reach 10 billion, 13 billion, or more.

This major objective – to not exceed 8 billion – combined with the fact that we hit the 8 billion mark in 2022 might help explain the intense urgency of so many planned and organised actions during the past three years.

Perhaps the most obvious result of covid lockdowns and the interruption of commerce is the current record number of people at risk of starvation.  Before the covid era, the number of people at risk of starvation was 135 million.  By the end of 2021, that had increased by another 135 million people, and in 2022, it then increased another 67 million.  The result is currently about 10 million deaths from starvation, 3 million of them children.

Further reading: World Hunger Facts, Action Against Hunger

The Kissinger Report created a template and spending plan that includes:

  • Fertility and contraceptive research.
  • Biomedical research would be doubled.
  • Field testing of existing technology.
  • Development of new technology.
  • Oral contraceptives (optimal steroid hormone combinations and doses for populations).
  • Intra-uterine devices of differing size, shape, and bioactivity should be developed and tested to determine the optimum levels of acceptability
  • Sterilisation of men and women has received wide-spread acceptance in several areas. Female sterilisation has been improved by technical advances with aparoscopes, culdoscopes, and greatly simplified abdominal surgical techniques … the use of tubal clips, trans-cervical approaches, and simpler techniques can be developed. For men, several current techniques hold promise but require more refinement.
  • Leuteolytic and anto-progesterone approaches to fertility control including use of prostaglandins.
  • Injectable contraceptives for women … administered by pare-professionals.  Currently limited by their side effects and potential hazards… can be overcome with additional research.
  • Male contraceptive, in particular an injection which will be effective for specified periods of time.
  • Injection which will assure a woman of regular periods.  The drug would be given by pare-professionals once a month or as needed to regularise the menstrual cycle.

The report recommends population control only in Least Developed Countries (“LDC”), and cautions that “We must take care that our activities should not give the appearance to the LDCs of an industrialised country policy directed against the LDCs,” though the policy was precisely that.

The report stresses more than once that weaving the concepts of family planning into health programs is a strategy for gaining acceptance and will: “help the US contend with the ideological charge that the US is more interested in curbing the numbers of LDC people than it is in their future and well-being.  We should recognise that those who argue along ideological lines have made a great deal of the fact that the US contribution to development programs and health programs has steadily shrunk, whereas funding for population programs has steadily increased.”

The Report also mentioned mandatory programmes of population control: “A growing number of experts are of the belief that the outlook is much harsher and far less tractable than commonly perceived… the conclusion of this view is that mandatory programmes may be needed and that we should be considering these possibilities now.”

And asked: “Is the US prepared to accept food rationing to help people who can’t/won’t control their population growth? … Are mandatory population control measures appropriate for the US and/or for others?”

The Report proposes the commercial approach in which US government uses “big-medical research to improve the existing means of fertility control and to develop new ones.” It favours “large-scale programmes that will induce fertility decline in a cost-effective manner,” and enthusiastically describes controversial examples, such as what it calls “the remarkably successful experiments in India in which financial incentives, along with other motivational devices, were used to get large numbers of men to accept vasectomies.”

The Report stated that primary emphasis on “population moderation” should be applied to “the largest and fastest growing developing countries where there is special US political and strategic interest.”  In 1974, the named countries were India, Bangladesh, Pakistan, Nigeria, Mexico, Indonesia, Brazil, the Philippines, Thailand, Egypt, Turkey, Ethiopia and Columbia.

Note: 33 years later, in 2021, the US donated millions of mRNA vaccines to the following countries, all of which were specifically named in The Kissinger Report: Bangladesh, Pakistan, Nigeria, Indonesia, Brazil, Philippines, Thailand, Ethiopia, and Columbia.

The policies expanded even further in 1976 after the NSC advocated for the use of withholding food as a strategy of influence (food power), and using military force to prevent population growth.

United Nations Fund for Population Activities (“UNFPA”)

The Kissinger Report stated it is “desirable in terms of US interests” to work with the UNFPA which already had projects in more than 70 countries.

Pressure to develop a global strategy of population reduction was advanced to the Nixon Administration by Major General William Draper, who had been instrumental in establishing UNFPA and also co-founded the Population Crisis Committee.

UNFPA ran programs described by critics as forced abortions and coercive sterilisations. The UNFPA gave money from the US to support the People’s Republic of China’s birth control campaign, widely accused of major human rights violations, mainly on women and girls.  Likewise, UNFPA provided funding for the forced sterilisation program promoted by the Indian government, exposed in 2014 when dozens of women died in “sterilisation camps” to which they were lured in exchange for social benefits.

The program also received funds from other governments and various US organisations, including the Bill and Melinda Gates Foundation.

Further reading: The Kissinger Report and the World Population Control, The Wolf Report, 27 August 2017

Top 10 Methods Used to Reduce Human Population

Here are the top 10 methods “they” are using to reduce human population down to a “manageable” amount, at which point those remaining (apparently including the heirs to the fortunes of those driving this bus) will all live in a “utopian society”.

  • Targeted sterilisation
  • Wars
  • No cures for diseases
  • Sexually transmitted diseases
  • Environmental manipulation
  • Abortions
  • Genetically modified organisms
  • Same sex relationships
  • The food supply
  • Transhumanism

================

THE UNACKNOWLEDGED SECRET SPACE SALVATION UNDER OUR FEET – Updated

THE UNACKNOWLEDGED SECRET SPACE SALVATION UNDER OUR FEET – Updated  By Kerry Cassidy, ProjectCamelotportal.com, 27 July 230727

Editor’s note: Check Kerry Cassidy’s website ProjectCamelotportal.com for more exceptional related information.

The question is do people who are witnessing the billions of dollars going into human trafficking and adrenochrome production and distribution and the statistics in terms of people made disabled by the vax understand this is part of an OVERALL HUMAN GENETIC REVOLUTION INVOLVING TORTURE, MURDER, TOTALITARIAN GLOBAL CONTROL AND POPULATION CULLING EFFORT BY A CERTAIN group of psychopaths with a very calculated agenda?  The roll out of digital currency will simply solidify their dominion over you.  We the awakened are faced with massive numbers of unenlightened VICTIMS in our midst that have already condemned themselves to a life of slavery, half-life, servitude and torture.  Even if you stop the VAX booster mainlining by a substantial portion of the population tomorrow the damage to those as Ed Dowd’s statistics clearly show is done.  While inside the underground cities supposedly we are told, by those in the Secret Space Program that MEDBEDS could reverse all of this the liklihood that they will reach TOPSIDE anytime in the next embattled 7 years is miniscule.  We battle the portion of the human family that has already gone underground and off planet for the right to exist and gain access to the technologies and solutions which would make life worth living for those billions that made the wrong choice and probably don’t have the brain power to change anytime soon enough to make a difference.

You need to ask yourself and the representatives of the white hats and Trump whether they have made a deal with those in charge of the Secret Space Program and its assets and military might and off planet tech.  Because this is where the rubber meets the road in terms of the future of humanity.  At this point the destiny of humanity hangs in that balance.  Although the majority of the surface dwellers appear to have no idea about this reality even though it stands in their way of freedom and redemption for our species.

People are so busy pretending that Secret Space and our dealings with off and hidden on planet and intradimensionals are figments of our imaginations that they waste their precious time and resources denying this reality even in the face of their demise.  While people like Musk successfully mislead people on surface Earth into believing in useless out-of-date technologies the hidden underground/undersea bases roll along using energy from the vacuum and real Tesla tech proven decades ago to eliminate the need for sickness, poverty and scarcity of any kind.  One wonders at that terrible dichotomy that exists just a few miles below our feet.  One group of humanity thrives while the other is embattled with the entire deception which is life on surface Earth with FAKE WARS, FAKE GOVERNMENTS, FALSE RELIGIOUS OPOIDS AND NON-STOP MEDIA DECEPTION…battling for the remaining scraps of food, water and air still available for the moment but for how long?

While humans on the surface argue about whether aliens are real and think the Earth is flat our brothers travel untold distances to the stars, galaxies and terraform other planets.  Slave ships enter Earth through portals and gather up the children and humans displaced by war and starvation perpetuating the dynamic of humans slave colonies onto other worlds.  While satanic elite run a rampant slave trade and murder of children nonstop with the help of the CIA, FBI, law enforcement and governments around the world who holding their hands out to be included on the dole.

The white hats play a game of cat and mouse with those in positions of power.  Making deals with mafia heads and theoretically searching for those within the secret gov and secret space program and the families in Basel Switzerland who still hold the keys to the financial systems of this world… sequestered and dominated by some unseen hidden hand or alien race that hides off planet and orchestrates the timing of the takeover of Planet Earth.  The ones with the biggest guns win according to white hat Juan O Savin who himself wears a disguise to hide his true identity not from those in the know…who know exactly who he is but from the people who for some reason pose a threat to his ability to operate in the shadows one presumes. While Trump plays the embattled “candidate” while ruling in secret as President and Commander-in-chief allowing the Chinese to perpetrate a CCP led Biden show for the benefit or detriment of the American people as a distraction and ultimately place to lay blame for the destruction and exposure of the deep state while the real secret state continues undeterred and unacknowledged.

They built our space program on the backs of the sweat and tears of the surface dwellers…It’s time we take back that which is our own.

Addendum:   … the idea here is that ALL THE PROBLEMS on surface Earth could be solved by the tech already in use by the secret space program that is operating BENEATH OUR FEET in underground cities and bases around the world. JFKjr (our VP) and Trump will need to negotiate with that rogue civilization which are our brothers and sisters, in order to FREE UP the tech and bring it to the surface. People need to become aware of this in order to demand that such negotiations take place on our behalf. If left to their own devices there is no guarantee the White Hats will be successful in this. What they need is the WILL OF THE PEOPLE BEHIND THEM to make this happen.

Article By Kerry Cassidy July 18, 2023

====================================

The Epic War Between the Khazarian Cabal and Christian Russia Reaching A Climax

 

The Epic War Between the Khazarian Cabal and Christian Russia Reaching A Climax  By Preston James, the Intel Drop. Posted by State of the Nation, 28 April 2023

Is there now an age old battle between the Khazarian Mafia and the Russians being fought on Planet Earth that now coming to an end point?

According to an unconfirmed report yesterday, Israel sent troops into Ukraine to fight the Russians for Zelensky’s army, and they were soundly defeated in short order. This kind of action seems to be a hopeless endeavor as the Russian Federation’s apparent complete weapons superiority (so far) seems to assure an RF victory in the Ukraine.

And there are now confirmed reports that a secret Underground Base in the Ukraine near Kiev which was staffed by hundreds of NATO officers was hit and destroyed by a hypersonic RF missile fired from one of the RF fighter aircraft.

Zelensky had claimed that the Ukraine was set to launch a major counteroffensive against the RF that would crush them and retake Crimea. So far no such thing has occurred, nor is it likely to occur at all. If the RF decides to it could remove all access to Kiev by highway and air in about 20 minutes and turn Brussels and NATO/Gladio/DVD to ashes in less than an hour.

Supposedly the RF has not even deployed their most secret weaponry in the Ukraine which involves scalar frequency and time-warping technology of their advanced particle quantum physics.

After 8 years of restraint while Russians in the Donbass were repeatedly attacked, sniped and terrorized by the efforts of the RKM cutouts inside America’s State Dept. who paid for and deployed the Maidan Coup d’état, the RF decided enough was enough and they could no longer tolerate the aggression of NATO against innocent Russians living there and their very RF borders as well as the violation of the Minsk Agreement. Obviously Crimea and Donbass were historically Russian and most citizens there spoke Russian and wanted to become part of the RF.

RKM = Rothschild-controlled Khazarian Mafia

And the extensive US and Western sanctions leveled against the RF appears to have greatly increased the economic might of the RF. The American blowing up of the natural gas pipeline to Europe appears to have brought immense oil profits to the RF. As the German people will find out in due time, this act to cut off their inexpensive RF natural gas will cripple their industrial might and economy, and transform them into a third world nation in due time.

How strange for the German and EU leaders to favor this act of sabotage and the Globalist-mandated destruction of their own societies and economies? What has been done to the brains of these Western leaders who are betraying their populace that pay their salaries and why do they want to destroy their own nations and their own sovereignty?

The answer lies in what the top inverted sidekick of the head Globalist has stated: the human brain has been hacked. The Globalist top leadership has stated publicly, “in the future you will own nothing but will be happy”. Why? Because the masses have apparently had their brains mass hacked and they have been cloned to think with one mindset. Has all this been done by the deployment of very advanced Beyond-Black brain hacking technology? How come some people just are affected by these brain hacks? Seems evident that hardcore truthers and very independent strong-willed folks are impervious to all this.

As you can imagine, if this Intel is accurate, RF weapons superiority poses a very dangerous situation for Israel if they continue trying to support the Ukraine Army  and defeat the RF in the Ukraine and trying to serve as the RKM’s COL top Cutout. (COL = City of London) It does seem that the military might of the Pentagon appears to be greatly weakened under the invalid non-elected Biden Regime. Israel is already divided and crumbling politically within. Sadly, there are many Israelis who are sick of their government’s persecution of Palestinians and want peace, but their voices are ignored by the RKM-based govt even when they take to the streets and demonstrate. Their desire for peace is not shared by the RKM top leader who want to continue using American soldiers as their cannon fodder to destroy many Mideast Nations and promotes their exceedingly evil Greater Israel Plan. Of course, they don’t want to do the fighting themselves or have their children do it either.

And Israel is likely being covertly punished for doing 9/11 which they did with help from the NeoCons and PNACers in America. After 9/11, the NeoCons and PNACers were warned by the US Secret Space War Program that any more such actions would result in Israeli military capabilities being turned to dust in short order.

Without the full military strength of the Pentagon supporting Israeli defense, it is likely they will wither up and become notably weak. And if rumors are true, the Nuclear Snake-eaters (NEST) folks have supposedly cleaned out all the Israel Nukes stored in various Israeli Embassies while they supposedly had “labor problems” and were closed. If true, then it looks like their “Samson Option” is now quite limited unless they can manipulate the Pentagon in staring a Nuclear War with the RF.

If these reports on RF superiority are accurate, the Russian Federation now likely has the advanced high tech means to completely decapitate NATO/Gladio/DVD in Brussels as well as all Israeli defense and nuclear arms using advanced quantum particle weaponry. Anyone who doubts this claimed advanced RF weaponry need only check out the USS Donald Cook incident when the ship slightly probed Russian defenses and an RF fighter was sent up in response. The USS Donald Cook activated and locked on its missile radar systems to follow the fighter. The RF pilot’s response was to activate a special wing pod with advanced quantum particle physics capability that completely shut off the ship’s power for a period of time, leaving it literally dead in the water.

Not only is it claimed by some that RF missiles have antigravity generating nosecones that allow hyper-supersonic speeds without any air resistance, these missiles are hived and continually communicate with one another for constant retargeting as any conditions change. These missiles can supposedly corkscrew and zig zag and are almost impossible to stop. And some insiders believe that the RF has hypersonic torpedos that share these same capabilities and small unmanned drone subs that trail most US subs from a distance and are electronically cloaked making them difficult to identify.

One interesting factor appears to be the pre-existing Secret Space War Treaty between the America and the RF that they would only use their developed Secret Space War weaponry to protect Planet Earth from any Alien Invaders as President Ronald Reagan was quite concerned about. Reagan pushed hard to establish their partnership and for the USA to create and develop the Deep-Black and Beyond-Black Star Wars weaponry. Are these new advanced RF weapons part of a cadre of Secret Space War weaponry or something different that the RF developed to deploy during conventional warfare on Planet Earth?

Why has the COL/RKM been obsessed for over 200 years with destroying Persia (now Iran) and Mother Russia? Apparently it is because both Persia and Russia destroyed Khazaria after warning the to stop murdering and robbing travelers who passed through Khazaria as a central travel nexus. Some insider experts believe that the RKM is still obsessed with forever destroying Persia (Iran) and Russia for their destruction of Khazaria in the 1200’s AD.

Some top insiders are very frightened that as the Russian Federation crushes all Ukrainian military efforts, this will mean the complete worldwide end of the Rothschild Khazarian Mafia (RKM) and eventually all their Cutouts and traitors to the USA.

By the time this occurs it may however end up that it is too late and the whole USA will be finished as a total collapse of the USD occurs, and RKM/COL efforts to replace it with a pure digital system is  unable to succeed.

There are hundreds of MS-13 now in the USA in our major cities and they have been well armed by The Company (also known as the CIA). These monsters were trained by the US Army special forces inside the USA and armed by the Fast and Furious Operation run by one of the greatest American Traitors and law breakers in history. It is known that The Company has been distributing confiscated police weapons from large cities to gang bangers for many years, in addition along with their partnership with the drug cartels which they keep fighting between themselves so any one of them does not get too powerful. The trademark of these MS-13 monsters is tattoos all over their bodies and faces, and a habitual practice of chopping up their victims. These animals have lost their very souls and function as savage monsters.

The role of The Company administering drugs to MS-13 to cause this blood thirsty savage homicidal attitude is unknown but is suspected based on what insiders have claimed. The first experiments done with chemicals that remove the need for sleep for up to a week and made soldiers incredibly blood thirsty and savage was done in Vietnam, involved the hallucinogen “BZ”. This was described in the movie “Jacob’s Ladder”. According to insider reports this experiment to make soldiers hyper aggressive, sleepless, to fight and win no matter what failed miserably as those administered the drug turned on each other and murdered all they could, yes, even their own fellow soldiers.

Another similar experiment by The Company was the distribution of “Bath Salts” to drug users in certain large West Coast cities. One side effect in addition to the brutal animal like aggression of those ingesting this drug toward their victims was the attempt to chew the victims face off. As the drug took effect, body temperature  rose quickly and most who ingested this quickly removed their clothes before attacking their prey in a psychotic, unconscious rage. This was covered up for the most part but did leak into the local press somewhat.

The amazing thing about all these traitorous acts by top Democrats, some RINOs and RKM Cutouts (SES boys?) inside America to destroy America will undoubtedly end up with the Globalists quickly destroying these traitors as well as all their Cutouts if these Globalists can win this war against the RF and the BRICS Nations because they will no longer be needed and will become excess baggage.

The apparent fall back routines that the Globalists and NeoCon/PNACers have is to suddenly collapse the economy and monetary system, install a pure digital “Block Chain” monetary system, deny use to anyone not following their new rules of expression, to destroy the US Constitution and Bill of Rights, and to erode any will of the “We The People” by bringing in millions of illegals up to the border in buses and trucks where they are dumped. Obviously the Globalists are paying for all this with American money that was fraudulently issued or printed at will with no limitations.

If this fails the final fall back routine of the Globalists is likely to initiate a complete full scale ICBM Nuclear war with the RF and BRICS nations, while the top dogs seek safety in DUMBs and wait underground for until they can re-establish a new feral system with mostly robots and very few humans, which is what they wanted all along anyway. The problem these Globalist madmen face is that it is uncertain that their Nukes will work because the RF’s new advanced weapons have been rumored to be able to neutralize all of them.

If on the other hand the RF and the BRICS win this secret colossal battle for world power it seems very likely that the American people will want final judgement and justice against all their Globalist NWO top Cutouts and Traitors that sold America out, destroyed its Rule of Law and Judicial System, destroyed its economy and let in millions of illegals to destroy America from top to bottom.

Many hope that the RF are the good guys here and are responding to the RKM and NATO’s aggressions since 2014 and especially to the violation of the Minsk Agreement. However we do not know yet for certain what the RF’s long-term agenda is here, or why some of their tanks display the letter “Z” on the sides. Could this World War 3 actually be an internecine war between different factions of those seeking to run the world by leaders of the RF who have their own secret long-term agenda?

And the final question remains as President Ronald Reagan once posed to the world. Could it be that Planet Earth is being attacked by a very advanced alien force that is using Beyond-Black brain-hacking mass mind control technologies which large segments of the human masses have no real defense against?

The USN Navy Secret Space War people once stated that as soon as they reached “weapons parity” with Alien ETs who were malevolent, they would disclose the Alien Presence, something many in the Pentagon and the USG/SES do not want. Last year the USN released numerous gunsight photos of UFOs and stated more would be coming this year. And the anti-gravity generator patent of Salvador Pais who invented one meant to generate anti-gravity was made public, itself an astounding disclosure. And, there are of course the many longstanding rumors about the Beyond-Black “Solar Warden” Secret Space Program.

Stay tuned because you can bet this whole situation is going to get very interesting soon. Obviously, when USG officials have been mind-hacked en masse using Beyond-Black advanced particle quantum physics, this would seem incredibly confusing to those who remain unhacked and sense how nuts these USG leaders are acting, being so willing to destroy America and American society while sitting around in an apparent mass fugue state.

___

====================

The British Crown, Privy Council and ‘City
of London’ Effectively Rule America

 

The British Crown^J Privy Council and City rule the US  By State of the Nation, 20 March 2023

You know that “Special Relationship” that so many POTUSes say exists between the US and UK? So special that each U.S. President who repeated the Tavistock-fabricated mantra knew that they were really working for “the Crown”, not the American people.

By the way, according to the U.S. Constitution, that’s called:

T R E A S O N 

State of the Nation

This exposé will be a relatively short one.

That’s because all the evidence proving treason at the highest echelons of the US government is now in plain sight.  This has never happened before!

Each piece of evidence that proves the United Kingdom has ruled over the United States — FOR QUITE A LONG TIME — is so compelling and conclusive as to be self-evident.

The real short story here has been nicely summed up at this excellent video: GAME OVER! It’s time for torches and pitchforks.

For anyone who wants to flesh out the skeleton of this massive multi-decade British criminal conspiracy to usurp the America Republic and surreptitiously subjugate the U.S. citizenry to the Crown, please consider this important article on SERCO—sometimes known as “the Octopus”.

SERCO: A Corporate Octopus With Tentacles Wrapped Around The Globe

Next up is a crucial article that explains how things are connected between all the moving parts of this traitorous juggernaut. THE BRITISH TAVISTOCK INSTITUTE CONTROLS MSM SOCIAL MEDIA PROPAGANDA, MUELLER, SERCO AND THE SENIOR EXECUTIVE SERVICE (SES)

With this critical understanding of how the British Intelligence Community stealthily usurped American sovereignty and financially enslaved the populace, it’s much easier to grasp why the nation has been subjected to a fake Russiagate investigation by Special Counsel Robert Swan Mueller III.  Oh, he’s “special” alright!  A very special British agent, indeed, who’s also a stone-cold Deep State hitman, lifelong Rothschild puppet and seditious SES employee.

MUELLER INVESTIGATION: A Massive Cover-up of Deep State Criminality and Corruption

Remember, turncoat Mueller was initially recruited to cover up the greatest terrorist attack on U.S. soil known as 9/11.  As a matter of historical fact, as FBI director for 12 long years starting just 7 days before the state-sponsored, false flag, terror operation on September 11, 2001, Mueller was specifically chosen to function as “the cover-up artist of the millennium”.  As follows:

KEY POINTS:  Robert Mueller was deliberately selected to lead the FBI during the terrorist attacks on September 11, 2001.  It was by purposeful design that his tenure as FBI Director began on September 4, 2001, just 7 days before the 9/11 false flag terror operation.  And, that he remained in that job for 12 corrupt years until September 4, 2013 to ensure that the FBI would never professionally investigate the greatest crime and act of terrorism ever perpetrated on US soil.  In fact, Mueller’s 12 years are marked by an overwhelming body of evidence which proves his willful neglect, dereliction of duty, official misconduct and misprision of felony.  Clearly, Mueller’s greatest crime to date was overseeing the institutional cover-up of the 9/11 government conspiracy to commit acts of terror, murder and destruction against the American people and property.
(Source: ROBERT MUELLER: He’s not a Special Counsel, he’s a Deep State hitman and cover-up artist!)

 

Herr Mueller has effectively destroyed the rule of law in America with his Gestapo henchmen and Stasi thuggery

Why so much focus on Mueller?

Because his endless story of outright treason and calculated sedition is representative of so many other American elected politicians, government officials and high-level statesmen—that’s why!

In other words, Deep State operative Mueller has been able to literally destroy the rule of law in America because he is painstakingly protected by his overlords in the New World Order globalist cabal.  The guy is not only untouchable as he acts with criminal impunity, he’s also operating completely outside of the rubric of the U.S. Code.

Everyone saw how highly acclaimed — by the entire U.S. Congress — Mueller was just before and after his selection as Special Counsel by another Deep State operative—Rod Rosenstein.  Exactly why was British agent Mueller chosen to commandeer such a blatantly flawed and fake investigation in the first place?  Here’s the back story:  MUELLER was installed by his Deep State Masters to Cover Up Real Crimes, Fabricate False Crimes and Protect the Power Elite from Prosecution

The bottom line is that the U.S. Federal Government is full of “Muellers”—British agents who are in the pay — monetary or political — of the UK Government.  There are literally thousands of U.S. Government service workers (especially SES employees) who actively work for the British Intelligence Community, the Rothschild Crime Syndicate and/or the London Financial District.  Barack and Michelle Obama, Hillary and Bill Clinton, Joe Biden and Bernie Sanders, Nancy Pelosi and Chuck Schumer, Adam Schiff and Kamala Harris, Lindsay Graham and Diane Feinstein, James Comey and John Brennan, James Clapper and Michael Hayden are just a few of other obvious, yet covert, agents of “the Crown”.  And, most of them don’t even know it!

The Great Game against Russia

The other side of this multi-century pursuit of global domination is the war (military and political, financial and economic) against the Russian Federation.  While the USA was completely taken over by the British Crown quite some time ago, Russia refuses to be absorbed into the American-British Empire.  Hence, the Great Game was commenced centuries ago in order to take over the Russian Motherland by stealth, by proxy, and by any means necessary.

The more current bogus Russiagate scandal is nothing less than a reckless and daffy British attempt to foment a World War between the United States and Russia.  The incessant war propaganda campaign being waged by London globalists against Kremlin nationalists is way beyond anything humanity has ever witnessed before.  So shrill is their naked prevarication about anything having to do with Russia, that the whole world now knows of British designs to maintain and expand their clandestine hegemony worldwide (sometimes viewed as The Commonwealth). See: Britain’s “Institute for Statecraft” Finally Exposed, Top Secret ‘Integrity Initiative’ Blown Wide Open

What’s essential to comprehend as this international psyop is run by British intel is that they oversee just one prong of an elaborate multi-pronged strategy to conquer Russia … and then the whole world.  The primary pieces of this complex Gladio black operation to foist a One World Government upon the entire planetary civilization include the Vatican (religious and social control), London (financial and economic control), Washington, D.C. (political and military control) and Tel Aviv (intel and criminal control).  A vital part of their ultimate plan for total global domination is well described here: STRATFOR Chief Reveals Zio-Anglo-American Plot For World Domination

How do the Crown, Privy Council and City of London rule America?

It’s complicated.

In actuality, it’s a very long and extremely complicated story that goes all the way back to the American Revolutionary War and before.

However, it’s that latest phase of British subversion of the Republic that is detailed in the following 3 posts.  First there is this excellent video titled: The Crown, Tavistock and the Overthrow of Donald Trump

This second video provides more vital details and important perspective on How the Brits tried to overthrow President Trump.

Lastly, there’s an outstanding multi-media compilation below of hard, anecdotal and circumstantial evidence, which prove categorically that the British establishment conspired with Deep State to first steal the election from Candidate Trump, before they tried to overthrow President Trump—an immense and convoluted criminal conspiracy that continues up to this very day.

2018: THE YEAR CITIZENS BUSTED THE ROYALS FOR THEIR ATTEMPTED OVERTHROW OF DONALD J. TRUMP

Conclusion

There can only be one conclusion: Great Britain rules the United States.  Which is why It wasn’t Russia that tried to fix the 2016 U.S. presidential election, it was the British.

Fabricated Oppo Against Trump by British Spook Firm,
Illegally Funded by Clinton Campaign and DNC,
Then Used to Initiate Probe and Appoint Special Counsel,
And Conduct a Witch Hunt Against Trump and Russia[1]

And do you know that the Brits continue to promote their utterly juvenile charade now ridiculed the world over as “the MI6-directed fake Russiagate scandal”?!

Not only do the real perps promote this preposterous hoax — 24/7 — using the London press and New York MSM, but they’re also openly influencing the POTUS not to release the damning Russiagate documents because of how much various organs of the UK Government are directly implicated in the treacherous affair. See: MI6 battling to stop Donald Trump releasing classified Russia probe documents

Truly, when all the dirty laundry is aired between London and Washington, D.C. generations of Americans will fully understand that they have been the victim of:

THE GREATEST CRIMINAL
CONSPIRACY IN U.S. HISTORY

 

State of the Nation
December 31, 2018

Source

[1] DOSSIERGATE: The Corrupt and Covert Intersection of the U.S. & U.K. Intelligence Communities

___

=================

Communist Rules for Revolution

 

Communist Rules for Revolution  By Harold Byler, henrymakow.com, 9 March 2023


The allied forces discovered a copy of these “Rules” in May, 1919, at Dusseldorf, Germany. 
They were first printed in the United States in the Bartlesville (Oklahoma) Examiner-Enterprise that same year, 1919. Almost 30 years later, in 1946, the Attorney General of Florida obtained them from a known member of the Communist Party USA, who acknowledged that these “Rules” were then still a part of the Communist program for the United States. They are as follows:

 

  1. Corrupt the young, get them away from religion. Get them interested in sex. Make them superficial. Destroy their ruggedness.
  2.  Get control of all means of publicity.3. Get people’s minds off their government by focusing their attention on athletics, sexy books, and other trivialities.4. Divide the people into hostile groups by constantly harping on controversial matters of no importance.5. Destroy the people’s faith in their natural leaders by holding the latter up to contempt, ridicule, and obloquy.6. Always preach true democracy, but seize power as fast and as ruthlessly as possible.7. By encouraging government extravagance, destroy its credit and produce fear of inflation with rising prices and general discontent.8. Foment unnecessary strikes in vital industries, encourage civil disorders, and foster a lenient and soft attitude on the part of government toward such disorders.9. By specious argument cause the breakdown of the old moral virtues, honesty, sobriety, continence, faith in the pledged word, and ruggedness.10. Cause the registration of all firearms on some pretext, with a view to confiscating them and leaving the populace helpless.Communist organizer, Saul Alinsky, was a long-time friend of Hillary Clinton and Barack Obama. Alinski wrote two books that influenced those in political control of our nation today: “Rules for Radicals”and “Reveille for Radicals”. Hillary did her college thesis on his writings, and Obama wrote about him in his books. Alinski wrote about “How to create a Socialist State”, and simplified Vladimir Lenin’s original scheme for world conquest by Communism under Russian rule. He stated that there are eight levels of control that must be obtained to create a Socialist State, with the first being the most important:1. Healthcare — Control healthcare and you control the people.2. Poverty — Increase the poverty level as high as possible. Poor people are easier to control and will not fight back if you are providing everything for them to live.3. Debt — Increase the debt to an unsustainable level… that way you are able to increase taxes, and this will produce more poverty.4. Gun Control — Remove the ability for citizens to defend themselves from the Government. That way you are able to create a Police State.5. Welfare — Take control of every aspect of people’s lives…(Food, Housing and Income).6. Education — Take control of what people read and what people listen to – take control of what children learn in school.7. Religion — Remove the belief in God from schools and the government.8. Class Warfare — Divide the people into the wealthy and the poor.  This will cause more discontent, and it will be easier to tax the wealthy with the support of the poor.

These rules are still in effect and demonstrate how much the Democrat Party has been corrupted by the illegal Communist Party USA to follow these rules. Stalin described his converts as “Useful Idiots.” These “Useful Idiots” have destroyed every nation in which they have seized power and control. Funded by communist, Hungarian billionaire George Soros, it is presently happening at an alarming rate in the U.S.

==============

Who and what caused the Turkish earthquake?

Who and what caused the Turkish earthquake  From HenryMakow.com, 16 February 2023

Editor’s note: View the link above to see the graphics in this article.

Diana Iovanovici Sosoaca is a Romanian lawyer and far-right politician. She is a Romanian Senator of Romania for the Iasi County since December of 2020.

She gained notoriety in 2020 after publishing several Facebook posts against Covid-19 restriction measures. She is a major anti-vaccine proponent and supports Romania’s withdrawal from the European Union. Smart lady.

Her jaw-dropping speech last week regarding the weaponization of earthquakes against Turkey, in retribution for Turkey’s President Recep Tayyip Erdo?an stance against Ukraine and NATO expansion, should be heard around the world.

I know President Erdo?an is not a saint by any means…. but he wasn’t going along with the NATO allies and was making public his loyalty to Russia. It cost him and the Turkish people dearly.

Sosoaca’s speech is one of the frankest speeches I have heard in recent years.

People Had to Die, and It’s Not Over Yet

Dear Fellow Senators, For three years we have been experiencing a real campaign of masks killing worldwide, either through alleged pandemics and the imminent need to inject untested vaccines that kill people, or through wars that reduce the world’s population, but rearrange international politics, realigns power poles and alters borders. We have lived to witness the production of earthquakes on command, which is actually an attack on turkey by the greatest of the world who totally disliked being set up by Recep Tayyip Erdo?an, the President of Turkey.

Moreover, his position of neutrality and mediator in the Ukrainian-Russian war deeply disturbed them, especially since Turkey is the second great power from a military point of view within NATO.

His position to block Sweden’s accession to NATO, his speech in Davos, as well as the gesture of leaving in the middle of the press conference, defying Schwab, did not remain without an echo in the cold world of leaders.

But, no one thought that people would have to die, so many people, and in such a terrible way. And it’s just a warning because it wasn’t the most populated area of Turkey. 150 aftershocks of a devastating earthquake, the second larger than the first, without the existence of an epicenter the area being artificially stimulated, geological weapons having existed for a very long time, being used so far without causing too many casualties, probably for experiments.

Now, it has been put into practice.

If we look carefully at the map of Turkey, we will see that it is furrowed by gas and oil pipelines, this being actually one of the goals:….. (this is the only piece of the translation I could not transcribe. Anyone speak Romanian to help with this? It’s an important piece!)

(Jim Stone says this cloud appeared the day before the earthquake.)

 

But, 10 seconds before the occurrence of the so-called earthquake, the Turks closed the pipelines.

In addition, 24 hours before the earthquake, 10 countries withdrew their ambassadors from Turkey.

5 days before its occurrence, the Romanian Ministry of Foreign Affairs issues a travel warning for Romanian citizens in Turkey although there was no danger, as did other countries. By killing people, they served their interests.

The maps shown on all the television channels show that there was no epicenter, but a line with thousands of earthquakes. The Turkish secret services are investigating a possible “criminal intervention,” — read an involvement of another state in triggering the first earthquake– what followed later being a chain reaction after the destabilization of tectonic plates in the region, It’s very clear that President Erdogan was punished for his courage, dignity and honor and for his closeness to the Russian Federation, in fact, a position of neutrality and mediation for peace.

In addition, it is desired to divert people’s attention from Ukraine, where representatives of many countries have already begun to shout against the despotism and orders given by President Zelensky as if he is ruling the world and someone is obliged to send weapons and participate in his war, a war where he sacrificed his own people and destroyed his entire country.

Anyone who speaks of peace is put on the pole of infamy and attache from all sides. This is what happened in Romania when I started the unique initiative” “neutrality for Romania,” The Peace of Bucharest.” They all rushed at me, although now, after one year of war, almost all of them say everything that I said and supported from the beginning, claiming now they are the owners of these ideas. Plagiarists! Pharisees!! Judas! Because of you, people have died and continue to die, you all have hands stained with the blood of millions of people killed door the interests of some madmen who wish to rule the world. Unfortunately, at the Romanian leadership level, we only have incompetents, idiots, plagiarists, thieves, robbers, criminals, cowards, traitors, and the list goes on. These incompetents, awarded by foreign countries for special merits in their support, but at the expense of Romania are trying at this moment to turn Romanian from a neutral, sovereign state into a servile and offensive state through which some great powers can exercise their warlike actions and turn Romanians into cannon for the benefit of others. Judas, we will stop you at any risk and at any cost. Leave Romania to be sovereign and neutral.

We are not interested in anyone’s wars. We have always defended our nation and land, and we have not attacked Europe. You should know, we have always been in the losing camp, even when the camp won. We have always paid.

ENOUGH! STOP HERE! ROMANIA WILL KEEP ITS NEUTRALITY, NO MATTER WHAT YOU PROMISED TO OTHERS, YOU TRAITORS! WE HAVE AN OBLIGATION TO KEEP GOOD NEIGHBORHOOD RELATIONS IN THE REGION, WHATEVER OTHERS ASK YOU. IF YOU ARE NOT ABLE TO DEFEND OUR PEACE, AND YOU ARE NOT, THE LEAVES OR WE WILL TAKE YOU DOWN!

It is very clear to me that at this point things at the internal level have gotten out of hand, the fools are playing as God and they think they have won the game. Because of these demented and psychopathic people who cause wars and cataclysms using unconventional weapons, we, humans are just numbers they can get rid of.

It is imperative that all the nations, the peoples of the world, rise together, wake up from the daily comfort and carelessness and just like in 1848 we’ll begin the struggle for liberation from the yoke of psychopaths, of demented people who steal our happiness and the beautiful world that we live in. That’s why I use all of you who still want to live in a world of God, and not Satan, I urge you to rise up to fight, to a world revolt to free us all and to destroy these enemies, because in this moment we are in LEGITIMATE DEFENSE. TAKE THE CLAWS OFF TURKEY! TAKE THE CLAWS OFF ROMANIA! TAKE THE CLAWS OFF GOD’S PEOPLE!

Warning to the psychopaths of the world: If you need people to die, we need you to perish too! It’s all or nothing! An eye for an eye and a tooth for a tooth! Talion’s law!

=====================

Steve Bannon Interviews the Heroic Archbishop Viganò

Steve Bannon Interviews the Heroic Archbishop Viganò  From WarRoom.org, 30 June 2022

Editor’s note: The full interview – which is essential reading – can be viewed from the link above.

Your Excellency, after the psycho-pandemic, we now have the Russian-Ukrainian crisis. Are we in “phase two” of one single project, or can we now consider the Covid farce to be over and concern ourselves with the increase in energy prices?

If in the last two years we had been faced with a true pandemic, caused by a deadly virus for which no other cures existed except for a vaccine, we would be able to think that the emergency was not intended. But this is not what happened: the SARS-CoV-2 virus is nothing but a seasonal flu that could have been cured with existing treatments and effective prevention based on strengthening immune defences. The prohibition of treatment, the discrediting of the effectiveness of drugs that have been in use for decades, the decision to hospitalize the elderly who became sick in nursing homes and the imposition of an experimental gene treatment that has been demonstrated not only to be ineffective but also harmful and often fatal – all this confirms for us that the pandemic has been planned and managed with the purpose of creating the greatest damage possible. This is a fact that has been established and confirmed by the official data, despite the systematic falsification of that same data.

Certainly, those who wanted to manage the pandemic in this way are not disposed now to yield easily, also because there are billionaire interests behind all of it. But what “they” want does not always necessarily happen.

===============

The Hidden History of the Incredibly Evil Khazarian Mafia

The Hidden History of the Incredibly Evil Khazarian Mafia  By Preston James, for Veterans Today, 6 July 2022

Secret History of Khazarian Mafia and its evil plan to hijack the whole world now revealed for first time.

Editor’s Note: The introduction below presents the long and complex history of the Khazarian Mafia together with its evil machinations and influences on much of the world’s history. Click on the link above to read the full article.

The history of the Khazarians, specifically the Khazarian Mafia (KM), the World’s largest Organized Crime Syndicate that the Khazarian oligarchy morphed into by their deployment of Babylonian Money-Magick, has been nearly completely excised from the history books.

The present-day KM knows that it cannot operate or exist without abject secrecy, and therefore has spent a lot of money having its history excised from the history books in order to prevent citizens of the World from learning about its “Evil beyond imagination”, that empowers this World’s largest Organized Crime Cabal.

The authors of this article have done their best to resurrect this lost, secret history of the Khazarians and their large International Organized Crime Syndicate, best referred to as the Khazarian Mafia (KM), and make this history available to the World via the Internet, which is the new Gutenberg Press.

It has been exceedingly difficult to reconstruct this hidden secret history of the KM, so please excuse any minor inaccuracies or errors which are unintentional and are due to the difficulty in digging out the true history of Khazaria and its mafia. We have done the best we can to reconstruct it.

It was Mike Harris that connected the dots and made the actual discovery of the presence of the Khazarian Mafia’s secret history and blood oath to take revenge on Russia for helping Americans win the Revolutionary War and the Civil War, and their blood oath of revenge against America and Americans for winning these wars and sustaining the Union.

At the Syrian Conference on Combating Terrorism and Religious Extremism, December 1, 2014 — in his Keynote address, Veterans Today Senior Editor and Director Gordon Duff disclosed publicly for the first time ever that World Terrorism is actually due to a large International Organized Crime Syndicate associated with Israel. This disclosure sent shock waves at the Conference and almost instantly around the world, as almost every world leader received reports of Gordon Duff’s historical disclosure that same day, some within minutes.

And the shock waves from his historic speech in Damascus continue to reverberate around the world even to this very day. And now Gordon Duff has asked President Putin to release Russian Intel which will expose about 300 traitors in Congress for their serious serial felonies and statutory espionage on behalf of the Khazarian Mafia (KM) against America and many Middle East nations.

We now know that the Khazarian Mafia (KM) is waging a secret war against America and Americans by the use of False-flag Gladio-style terrorism, and via the illegal and Unconstitutional Federal Reserve System, the IRS, the FBI, FEMA, Homeland Security, and the TSA. We know for certain that the KM was responsible for deploying an inside-job, Gladio-style False-flag attack on America on 9-11-01, as well as the Murrah Building Bombing on April 19, 1995.

==================

Previous articles 

  • UN plans New World Order via climate change

The great ‘reset’. Fiat currencies and economies collapse as do civilisations. Then what?

Key parts of the world’s financial affairs have been hi-jacked by self-serving financial organisations, bureaucracies, country leaders and individuals.   All this and much more are signs of civilisation collapse – at least in the West. The outlook is dire.  

Scroll to end to view previous articles

 

NESARA/GESARA – The Progress Report

NESARA GESARA – The Progress Report  By Clif High, 17 June 2024

QFS, Dinar and Zimbabwe RV: the end of fiat currencies

Editor’s note:  All is explained except what happens next, and when.

NESARA (National Economic Security and Recovery Act) and GESARA (Global Economic Security and Recovery Act) are concepts originating from a set of economic reforms proposed in the United States in the 1990s. The original NESARA proposal included measures to abolish income taxes, cancel out debt, and return to a commodity-based currency system (such as gold), among other financial reforms. However, this proposal never became law.

Over time, NESARA and GESARA have become associated with a variety of conspiracy theories. These theories suggest that these acts have secretly passed and will lead to massive positive changes globally such as debt forgiveness, the abolishment of income tax, a new form of government, and even the distribution of vast sums of wealth from hidden sources. The theories often tie in other elements, such as secret societies, alien interventions, and the imminent arrest of powerful political personalities. The linguistics of these theories are focused to attach to Christian ethos mind patterns. In the language associated with NESARA/GESARA as conspiracy theories, the targets are clearly a specific subset of the Evangelical sects within Christianity. There is no penetration of the NESARA/GESARA language within the Islam, or Buddhist, or other religious communities. There is no penetration of this language into Leftist, or atheist, or other, non Christian communities.

Within the conspiracy theories attached to NESARA are statements that the act was signed into Law by President Bush, and then, immediately ‘hidden’ from the public while the Federal government supposedly is ‘blocked’ from implementing it by nefarious actors within the [deep state].

It’s important to note that there is no credible evidence to support the existence of GESARA. While NESARA was an actual legislative proposal, it was never enacted. GESARA language first shows up eight months after the failure of NESARA to be advanced in the legislature. GESARA was a deliberate strategy to expand the scam to non USA citizens. It failed in this effort of expansion. There is evidence of funding behind a push for GESARA into specific Islamic groups in 2005 that failed to obtain traction. The details often cited in these theories do not correspond to anything in our common shared reality and are widely considered to be absolute bullshit by people who work within legitimate political or economic analysis areas.

This attitude of rejection, and disbelief, is also elicited by the ‘QFS’. The “Quantum Financial System” (QFS) is another concept frequently mentioned in conjunction with various conspiracy theories, particularly those surrounding NESARA/GESARA. It is described by proponents as a highly advanced technology system that would completely replace the current banking and financial systems around the world. The QFS is often depicted as being based on quantum computing technology, which proponents claim can provide heightened security through quantum cryptography and create a transparent, fraud-proof system. Aspects of the QFS include the idea that ALL resources within the Earth’s biosphere would be ‘placed on blockchain’ for an absolute accounting, and tracking, of the use of such resources. Note that many of the claims for the QFS actually mirror the goals, and function of the CCP Social Credit System.

Advocates of this theory suggest that the QFS will enable the seamless and instant transfer of currencies and that it would be immune to corruption, hacking, or manipulation. It is also said to be capable of ensuring complete privacy and anonymity of transactions, while simultaneously being fully transparent in terms of authorities’ ability to prevent illegal activities.

It’s important to clarify that, as of now, there is no verified existence of such a system in development or in use by any government or financial institution recognized by any financial entities or technology experts. The descriptions of the QFS often contain a mixture of some factual elements of quantum computing potentials and a lot of speculative, unfounded claims. Quantum computing itself is in the early stages of development, primarily focused on research rather than practical applications, especially on the scale described in QFS theories. There is NO ‘Quantum computer network’ in operation now, and given that Quantum computers are batch process, analog machines that cannot run digital software, it is not technically possible for Quantum computers to run a digital network. Quantum computers cannot run digital software, and can NOT host AI. Most of the Quantum computing world is still in research mode, and the technology is likely two decades away from any form of commercial adoption. Quantum computers, by the nature of the technology, will always be ‘batch processors’, and will NEVER be used to ‘run networks’.

Claims that the QFS is operational, or there is a Quantum computer based network, need to be challenged, and demands made for receipts be imposed upon those people making such claims as they are incorrect, inaccurate, and may be deliberate lies attempting to deceive.

The concepts of NESARA/GESARA and the Quantum Financial System (QFS) can be particularly appealing to individuals with limited financial understanding because they promise simple solutions to complex financial issues and present an idealized scenario where financial burdens such as debt and taxes are effortlessly resolved. These narratives are DESIGNED to specifically target and impact those with lower financial literacy:

  1. Complexity and Jargon: The use of complex terms and financial jargon (like “quantum technology” in the case of QFS) can be overwhelming. People who aren’t familiar with these concepts might assume the information is legitimate simply because it sounds sophisticated and technical.
  2. Promises of Wealth and Debt Relief: These theories often include promises of imminent wealth distribution and debt forgiveness, which can be very attractive to anyone struggling financially. The hope of such outcomes can cloud judgment, leading individuals to overlook the lack of evidence or logical basis behind these claims.
  3. Exploitation of Distrust: Many of these theories tap into a general distrust of governmental and financial institutions. For individuals who feel marginalized or cheated by the system, the idea that there is a hidden or suppressed solution can be very appealing.
  4. Urgency and Exclusivity: By suggesting that these events are about to happen, these theories create a sense of urgency that can rush individuals into making hasty decisions, such as investing in certain assets, joining groups, or donating money to causes that purport to support the implementation of these acts.
  5. Scams and Frauds: Scammers use these theories to legitimize fraudulent schemes, asking people to invest in new “quantum-resistant” cryptocurrencies, participate in exclusive financial opportunities linked to the supposed upcoming changes, or buy products and services that are “necessary” to prepare for the transition.
  6. Social Proof and Echo Chambers: People discussing these theories often form tight-knit communities that reinforce each other’s beliefs. This social validation can make the theories seem more credible to someone who is unfamiliar with how financial systems actually work. A key aspect of identifying these communities is the language that constantly brings the concept back to ‘faith’, and the invocation of language found in religious settings which is tied to the financial frauds of NESARA/GESARA/QFS.

The NESARA/GESARA/QFS scams are dependent on directing the language within the discussion to specific terms in order to invoke ‘faith’ as an emotion in order to support the scam internally within the ethical structure of the victim. It is a sophisticated attempt to prey upon in-built mental pathways. Once these paths are captured by the scammer, it becomes incredibly difficult to dissuade the victim from their attitude that these scams are real. This is due to the deep religious hooks within the victim’s personality. This language is further reinforced by the continuous exposure for a lifetime to the same language from THE most effective scam in history, the Federal Reserve note which is not money, and is a legislative supported debt instrument.

Federal Reserve Notes are legal tender, with the words “this note is legal tender for all debts, public and private” printed on each note. The notes are backed by financial assets that the Federal Reserve Banks pledge as collateral, which are mainly Treasury securities and mortgage agency securities that they purchase on the open market by fiat payment. In other words, the Federal Reserve Bank, which is not part of the Federal government, and is not a bank, is ‘backing’ their debt notes (aka ‘dollars’) with other debt instruments (not money) that the government produces that the FED purchases with its fiat dollars. So the dollar is a debt instrument issued by a private corporation, and loaned to the US Government for use at a cost of interest payments by the People of the USA to the private corporation of the Federal Reserve. The BIGGEST scam of them all.

There are many linguistic ties between the NESARA/GESARA/OFS scam and the ‘Iragi RV’, or the Zimbabwe RV. Note that these scams offer the Kuwaiti Dinar RV as ‘proof’ that the same occurrence will emerge for these other currencies from Iraq and Zimbabwe.

The situation of the Kuwaiti currency ‘revalue’ were entirely unique, and were based off of the geopolitical movements of the Bush Regime. This arose after the failure to convince Saddam Hussein to allow STF (special technology forces) of the US military to enter three ziggurats in Iraq for the purposes of examining, and removing artifacts. This failure led to the Bush Regime giving Saddam Hussein ‘permission’ to invade Kuwait. This permission was to create the conditions of the Iraq invasion of Kuwait. That invasion caused the Kuwaiti dinar currency to collapse as the financial world assumed that the government of the country was gone, thus the currency was worthless. This led to an international devaluation of the Kuwaiti dinar in the global financial markets. There is evidence to support the idea that members of the Bush Regime anticipated this effect, and purchased billions of dinars. They bought the Iraqi currency as they knew the Bush Regime would be restoring the Kuwaiti power structure as part of their invasion of Iraq to loot the ziggurats. This occurred, the Kuwaiti government was restored, and faith returned to the Kuwaiti Dinar within the international currency markets and thus the ‘value’ of the dinar was raised and those who were in on the scheme profited hugely.

Note that the government of Kuwait did NOT ‘revalue’ the dinar. That was a function of the open markets in currency trading, and the underlying plot by the Bush Regime to manipulate these markets as a side effort in their Iraq War. There was NEVER any repurchase of the Kuwaiti Dinar by the government of Kuwait in any deliberate attempt to “Re-Value” their currency.

No government will ever Re-Value their currency upwards in purchasing power (value). There is NO incentive for any fiat currency to be worth ‘more’ in purchasing power. It is in the nature of fiat currencies that they can NOT be revalued upward in purchase power by the government that issues them. INFLATION is the only route available for non-backed currencies.

During the 1930s, the United States was grappling with the Great Depression, a period of severe economic downturn that caused widespread hardship. In response to deflationary pressures—where prices and wages fell dramatically—there were concerted efforts by the government and the Federal Reserve to induce inflation into their currency which was dying against the real purchasing power of gold and silver constitutional money. These efforts aimed to increase the money supply and raise the price level, thereby relieving some of the economic stress. This effort was coordinated by the Fed and forced through a reluctant Congress by bribery, and extortion, and threats.

Key Actions by the Federal Reserve and the U.S. Government:

Abandonment of the Gold Standard (1933): One of the significant steps towards inducing inflation involved the United States moving off the gold standard temporarily. President Franklin D. Roosevelt suspended the gold standard, which had constrained the Fed’s ability to increase the money supply because the dollar was pegged to a fixed amount of gold. By moving off the gold standard, the Fed could print more money which is the definition of inflation.

Executive Order 6102 (1933): This order required U.S. citizens to exchange their gold coins, gold bullion, and gold certificates for U.S. dollars. This measure was intended to prevent hoarding of gold and to increase the gold reserves held by the Federal Reserve, thereby giving it more leverage to increase the money supply. This action made every American citizen an economic eunuch now dependent on a private corporation for ‘money’, and they (the Fed) kept the money (gold), and rented out their currency (the dollar) in exchange for debt against the government and people of the US as was designed by the Freemasons who plotted to bring in the Federal reserve in 1910.

Devaluation of the Dollar: The Gold Reserve Act of 1934 officially devalued the dollar in gold terms from $20.67 to $35 per ounce of gold. This devaluation was aimed at increasing the price of goods, making American goods cheaper for foreigners and thus boosting exports. It also effectively increased the money supply in terms of gold-backed securities which were now constrained by the markets for debt that the Federal Reserve controlled.

Open Market Operations and Interest Rate Reductions: The Fed engaged in open market operations by buying government securities. This action increased the banking system’s reserves and the overall money supply. Additionally, lowering interest rates made borrowing cheaper, encouraging spending and speculation (boom and bust cycles only exist in fiat currencies) which they renamed as ‘investment’.

Public Works and Government Spending: Alongside monetary policy, fiscal policy played a critical role. The government increased its spending on public works and social welfare programs under the New Deal. This not only created jobs but also increased cash flow in the economy, contributing to inflationary pressure. The Federal Reserve was dying a natural death in 1933, and was saved by extreme legislative support that turned all USA citizens into debt slaves until the system itself should (once again) be dying due to natural economic forces (we are there, now).

These actions were part of a broader strategy to counteract the deflation that had aggravated the economic downturn. By inducing mild inflation, the government and the Fed aimed to decrease the real burden of debt and stimulate economic growth by encouraging spending and wild speculation. This effort is now failing under these natural economic forces as the debt has completely consumed all of the purchasing value within the Fed’s currency.

The closure of the gold window by President Nixon in 1971 and the subsequent establishment of the petrodollar system by Henry Kissinger are pivotal moments in the history of global economics and fiat currencies experimentation. These actions marked the end of the Bretton Woods system and significantly reshaped international monetary relations. The result of which include all wars since 1971.

Closing of the Gold Window

Reasons:

Balance of Payments Deficits: Throughout the 1960s, the U.S. faced persistent balance of payments deficits due to high government spending on social welfare programs and military expenditures, particularly related to the Vietnam War. This led to a significant outflow of gold reserves.

Foreign Demand for Gold: As U.S. gold reserves decreased due to these deficits, other countries began losing confidence in the U.S. dollar’s value. They increasingly demanded gold for their dollars, further depleting U.S. gold reserves.

Dollar Overvaluation: The fixed exchange rate under the Bretton Woods system overvalued the dollar relative to gold, making the official rate of $35 per ounce of gold unsustainable. Note that inflation has indeed been brought into the system of the federal reserve note as gold is now over $2000 dollars per ounce with no expectation of an upper limit.

Speculative Attacks: The financial market began speculating against the dollar, exacerbating the outflow of gold. Gold is real money and the Federal Reserve, and the US government freaked out at the out pouring of gold into foreign banks in 1970, and even worse, 1971.

Effects:

End of Bretton Woods System: Nixon’s announcement effectively ended the Bretton Woods system of fixed exchange rates, leading to a system of floating exchange rates, which facilitated massive, continuous, manipulation on extremely speculative global currency markets.

Currency Volatility: The removal of gold backing led to increased volatility in the currency markets as exchange rates could now fluctuate freely based on market forces. We are living those results now.

Inflation: The immediate aftermath saw increased inflation in the U.S. as the dollar’s value was no longer anchored by gold as we see with recent gold price escalation that is expected to go vertical this year.

Creation of the Petrodollar

Reasons:

Need for Stability: Post-1971, with the dollar no longer backed by gold, there was a need to ensure ongoing global demand for the dollar to maintain its value and status as the world’s primary reserve currency.

Oil Market Leverage: The U.S., recognizing the critical role of oil in the global economy, saw an opportunity to create a demand for the dollar through oil transactions.

Mechanism:

In the early 1970s, U.S. Secretary of State Henry Kissinger negotiated with Saudi Arabia and later other OPEC nations to price and trade oil exclusively in U.S. dollars. In return, the U.S. offered military protection and security guarantees to these oil-producing nations.

Effects:

Global Demand for the Dollar: The petrodollar system increased global demand for the dollar since countries now needed substantial dollar reserves to purchase oil. This helped offset potential negative impacts from the end of the gold standard.

U.S. Economic Leverage: By ensuring that oil sales worldwide were denominated in dollars, the U.S. could exert considerable influence over global economic conditions. It also provided the U.S. with significant leverage in geopolitical matters.

Impact on Oil-Producing Countries: These countries accumulated large reserves of dollars, which they often invested back into U.S. assets, further integrating their economies with that of the U.S.

Overall, these strategic economic maneuvers by Nixon and Kissinger significantly distorted global financial systems and political relationships, effects of which are still manifesting in various ways in today’s international economic landscape. Most of the more visible manifestations are the Wars.

We are now at the end of the Federal Reserve system’s fiat (debt) currency. There is the expectation for a resurgent Constitutional dollar to emerge in these next years to replace the Federal Reserve debt currency. Note that it will NOT be a case of ‘revalued’ Federal Reserve Notes. As the Constitutional dollar emerges, it is expected that its purchasing value will be tied to the gold and silver involved in the currency. It is expected that Federal Reserve notes (the actual paper debt instruments) will go the way of the Confederate currency, and become a collectible item with value only as a curiosity. Much like the Iraqi and Zimbabwe currencies.

All that remains is debt.

Humanity is now at the end of the Federal Reserve’s fiat money scheme that had conquered the whole of our globe.

All that remains is debt.

Fiat currencies only have one path. Continuous inflation that always leads to repudiation (refusal) of the debt instruments. We are there now as 70+ %$ of the countries, and peoples of the planet will not accept the Federal Reserve debt instrument (aka the USA dollar).

There is NO Nesara/Gesara.

There is NO QFS.

There will be NO RV of Iraqi or Zimbabwe currencies.

Humanity is entering a completely new period as we move further into the Age of Aquarius.

These fiat currency debt schemes have run their course.

Humanity has had enough of the lies of debt schemes and inflation.

We are into this period a number of years, and in 2024, and 2025, there will be major developments emerging that will alter the rest of your life.

It will not be as you may imagine it now.

======================================

The great reset of world economies as fiat currencies collapse

Bix Weir – Before The Election The Country Will Be Hit With A Cyber Attack, Good Guys Are In Control (rumble.com) 1 March 2024

X22 report interviews Bix Weir, 38 minutes, about his forecasts of how and when most economies in the world will collapse in parallel with all fiat currencies collapsing.  Within a few months – not years – following a massive cyber attack.

=======================

Gold’s Imminent Return As Money

Gold’s Imminent Return As Money  By Alasdair Macleod, via GoldMoney.com, 19 February 2023

Editor’s note: Click on the link above to view several graphics in this very pertinent article.

The consequences of Russia and her Asian allies embracing gold backing for their currencies are poorly understood in western capital markets. This move could lead to the destruction of the global fiat currency system.

According to evidence which is widely ignored in western capital markets, a move by Russia to put a new trade settlement currency and possibly the rouble as well onto a new gold standard is becoming a certainty. As a weapon of mass fiat currency destruction, the timing is probably bound up in on-the-ground military considerations, which are already showing signs of escalating in Eastern Ukraine.

As well as using gold to undermine the western currency system, a return to a credible gold standard has significant advantages for Russia and for her allies in the Shanghai Cooperation Organisation, the Eurasian Economic Union, BRICS+, and all their commodity suppliers beyond Asia. At the same time, it would destroy the west’s fiat currencies and financial system.

This article explains how one part of the global economy can thrive while the other collapses.

Introduction

Recently, I have written about the signals emanating from Russia that President Putin is minded to re-adopt sound money by returning to some sort of gold standard. We do not yet know the details, but consider what he said at the St Petersburg International Economic Forum in June last year:

“Caught in the inflationary storm, many nations are asking, why bother exchanging goods for dollars and euros when they are losing value right before our eyes? Indeed, the economy of imaginary wealth is being inevitably replaced by the economy of real valuables and hard assets.

“According to the IMF, today’s global foreign currency reserves contain 7.1 trillion dollars and 2.5 trillion euros. And this money is depreciating at an annual rate of about 8%. Moreover, it can be confiscated or stolen at the whim of the US if it disapproves of something in a country’s policy.

I think this has become a very real threat for many countries that keep their gold and foreign exchange reserves in these currencies. According to objective expert analysis, in the coming years a conversion process of global reserves will get under way. Reserves will be converted from weakening currencies into tangible resources like food, energy, commodities, and other raw materials. Clearly, this process will further fuel global dollar inflation.”

This message was delivered to 81 official delegations, and 14,000 delegates from a further 49 countries, including heads of state and government attending unofficially. Putin’s message was that central banks will be dumping dollars and euros and accumulating gold reserves instead — the only “tangible resources” they can own, not stored in western vaults where they can be impounded as has happened to Venezuela. And government agencies will stockpile essential commodities, raw materials, and food instead.

The statement on gold reserves was not so specific, but by disposing of dollars and euros, trade and foreign exchange liquidity is bound to swing in favour of gold. With central banks reported to have accumulated record quantities of bullion last year, they appear to agree with President Putin.

In effect, delegates at the St Petersburg Forum were put on notice that the dollar will be attacked by Putin’s mobilisation of foreign liquidation of currency reserves in favour of tangible commodities and gold. For many central banks, the logic of maintaining official currency reserves will no longer apply, while increasing physical gold holdings under their direct control is the new priority.

The timing of the dollar’s demise will in large part be set by Putin’s geopolitical timing, because he can almost certainly trigger foreign liquidation simply by passing the word.

Separately, Putin’s senior economic adviser, Sergey Glazyev, has been working officially on a new trade settlement currency for use between members of the Eurasia Economic Union (EAEU), with an ambition to extend the settlement facility to all members of the Shanghai Cooperation Organisation (SCO) and BRICS+ (a rapidly expanding club of nations including non-Asian nations) who wish to use it. These groupings represent well over half the world’s population.

From the few statements on his thinking, it has become clear that having considered the options Glazyev now favours a currency solution based on gold alone.

We should also note that the proposal for an expanded Moscow gold exchange is being headed up by Glazyev himself. And in a move which appears to front-run developments, Sber — Russia’s largest bank — announced the introduction of a gold-backed digital financial fund.

On 27 December, the same day that Sber announced its new digital gold fund, in an article entitled “Golden rouble 3.0: How Russia can change foreign trade infrastructure”[i] written for Vedomosti, a Moscow-based Russian business newspaper, Glazyev laid out his latest thoughts. It was co-authored by Dmitry Mityaev, who is Assistant Member of the Board for Integration and Macroeconomics of the Eurasian Economic Commission — so this article is not just Glazyev’s musings, and it can be assumed to carry official weight.

From this article, the EAEU currency commission now appears to have dropped earlier proposals for a new currency entirely, using gold instead as the principal means of settling trade imbalances. It is likely to wrapped up as a digital representation of physical gold. If it copies the Bretton Woods model, perhaps only participating central banks will be permitted to demand physical delivery, but the digital currency would be more widely available as credit for trade settlement.

Presumably, the requirement to be prepared to settle national payment imbalances in gold bullion could be then minimised if one or more national currencies went onto a credible gold standard either by linking their currencies to the new trade settlement currency in an Asian version of Bretton Woods, or by going onto individual gold standards. The implication is that the rouble, and probably China’s yuan might do just that to produce a seamless gold-linked pan-Asian settlement system.

Whatever the detail, this is not a step to be taken lightly. China is highly dependent on exports to America and NATO members. But she appears to be refocusing on Asia and has the personal savings available to back the necessary capital investment, which in some cases will offset her imported energy costs. Both Russia and the Saudis heading up OPEC+ will be fully aware of the impact on the fiat petrodollar regime of switching payments to yuan, roubles, or other Asian national currencies for their primary export product — crude oil. Reserves of western alliance fiat currencies not sold might have to be written off. Consequently, the Saudis and other Gulf energy exporters are sure to have sought assurances about the stability of yuan and possibly roubles relative to the dollar.

Therefore, we have three elements pointing to an emerging gold standard in Asia, and for the nations that are associated with it. Firstly, President Putin made it clear that he sees a transition to sound currency values based on commodities (i.e. represented by gold), away from the dollars and euros which can be weaponised by America and alliance nations in its sphere of influence. Secondly, Putin’s view is being echoed by his senior economic adviser, Sergey Glazyev, who is the central figure formulating trade settlement arrangements. And thirdly, it is impossible to imagine that Middle Eastern energy exporters would accept payment in currencies other than dollars unless they were given sufficient reassurances about their future payment values relative to the petrodollar.

Until last year, the Russian and Chinese long-term policy of doing away with dollars for pricing commodities, settling cross-border trade, and intermediating in virtually all foreign exchange transactions has been defensive, letting America make the geopolitical running. Sanctions against Russia changed all that. Backed into a corner, Putin has no option but to seek to destabilise the western financial system deliberately. He quickly moved to protect the rouble. Now he is taking the initiative, and as part of his effort to remove the American threat from Eastern Europe entirely his strategy is both military and financial.

Pricing Russian commodities

As the world’s largest exporter of energy as well as of a wide range of industrial commodities and raw materials, the Russian economy stands to benefit enormously from a shift in global currencies away from the fiat dollar and associated western currencies to the currencies whose economic backing is commodity related. And when we think of the Russian economy, we think primarily in terms of oil. There is a further relevance to energy because it is a topic Putin thoroughly understands, his post-graduate qualification being in energy economics. He has always had a firm grip on the global energy scene, including gas and nuclear, fully understanding the western alliance’s pressure points. And on the evidence, with his close advisers he also appears to have a better grasp of monetary theory than his opposite numbers in the western alliance.

It is in this context that we should view the price of oil and its history.

The chart above is instructive, particularly with respect to the price of oil in gold. In 1950, WTI benchmark oil was priced at $2.57, and with gold fixed at $35 to the ounce, the gold equivalent was 2.361 grammes to the barrel. The oil price increased to $3.56 (3.06 gold grammes) by the time the Bretton Woods agreement was suspended. Until then, priced in dollars the price had been remarkably stable, and some of that increase in the oil price before the end of the Bretton Woods agreement was understandable, because the dollar’s official value in gold began to be challenged in the markets before Bretton Woods was suspended in 1971.

The price stability between 1950 and 1971 (when Bretton Woods ceased) was remarkable. The expansion of credit, measured by M3 money supply between those dates was substantial, since 1960 more than doubling. According to the monetarists, the purchasing power of the dollar should have approximately halved. The plain fact that it didn’t is evidence that so long as a currency’s link with gold enjoys market credibility, it will not lose purchasing power due to credit expansion. What did give eventually was not prices, but an increasing run agaist US gold reserves which fell from a peak in 1949 of 21,828 tonnes to 9,070 tonnes by 1971.

Gold’s purchasing power enjoys unrivalled stability, which is why it has always been money throughout the ages. All evidence confirms this, illustrated in our next chart, which is of wholesale prices in the UK during the gold standard from 1817—1914.

Following the economic consequences of the Napoleonic Wars and when the new gold standard bedded in, over time price levels stabilised. As banking systems became increasingly refined following the 1844 Bank Charter Act and the Bank of England joining the London Clearing System in 1864, by this measure the general level of prices became increasingly constant.

To confirm gold’s price stability, we can go even further back to the time of Diocletian, who produced his edict of maximum prices in 301AD. The circumstances were that the purchasing power of the denarii coin was falling due to its debasement. From the edict, we find that a gramme of gold was fixed at 216 denarii, giving us a conversion value for goods listed in the edict for comparison with today. From this, we know that in today’s currency pork was about $4 a pound, sea fish about $8 a pound and a dozen eggs $3.32. Vin ordinaire was $2.96 for a 75cl bottle, and good quality wine $11.10 a bottle. Beer was $3 a litre. Clearly, prices for staples which we still consume were similar to today, irrefutable evidence that gold valued as money is stable even over thousands of years.

Following the ending of the Bretton Woods agreement, the price of oil in gold showed the same long-term relative stability at a time when it fluctuated wildly in dollars. Since 1971, measured in dollars WTI oil has been as high as $140 and even went negative due to problems emanating from futures markets in April, 2020. In gold grammes the range has been 4.88 and 0.35. There can be little doubt that price volatility in gold would have been considerably less if American attempts to demonetise gold, suppress its dollar price, and rig markets generally over the decades had not taken place. To see prices being considerably more volatile in dollars than in gold grammes following the end of Bretton Woods confirms the better means of pricing oil, and therefore the whole commodity complex, is in gold.

Bearing in mind that Russian economists were never exposed to Keynesian philosophy before the collapse of the Soviet Union, senior advisers such as Sergey Glazyev are almost certainly aware that gold remains money despite American propaganda that it has been superseded by the US dollar. Putin’s economic advisers had complained that the Bank of Russia’s policy of selling all mined gold into London before trade and financial sanctions were imposed showed that its senior management had been captured by the economic and monetary policies of western central bankers and did not represent their own views.

Putin will know that priced in gold, Russia’s commodity exports should have broadly retained their market value. Both Glazyev and Putin will also know that the gold price of oil today is 1.32 grammes per barrel, down 42% from the 1950 level of 2.36 grammes, and down 51% from 2.67 grammes price when the Bretton Woods agreement was suspended. Russia has lost badly from the west’s fiat currency regime.

There is a further issue in that the only significant sources of oil which require minimal energy to extract are in the Middle East and Siberia. Elsewhere, oil, particularly shale requires substantial energy input, fuelled by oil derivatives. It is in this context that we must view attempts by Russia in partnership with the Saudis and Iran to take command of global oil pricing.

According to British Petroleum’s 2022 statistical review, global crude oil supply in 2021 was 89,877,000 barrels daily, of which Russia and the Middle East combined was 41,985,000. Viewed this way, the strategic importance for both Russia and the Middle East to work together to control pricing becomes clear. Furthermore, with the advanced nations in the west bent on reducing fossil fuel dependency and therefore their own oil production hands further pricing power to Asian suppliers.

If Russia decides to push up global prices while continuing to offer oil at discounted prices to her allies, then the price in gold grammes becomes relevant, given the increasing evidence that gold will return to underpin trade and possibly national currencies in the SCO, the EAEU, and BRICS. As noted above, the gold gramme price when Bretton Woods was suspended was 2.67 grammes per barrel, today it is 1.42 grammes. At today’s gold to dollar exchange rate of $1840, that would be the equivalent of $150 per barrel.

The monetary consequences of Asian gold standards

We can assume that the consequences of the Asian hegemons backing their payment systems with gold will have been carefully considered by them, particularly by the Russians who have been forced into bringing forward a means of protecting their export revenues from weaponised dollars.

Besides bringing stability to export values there are other advantages to reintroducing gold into currency systems. Interest rate stability at lower rates is an obvious benefit. Currently, the Bank of Russia’s key interest rate is 7.5% and price inflation is estimated at 11.8%. The yield on Russia’s 10-year OFZ bond is 11%. If the rouble becomes a credible gold substitute, price inflation, interest rates, and bond yields can be expected to decline towards levels that reflect gold’s long-term stability. And assuming that credit expansion by Russia’s commercial banks is not excessive, there is no reason to expect otherwise than that financial stability for the currency and the Russian economy would continue in the long-term. Coupled with low taxes (Russia’s income tax is a flat 13%) this stability can be expected foster genuine economic progress and the accumulation of personal wealth for the Russian people.

Following the Napoleonic Wars, these are the conditions that led Britain to becoming the most powerful commercial entity in the world by the First World War. They will foster the industrial revolution planned by both Russia and China in partnership with the Eurasian continent’s members of the SCO and EAEU. The stability that gold gives to participating currencies is bound to attract other nations away from the US dollar-based fiat currency system to participate in this success. And as momentum for the new currency regime grows, Russia’s price inflation, interest rates and bond yields are bound to decline to zero, 2%, and 3% or 4% respectively.

However, a move towards gold backing for their currencies by the Asian hegemons can be expected to undermine the purchasing power of western fiat currencies. International capital will leave fiat currencies for commodities, with nations rebuilding stockpiles of energy, metals, and other raw materials. Precious metals, specifically gold, will be sought and its price can be expected to increase.

The consequences for commodity prices being measured in gold grammes or in gold currency substitutes will be to drive commodity prices measured in declining fiat currencies even higher. In the example given earlier in this article, which suggests that in today’s dollars the pre-Bretton Woods oil price would be the equivalent of $150 per barrel, this value is struck with gold at $1840. A rise in the gold price measured in declining fiat currency would easily take this oil price estimate to well over $200.

The consequences for wholesale and consumer prices in the western nations would rapidly become obvious, with central banks forced to revise their expectations for price inflation sharply higher, forced to adjust their interest rate policies accordingly. Bond yields can be expected to rise, undermining all financial and property values. As this negative outlook clarifies, measured against gold fiat currencies will likely enter a substantial relative decline.

The consequences of the emergence of gold backing for currencies in Asia on the currencies and economies of the western alliance are bound to differ in their detail. Briefly, the following difficulties for the major players are likely to emerge:

  • The reliance on inward foreign investment has protected the dollar from continual trade deficits and played a key role in funding US Government debt since the end of Bretton Woods. It has allowed the US Government to run budget deficits more or less continually. The accumulation of foreign capital as the counterpart of trade imbalances now appears to have slowed and will reverse if President Putin follows through on his warning at the St Petersburg Economic Forum, persuading attendees to actively sell dollars. The US Government will face significant funding hurdles against foreign liquidation of Treasuries. Bond yields and funding costs for the government are bound to rise to crisis levels. And the Fed’s own financial condition will become a further source of concern for foreign exchange markets. Furthermore, the commercial banks have balance sheet constraints, restricting their ability to create further credit under Basel III rules.
  • The consequences for the EU and the eurozone would be both politically and economically divisive. If it were not for political constraints, Germany would naturally drift towards cooperation with the sound money regimes emerging to her east, particularly as the finances of the Mediterranean club deteriorate, needing yet more support at the expense of Germany’s wealth. With falling bond prices, the entire euro system comprised of the ECB and its national central banks would need to be recapitalised, being already in negative equity. The eurozone’s global systemically important banks (G-SIBs) are extremely highly leveraged and unlikely to survive the combination of falling asset values and bad debts that would be the certain consequences of the euro’s declining purchasing power. Having been assembled at the behest of a political committee and now managed by a political cabal, the euro is at risk of losing all market credibility.
  • The consequences for the Japanese yen will also be harsh. The Japanese economy is highly dependent on imported commodities and raw materials. Higher prices in yen will feed through to yet higher prices through the value chain. Already, Japanese inflation is recorded at 4%. The CPI includes prices suppressed by government subsidies giving a cosmetic effect. The Bank of Japan has taken a losing bet on the inflation outlook, continuing to assume that it was transient long after other major central banks accepted that inflation was not going to subside so easily as they originally thought. Government bond yields up to two years maturity still have negative yields, illustrating the unreality of the BoJ’s three-wise-monkeys approach to price inflation and interest rate policy. For now, the BoJ is aggressively rigging the bond market to keep yields suppressed by buying enormous quantities of 10-year JGBs to cap their yield at 0.5%. One way or another, the ending of this policy is going to forced upon the BoJ and the shock to government finances will be tremendous. The government debt to GDP ratio stands at over 250%, and a rise in funding costs is likely to be catastrophic for the yen.
  • The consequences for the UK pound will also be significant. In a similar debt trap to that of the US Government, the British have the further disadvantage of an economy suppressed by increasing taxes. Furthermore, with London being the international financial centre built on fiat currencies, the UK will be at the epicentre of a fiat currency crisis. For the size of her economy, the UK has little in the way of gold reserves, hampering any future escape from the fiat currency trap.

Not only will the major governments aligned both economically and intellectually with the fiat dollar as their reserve currency be left with a comparative disadvantage by an Asia moving to sound money standards, but their economies are exposed to highly costly welfare commitments. Politically, it is proving impossible for them to respond to developments in Asia with cuts in public spending. Rising prices, which in reality represent declining purchasing power for fiat currencies, will require significantly higher interest rates to stop foreign selling in favour of strategic commodity and gold reserves.

A moment of fundamental choice is rapidly approaching: will central banks continue to suppress interest rates to save financial markets and support economic activity, or will they act to protect the currency and ignore the financial and economic consequences? The political imperative is clear, not least because of the consequences for government funding costs and liabilities. Furthermore, economists in governments and central banks would be reluctant to abandon their embedded economic and monetary policies by protecting their currencies because it would be an admission of failure.

Already, financial commentators are aware of the approaching dilemma, referring to it as a policy pivot. Conditioned to be inflationists, they are all warning of the dangers of higher interest rates, and owners of financial assets are banking on this so-called pivot taking place. But a pivot only delays the outcome by very little time because the consequences of a rapidly depreciating currency relative to commodity and other cost inputs will soon lead to economic activity being hampered, business plans rapidly becoming obsolete, and unemployment rising catastrophically. The Keynesian response of economic stimulation will simply not be available.

The only salvation will be for western governments to jettison Keynesian macroeconomics entirely and revert to classical economic theories. The false assumptions that have built up over the last hundred years will have to be overturned. Therefore, economists in central banks and government departments will not be intellectually equipped to provide solutions. Re-education against a background of economic crisis driven by collapsing fiat currencies will take some time; time that markets are unlikely to grant.

Crises of this sort nearly always emanate in the foreign exchanges because it is foreign holders of currencies who are the first to recognise a currency’s weakness. Usually, it involves a specific currency. But this time, it will affect all the major currencies in the western alliance. Furthermore, instead of a shift between fiat currencies, much of the crisis will reflect the wholesale selling of fiat currencies for commodities and gold. Additionally, the error the western alliance made in rendering their currencies worthless in Russian hands has tipped off all foreign holders of fiat currencies to their true value.

A sensible course for any non-aligned government would be to swap currency reserves for strategic reserves, the latter being comprised of commodities, raw materials, and foodstuffs. The pressure this switch would bring to bear on markets is not restricted to currencies but is a reversal of the conditions which have underpinned the growth of derivatives. The scramble to cover paper obligations as demand for physical commodities begin to drive prices is sure to result in market dislocations, threatening the solvency of trading banks and speculators.

There is also likely to be an unwinding of positions between fiat currencies. Japan has been a source of capital for America through the carry trade, and to a lesser extent a source of direct investment into European bonds. The shock of higher interest rates in Japan is bound to cause a repatriation of these funds for two reasons: firstly, at times of heightened global uncertainty, investors will liquidate positions in markets foreign to them because their accounting is in their native currency and foreign investment is an additional investment risk; and secondly, losses in domestic investments have to be funded.

It’s not just Japan. It is a problem that afflicts all foreign investors in bear markets caused by rising interest rates. The reversal of investment flows which have accumulated since the last financial crisis thirteen years ago is bound to dominate foreign exchange activity. China and Russia never participated in the trend to export capital, but members of the western alliance did. The reversal of these flows is a trend which is likely to hit the dollar hard, not just in terms of commodity prices, but initially against the euro and the yen in particular.

The impact on gold

Throughout history, money has been gold, and the rest credit. When you detach credit from gold, there are consequences. Pricing goods and services in credit diverges from pricing them in gold. It is really that simple.

In this article, the assumption has been that pricing everything in gold has led to minimal fluctuations in gold’s purchasing power. But fluctuations do occur, and because fiat currencies dominate pricing, they are driven mostly by changes in the status of credit. There was no clearer example of this than the divergence in pricing between gold and fiat which followed the end of the Bretton Woods era, illustrated in our earlier chart comparing oil priced in gold with oil priced in dollars. The chart below puts it directly in a gold versus fiat context.

Since the suspension of Bretton Woods, the dollar has lost 98% of its value relative to real money, which is gold. The other major fiat currencies have been similarly impoverishing, and only now is the final act in their destruction looming.

An acceleration in the rate of collapse of fiat currencies will obviously lead to a significant increase in demand for gold. Therefore, commodities and goods values measured in gold will fall. This would also be reflected in the purchasing power of currencies on a credible gold standard, increasing their divergence from fiat currencies even further.

What we have described is the development of a world split by an acknowledgement that gold is money and that currencies must become credible substitutes for it, and a world hooked both practically and intellectually on fiat currencies. Instead of assuming the world economy is interdependent on the economic policies of all nations, we will discover that that is not the case, and while the fiat world sinks into a currency collapse, nations which embrace sound money are set for a new phase of economic prosperity.

===================

Western Civilization Is In Its Final Years

Western Civilization Is In Its Final Years  By Paul Craig Roberts, 26 September 2022

Insouciance has a cost, and the cost is now coming home to Western civilization.

Perhaps other civilizations have destroyed themselves, but it is certain that the Western world has destroyed itself.  Other civilizations might have underestimated a threat, or made a military blunder, or like Cartage antagonized a more powerful foe.  But the Western world is the first in history that, despite its dominant economic and military power, dismantled itself.

Everywhere one looks in the Western world, governments, intellectual and professional elites, and media have picked apart Western Civilization with relentless demonization beginning in the 1960s. (And yes there are older roots. The “march through the institutions” Frankfort School moved to Columbia University in the 1930s.) White liberals thought that this was the way to reform society, but they were delusional.  It is the way to deconstruct society, and that is what they have achieved.

Education, media, Hollywood, and white liberal politicians are weapons deployed against white society.  They have painted a picture for all generations that came after mine of Western civilization as a racist oppressor of all other peoples — people of color, people who are not heterosexual, people unsure of their gender, and women.  Feminists, minority rights activists, lesbian and homosexual activists, transgender rights activists, together with the neoconservatives who advocate US wars in Israel’s interests, have been the dominating forces in the Western world for 60 years.  The demonization of Western civilization as colonialist, imperialist, and racist is institutionalized in universities, public schools, movies, literature, art, and in the New York Times’ 1619 Project.  Statues and memorials have been destroyed, museum collections removed, and books banned.

As university classes become more diverse in the white countries, the culture, history, and literature of the countries comes under attack as unrepresentative.  Shakespeare, for example, is no longer a requirement for English majors.  Seven years ago the American Council of Trustees and Alumni reported that only 4 of the 52 top American universities  require a knowledge of Shakespeare for an English major. In place of Shakespeare’s central place in the development of English literature, universities provide courses on vampires, cyborgs, and popular movies  and TV shows.  The abandonment of English literature, even by university English departments, has become common. For example, Stirling University in the UK dropped Jane Austin in order to “decolonize the curriculum.”

Each time a piece of the cultural tradition is cast into the Memory Hole, the culture weakens and fades a bit more.  In this way we are being dispossessed of who we are.  To put it simply, year by year Western civilization is being erased.

Narratives are controlled, and censorship is extreme.  Indoctrination of the young with critical race theory and gender theory is emphasized more than reading, writing, and math. That blacks do less well in math than whites is taken as proof that math is a tool of white oppression.  White students, white members of the military, and white employees of corporations and federal, state, and local governments are subjected to “sensitivity training” which inculcates a sense of guilt and teaches white people to be deferential to people of color.  White Americans have become second class citizens who are held back by racial quotas. White Americans are unprotected by prohibitions against hate crimes and have to accept rampages  by backs that loot and burn their businesses, constant insults, and calls for their deaths.  Democrat-controlled cities such as San Francisco have passed a law that permits blacks to steal up to $950 on each occasion from stores without a felony charge.  In other words black crime is being legalized and made a privilege. Consequently, Walgreen and other retailers have closed a large number of stores and reduced open hours in others.  Emboldened by the city’s acceptance of crime, criminal activity has exploded with 45% of the city’s population now victims of theft.

Affirmation of the West is hard to come by and is no longer a part of the educational process.  A corresponding loss of white confidence and a sense of guilt have resulted in many white Americans accepting to their own children’s disadvantage lower educational standards and admission and employment quotas. The merit-based society has disappeared. The majority of people who have come to maturity during these decades  have been affected by concerns for the “oppressed.”  The former oppressed–the working class–has been transformed into oppressors known as “Trump Deplorables.”  The new oppressed are the victims of the white working class that votes for Trump. Today anyone who speaks for the working class is likely to be investigated by the FBI as a  “white supremacist,” or “domestic terrorist.”  The brainwashing has been effective. The latest Rasmussen Poll finds that as many Americans agree as disagree with Biden’s assertion that “Donald Trump and the MAGA Republicans represent an extremism that threatens the very foundations of our republic.”

In the small part of the Earth’s territory in which white people, a small minority of the world population, exist, white people are said to be an oppressive majority and are being shoved aside in their own countries.  In those bye-gone days when a country was a homogenous nation, the nation was based on its race. Germany consisted of Germans. France consisted of French. Britain was British.  Sweden was Swedish.  Today there are no Western nations. The Western countries are merely geographical locations.

Nationalism is the foundation of unity. To prevent immigration from turning the US into a tower of babel, immigrants underwent a process of assimilation, thus forming a nation out of different ethnicities.  But assimilation was abandoned on the grounds that it was against diversity and multiculturalism.  Nationalism was redefined as fascism and white supremacy. But without nationalism there is not a people, and unity disappeared.  For many years the West has had open borders and is being overrun by diverse millions of immigrant-invaders who have acquired the status of “preferred minorities.”

White families are disappearing in corporate advertisements, another indication of the marginalized  status of white people in their own country.  White men are disappearing from cabinet positions.  Scandinavian  governments are essentially female. Liz Truss has put together a diverse government in Britain in which women and people of color are a majority.  Biden’s cabinet is scarce on white gentile men. His Secretary of State is Jewish. His Attorney General is Jewish, his Secretary of Treasury is a Jewish woman, his Secretary of Defense is a black male.  His vice president is a black woman. Of the remaining 18 cabinet members, 15 are either female, black, Hispanic, or homosexual.  Only 3 cabinet members are white heterosexual men. The chief of staff is Jewish.  https://www.whitehouse.gov/administration/cabinet/

We used to hear a great deal about the under-representation of women and blacks. Now it is white men who are underrepresented.  We hear a great deal about “white privilege,” but where is it?  How do we explain the marginalization of white people in white countries? Wilmot Robertson explained it in 1972 in his book, The Dispossessed Majority.  Jean Raspail explained it in 1973 in his book, The Camp of the Saints.  The slow erasure of Western civilization is a multi-decade phenomenon.  In the 21st century the open borders policies of the white countries have accelerated the process.  In Sweden the subordination of white people to immigrant-invaders went so far as to produce a few days ago a political rebellion against Sweden’s long-ruling leftwing Social Democratic Party which was just voted out of power.

In Sweden moderate political parties are called right-wing and extremist, but despite this handicap, what the New York Times calls “the right-wing bloc” unseated the crazed anti-white left-wing Social Democratic Party government that refused to acknowledge the crime rampage by immigrant-invaders.

Over-run by immigrant-invaders, thanks to the Social Democratic Party’s open borders policy, Sweden quickly rose from the lowest rate of fatal shootings in Europe to the highest.  Rape runs rampant. One fourth of Swedish women say they are afraid to leave their homes. Court convictions revealed that in rape cases where the victim did not know the attacker, foreign-born offenders were responsible for 85% of the rapes.  However, far from all the rapes are reported, because the raped Swedish women fear being charged for hate crimes for testifying against a privileged immigrant-invader. The implication is that the Swedish women are racist for accusing an immigrant-invader. Under the Social Democrats, a collection of nut cases as bad as America’s Woke Democrats, rape was becoming a right of immigrant-invaders.

Under the anti-white Social Democrats, the police were not permitted to attribute the crime wave to immigrant-invaders. Finally, a couple of years ago a senior police officer, Peter Springare, had had enough. To quote from the UK Daily Mail, September 18, 2022:

“In an online posting, he wrote of his working week: ‘This is what I’ve handled between Monday and Friday; rape, rape, robbery, aggravated assault, rape-assault and rape, extortion, blackmail, assault, violence against police, threats to police, drug crime, drug crime, felony, attempted murder, rape again, extortion again . . .   Countries representing the crimes this week: Iraq, Iraq, Turkey, Syria, Afghanistan, Somalia, Somalia, Syria again, Somalia . . .’”

The anti-white Social Democrats tried to prosecute Springare for committing a hate crime by telling the truth, but widespread public protests against the silencing of someone who finally told them the truth prevented the Social Democrats from destroying the senior police official.

The immigrant-invaders have sensed the lack of confidence that years of anti-white propaganda has produced in the Swedish people. Immigrant-invader Based Mahmoud recently stated that “Sweden is ours in ten or fifteen years whether they like it or not.”  Demographics support his claim.

In short, it is a safe conclusion that the Social Democrats have destroyed Sweden.  Despite the massive crime wave the Social Democrats unleashed on Sweden, the margin of their defeat was a mere three votes.  The woke media and universities will not be content until they have the party of the immigrant-invaders back in office serving diversity and multiculturalism.  The next great wave of refugees will be white people fleeing from Sweden.

========================

Financialization and its Discontents

Financialization and its Discontents  By Francis Lee for the Saker blog, 25 September 2022

As the textbooks would have define it Capitalism should be understood as being essentially a dynamic force, constantly growing and mutating, and it takes no prisoners moreover. It is a social system in which individuals are free to own the means of production, property, and maximize profits and which resource allocation is determined by the price system. Well, that’s the theory in its pristine form going all the way back to John Locke (1632-1704). However, in the fullness of time the system changed and adapted to the requirements of its new environment. The early logicians of the system were mostly to be found in Europe, particularly England, France, and Germany. The English School of theoretical practitioners, including Adam Smith – who in fact was Scottish – (1723-90), (David Ricardo (1722-1823) who was originally Portuguese, John Stuart Mill (1806-1873), Karl Marx (1818-1883) and his sidekick (Friedrich Engels – both German (1820-1895) Although much of Engels’ work was journalism rather than economic theory – see for example ‘’The Condition of the working class in England 1844.’’

Such was the golden age of political economy.

Political Economy was, however, about to be eclipsed by a new theory, viz., ‘Economics’. Mathematical Economics has now pretty much insinuated its way into the Political Economy of the dominant school, university, and business curricula. The theory is based upon a system of ‘natural’ laws’ (sic!) which are apparently above dispute and rigidly disciplined by a priesthood of clerics sworn to uphold its religious precepts.

So far, however, any attempt to challenge the teachings of this faith and its defenders will find it tough going. Be that as it may a radical movement among its retractors is building up a head of steam in opposition. Nothing stays the same forever and to be subject to a radical reshaping of the way economics and finance are, and have been, studied and taught. What has gone wrong has long historical roots and will doubtless correct – but correct it must. There has been and increasingly more than dissatisfaction with the current Economics paradigm. Its critics are vehement:

‘’Academic economics has become a disaster and a disgrace. In a particular lecture Nobel Laureate Paul Krugman said that much of the past 30 years of macroeconomics was ‘spectacularly useless at best, and positively harmful at worst.’’’ (1)

Krugman was on this occasion correct. ‘’Not only did most academic economists fail to see the Great Implosion (2008) coming, but they were not even looking in the right direction. And having been surprised by its arrival, they had little to say about its implications – the greatest event to have fallen the capitalist system since the Second World War.’’ (2)

Yet, the herd-like response to the 2008 debacle was not unique. It seems like many other blow-outs inbuilt in popular consciousness. Everything seems to be going along as normal and them – wham, everything collapses. And this is not the first time that this has happened. Much the same was true of the collapse of communism in the early 1990s which broke on an unsuspecting academic community that had written virtually nothing about how a society should move from communism to a market system. The situation was and is hardly unique.

‘’Although there are shining exceptions, most academic economists, whilst clinging to the idea that their subject matter is somehow relevant and of interest to a wider world, in fact practice a modern form of scholasticism – of no use or interest to man or beast. The output of this activity consists of articles entombed in ‘scholarly’ journals usually about questions of startling irrelevance, badly thought out and appallingly badly written, littered with jargon, and liberally dosed with mathematics, destined to be read by no-one outside of a narrow coterie, and increasingly not even by them.’’ (3)

But what happens when civilizations disintegrate as they always do? Well, we would have a case-study – or perhaps I should say case-studies, plural – standing squarely in front of us. During the 1980s and 90s the system enjoyed a period of considerable prosperity. This was occasioned by the fall in the oil price and dominance of the yuppie ideology of leveraged wealth and risk taking. There was also the emergence of China – N.B. Russia was still in the convalescent ward at the time having been ravaged by its own extractive yuppie class oligarchs – China, however, powered ahead as a major supplier of cheap goods and the remarkable advances in technology.

The values of modern financial markets, dominated by the devil-may-care worship of greed, are deeply corrosive of the values which held societies together. They are also corrosive of the values that underpin successful business. Businesses once focused primarily on producing goods and services for which they had a competitive advantage, but today they are more likely to place just as much if not more focused on their share price, their dividends regime, their borrowing, and their bets they have made on exchange rates and interest rates.

What also bears examination was the great sell-off of national assets during the heady years of the Blair/Clinton interlude. Monies which were handed out into the greedy grasp of the oligarch class throughout the US and Europe. Michael Hudson explains:

‘’The West’s former left-wing parties have adopted neo-liberal policies relinquishing political control back to the financial and rentier elites that seemed on the brink of losing them when the 20th century tax and regulatory reforms began to be put in place. Tony Blair’s British Labour Party, and Bill Clinton’s US Democratic Party in the 1990s have been followed by the German Social Democrats SPD and French PS Parti Socialiste in this regression. Not to mention the Greek and Spanish socialist parties.’’ (4)

But we have now moved on to the second leg of the great economic and political reset which was in as sense 2008 on steroids.

The Finance Revolution

The best-known understanding of Finance and Financialization can be delineated as follows: financialization is a global system which involves the increasing role of financial motives, financial markets, financial actors, and financial institutions in the operation of domestic and international economies. (5)

Financialization involves a uniquely new order of wealth extraction – not to be confused with wealth creation (production). In addition, the unchecked growth of finance has given rise to the emergence of a new rentier economy and a rentier class similar to the aristocratic strata of yesteryear; a class against whom the 19th and 20th century proponents of a productive economy toiled in vain. Unfortunately, this social/economic formation has become a growth consuming parasite which has positioned itself astride the national and even global/financial borders of sovereign states. This economic and financial coup against the working class as well as productive capitalism has nurtured a political counter-revolution which has so far been impervious to any change of its social and political position. As Michael Hudson notes.

‘’The distinguishing feature of finance-capitalism is not the real economy of production and consumption, industrial profits, and wages, but the financialization of income and wealth. That is what is imposing austerity, as a result of payments to the Finance, Insurance and Real Estate sector, ‘’crowding out’’ personal and corporate income. This phenomenon is a composite of debt deflation and rent deflation.’’ (6)

Michael Hudson: a note on debt deflation. Below.

‘’Every economy needs credit to finance housing, education, (in the United States) and large consumer durables from automobiles to refrigerators. The problem is that the economy-wide volume of debt grows exponentially by compound interest. The financial expansion of debt (and of ‘’savings’’ on the creditors’ side of the economy’s balance sheet) is extractive, deflating the industrial economy’s circulation of production and consumption spending … Hudson.

David Ricardo (see above) ignored the exponential growth of interest- bearing debt. It was left to Karl Marx to elaborate (In Volumes II and III of Capital) that the financial system of credit and debt is external to industrial capitalism. It grows by purely mathematical laws, and these are independent of the economy’s ability to produce and pay-off the debts. As the rising debt overhead diverts income away from the industrial economy, creditors receiving this exponential growth recycle their interest receipts into yet more lending diverting more and more income to banks and bondholders away from the industrial economy. What doubles is not real growth but the financial burden, leaving less income to be spent on goods and services.

The resulting exponential all-devouring path ‘’assimilates all the surplus value with the exception of the share claimed by the state.’’ see Marx. (7)

The State and Sovereignty

During the post 1945 period it was generally understood that the political institutions of state have always been in a sense neutral. Acting in the public interest the state was responsible for key sectors of the economy which included, health, education, key industries like transportation, public utilities – water, electricity, gas, coal, iron, and steel. Moreover, there were cultural utilities such as music, housing, and theatre drama – and in addition, museums, parks, playing-fields, and lidos which have always been funded by the state. There were a number of things like Circuses for example which remained in the private sector.

But the state no longer oversees most of the above. The only real institutions which now matter are the civil service, the police, and the armed forces, and of course – the media.

First to be targeted were the inhabitants of the global south. The IMF and World Bank were given this particular role. This deadly duo of IMF/WB were provided with a brief to impose the dreaded ‘Structural Adjustment Programmes forced on governments in Latin America Asia and Africa by the IMF/WB duo to pursue export led industrialization, cut welfare spending, lower salaries of civil servants and cut their numbers, rush privatization measures, and above all, enforce private property rights … And the upshot of all this was the creation of crony capitalism which enabled well-connected individuals and companies to take control of key sectors and turn themselves into plutocrats through opportunistic networking and clientelism. Carlos Slim emerged from nowhere and became the richest man in the world by acquiring control of Mexico’s telecom sector on privatization. Predictably other nonentities in the global south emerged as billionaires combining political skills with ruthless commercial acumen.

In the Northern hemisphere what was left was the privatization of much of the above. In Russia this took on the most extreme form and led to a collapse in the Russian state, institutions, culture and religion and the rise of the Oligarch class. Russia was literally gutted by the privatizers and their western backers and took years to recover.

This process also took place in ex-post-soviet states and also took years to recover, and had enjoyed a brief renaissance, until a reemergence of the new capitalist order with the usual smorgasbord of structural reforms imposed by the IMF/WB duo was meted out. (8) These destructive policies brought in by a series of privatizations which were a bonanza to the already well-heeled but has become a new burden for the new working class in the West.

(One of the side effects of this global counter-revolution has been the fall in population particularly in the northern hemisphere. The fertility rate for women has been falling and with it the size of the population. I cannot think of one country in the northern hemisphere which manages the minimum 2.1 fertility rate for women. In short, and to the joy of the eugenicists, the world population has been in long-term decline from 1950 onwards.) The Great Game goes on.

This article by Alastair Macleod can be read in full in Goldmoney

Geopolitics: The world is splitting in 2. 18-Aug-2022. By Alasdair Macleod.

While we are being distracted by Ukraine, President Putin has advanced his geopolitical goals materially. Aided and abetted by President Xi, Putin is taking the Asian continent into his control. The mission is well on its way to being achieved. He now awaits the winter months to finally force the EU to reject America’s hegemony. Only then, will the western end of the Eurasian continent be truly free of America.

This brief synopsis explains how he is achieving his strategic goals. It examines the geopolitics of the Asian landmass and the nations tied to it, which are commercially and financially turning their backs on the US-led western alliance.

I look at the politics from President Putin of Russia’s viewpoint, since he is the only national leader who seems to have a clear grasp of this long-term objectives. His active strategy conforms closely with Halford Mackinder’s predictive analysis of nearly 120 years ago. Mackinder is regarded as the founder of geopolitics.

Putin is determined to remove the American threat to his western borders by squeezing the EU to that end. But he is also building political relationships based on control of global fossil fuel supplies – a pathway opened for him by American and European obsessions over climate change. In partnership with China, the consolidation of his power over the Eurasian landmass has progressed rapidly in recent weeks.

For the Western alliance, financially and economically his timing is particularly awkward, coinciding with the end of the 40-year period of declining interest rates, rising consumer price inflation, and a deepening recession driven by contracting bank credit.

It is the continuation of a financial war by other means, and it looks like Putin has an unbeatable hand. He is on course to push our fragile fiat currency based financial system over the edge.

NOTES

(1) ‘The Trouble with Markets’, Roger Bootle – Saving Capitalism from Itself – Chapter 9 – pp.232-33 – P.Krugman

(2) Bootle – page 233 – Ibid.

(3) Bootle – op. cit.

(4) Michael Hudson – The Destiny of Civilization – p.172

(5) Grace Blakely – Stolen: How to Save The World from Financialization. By Grace Blakeley – page 11.

(6) Michael Hudson – The Destiny of Civilization – p.15

(7) K. Marx – Capital Volume 3, page 699

(8) Meanwhile the Washington Institutions gained a new role in the 1990s as the midwives to capitalist development in the numerous ‘transition’ economies of the former Soviet Union and Eastern Europe the hastily established European Bank for Reconstruction and Development. (ERBD). They adopted the structural adjustment strategy to these countries in what was euphemistically called ‘shock therapy’. This had calamitous social and economic consequences for which the international financial institutions advising them to bear a great deal of responsibility.

==============

The Fed Has Never Been Right

The Fed Has Never Been Right  By Peter Schiff, Zerohedge, 30 October 2020

Peter Schiff delivered a key-note speech at the Virtual Investor Day Conference. He walked through the history of the Federal Reserve’s monetary policy over the last several decades and explained the inevitable outcome. Peter’s recap of Fed history leads you to an undeniable conclusion: the Federal Reserve has never been right. And it has set us up for an even bigger crisis.

 

Peter opened his talk saying that he thinks we are entering the final chapter of the book Alan Greenspan started to write.

And I have a feeling he had an understanding of how badly it was going to end. But unfortunately, a lot of people who have been adding pages or chapters to that book since Greenspan resigned really don’t have any idea what’s coming.”

Greenspan started the book by unleashing the loose money policy that blew up the dot-com bubble.

When that bubble popped, instead of admitting his mistakes, Greenspan ignored them and tried to revive the economy by inflating a bigger bubble in the real estate market than the bubble that had just popped in the stock market. And the Fed succeeded in inflating that bubble. But that was not a success. It was a failure.”

Peter reminds us that he warned that the Fed policy was distorting the economy. He knew that it was creating a bubble economy. People were using the inflated value of their homes as ATMs and that drove consumer spending. People were living beyond their means. Nobody was saving.

So, the whole economy was distorted by the malinvestments and bad decisions that were being made as a result of artificially low interest rates.”

When the Fed tried to normalize, the bubble popped, the mortgage market blew up, and that gave us the Great Recession.

In the wake of the 2008 financial crisis, the Federal Reserve repeated the process, dropping interest rates to zero and launching quantitative easing. Ben Bernanke promised QE was just temporary – that the Fed was not monetizing the debt. He promised the Fed would shrink its balance sheet once the crisis passed. At the time, Peter said it was impossible. He said even if the Fed tried to normalize rates and shrink its balance sheet, it would fail.

Everything the Fed said about their ability to normalize rates and shrink the balance sheet was wrong. I said they were wrong as they were saying it. They never were able to normalize interest rates. They never came close to returning the balance sheet to pre-crisis levels.”

In Q4 2018, the Fed abandoned rate hikes at about 2.5% – not even close to normal. They called off quantitative tightening. By 2019, the Fed was back to rate cuts and the launched QE, all the while claiming it wasn’t QE. The Fed told us the pivot back to loose monetary policy was only temporary, calling it a “midcourse correction.”  But Peter said we were going back to zero and that’s exactly what happened.

And here we are today with the central bank running QE infinity and saying rates will stay at zero for years.

We are now the banana republic that Ben Bernanke assured us we would never become.”

Peter said he went through the history of Fed failures to make a point that should be pretty obvious.

The Federal Reserve has never been right. Everything they have said about the efficacy of their policies, what their policies would create, and their ability to reverse them or unwind them, has been wrong. And it’s amazing how consistently wrong they have been.”

And now they are pushing toward the logical conclusion.

We are headed for a US dollar crisis and a sovereign debt crisis. The magnitude of this crisis will be unlike anything we’ve ever experienced. Because this is not just mortgages blowing up. This is the credit of the United States government. This is the risk-free asset becoming the most toxic asset on the planet. And it’s not just US Treasuries that are going to collapse, but it’s the entire US-denominated bond market which is built on top the foundation of US Treasuries. So, Treasuries go — it all goes — corporate bonds, muni bonds, mortgages. Any debt instrument that is denominated in US dollars is going to collapse.”

So where will people run?

Gold.

The world is going to return to gold-backed paper money.”

====================================

Debunking The Establishment’s Desperate Plans To Discredit Gold  By James Richards, via DailyReckoning.com. from Zerohedge, 27 August 2020

Central Banks Are Driving Gold

Gold as an asset class is confusing to most investors. Even sophisticated investors are accustomed to hearing gold ridiculed as a “shiny rock” and hearing serious gold analysts mocked as “gold bugs,” “gold nuts” or worse.

As a gold analyst, I grew used to this a long time ago. But, it’s still disconcerting when one realizes the extent to which gold is simply not taken seriously or is treated as a mere commodity no different than soybeans or wheat.

 

The reasons for this disparaging approach to gold are not difficult to discern. Economic elites and academic economists control the central banks. The central banks control what we now consider “money” (dollars, euros, yen and other major currencies).

Those who control the money supply can indirectly control economies and the destiny of nations simply by deciding when and how much to ease or tighten credit conditions, and when to favor (or disfavor) certain types of lending.

When you ease credit conditions in a difficult environment, you help favored institutions (mainly banks) to survive. If you tighten credit conditions in a difficult environment, you can more or less guarantee that certain companies, banks or even nations will fail.

This power is based on money and the money is controlled by central banks, primarily the Federal Reserve System. However, the money-based power depends on a monopoly on money creation.

As long as investors and institutions are forced into a dollar-based system, then control of the dollar equates to control of those institutions. The minute another form of money competes with the dollar (or euro, etc.) as a store of value and medium of exchange, then the control of the power elites is broken.

This is why the elites disparage and marginalize gold. It’s easy to show why gold is a better form of money, why it’s more reliable than central bank money for preserving wealth, and why it’s a threat to the money-monopoly that the elites depend upon to maintain power.

Not only is gold a superior form of money, it’s also not under the control of any central bank or group of individuals. Yes, miners control new output, but annual output is only about 1.8% of all the above-ground gold in the world.

The value of gold is determined not by new output, but by the above-ground supply, which is 190,000 metric tonnes. Most of that above-ground supply is either owned by central banks and finance ministries (about 34,000 metric tonnes) or is held privately either as jewelry (“wearable wealth”) or bullion (coins and bars).

The floating supply available for day-to-day trading and investment is only a small fraction of the total supply. Gold is valuable and is a powerful form of money, but it’s not under the control of any single institution or group of institutions.

Clearly gold is a threat to the central bank money monopoly. Gold cannot be made to disappear (it’s too valuable), and it would be almost impossible to confiscate (despite persistent rumors to that effect).

If gold is a threat to central bank money and cannot be made to disappear, then it must be discreditedSo it becomes important for central bankers and academic economists to construct a narrative that’s easily absorbed by everyday investors that says gold is not money.

The narrative goes like this:

There’s not enough gold in the world to support trade and commerce. (That’s false: there’s always enough gold, it’s just a question of price. The same amount of gold supports a larger amount of transactions when the price is raised).

Gold supply cannot expand fast enough to keep up with economic growth. (That’s false: It confuses the official supply with the total supply. Central banks can always expand the official supply by printing money and buying gold from private hands. That expands the money supply and supports economic expansion).

Gold causes financial panics and crashes. (That’s false: There were panics and crashes during the gold standard and panics and crashes since the gold standard ended. Panics and crashes are not caused or cured by gold. They are caused by a loss of confidence in banks, paper money or the economy. There is no correlation between gold and financial panic).

Gold caused and prolonged the Great Depression. (That’s false: Even Milton Friedman and Ben Bernanke have written that the Great Depression was caused by the Fed. During the Great Depression, base money supply could be 250% of the market value of official gold. Actual money supply never exceeded 100% of the gold value. In other words, the Fed could have more than doubled the money supply even with a gold standard. It failed to do so. That’s a Fed failure not a gold failure).

You get the point. There’s a clever narrative about why gold is not money. But, the narrative is false. It’s simply the case that everyday citizens believe what the economists say (usually a bad idea) or don’t know enough economic history to refute the economists (and how could you know the history if they stopped teaching it fifty years ago).

The bottom line is that economists know that gold could be a perfectly usable form of money. The reason they don’t want it is because it dilutes their monopoly power over printed money and therefore reduces their political power over people and nations.

To marginalize gold, they created a phony narrative about why gold doesn’t work as money. Most people were too easily impressed by the narrative or simply didn’t know enough to challenge it. Therefore the narrative wins even if it is false.

In fact, central banks went from being net sellers to net buyers of gold in 2010, and that net buying position has persisted ever since. The largest buyers are Russia and China, but significant purchases have also been made by Iran, Turkey, Kazakhstan, Mexico and Vietnam.

Here’s the bottom line:

Central banks have a monopoly on central bank money. Gold is the competitor to central bank money and most central banks would prefer to ignore gold. Yet, central banks in the aggregate are net buyers of gold.

In effect, central banks are signaling through their actions that they are losing confidence in their own money and their money monopoly. They’re getting ready for the day when confidence in central bank money will collapse across the board. In that world, gold will be the only form of money anyone wants.

As confidence in the dollar is eroded due to Fed money printing and congressional super-deficits, investors will gradually look for alternative stores of wealth, including gold.aily recap featuring a curated list of must-read stories.

Top of Form

Bottom of Form

These trends begin slowly and then gather momentum. As the dollar price of gold really begins to soar, investors will take notice. Even more people will invest in gold, driving the price still higher.

Investors like to say that the price of gold is going up. But what is really happening is that the value of the dollar is going down (it takes more dollars to buy the same amount of gold).

This is the real inflation and the real dollar collapse most investors miss at the early stages.

Eventually, confidence in the dollar will be lost completely, central bankers will need to restore confidence, and they’ll turn to some type of gold standard to do so.

We’re a long way from that point right now.

But if central banks are voting with their printing presses in favour of gold, if the super-rich and their advisers are all jumping on the gold bandwagon, what are you waiting for?

Here’s a once in a lifetime opportunity to front run central banks and acquire your own gold at attractive prices before the curtain drops on paper money.

=====================

Lockdowns, Coronavirus, and Banks: Following the Money

 

Lockdowns, Coronavirus, and Banks. Following the Money  By Prof Anthony Hall, American Herald Tribute 16 August 2020

It usually makes sense to follow the money when seeking understanding of almost any major change. The strategy of following the money in our current convergence of crises in late summer of 2020 leads us directly to the lockdowns. The lockdowns were first imposed on people in the Wuhan area of China. Then other populations throughout the world were told to “shelter in place,” all in the name of combating the COVID-19 virus.

Understanding of the enormous impact of the lockdowns is still developing. The lockdowns are proving to pack a far more devastating punch than any other aspect of the strange sequence of events that is making 2020 a year like no other. Even when the issues are narrowed to those of human health, the lockdowns have had, and will continue to have, far more wide-ranging and devastating impacts than the celebrity virus.

The lockdowns have, for starters, been directly responsible for explosive rates of suicide, domestic violence, overdoses, and depression. In the long run, these maladies from the lockdowns will probably kill and harm many more people than COVID-19.

But this comparison does not tell the full story. The nature and length of the lockdowns are causing millions of people to lose their jobs, businesses and financial viability. It seems that the economic descent is still gathering force. The assault of the lockdowns on our economic wellbeing still has much farther to go.

The lockdowns have proven to be a powerful instrument of social control. This attribute is becoming very attractive especially to some politicians. They have discovered they can derive considerable political traction from hyping and exploiting the largely manufactured pandemic panic.

The lockdowns are still a work-in-progress. There are past lockdowns, revolving lockdowns, partial lockdowns, mandatory lockdowns, voluntary lockdowns, severe lockdowns and probably an array of many lockdown types yet to be invented.

The lockdowns extend to disruptions in supply chains, disruptions in money flows, drops in consumption, breakdowns in transport and travelling, increased bankruptcies, losses of finance leading to losses of housing, as well as the inability to pay taxes and debts.

The lockdowns extend beyond personal habitations to prohibitions on large assemblies of people in stadiums, concert halls, churches, and a myriad of places devoted to public recreation and entertainment. On the basis of this way of looking at what is happening, it becomes clear the economic and health effects of the lockdowns are far more pronounced than the damage wrought directly by the new coronavirus.

This approach to following the money leads to the question of whether the spread of COVID-19 was set in motion as a pretext. Was COVID-19 unleashed as an expedient for bringing about the lockdowns with the goal of crashing the existing economy? What rationale could there possibly be for purposely crashing the existing economy?

One possible reason might have been to put in place new structures to create the framework for a new set of economic relationships. With these changes would come accompanying sets of altered social and political relationships.

Among the economic changes being sought are the robotization of almost everything, cashless financial interactions, and elaborate AI impositions. These AI impositions extend to digital alterations of human consciousness and behaviour. The emphasis being placed on vaccines is very much interwoven with plans to extend AI into an altered matrix of human nanobiotechnology.

There are other possibilities to consider. One is that in the autumn of 2019 the economy was already starting to falter. Fortuitously for some, the new virus came along at a moment when it could be exploited as a scapegoat. By placing responsibility for the economic debacle on pathogens rather than people, Wall Street bankers and federal authorities are let off the hook. They can escape any accounting for an economic calamity that they had a hand in helping to instigate.

A presentation in August of 2019 by the Wall Street leviathan, BlackRock Financial Management, provides a telling indicator of foreknowledge. It was well understood by many insiders in 2019 that a sharp economic downturn was imminent.

At a meeting of central bankers in Jackson Hole Wyoming, BlackRock representatives delivered a strategy for dealing with the future downturn. Several months later during the spring of 2020 this strategy was adopted by both the US Treasury and the US Federal Reserve. BlackRock’s plan from August of 2019 set the basis of the federal response to the much-anticipated economic meltdown.

Much of this essay is devoted to considering the background of the controversial agencies now responding to the economic devastation created by the lockdowns. One of these agencies is empowered to bring into existence large quantities of debt-laden money.

The very public role in 2020 of the Federal Reserve of the United States resuscitates many old grievances. When the Federal Reserve was first created in 1913 it was heavily criticized as a giveaway of federal authority.

The critics lamented the giveaway to private bankers whose firms acquired ownership of all twelve of the regional banks that together constitute the Federal Reserve. Of these twelve regional banks, the Federal Reserve Bank of New York is by far the largest and most dominant especially right now.

The Federal Reserve of the United States combined forces with dozens of other privately-owned central banks thoughout the world to form the Bank of International Settlements. Many of the key archetypes for this type of banking were developed in Europe and the City of London where the Rothschild banking family had a large and resilient role, one that persists until this day.

Along with the Federal Reserve Bank of New York, BlackRock was deeply involved in helping to administer the bailout in 2008. This bailout resuscitated many failing Wall Street firms together with their counterparties in a number of speculative ventures involving various forms of derivatives.

The bailouts resulted in payments of $29 trillion, much of it going to restore failing financial institutions whose excesses actually caused the giant economic crash. Where the financial sector profited greatly from the bailouts, taxpayers were abused yet again. The burden of an expanded national debt fell ultimately on taxpayers who must pay the interest on the loans for the federal bailout of the “too big to fail” financial institutions.

Unsettling precedents are set by the Wall Street club’s manipulation of the economic crash of 2007-2010 to enrich its own members so extravagantly. This prior experience bodes poorly for the intervention by the same players in this current round of responses to the economic crisis of 2020.

In preparing this essay I have enjoyed the many articles by Pam Martens and Russ Martens in Wall Street on Parade. These hundreds of well-researched articles form a significant primary source on the recent history of the Federal Reserve, including over the last few months.

In this essay I draw a contrast between the privately-owned regional banks of the Federal Reserve and the government-owned Bank of Canada that once issued low-interest loans to build infrastructure projects.

With this arrangement in place, Canada went through a major period of national growth between 1938 and 1974. Canada emerged from this period with a national debt of only $20 billion. Then in 1974 Prime Minister Pierre Trudeau dropped this arrangement to enable Canada to join the Bank of International Settlements. One result is that national debt rose to $700 billion by 2020.

We need to face the current financial crisis by developing new institutions that avoid the pitfalls of old remedies for old problems that no longer prevail. We need to make special efforts to change our approach to the problem of excessive debts and the overconcentration of wealth in fewer and fewer hands.

Locking Down the Viability of Commerce

Of all the facets of the ongoing fiasco generally associated with the coronavirus crisis, none has been so widely catastrophic as the so-called “lockdowns.” The supposed cure of the lockdowns is itself proving to be much more lethal and debilitating than COVID-19’s flu-like impact on human health.

Many questions arise from the immense economic consequences attributed to the initial effort to “flatten the curve” of the hospital treatments for COVID-19. Did the financial crisis occur as a result of the spread of the new coronavirus crisis? Or was the COVID-19 crisis set in motion to help give cover to a long-building economic meltdown that was already well underway in the autumn of 2019?

The lockdowns were first instituted in Wuhan China with the objective of slowing down the spread of the virus so that hospitals would not be overwhelmed. Were the Chinese lockdowns engineered in part to create a model to be followed in Europe, North America, Indochina and other sites of infection like India and Australia? The Chinese lockdowns in Hubei province and then in other parts of China apparently set an example influencing the decision of governments in many jurisdictions. Was this Chinese example for the rest of the world created by design to influence the nature of international responses?

The lockdowns represented a new form of response to a public health crisis. Quarantines have long been used as a means of safeguarding the public from the spread of contagious maladies. Quarantines, however, involve isolating the sick to protect the well. On the other hand the lockdowns are directed at limiting the movement and circulation of almost everyone whether or not they show symptoms of any infections.

Hence lockdowns, or, more euphemistically “sheltering in place,” led to the cancellation of many activities and to the shutdown of institutions. The results extended, for instance, to the closure of schools, sports events, theatrical presentations and business operations. In this way the lockdowns also led to the crippling of many forms of economic interaction. National economies as well as international trade and commerce were severely impacted.

The concept of lockdowns was not universally embraced and applied. For instance, the governments of Sweden and South Korea did not accept the emerging orthodoxy about enforcing compliance with all kinds of restrictions on human interactions. Alternatively, the government of Israel was an early and strident enforcer of very severe lockdown policies.

At first it seemed the lockdown succeeded magnificently in saving Israeli lives. According to Israel Shamir, in other European states the Israeli model was often brought up as an example. In due course, however, the full extent of the assault on the viability of the Israeli economy began to come into focus. Then popular resistance was aroused to reject government attempts to enforce a second wave of lockdowns against a second wave of supposed infections. As Shamir sees it, the result is that “Today Israel is a failed state with a ruined economy and unhappy citizens.”

In many countries the lockdowns began with a few crucial decisions made at the highest level of government. Large and proliferating consequences would flow from the initial determination of what activities, businesses, organizations, institutions and workers were to be designated as “essential.”

The consequences would be severe for those individuals and businesses excluded from the designation identifying what is essential. This deep intervention into the realm of free choice in market relations set a major precedent for much more intervention of a similar nature to come.

The arbitrary division of activities into essential and nonessential categories created a template to be frequently replicated and revised in the name of serving public heath. Suddenly central planning took a great leap forward. The momentum from a generation of neoliberalism was checked even as the antagonistic polarities between rich and poor continued to grow.

To be defined as “nonessential” would soon be equated with job losses and business failures across many fields of enterprise as the first wave of lockdowns outside China unfolded. Indeed, it becomes clearer every day that revolving lockdowns, restrictions and social distancing are being managed in order to help give false justification to a speciously idealized vaccine fix as the only conclusive solution to a manufactured problem.

What must it have meant for breadwinners who fed themselves and their families through wages or self-employment to be declared by government to be “non-essential”? Surely for real providers their jobs, their businesses and their earnings were essential for themselves and their dependents. All jobs and all businesses that people depend on for livelihoods, sustenance and survival are essential in their own way.

Was COVID-19 a Cover for an Anticipated or Planned Financial Crisis?

A major sign of financial distress in the US economy kicked in in mid-September of 2019 when there was a breakdown in the normal operation of the Repo Market. This repurchase market in the United States is important in maintaining liquidity in the financial system.

Those directing entities like large banks, Wall Street traders and hedge funds frequently seek large amounts of cash on a short-term basis. They obtain this cash from, for instance, money market funds by putting up securities, often Treasury Bills, as collateral. Most often the financial instruments go back, say the following night, to their original owners with interest payments attached for the use of the cash.

In mid-September the trust broke down between participants in the Repo Market. The Federal Reserve Bank of New York then entered the picture making trillions of dollars available to keep the system for short-term moving of assets going. This intervention repeated the operation that came in response to the first signs of trouble as Wall Street moved towards the stock market crash of 2008.

One of the major problems on the eve of the bailout of 2008-09, like the problem in the autumn of 2019, had to do with the overwhelming of the real economy by massive speculative activity. The problem then, like a big part of the problem now, involves the disproportionate size of the derivative bets. The making of these bets have become a dangerous addiction that continues to this day to menace the viability of the financial system headquartered on Wall Street.

By March of 2020 it was reported that the Federal Reserve Bank of New York had turned on its money spigot to create $9 trillion in new money with the goal of keeping the failing Repo Market operational. The precise destinations of that money together with the terms of its disbursement, however, remain a secret. As Pam Martens and Russ Martens write,

Since the Fed turned on its latest money spigot to Wall Street [in September of 2019], it has refused to provide the public with the dollar amounts going to any specific banks. This has denied the public the ability to know which financial institutions are in trouble. The Fed, exactly as it did in 2008, has drawn a dark curtain around troubled banks and the public’s right to know, while aiding and abetting a financial coverup of just how bad things are on Wall Street.

Looking back at the prior bailout from their temporal vantage point in January of 2020, the authors noted  “During the 2007 to 2010 financial collapse on Wall Street – the worst financial crisis since the Great Depression, the Fed funnelled a total of $29 trillion in cumulative loans to Wall Street banks, their trading houses and their foreign derivative counterparties.”

The authors compared the rate of the transfer of funds from the New York Federal Reserve Bank to the Wall Street banking establishment in the 2008 crash and in the early stages of the 2020 financial debacle. The authors observed, “at this rate, [the Fed] is going to top the rate of money it threw at the 2008 crisis in no time at all.”

The view that all was well with the economy until the impact of the health crisis began to be felt in early 2020 leads away from the fact that money markets began to falter dangerously in the autumn of 2019. The problems with the Repo Market were part of a litany of indicators pointing to turbulence ahead in troubled economic waters.

For instance, the resignation in 2019 of about 1,500 prominent corporate CEOs can be seen as a suggestion that news was circulating prior to 2020 about the imminence of serious financial problems ahead. Insiders’ awareness of menacing developments threatening the workings of the global economy were probably a factor in the decision of a large number of senior executives to exit the upper echelons of the business world.

Not only did a record number of CEOs resign, but many of them sold off the bulk of their shares in the companies they were leaving.

Pam Marten and Russ Marten who follow Wall Street’s machinations on a daily basis have advanced the case that the Federal Reserve is engaged in fraud by trying to make it seem that “the banking industry came into 2020 in a healthy condition;” that it is only because of “the COVID-19 pandemic” that the financial system is” unravelling,”

The authors argue that this misrepresentation was deployed because the deceivers are apparently “desperate” to prevent Congress from conducting an investigation for the second time in twelve years on why the Fed, “had to engage in trillions of dollars of Wall Street bailouts.” In spite of the Fed’s fear of facing a Congressional investigation after the November 2020 vote, such a timely investigation of the US financial sector would well serve the public interest.

The authors present a number of signs demonstrating that “the Fed knew, or should have known…. that there was a big banking crisis brewing in August of last year. [2019]” The signs of the financial crisis in the making included negative yields on government bonds around the world as well as big drops in the Dow Jones average. The plunge in the price of stocks was led by US banks, but especially Citigroup and JP Morgan Chase.

Another significant indicator that something was deeply wrong in financial markets was a telling inversion in the value of Treasury notes with the two-year rate yielding more than the ten-year rate.

Yet another sign of serious trouble ahead involved repeated contractions in the size of the German economy. Moreover, in September of 2019 news broke that officials of JP Morgan Chase faced criminal charges for RICO-style racketeering. This scandal added to the evidence of converging problems plaguing core economic institutions as more disruptive mayhem gathered on the horizons.

Accordingly, there is ample cause to ask if there are major underlying reasons for the financial crash of 2020 other than the misnamed pandemic and the lockdowns done in its name of “flattening” its spikes of infection. At the same time, there is ample cause to recognize that the lockdowns have been a very significant factor in the depth of the economic debacle that is making 2020 a year like no other.

Some go further. They argue that the financial crash of 2020 was not only anticipated but planned and pushed forward with clear understanding of its instrumental role in the Great Reset sought by self-appointed protagonists of creative destruction. The advocates of this interpretation place significant weight on the importance of the lockdowns as an effective means of obliterating in a single act a host of old economic relationships. For instance Peter Koenig examines the “farce and diabolical agenda of a universal lockdown.”

Koenig writes, “The pandemic was needed as a pretext to halt and collapse the world economy and the underlying social fabric.”

Inflating the Numbers and Traumatizing the Public to Energize the Epidemic of Fear

There have been many pandemics in global history whose effects on human health have been much more pervasive and devastating than the current one said to be generated by a new coronavirus. In spite, however, of its comparatively mild flu-like effects on human health, at least at this point in the summer of 2020, there has never been a contagion whose spread has generated so much global publicity and hype. As in the aftermath of 9/11, this hype extends to audacious levels of media-generated panic. As with the psyop of 9/11, the media-induced panic has been expertly finessed by practitioners skilled in leveraging the currency of fear to realize a host of radical political objectives.

According to Robert E. Wright in an essay published by the American Institute for Economic Research, “closing down the U.S. economy in response to COVID-19 was probably the worst public policy in at least one-hundred years.” As Wright sees it, the decision to lock down the economy was made in ignorant disregard of the deep and devastating impact that such an action would spur. “Economic lockdowns were the fantasies of government officials so out of touch with economic and physical reality that they thought the costs would be fairly low.”

The consequences, Wright predicts, will extend across many domains including the violence done to the rule of law. The lockdowns, he writes, “turned the Constitution into a frail and worthless fabric.” Writing in late April, Wright touched on the comparisons to be made between the economic lockdowns and slavery. He write, “Slaves definitely had it worse than Americans under lockdown do, but already Americans are beginning to protest their confinement and to subtly subvert authorities, just as chattel slaves did.”

The people held captive in confined lockdown settings have had the time and often the inclination to imbibe much of the 24/7 media coverage of the misnamed pandemic. Taken together, all this media sensationalism has come to constitute one of the most concerted psychological operations ever.

The implications have been enormous for the mental health of multitudes of people. This massive alteration of attitudes and behaviours is the outcome of media experiments performed on human subjects without their informed consent. The media’s success in bringing about herd subservience to propagandistic messaging represents a huge incentive for more of the same to come. It turns out that the subject matter of public health offers virtually limitless potential for power-seeking interests and agents to meddle with the privacies, civil liberties and human rights of those they seek to manipulate, control and exploit.

The social, economic and health impacts of the dislocations flowing from the lockdowns are proving to be especially devastating on the poorest, the most deprived and the most vulnerable members of society. This impact will continue to be marked in many ways, including in increased rates of suicide, domestic violence, mental illness, addictions, homelessness, and incarceration far larger than those caused directly by COVID-19. As rates of deprivation through poverty escalate, so too will crime rates soar.

The over-the-top alarmism of the big media cabals has been well financed by the advertising revenue of the pharmaceutical industry. With some few exceptions, major media outlets pushed the public to accept the lockdowns as well as the attending losses in jobs and business activity. In seeking to push the agenda of their sponsors, the big media cartels have been especially unmindful of their journalistic responsibilities. Their tendency has been to avoid or censor forums where even expert practitioners of public health can publicly question and discuss government dictates about vital issues of public policy.

Whether in Germany or the United States or many other countries, front line workers in this health care crisis have nevertheless gathered together with the goal of trying to correct the one-sided prejudices of of discriminatory media coverage. One of the major themes in the presentations by medical practitioners is to confront the chorus of media misrepresentations on the remedial effects of hydroxychloroquine and zinc.

On July 27 a group of doctors gathered on the grounds of the US Supreme Court to try to address the biases of the media and the blind spots of government.

Another aspect in the collateral damage engendered by COVID-19 alarmism is marked in the fatalities arising from the wholesale postponement of many necessary interventions including surgery. How many have died or will die because of the hold put on medical interventions to remedy cancer, heart conditions and many other potentially lethal ailments?

Did the unprecedented lockdowns come about as part of a preconceived plan to inflate the severity of an anticipated financial meltdown? What is to be made of the suspicious intervention of administrators to produce severely padded numbers of reported deaths in almost every jurisdiction? This kind of manipulation of statistics raised the possibility that we are witnessing a purposeful and systemic inflation of the severity of this health care crisis.

Questions about the number of cases arise because of the means of testing for the presence of a supposedly new coronavirus. The PCR system that is presently being widely used does not test for the virus but tests for the existence of antibodies produced in response to many health challenges including the common cold. This problem creates a good deal of uncertainty of what a positive test really means.

The problems with calculating case numbers extend to widespread reports that have described people who were not tested for COVID-19 but who nevertheless received notices from officials counting them as COVID-19 positive. Broadcaster Armstrong Williams addressed the phenomenon on his network of MSM media outlets in late July.

From the mass of responses he received, Williams estimated that those not tested but counted as a positive probably extends probably to hundreds of thousands of individuals. What would drive the effort to exaggerate the size of the afflicted population?

This same pattern of inflation of case numbers was reinforced by the Tricare branch of the US Defense Department’s Military Health System. This branch sent out notices to 600,000 individuals who had not been tested. The notices nevertheless informed the recipients that they had tested positive for COVID 19.

Is the inflation of COVID-19 death rates and cases numbers an expression of the zeal to justify the massive lockdowns? Were the lockdowns in China conceived as part of a scheme to help create the conditions for the public’s acceptance of a plan to remake the world’s political economy? What is to be made of the fact that those most identified with the World Economic Forum (WEF) have led the way in putting a positive spin on the reset arising from the very health crisis the WEF helped introduce and publicize in Oct. of 2019?

As Usual, the Poor Get Poorer

The original Chinese lockdowns in the winter of 2020 caused the breakdowns of import-export supply chains extending across the planet. Lockdowns in the movement of raw materials, parts, finished products, expertise, money and more shut down domestic businesses in China as well as transnational commerce in many countries outside China. The supply chain disruptions were especially severe for businesses that have dispensed with the practice of keeping on hand large inventories of parts and raw material, depending instead on just-in-time deliveries.

As the supply chains broke down domestically and internationally, many enterprises lacked the revenue to pay their expenses. Bankruptcies began to proliferate at rates that will probably continue to be astronomical for some time. All kinds of loans and liabilities were not paid out in full or at all. Many homes are being re-mortgaged or cast into real estate markets as happened during the prelude and course of the bailouts of 2007-2010.

The brunt of the financial onslaught hit small businesses especially hard. Collectively small businesses have been a big creator of jobs. They have picked up some of the slack from the rush of big businesses to downsize their number of full-time employees. Moreover, small businesses and start-ups are often the site of exceptionally agile innovations across broad spectrums of economic activity. The hard financial slam on the small business sector, therefore, is packing a heavy punch on the economic conditions of everyone.

The devastating impact of the economic meltdown on workers and small businesses in Europe and North America extends in especially lethal ways to the massive population of poor people living all over the world. Many of these poor people reside in countries where much of the paid work is irregular and informal.

At the end of April the International Labor Organization (ILO), an entity created along with the League of Nations at the end of the First World War, estimated that there would be 1.6 billion victims of the meltdown in the worldwide “informal economy.” In the first month of the crisis these workers based largely in Africa and Latin America lost 60% of their subsistence level incomes.

As ILO Director-General, Guy Ryder, has asserted,

This pandemic has laid bare in the cruellest way, the extraordinary precariousness and injustices of our world of work. It is the decimation of livelihoods in the informal economy – where six out of ten workers make a living – which has ignited the warnings from our colleagues in the World Food Programme, of the coming pandemic of hunger. It is the gaping holes in the social protection systems of even the richest countries, which have left millions in situations of deprivation. It is the failure to guarantee workplace safety that condemns nearly 3 million to die each year because of the work they do. And it is the unchecked dynamic of growing inequality which means that if, in medical terms, the virus does not discriminate between its victims in its social and economic impact, it discriminates brutally against the poorest and the powerless.

Guy Ryder remembered the optimistic rhetoric in officialdom’s responses to the economic crash of 2007-2009. He compares the expectations currently being aroused by the vaccination fixation with the many optimistic sentiments previously suggesting the imminence of remedies for grotesque levels of global inequality. Ryder reflected,

We’ve heard it before. The mantra which provided the mood music of the crash of 2008-2009 was that once the vaccine to the virus of financial excess had been developed and applied, the global economy would be safer, fairer, more sustainable. But that didn’t happen. The old normal was restored with a vengeance and those on the lower echelons of labour markets found themselves even further behind.

The internationalization of increased unemployment and poverty brought about in the name of combating the corona crisis is having the effect of further widening the polarization between rich and poor on a global scale. Ryder’s metaphor about the false promises concerning a “vaccine” to correct “financial excess” can well be seen as a precautionary comment on the flowery rhetoric currently adorning the calls for a global reset.

Wall Street and 9/11

The world economic crisis of 2020 is creating the context for large-scale repeats of some key aspects of the bailout of 2007-2010. The bailout of 2007-2008 drew, in turn, from many practices developed in the period when the explosive events of 9/11 triggered a worldwide reset of global geopolitics.

While the events of 2008 and 2020 both drew attention to the geopolitical importance of Wall Street, the terrible pummelling of New York’s financial district was the event that ushered in a new era of history, an era that has delivered us to the current financial meltdown/lockdown.

It lies well beyond the scope of this essay to go into detail about the dynamics of what really transpired on 9/11. Nevertheless, some explicit reckoning with this topic is crucial to understanding some of the essential themes addressed in this essay.

Indeed, it would be difficult to overstate the relevance of 9/11 to the background and nature of the current debacle. The execution and spinning of 9/11 were instrumental in creating the repertoire of political trickery presently being adapted in the manufacturing and exploiting of the COVID-19 hysteria. A consistent attribute of the journey from 9/11 to COVID-19 has been the amplification of executive authority through the medium of emergency measures enactments, policies and dictates.

Wall Street is a major site where much of this political trickery was concocted in planning exercises extending to many other sites of power and intrigue. In the case of 9/11, a number of prominent Wall Street firms were involved before, during and after the events of September 11. As is extremely well documented, these events have been misrepresented in ways that helped to further harness the military might of the United States to the expansionistic designs of Israel in the Middle East.

The response of the Federal Reserve to the events of 9/11 helped set in motion a basic approach to disaster management that continues to this day. Almost immediately following the pulverization of Manhattan’s most gigantic and iconographic landmarks, Federal Reserve officials made it their highest priority to inject liquidity into financial markets. Many different kinds of scenario can be advanced behind the cover of infusing liquidity into markets.

For three days in a row the Federal Reserve Bank of New York turned on its money spigots to inject transfusions of $100 billion dollars of newly generated funds into the Wall Street home of the financial system. The declared aim was to keep the flow of capital between financial institutions well lubricated. The Federal Reserve’s infusions of new money into Wall Street took many forms. New habits and appetites were thereby cultivated in ways that continue to influence the behaviour of Wall Street organizations in the financial debacle of 2020.

The revelations concerning the events of 9/11 contained a number of financial surprises. Questions immediately arose, for instance, about whether the destruction of the three World Trade Center skyscrapers had obliterated software and hardware vital to the continuing operations of computerized banking systems. Whatever problems arose along these lines, it turned out that there was sufficient digital information backed up in other locations to keep banking operations viable.

But while much digital data survived the destruction of core installations in the US financial sector, some strategic information was indeed obliterated. For instance, strategic records entailed in federal investigations into many business scandals were lost. Some of the incinerated data touched on, for instance, the machinations of the energy giant, Enron, along with its Wall Street partners, JP Morgan Chase and Citigroup.

The writings of E. P Heidner are prominent in the literature posing theories about the elimination of incriminating documentation as a result of the controlled demolitions of 9/11. What information was eliminated and what was retained in the wake of the devastation? Heidner has published a very ambitious account placing the events of 9/11 at the forefront of a deep and elaborate relationship linking George H. W. Bush to Canada’s Barrick Gold and the emergence of gold derivatives.

The surprises involving 9/11 and Wall Street included evidence concerning trading on the New York Stock Exchange. A few individuals enriched themselves significantly by purchasing a disproportionately high number of put options on shares about to fall precipitously as a result of the anticipated events of 9/11. Investigators, however, chose to ignore this evidence because it did not conform to the prevailing interpretation of who did what to whom on 9/11.

Another suspicious group of transactions conducted right before 9/11 involved some very large purchases of five-year US Treasury notes. These instruments are well known hedges when one has knowledge that a world crisis is imminent. One of these purchases was a $5 billion transaction. The US Treasury Department would have been informed about the identity of the purchaser. Nevertheless the FBI and the Securities Exchange Commission collaborated to point public attention away from these suspect transactions. (p. 199)

On the very day of 9/11 local police arrested Israeli suspects employed in the New York area as Urban Movers. The local investigators were soon pressured to ignore the evidence, however, and go along with the agenda of the White House and the media chorus during the autumn of 2001.

In the hours following the pulverization of the Twin Towers the dominant mantra was raised “Osama bin Laden and al-Qeada did it.” That mantra led in the weeks, months and years that followed to US-led invasions of several Muslim-majority countries. Some have described these military campaigns as wars for Israel.

Soon New York area jails were being filled up with random Muslims picked up for nothing more than visa violations and such. The unrelenting demonization of Muslims collectively can now be seen in retrospect as a dramatic psychological operation meant to poison minds as the pounding of the war drums grew in intensity. In the process a traumatized public were introduced to concepts like “jihad.” At no time has there ever been a credible police investigation into the question of who is responsible for the 9/11 crimes.

Defense Secretary Donald Rumsfeld chose September 10, the day before 9/11, to break the news at a press conference that $2.3 trillion had gone missing from the Pentagon’s budget. Not surprisingly the story of the missing money got buried the next day as reports of the debacle in Manhattan and Washington DC dominated MSM news coverage.

As reported by Forbes Magazine, the size of the amount said to have gone missing in Donald Rumsfeld’s 2001 report of Defense Department spending had mushroomed by 2015 to around $21 trillion. It was Mark Skidmore, an Economics Professor at the University of Michigan, who became the main sleuth responsible for identifying the gargantuan amount of federal funds that the US government can’t account for.

As the agency that created the missing tens of trillions that apparently has disappeared without a trace, wouldn’t the US Federal Reserve be in a position to render some assistance in tracking down the lost funds? Or is the Federal Reserve somehow a participant or a complicit party in the disappearance of the tens of trillions without a paper trail?

The inability or unwillingness of officialdom to explain what happened to the lost $21 trillion, an amount comparable to the size of the entire US national debt prior to the lockdowns, might be viewed in the light of the black budgets of the US Department of Defense (DOD). Black budgets are off-the-books funds devoted to secret research and to secret initiatives in applied research.

In explaining this phenomenon, former Canadian Defense Minister, Paul Hellyer, has observed, “thousands of billions of dollars have been spent on projects about which Congress and the Commander In Chief have deliberately been kept in the dark.” Eric Zuess goes further. As he explains it, the entire Defense Department operates pretty much on the basis of an unusual system well outside the standard rules of accounting applied in other federal agencies.

When news broke about the missing $21 trillion, federal authorities responded by promising that special audits would be conducted to explain the irregularities. The results of those audits, if they took place at all, were never published. The fact that the Defense of Department has developed in a kind of audit free zone has made it a natural magnet for people and interests engaged in all kinds of criminal activities.

Eric Zuess calls attention to the 1,000 military bases around the world that form a natural network conducive to the cultivation of many forms of criminal trafficking. Zuess includes in his reflections commentary on the secret installations in some American embassies but especially in the giant US Embassy in Baghdad Iraq.

The US complex in Baghdad’s Green Zone is the biggest Embassy in the world. Its monumental form on a 104 acre site expresses the expansionary dynamics of US military intervention in the Middle East and Eurasia following 9/11.

The phenomenon of missing tens of trillions calls attention to larger patterns of kleptocratic activity that forms a major subject addressed here. The shifts into new forms of organized crime in the name of “national security” began to come to light in the late 1980s. An important source of disclosures was the series of revelations that accompanied the coming apart of the Saudi-backed Bank of Credit and Commerce International, the BCCI.

The nature of this financial institution, where CIA operatives were prominent among its clients, provides a good window into the political economy of drug dealing, money laundering, weapons smuggling, regime change and many much more criminal acts that took place along the road to 9/11.

The BCCI was a key site of financial transactions that contributed to the end of the Cold War and the inception of many new kinds of conflict. These activities often involved the well-financed activities of mercenaries, proxy armies, and a heavy reliance on private contractors of many sorts.

The Enron scandal was seen to embody some of the same lapses facilitated by fraudulent accounting integral to the BCCI scandal. Given the bubble of secrecy surrounding the Federal Reserve, there are thick barriers blocking deep investigation into whether or not the US Central Bank was involved in the relationship of the US national security establishment and the BCCI.

The kind of dark transactions that the BCCI was designed to facilitate must have been channelled after its demise into other banking institutions probably with Wall Street connections. Since 9/11, however, many emergency measures have been imposed that add extra layers of secrecy protecting the perpetrators of many criminal acts from public exposure and criminal prosecutions.

The events of 9/11 have sometimes been described as the basis of a global coup. To this day there is no genuine consensus about what really transpired to create the illusion of justification for repeated US military invasions of Muslim-majority countries in the Middle East and Eurasia.

The 9/11 debacle and the emergency measures that followed presented Wall Street with an array of new opportunities for profit that came with the elaborate refurbishing and retooling of the military-industrial complex.

The response to 9/11 was expanded and generalized upon to create the basis of a war directed not at a particular enemy, but rather at an ill-defined conception identified as “terrorism.” This alteration was part of a complex of changes adding trillions to the flow of money energizing the axis of interaction linking the Pentagon and Wall Street and the abundance of new companies created to advance the geopolitical objectives emerging from the 9/11 coup.

According to Pam Martens and Russ Martens, the excesses of deregulation helped induce an anything-goes-ethos on Wall Street and at its Federal Reserve regulator in the wake of 9/11. As the authors tell it, the response to 9/11 helped set important precedents for the maintaining flows of credit and capital in financial markets.

Often the destination of the funds generated in the name of pumping liquidity into markets was not identified and reported in transactions classified as financial emergency measures. While the priority was on keeping financial pumps primed, there was much less concern for transparency and accountability among those in positions of power at the Federal Reserve.

The financial sector’s capture of the government instruments meant to regulate the behaviour of Wall Street institutions was much like the deregulation of the US pharmaceutical industry. Both episodes highlight a message that has become especially insistent as the twenty-first century unfolds.

The nature of the response to 9/11 emphasized the mercenary ascent of corporate dominance as the primary force directing governments. Throughout this transformation the message to citizens became increasingly clear. Buyer Beware. We cannot depend on governments to represent our will and interests. We cannot even count on our governments to protect citizens from corporatist attacks especially on human health and whatever financial security we have been able to build up.

Bailouts, Derivatives, and the Federal Reserve Bank of New York

The elimination of the Glass-Steagall Act in 1999 was essential to the process of dramatically cutting back the government’s role as a protector of the public interest on the financial services sector. The Glass-Steagall Act was an essential measure in US President Franklin D. Roosevelt’s New Deal. Some view the New Deal as a strategy for saving capitalism by moderating ts most sharp-edged features. Instituted in 1933 in response to the onset of the Great Depression, the Glass-Steagall Act separated the operations of deposit-accepting banks from the more speculative activity of investment brokers.

The termination of the regulatory framework put in place by the Glass Steagall Act opened much new space for all kinds of experiments in the manipulation of money in financial markets. The changes began with the merger of different sorts of financial institutions including some in the insurance field. Those overseeing the reconstituted entities headquartered on Wall Street took advantage of their widened latitudes of operation. They developed all sorts of ways of elaborating their financial services and presenting them in new packages.

The word, “derivative” is often associated with many applications of the new possibilities in the reconstituted financial services sector. The word, derivative, can be applied to many kinds of transactions involving speculative bets of various sorts. As the word suggests, a derivative is derived from a fixed asset such as currency, bonds, stocks, and commodities. Alterations in the values of fixed assets affect the value of derivatives that often take the form of contracts between two or more parties.

One of the most famous derivatives in the era of the financial crash of 2007-2010 was described as mortgaged-backed securities. On the surface these bundles of debt-burdened properties might seem easy to understand. But that would be a delusion. The value of these products was affected, for instance, by unpredictable shifts in interest rates, liar loans extended to homebuyers who lacked the capacity to make regular mortgage payments, and significant shifts in the value of real estate.

Mortgage-backed securities were just one type of a huge array of derivatives invented on the run in the heady atmosphere of secret and unregulated transactions between counterparties. Derivatives could involve contracts formalizing bets between rivals gambling on the outcome of competitive efforts to shape the future.  An array of derivative bets was built around transactions often placed behind the veil of esoteric nomenclature like “collateralized debt obligations” or “credit default swaps.”

The variables in derivative bets might include competing national security agendas involving, for instance, pipeline constructions, regime change, weapons development and sales, false flag terror events, or money laundering. Since derivative bets involve confidential transactions with secret outcomes, they can be derived from all sorts of criteria. Derivative bets can, for instance, involve all manner of computerized calculations that in some cases are constructed much like war game scenarios.

The complexity of derivatives became greater when the American Insurance Group, AIG, began selling insurance programs to protect all sides in derivative bets from suffering too drastically from the consequences of being on the losing side of transactions.

The derivative frenzy, sometimes involving bets being made by parties unable to cover potential losses, overwhelmed the scale of the day-to-day economy. The “real economy” embodies exchanges of goods, services, wages and such that supply the basic necessities for human survival with some margin for recreation, travel, cultural engagement and such.

The Swiss-based Bank of International Settlements calculated in 2008 that the size of the all forms of derivative products had a monetary value of $1.14 quadrillion. A quadrillion is a thousand trillions. By comparison, the estimated value of all the real estate in the world was $75 trillion in 2008.

[Bank for International Settlements, Semiannual OTC derivative statistics at end-December, 2008.]

As the enticements of derivative betting preoccupied the leading directors of Wall Street institutions, their more traditional way of relating to one another began to falter. It was in this atmosphere that the Repo Market became problematic in December of 2007 just as it showed similar signs of breakdown in September of 2019.

In both instances the level of distrust between those in charge of financial institutions began to falter because they all had good reason to believe that their fellow bankers were overextended. All had reason to believe their counterparts were mired by too much speculative activity enabled by all sorts of novel experiments including various forms of derivative dealing.

In December of 2007 as in the autumn of 2019, the Federal Reserve Bank of New York was forced to enter the picture to keep the financial pumps on Wall Street primed. The New York Fed kept the liquidity cycles flowing by invoking its power to create new money with the interest charged to tax payers.

As the financial crisis unfolded in 2008 and 2009 the Federal Reserve, but especially the privately-owned New York Federal Reserve bank, stepped forward to bail out many financial institutions that had become insolvent or near insolvent. In the process precedents and patterns were established that are being re-enacted with some modifications in 2020.

One of the innovations that took place in 2008 was the decision by the Federal Reserve Bank of New York to hire a large Wall Street financial institution, BlackRock, to administer the bailouts. These transfers of money went through three specially created companies now being replicated as Special Purpose Vehicles in the course of the payouts of 2020.

In 2008-09 BlackRock administered the three companies named after the address of the New York Federal Reserve Bank on Maiden Lane. BlackRock emerged from an older Wall Street firm called Blackstone. Its former chair, Peter C. Peterson, was a former Chair of the Federal Reserve Bank of New York.

The original Maiden Lane company paid Bear Stearns Corp $30 billion. This amount from the New York Fed covered the debt of Bear Stearns, a condition negotiated to clear the way for the purchase of the old Wall Street institution by JP Morgan Chase. Maiden Lane II was a vehicle for payouts to companies that had purchased “mortgage-backed securities” before these derivative products turned soar.

Maiden Lane III was to pay off “multi-sector collateralized debt obligations.” Among these bailouts were payoffs to the counterparties of the insurance giant, AIG. As noted, AIG had developed an insurance product to be sold to those engaged in derivative bets. When the bottom fell out of markets, AIG lacked the means to pay off the large number of insurance claims made against it. The Federal Reserve Bank of New York stepped in to bail out the counterparties of AIG, many of them deemed to be “too big to fail.”

Among the counterparties of AIG was Goldman Sachs. It received of $13 billion from the Federal Reserve. Other bailouts to AIG’s counterparties were $12 billion to Deutsche Bank, $6.8 billion to Merrill Lynch, $5 billion to Switzerland’s UBS, $7.9 billion to Barclays, and $5.2 billion to Bank of America. Some of these banks received additional funds from other parts of the overall bailout transaction. Many dozens of other counterparties to AIG also received payouts in 2008-2009. Among them were the Bank of Montreal and Bank of Scotland.

The entire amount of the bailouts was subsequently calculated to be a whopping $29 trillion with a “t.” The lion’s share of these funds went to prop up US financial institutions and the many foreign banks with which they conducted business.

Much of this money went to the firms that were shareholders in the Federal Reserve Bank of New York or partners of the big Wall Street firms. Citigroup, the recipient of the largest amount, received about $2.5 trillion in the federal bailouts. Merrill Lynch received $2 trillion,

The Federal Reserve Bank was established by Congressional statute in 1913. The Federal Reserve headquarters is situated in Washington DC. The Central Bank was composed of twelve constituent regional banks. Each one of these regional banks is owned by private banks.

The private ownership of the banks that are the proprietors of the Federal Reserve system has been highly contentious from its inception. The creation of the Federal Reserve continues to be perceived by many of its critics as an unjustifiable giveaway whereby the US government ceded to private interests its vital capacity to issue its own currency and to direct monetary policy like the setting of interest rates.

Pam Martens and Russ Martens at Wall Street on Parade explain the controversial Federal Reserve structure as follows

While the Federal Reserve Board of Governors in Washington, D.C. is deemed an “independent federal agency,” with its Chair and Governors appointed by the President and confirmed by the Senate, the 12 regional Fed banks are private corporations owned by the member banks in their region. The settled law under John L. Lewis v. the United States confirms: “Each Federal Reserve Bank is a separate corporation owned by commercial banks in its region.”

In the case of the New York Fed, which is located in the Wall Street area of Manhattan, its largest shareowners are behemoth multinational banks, including JPMorgan Chase, Citigroup, Goldman Sachs and Morgan Stanley.

There was no genuine effort after the financial debacle of 2007-2010 to correct the main structural problems and weaknesses of the Wall Street-based US financial sector. The Dodd-Frank Bill signed into law by US President Barack Obama in 2010 did make some cosmetic changes. But the main features of the regulatory capture that has taken place with the elimination of the Glass-Steagall Act remained with only minor alterations. In particular the framework was held in place for speculative excess in derivative bets.

In the summer edition of The Atlantic, Frank Partnoy outlined a gloomy assessment of the continuity leading from the events of 2007-2010 to the current situation. This current situation draws a strange contrast between the lockdown-shattered quality of the economy and the propped-up value of the stock market whose future value will in all probability prove unsustainable. Partnoy writes,

It is a distasteful fact that the present situation is so dire in part because the banks fell right back into bad behavior after the last crash—taking too many risks, hiding debt in complex instruments and off-balance-sheet entities, and generally exploiting loopholes in laws intended to rein in their greed. Sparing them for a second time this century will be that much harder.

Wall Street Criminality on Display

The frauds and felonies of the Wall Street banks have continued after the future earnings of US taxpayers returned them to solvency after 2010. The record of infamy is comparable to that of the pharmaceutical industry.

The criminal behaviour in both sectors is very relevant to the overlapping crises that are underway in both the public health and financial sectors. In 2012 the crime spree in the financial sector began with astounding revelations about the role of many major banks in the LIBOR, the London Interbank Offered Rate. The LIBOR rates create the basis of interest rates involved in the borrowing and lending of money in the international arena.

When the scandal broke there were 35 different LIBOR rates involving various types of currency and various time frames for loans between banks. The rates were calculated every day based on information forwarded from 16 different banks to a panel on London. The reporting banks included Citigroup, JP Morgan Chase, Bank of America, UBS, and Deutsche Bank. The influence of the LIBOR rate extended beyond banks to affect the price of credit in many types of transactions.

The emergence of information that the banks were working together to rig the interest rate created the basis for a huge economic scandal. Fines extending from hundreds of millions into more than a billion dollars were placed on each of the offending banks. But in this instance and many others to follow, criminality was attached to the financial entities but not to top officials responsible for the decisions that put their corporations on the wrong side of the law.

One of the factors in the banking frauds comprising the LIBOR scandal was the temptation to improve the chance for financial gains in derivative bets. The biggest failure of the federal response to the financial meltdown of 2007-210 was that little was done to curb the excesses of transactions in the realm of derivatives.

Derivatives involved a form of gambling that exists in a kind of twilight zone. This twilight zone fills a space somewhere between the realm of the real economy and the realm of notional value. Notional values find expression in unrealized speculation about what might or might not come to fruition; what might or might not happen; who might win and who might lose in derivative speculations.

The addiction of Wall Street firms to derivative betting remains unchecked to this day. The bankers’ continuing fixation with unregulated gambling, often with other people’s money, is deeply menacing for the future of the global economy…. indeed for the future of everyone on earth. According to the Office of the Controller of Currency, in 2019 JP Morgan Chase had $59 trillion in derivative bets. In July of 2020 it emerged that Citigroup held $62 trillion in derivative contracts, about $30 trillion more than it held before it was bailed out in 2008. In 2019 Goldman Sachs held $47 trillion and Bank of America held $20.4 trillion in derivate bets.

A big part of the scandal embodied in these figures is embedded in the reality that all of these banks carry their most risky derivative bets in units of their corporate networks that are protected by the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation. This peril played a significant part in deepening the crisis engendered by financial meltdown that began in 2007.

One of the most redeeming features of the Dodd-Frank Act as originally drafted was a provision preventing financial institutions from keeping their derivative portfolios in banks whose deposits and depositors were backed up by federal insurance.

Citigroup led the push in Congress in 2014 to allow Wall Street institutions to revert back to a more deregulated and danger-prone economic environment. The notoriously inept decisions and actions of Citigroup had played a significant role in the lead up to the financial debacle of 2007 to 2010. Since 2016 Citigroup has become once again the biggest risk taker by loading itself up with more derivative speculations than any other financial institution in the world.

By returning derivative speculations to the protections of federal financial backstops, taxpayers are once again forced to assume responsibility for the most outlandish risks of Wall Street’s high rollers. It is taxpayers who are the backers of the federal government when it comes to their commitment to compensate banks for losses, even when these losses come about from derivative bets.

How much more Wall Street risk and public debt can be loaded onto taxpayers and even onto generations of taxpayers yet unborn? How is national debt to be understood when it plunders working people to guarantee and augment the wealth of the most privileged branches of society? Why should those most responsible for creating the most excessive risks to the financial wellbeing of our societies be protected from bearing the consequences of the very risks they themselves created?

Along with Citigroup, JP Morgan Chase stands out among a group of financial sector reprobates most deeply involved in sketchy activities that extend deep into the realm of criminality. In a simmering scandal six of JP Morgan Chase’s traders have been accused of breaking laws in conducting the bank’s futures trading in the value of precious metals. They have been accused of violating the RICO statute, a law meant for people suspected of being part of organized crime.

In the charges pressed by the Justice Department on JP Morgan Chase’s traders it is alleged that they “conducted the affairs of the [minerals] desk through a pattern of racketeering activity, specifically, wire fraud affecting a financial institution and bank fraud.”

In 2012 JP Morgan Chase faced a $1 billion fine for its role in the “London Wale” series of derivative bets described as follows by the Chair of the US Senate’s Permanent Subcommittee on Investigation. Senator Carl Levin explained, “Our findings open a window into the hidden world of high stakes derivatives trading by big banks. It exposes a derivatives trading culture at JPMorgan that piled on risk, hid losses, disregarded risk limits, manipulated risk models, dodged oversight, and misinformed the public.”

Traders at Goldman Sachs appear to have been part of the Wall Street crime spree. The tentacles of corruption in the Goldman Sachs case apparently extend deep into the US Justice Department. The case involves allegations of embezzlement, money laundering and missing billions. These manifestations of malfeasance all spin out of a scandal-prone Malaysian sovereign wealth fund administered by Goldman Sachs.

A big part of the scandal reported in Wall Street on Parade in July of 2020 involves the fact that the Justice Department’s prosecutors seem to be dragging their feet in this possible criminal felony case against Goldman Sachs. The prosecutors, including the US Attorney-General, William Barr, worked previously for the law firm, Kirkland and Ellis. Kirkland and Ellis was retained to defend Goldman Sachs in this matter.

Pam Martens and Russ Martens express dismay at the failure of US officialdom to hold Wall Street institutions accountable for the crime spree of some of its biggest firms. They write, “Congress and the executive branch of the government seem determined to protect Wall Street criminals, which simply assures their proliferation.”

Even racketeering charges against officials at JP Morgan Chase, where Jamie Dimon presides as CEO, failed to receive any attention from the professional deceivers that these days dominate MSM. The star reporters of Wall Street on Parade write, “Crime and fraud are so de rigueur at the bank led by Dimon that not one major newspaper ran the headline [of the racketeering charge] on the front page or anywhere else in the paper.

While federal charges that JP Morgan Chase’s Wall Street operation engaged in criminal racketeering was not of interest to the press, Jamie Dimon’s surprise visit in early June to a Chase branch in Mt. Kisco New York aroused considerable media attention. Dimon was photographed with staff wearing a mask and taking the knee. By participating in this ritual Dimon signaled that his Wall Street operation is in league with the sometimes violent cancel culture pushed into prominence by the Democratic Party in partnership with Black Lives Matter and Antifa.

In an article on 21 July marking ten years since the Dodd-Frank Act of 2010, the Martens duo conclude, “So here we are today, watching the Fed conduct another secret multi-trillion dollar bailout of Wall Street while the voices of Congress and mainstream media are nowhere to be heard.”

Enter BlackRock

In March it was announced that representatives of the US Treasury Department, the Federal Reserve Board and the BlackRock financial management were joining forces to make adjustments in the US economy. The aim was to address the financial dislocations resulting from the decision to lock down businesses, citizens, schools, entertainment, and social mingling outside the home, all in response to the health care hysteria promoted by governments and their media extensions.

The format of this process suggested some relaxation in the strict distinctions historically drawn between the US Treasury and the Federal Reserve. What would be the role of the third member of the group? In reflecting on this topic Joyce Nelson observed, “the new bailout bill not only further erases the line between the Federal Reserve and the U.S. Treasury, it places BlackRock effectively in an overseer position for both.”

Some saw as symbolically instructive the delegation to BlackRock of a larger role than that assigned it during the first bailout of 2007-2008. It would be hard to overestimate the significance of this prominent Wall Street firm’s return to a strategic role near the very heart of this major exercise of federal power. This invitation to take part in such crucial negotiations at such a consequential juncture in history caused some to characterize BlackRock as a “fourth branch of government.”

As Victoria Guida commented in Politico, “This is a transformational moment for the Fed, and BlackRock’s now going to be in an even stronger position to serve the Fed in the future.”

BlackRock officials had been instrumental in helping to manoeuvre their company into such a strategic role by responding proactively to the understanding in some elite circles that another financial debacle was imminent. Only months before the financial meltdown actually occurred a group of former central bankers all commissioned by BlackRock delivered a recovery plan in August of 2019.

Presented at a G 7 summit of central bankers in Jackson Hole Wyoming, the plan for the government responses to the looming financial collapse was entitled Dealing with the Next Downturn. Its authors are Stanley Fischer, former Governor of the Central Bank of Israel, Philipp Hildebrande, former Chairman of the Governing Board of the Swiss National Bank, Jean Boivin, former Deputy Governor of the Bank of Canada, and Elga Bartsch, Economist at Morgan Stanley.

The BlackRock Team at Jackson Hole put forward the case that a more aggressive and coordinated combination of monetary and fiscal policy must be brought to the job of stimulating a financial recovery. Monetary policy includes the setting of interest rates. Where monetary policy has historically been the domain of the central banks, fiscal policy, involving issues of taxation as well as the content and size of government budgets, lies within the jurisdiction of elected legislatures.

The nub of the proposal to unite fiscal and monetary policy put the US Treasury and the US Federal Reserve on the same political platform. As the author of this merger of monetary and fiscal policy, BlackRock became third member of the triumvirate charged to address the broad array of economic maladies that arrived in the wake of the lockdowns.

In the spring of 2020 BlackRock has been hired by the Bank of Canada and by Sweden’s Central Bank, the Riksbank, to deliver on the approaches to crisis management its representatives had laid out at Jackson Hole. BlackRock’s most high-profile and strategic engagement, however, began with its involvement in the negotiation of the $2 trillion CARES stimulus package that passed through the US Congress in March of 2020.

The CARES Act included $367 billion for loans and grants to small business, $130 billion for health care systems, $150 billion for state and local government, $500 billion for loans to corporate America, and $25 billion for airlines (in addition to loans).

The heart of the plan involved a payout of $1,200 per adult and $500 per child for households making up to $75,000. This payment to citizens approaches the concept of disseminating “helicopter money” as referred to in BlackRock’s initial outline for dealing with the “downturn.” Helicopter money distributed by the federal government to its citizens was also related to the concept of “going direct” in strategies for stimulating the economy.

BlackRock seems to be moving into the space recently held by Goldman Sachs as Wall Street’s best embodiment of ostentatious success including in the preparation of its corporate leaders for high-ranking positions in the federal government. Laurence Fink, BlackRock’s founder and CEO, might well have replicated this career path to become Treasury Secretary if Hillary Clinton had succeeded in becoming US President in 2016.

BlackRock’s leadership went to great lengths to avoid being tagged with the title in the United States of a “systematically important financial institution” (sifi). To be subject to this “sifi” label entails added federal scrutiny and regulation as well as heightened requirements to keep high amounts of capital on hand. BlackRock’s status as a private company not subject to sifi regulations makes the financial management firm more attractive to its federal partners in the federal payout operation presently underway.

One of the reasons for including a private company in the trio of partners involved in the payouts is to sneak around limitations on the legal powers of the Federal Reserve. As explained by Ellen Brown in her essay, Meet BlackRock: The New Great Vampire Squid, the Federal Reserve can only purchase “safe federally-guaranteed assets.” As a private company, BlackRock apparently faces no such restrictions. It can purchase more risky assets not backstopped by federal insurance.

The regional banks of the Federal Reserve Board are owned by private companies whose directors seem to have been part of the decision to include BlackRock in the implementation of the CARES process. There can be no doubt that the format of the CARES negotiations pulled the supposedly independent Federal Reserve more deeply into the political orbit of the US Treasury branch. The presence of a major Wall Street firm in the process, however, apparently gave the advocates of the Fed’s supposed independence from politics a sense that they retained some leverage in the process.

The inclusion of private companies in the conduct of government business has become in recent decades a very common expression of neoliberalism. One of the reasons for this embrace of public-private partnerships in the conduct of government business is to take advantage of the legal nature of private companies. The apportionment to private companies of significant roles in deciding and implementing public policies helps put veils of secrecy over the true nature of government decisions and actions.

Private companies can more easily assert claims to “proprietary information” than can public institutions when they act on behalf of citizens. This feature of privatization in the performance of public responsibilities by elected government runs counter to the imperatives of democratic transparency. It puts obstacles in the way of genuine accountability because the public is more likely to be kept in the dark about key aspects of what is being decided and done on their behalf.

Suck Up Economics and State Monopoly Capitalism

BlackRock owns, controls, or manages about $30 trillion in total in securities. It directly controls or owns somewhat less than a third of this amount. The remainder of the assets BlackRock manages are to service clients responsible for taking care of pension funds, philanthropies, foundations, endowments, family offices, superannuation funds and such.

A big part of BlackRock’s business model involves attracting customers by allowing them access to great masses of timely information of significant utility to those responsible for making investment decisions. This technological wizardry happens on a very advanced computational platform known as Aladdin.

Aladdin remains a work-in-progress, one that is widely recognized as the most sophisticated medium of its kind for assessing all manner of financial risks and potentials for profit. Its future as an investment platform is to become more and more integrated into the complex mix of hardware and software animating Artificial Intelligence.

BlackRock’s job is to dispense funds ushered into existence through the money-creating powers of the Federal Reserve. These transactions are to take place through eleven so-called “special purpose vehicles” similar to the Maiden Lane companies that BlackRock administered during the prior bailouts.

The funds it distributes in this round starting in 2020 are meant, at least at this early stage of the crisis, as payments for various sorts of assets. These assets might include an array of corporate bonds spanning a range from so-called investment grade to garbage grade junk bonds. The losses incurred in this exchange, involving supposed assets that might turn out to be worthless, or loans that might not be paid back, are to be charged to the US Treasury. Ultimately the liability lies on US taxpayers who are the holders of the national debt.

Bonds of varying levels of worth lie beneath another asset eligible for transformation into cash. This instrument of value is referred to as Exchange Traded Funds, ETFs. ETFs happen to be a specialty of BlackRock ever since the company launched a range of commercial ETFs into Stock Market circulation through its iShares division. BlackRock’s role on both sides of buying and selling ETFs comes up repeatedly as one of the many conflicts of interest of which the Wall Street firm stands accused.

Given that BlackRock is involved in one way or another in the proprietorship of pretty much every major company in the world, there is plenty to back up the allegation that Black Rock is an interested party in most of the transactions in which it engages as part of its partnership with the US Fed and Treasury Branch.

Pam Matens and Russ Martens have been very critical of the role of the Federal Reserve and BlackRock in the current economic crisis. They have anticipated that, if the current drift of events continues, American taxpayers will once again be gobsmacked with a huge growth in the national debt. This development would amount to another major transfer of wealth away from working people to the beneficiaries of Wall Street firms and the same commercial institutions that received the lion’s share of funds during the last bailout.

The co-authors picture BlackRock is part of a scheme to use “Special Purpose Vehicles” like “Enron used to hide the true state of its finances and blow itself up.” They entitle their article published on 31 March, 2020 as  “The Dark Secrets in the Fed’s Wall Street Bailout Are Getting a Devious Makeover in Today’s Bailout.”

The authors observe. “What makes the New York Fed’s bailout of Wall Street so much more dangerous this time around is that it has decided to use a different structure for its loans to Wall Street – one that will force losses on taxpayers and, it hopes, will provide an ironclad secrecy curtain around how much it spends and where the money goes.”

I find this account of an effort by the Federal Reserve to create an “ironclad secrecy curtain” shocking under these circumstances. It suggests an intention to exceed the deceptiveness of the last bailout. This warning renews longstanding suspicions that the failures of transparency and accountability have not subsided since the beginning of the era when deregulation and the 9/11 deceptions converged in the domestic and international operations of Wall Street.

The structural problems already identified in the process initiated to implement the CARES Act could have enormous consequences if the current economic crisis continues to deteriorate. This deterioration is not likely to stop anytime soon given the depth of the crash and its probable domino effects. It was reported in late July that during the second quarter of 2020 the US Gross Domestic Product collapsed at an annualized rate of 33%, the deepest decline in output ever recorded since the US government began measuring GDP in 1947.

The CARES Act helped set in motion a program with the potential to repeat elements of the earlier bailout. The amount of $454 billion was to be set aside to assist the banking sector. The Fed can leverage this amount by ten times according to the principles of fractional reserve banking.

The news of this development caused Mike Whitney to imagine “the Fed turning itself into a hedge fund in order to buy the sludge that has accumulated on the balance sheets of corporations and financial institutions for the last decade,” Whitney pictured an onslaught of “scheming sharpies who will figure out how to game the system and turn the whole fiasco into another Wall Street looting operation.”

Meanwhile the Martens Team at Wall Street on Parade called attention to the $9 trillion already injected by the New York Fed to flood liquidity into the still-troubled Repo Markets that began to falter in September of 2019. Add to this revelation the news that the Fed “has not announced one scintilla of information on what specific Wall Street firms have received this money or how much they individually received.”

There is no doubt that the nature of economic relations will be substantially altered in the process of dealing with the financial meltdown induced by the lockdowns and by the overreliance on high debt rates combined with artificially low interest rates prior to 2020. The altered political economy that is beginning to emerge following the lockdowns is sometimes described as state monopoly capitalism.

In deciding what companies get bailed out and what companies don’t, the financial authorities that are intervening in this crisis are pretty much deciding what enterprises get the advantage of federal financial backstops and what enterprises will not enjoy government sanction. Increasingly, therefore, it is the state that determines winners and losers in the organizing of financial relations. This development further undermines any notion that some idealized vision of competition and market forces will determine winners and losers in the economy of the future.

As Peter Ewarts has observed, it seems that BlackRock is being delegated by federal authorities to exercise “discretionary powers to pick winners and losers,” a choice that is “where the real bonanza and clout lies.” Will the winners be chosen from the companies run by executives that used the money gained from the prior bailouts to engage in stock buy backs? This process of buying back stock tends to be reflected in CEO bonuses and higher share prices. Alternatively this way of allocating funds tends to short change workers as well as innovation and efficiency in industrial production?

Will companies be rewarded whose executives have moved production facilities overseas or issued billions in junk bonds? Will companies be rewarded whose directors have participated in the effort to censor the Internet, bring about lockdowns or foment mask hysteria? Why is it that the coddled elites serving the financial imperatives of most wealthy branches of society are being put in the best position to decide who gets a life preserver from the state and who must sink and drown?

Might this bias be a factor in the current process that led Forbes Magazine to conclude in a headline that “Billionaries Are Getting Richer During the Covid-19 Pandemic While Most Americans Suffer.”

There can be no doubt that the financial transactions beginning with the CARES Act represent a crucial initial stage in what the promoters of the World Economic Forum have been labeling as the Great Reset. Laurence Fink and the BlackRock firm are significant participants in the World Economic Forum. The WEF helped introduce the pandemic in Event 201 in October of 2019 even as it is now trying to put a positive face on the fiasco.

Why should the people most harshly affected by the lockdowns tolerate that the very Wall Street interests dispossessing them, are tasked once again to lead and exploit the reset of the financial system? As presently structured by the likes of BlackRock and its beneficiaries, this process is once again transferring new wealth to the most wealthy branches of society. Simultaneously it is burdening the rest of the population with yet another massive increase in both personal and national indebtedness.

There is no more discussion of “trickle down” economics, a frequent metaphor invoked in the Reagan-Thatcher era. Instead we are in the midst of an increasingly intense phase of suck up economics. The rich are being further enriched and further empowered through the dispossession of the poor and the middle classes. This procedure, initiated when locked down citizens were sidelined from the political process, has the potential to result in the largest upward transfer of wealth so far in history.

BlackRock Versus the Debt-Lite Legacy of the Bank of Canada

At the end of March Laurence Fink, CEO and founder of BlackRock, announced in a letter to his company’s shareholder, “We are honored to have been selected to assist the Federal Reserve Bank of New York and the Bank of Canada on programs designed to facilitate capital to businesses and support the economy.”

This announcement might leave the impression that the Bank of Canada and the Federal Reserve Bank of New York are similar institutions. This impression is unfounded. The two banks have very different structures and histories. A spotlight on these differences helps illuminate the nature of a number of core financial issues.

These financial issues should command avid attention during this time of reckoning with a serious economic crisis that may well be still in its early stages. Such issues inevitably draw attention to the current manifestations of very old questions about the character of money and its relationship to the concepts of usury and debt. Questions about debt, debt enslavement as well as the possibility of debt renunciation or debt forgiveness are becoming especially pressing.

These controversial queries arise in an era when a tiny minority is aggressively asserting sweeping claims to ownership of vast concentrations of the world’s available assets. The other side of this picture reveals that the largest mass of humanity is sinking into a swamp of rising debt on a scale that is concurrently unsustainable and unconscionable. How did this level of inequity reach such audacious extremes? Are there any remedies in sight?

There is nothing to suggest structural remediation in the current approach to the economic crisis. In fact so far there is every indication that the current approach of bringing about an enormous expansion in the availability of debt-laden money will only compound the further dispossession of the already dispossessed in order to expand the wealth of the already wealthy.

As already noted, the Federal Reserve Bank of New York is one of twelve regional banks that together constitute the US Federal Reserve. Every regional Federal Reserve Bank is owned by a group of private banks. Each of the private banks at the base of a Federal Reserve regional bank marks its proprietorship through the ownership of shares. These shares cannot be freely traded in stock markets. The ownership of these shares expresses the private ownership of the US banking system.

The Fed’s New York regional bank has a special role in money creation given its location at the heart of the US financial sector on and around Wall Street. In this crisis, the Federal Reserve Bank of New York is creating new money in the name of holding back onslaughts of destitution and penury in a traumatized society. Ever since 1913 every new dollar brought into existence by the Federal Reserve, which is the central bank of the United States, creates added debt that collects compound interest as long as it is left unpaid.

The Bank of Canada was created to counter the delegation of money-creating authority to privately-owned banks. The Bank of Canada was founded during the Great Depression, a time when the failure of many existing institutions created the conditions to try out alternative entities in the attempt to improve economic relationships.

One of the driving forces in the creation of Canada’s new banking system was Gerald Gratten McGeer. McGreer was an elected official in British Columbia dedicated to changing the system so that the people of Canada could generate their own currency through the sovereign authority of Canada’s Parliament. McGeer helped to push the national government of Prime Minister R.B. Bennett in this direction. The wheels were set in motion in 1933 through the work on the Royal Commission on Banking and Currency.

McGeer drew much of his inspiration from former US President, Abraham Lincoln. Lincoln led the US federal government throughout the US Civil War. To finance the Armed Forces of the Union, Lincoln used the authority of the federal government to create “Greenbacks” as a means of paying the troops. By employing the sovereign authority of the US government to create its own currency, Lincoln avoided the intrigues that often accompanied the process of borrowing money from foreign lenders.

McGreer had obtained what he viewed as credible evidence that Lincoln had been assassinated because of his antagonism to the designs of private bankers seeking to widen their base of power in the United States. The Canadian politician had taken to heart a comment attributed often to Lincoln: “The privilege of creating and issuing money is not only the supreme prerogative of Government, but it is the Government’s greatest creative opportunity.”

The Bank of Canada was created in 1934 and nationalized as a Crown Corporation in 1938. To this day it retains its founding charter that affirms,

WHEREAS it is desirable to establish a central bank in Canada to regulate credit and currency in the best interests of the economic life of the nation, to control and protect the external value of the national monetary unit and to mitigate by its influence fluctuations in the general level of production, trade, prices and employment, so far as may be possible within the scope of monetary action, and generally to promote the economic and financial welfare of Canada.

The Bank of Canada formed an essential basis of a very creative period of Canadian growth, development, and diversification throughout the middle decades of the twentieth century. The Bank of Canada created the capital that financed the Canadian war effort from 1939 until 1945. After the war the Bank of Canada lent money at very low rates of interest to the municipal, provincial and national governments. The monies were used for infrastructure projects and for investments to increase the wellbeing and creative potential of Canada’s most important resource, its people.

This type of low interest or no interest financing formed the economic basis for projects like the creation of a national pension plan, national health care insurance, the Trans-Canada Highway, the St. Lawrence Seaway, the Avro-Arrow initiative as well as a formidable system of colleges and universities.

One could say that the Bank of Canada provided an indigenous money supply that was spent into the operations of a fast growing economy greased with lots of federal liquidity. The new money derived its value from the efforts of Canadian workers.  Together they brought about significant increases in the country’s net worth through practical improvements that bettered the lives of all citizens.

Consider the contrast between this type of national development and the kind of larceny facilitated by the Federal Reserve’s infusions of the money it creates into Wall Street’s operations in the twenty-first century. In, for instance, the financial bailouts of 2007 to 2010 the largest part of the newly-created money ended up in the coffers of the wealthy whereas the new debt created ended up as part of a US national debt.

The burden of carrying this debt falls inter-generationally on average working people who form the lion’s share of taxpayers. They have long been saddled with an “inextinguishable debt” that unrelentingly grows, hardly ever shrinks, and remains basically unpayable forever. The very concept of “compound interest” conveys the image of an overall debt spread out over many venues. This debt must grow in perpetuity. There is a constant need for additional debtors while existing debtors must face constantly growing personal debt.

There is reason to suspect that the financial debacle of 2020 will re-enact some the worst excesses of the 2008 bailout. Might the payouts this time around to derivative-addicted Wall Street firms like Citigroup, Goldman Sachs and JP Morgan Chase exceed the scale of the prior bailout? Would there be any way of even knowing whether the current round of payouts outdoes the former round of bailouts? The current process of federal disbursements is not transparent. In fact the process has been described as one designed to “provide an ironclad secrecy curtain around how much [the Fed} spends and where the money goes.”

Why is the Canadian government turning to the very firm that emerged as Wall Street’s main fixer and winner in the 2008 bailouts? Why is Justin Trudeau looking to BlackRock to respond to the Canadian aspects of the 2020 economic crash?

Justin Trudeau seems unwilling or unable to provide a coherent answer to this question and others requiring thoughtful replies rather than barrages of platitudes. Why is Justin Trudeau instituting what Joyce Nelson has characterized as a “new feudalism” in Canada’s economic policies?

Any decent effort of response on Trudeau’s part would have to make some reference to the background of the current debacle. There would have to be some acknowledgment that between 1934 and 1974 the Canada government did not build up any significant national debt. Then, between 1974 and 2020, the national debt of Canada skyrocketed from $22 billion to $700 billion.

Why was such a good and sustainable use of the Bank of Canada put aside, one that contributed magnificently to the health and wellbeing of the Canadian people as well as the Canadian federation? Who lost out? Who gained besides the international bankers?

The incomprehensible abandonment of a winning formula for Canadian development by Prime Minister Pierre Trudeau puts a special onus on his son, Canada’s current PM, to explain the incredibly costly mistake of his father. Why won’t Justin Trudeau fix the mistake of his father and restore the Bank of Canada to its former role in Canadian nation building?

There has never been a full and satisfactory explanation of what really happened in 1974 to persuade Pierre Trudeau to throw aside the means of developing infrastructure with resources generated internally within Canada. Trudeau Senior’s decision to stop building up Canada through the operation of the Canadian people’s own national bank was not debated in Parliament. The option was never part of an election platform let alone the subject of a national referendum.

Apparently the Swiss-based Bank of International Settlements, which is often referred to as the central bank for central bankers, had some role in Pierre Trudeau’s decision to cease using the Bank of Canada’s powers to generate near-debt-free Canadian currency.

Government as a Means of Escaping Debt Entrapment

That powers of debt-lite money creation invested by Parliament in the Bank of Canada have never been formally withdrawn. The Bank of Canada could still revert back to the direct creation of Canadian currency to be spent into an economy of national recovery; to be spent in investments in infrastructure as well as in cultivating and applying the creative skills of the Canadian people.

Between 2011 and 2017 a court case was brought against the government of Canada with the aim of restoring the Bank of Canada to its former role. As Rocco Galati, the lawyer for the Committee on Monetary and Economic Reform (COMER) explained  “Not only has the government abandoned its constitutional duty to govern, but it has transferred it to international private banks which corresponds to an abandonment of its sovereignty.”

After some significant rulings and contentious appeals, the COMER case came to an end without delivering results that its plaintiffs sought. But the court case helped to put a spotlight on the potential of the Bank of Canada. If properly utilized, this institution could provide a model corrective to the subordination of governance to the international Lords of Debt Explotation and their minions.

This process of politicizing the role of the Bank of Canada should extend to a process of calling out Justin Trudeau’s current approach to selling off key components of Canada’s infrastructure.

This topic came up in private discussions between Larry Fink and Justin Trudeau at the World Economic Forum in Davos in January of 2016. Fink apparently got Trudeau interested in attracting private investors to the project of improving or building Canadian infrastructure projects like roads, high-speed trains, airports and such. This kind of approach to developing infrastructure projects runs counter to the role once played by the Bank of Canada in incorporating self-sufficiency into the process of national building.

The dangers and opportunities in this time of manufactured crises are indeed unprecedented.  Instead of rejecting the Davos crowd’s preoccupation with a giant reset, why not embrace the concept? Why not treat this moment as an opening to reset the global economy in a way that would restore the Bank of Canada to some of its former functions. Why not highlight this return to the sovereign embrace of benevolent nation building as an example for the rest of the world?

Why not reconstitute the worldwide structures of the international system of economic relations to restore elected governments to the functions that have been pre-empted by unaccountable institutions like the US Federal Reserve or the Bank for International Settlements? Why not renew the model of banking as an exercise and expression of national sovereignty and the self-determination of peoples in a dynamic global arena of rules-based economic interaction?

Why not withdraw the power from private bankers to create national currencies? Why not follow the advice of the deceased Abraham Lincoln by restoring “the greatest of all creative possibilities available to governments,” namely their power to issue money and set interest rates. The restoration of economic power to governments and the people and peoples they represent would involve the infusion of life into conceptions of globalization very different than those used to justify the industrialization of China and the deindustrialization of North America.

By delegating to international organizations much of their capacity to influence the economic conditions affecting their own people, national legislatures have lost much of their capacity to provide responsible government. Governments thus weakened are not realistically in a position to derive their authority from the consent of the governed. When representative bodies cannot effectively express the right of their constituents to collective self-determination in economic realm, what legitimacy is left to the institution of representative government?

This strange moment puts humanity face to face with much that is novel and unprecedented and much that is old and integral to the history of human interaction. The economic dimensions of this crisis constitute its most devastating and far-reaching attribute. The supposed remedy being rushed into operation is to flood large quantities of debt-laden loans into existence and for governments to distribute the borrowed funds to individuals, businesses, and organizations as they see fit.

Once again, vast quantities of debt-laden money are being created without the informed consent of those on whose shoulders the vastly increased loads of debt are falling. Once again governments are rewarding political friends and punishing political enemies by means of the way the new funds are being apportioned.

Decisions are pushed forward that emanate not from citizen constituents but from cabals of supranational connivers actively engaged in wrecking what little remains of responsible government. As governments lose legitimacy by engaging in collusion with corrupt cronies and international crime syndicates they must depend more and more on police state thuggery to enforce some semblance of order.

This process is going forward in spite of the fact that alternative means exist to create as much new money as is required without having to pay large amounts of compound interest to private bankers. Every sovereign government has the capacity to generate new money by following the model of the Bank of Canada between 1938 and 1974.

There is an especially urgent need at this time for some serious reckoning with the economic dimensions of the crisis before us. This reckoning will inevitably meet the resistance of extremely powerful interests who are deriving great benefits from the existing system. The process of privatizing the creation of money has enriched and empowered a clique whose institutionalized, deep-rooted and continuing kleptocracy was exposed in part by the bailout of 2008.

Why should we take for granted in 2020 that the best way to deal with the economic debacle put before us is to create new money by agreeing to go much deeper into a quagmire of debt entrapment. This debt trap, whose cumulative amount will soon be more that $300 trillion globally, creates gross liabilities in a trajectory of disadvantage that severely limits the life chances even of many generations still unborn.

The other side of debt is embodied in assets. Who gets the assets and who gets the liabilities that coalesce to form indebtedness? What is to be made of the role of birth or inheritance or race or natural ability or social connections in apportioning assets or imposing the enslavements of accumulated debt?

John Perkins addressed some of these issues in his Confessions of an Economic Hit Man and in a subsequent follow-up volume. Perkins chronicled how an inter-related complex of US institutions aligned themselves with his own greedy and unscrupulous interventions. The goal of their coordinated aggressions was aimed at imposing the enslavements of massive debt with compound interest. Their version of loan sharking is one of many manifestations expressing a very old and common phenomenon. It often happens that powerful interests parasitically exploit the weak to further enrich themselves.

This partnership between John Perkins and the kleptocratic agencies directed by the US government has long been drawing wealth from struggling countries by pushing them more deeply into national indebtedness. Once the governments of target countries succumbed to greater dependence on debt-based financing, the conditions were ripe to force officials into adopting policies of austerity that harmed local citizens in order to augment the assets of international investors.

Significantly the World Bank demonstrated how this coercion works in the context of the current economic crisis. The World Bank attempted to impose conditions on a loan of $940 million to Belarus because the WB wanted Belarus to conform to the lockdowns that are a primary cause of the current manufactured crisis.

As revealed by the Belarus’s President, Alexander Lukashenko, the World Bank wanted his country to adopt the full set of COVID-19 measures that had been implemented by the Italian government. Lukashenko said no to the loan. He refused to accept the conditions and carried on the established policies of Belarus, a country that has “not implemented strict coronavirus containment measures.”

Lukashenko is far from alone in his contempt for the manipulative tactics of the apparatus promoting the manufactured crisis. For instance Tanzanian President, John Magufuli, tested the accuracy of the testing procedures being forced on his country by the World Health Organization. President and Medical Doctor Mugufi included in the samples submitted to the testing agency some tissue of a goat and a papaya. Both the goat and the papaya tested positive for COVID-19, an outcome he publicized before ordering the WHO group to leave his country.

The Political Economy of Usury From the Middle Ages to the Era of Social Credit and Ezra Pound

We cannot assess the division of humanity between a massive group of debtors and a much smaller group of creditors without touching on the issue of usury. The subject of usury, the lending of money with the addition of interest payments, has been an extremely contentious issue throughout much of human history.

There were prohibitions against usury in ancient Greece, ancient India and the Roman Empire. Throughout much of the last thousand years usury has been regarded as a sin outlawed in the Bible, the Torah and the Koran. At different times in history the Roman Catholic Church has been an especially zealous opponent of some forms of usury.

Considering the nature of our current predicaments including obscene levels of economic inequality, usury might yet again arouse contentions. Some of the core ethical issues raised by the resort to usury remain unresolved. How is it ethical, for instance, to subject disinherited children in poor countries to the indignities of deepened poverty so that rich folks in rich parts of the world can reap larger dividends?

Beginning in the Middle Ages, forms of usury began to show up first in the Italian city states and in the towns of the Franco-Flemish realm. The act of loaning money with interest gradually spread throughout Europe. In some predominately-Muslim jurisdictions, the concept conveyed in the Arabic term, “riba,” approximated the idea of usury or interest. Over time various versions of riba have affected Muslim banking practices.

Often there were prohibitions preventing Jews from demanding interest on loans made to other Jews. There were many Talmudic teachings, however, permitting interest to be collected from gentiles when they borrowed money from Jews. Many accounts of Jewish efforts to break down prohibitions on usury highlight obstacles preventing Jews from pursuing other lines of work. The case is made that the pull of some Jews into banking came about in part because of their exclusion from other occupations.

Whatever the case, the obstacles to usury continued to be lessened including through the changes to Biblical interpretation that came with the Protestant Reformation. Even in the twentieth century, however, usury continued to arouse criticism and distrust. Ezra Pound was one of those who became very outspoken when it came to problems with usury.

The modernist poet and scholar, Ezra Pound, was one of the most influential literary figures of the twentieth century. The importance of his work was expressed not only in his own literary efforts but also in his contributions to other authors in his circle of friends and colleagues.

Pound’s outspoken criticism of usury formed part of the discourse that was integral to the political movements seeking economic reform. The creation and successful nationalization of the Bank of Canada was one of the outgrowths of the concerted quest to give substance to economic institutions that would more effectively serve human needs.

The creation of the Bank of Canada drew on the ideas of Abraham Lincoln and also on those of many other theorists including Major C.H. Douglas. While Major Douglas and John Maynard Keynes each denounced one another’s work, both sought to stimulate economic activity by expanding the supply and distribution of money.  Major Douglas’ vision of Social Credit, one that Pound enthusiastically embraced, sought to bring about greater harmony and equilibrium between the forces of production and consumption.

A biographer of Pound has explained that this formidable literary figure believed “there was the prospect of building a Social Credit society where money served the consumer and served the producer.”  As Pound pictured it, “the middle men” seeking usurious, interest bearing profit” to be collected “without work or prior motivation, could be cut out.” During the Depression the hope of prosperity through the application of Social Credit principles was seized upon by many. One of them was an evangelical preacher in the Canadian province of Alberta.

Largely as a result of the popularity he gained by incorporating Major Douglas’ analysis of Social Credit into his Sunday afternoon Christian radio broadcast, “Bible Bill” Aberhart became the Premier of Alberta. His Social Credit Party gained 56 of 63 seats in the Alberta Legislature. The Social Credit Party continued in power until 1971.

The Social Credit preoccupation with bringing about changes in the relationship of citizens to financial institutions helped add to the discourse from which the Bank of Canada emerged as a dynamic instrument of nation building.

The enthusiasm was well placed of those who threw their lot in with the movement to create and enlivened the Bank of Canada. The generations that put their trust in this federal financial institution had the satisfaction of knowing that their taxes were not devoured to pay big amounts of interest to private bankers in the style that presently prevails almost everywhere.

Like his good friend and colleague, Ernest Hemingway, Pound was a devotee of clear, terse and succinct prose.

This characteristic of his writing comes through strongly in his harsh condemnations of usury. “Usury is the cancer of the world,” Pound wrote. He explained, “Until you know who has lent to whom, you know nothing of politics, you know nothing whatever of history, you know nothing of international wrangles.”

Ezra Pound was born in Idaho but was attracted to Italy throughout long periods of his life. In Italy he lionized its fascist leader, Benito Mussolini. He embraced the Axis side in World War II developing close relations with the British fascist leader, Oswald Mosley. Pound threw himself into the contest producing a torrent of radio broadcasts seeking to win over English-speaking converts to the Axis side. These broadcasts are today widely described as war propaganda.

Pound was indicted in the United States in 1943 and arrested at the war’s end by the US Armed Forces in Italy. After being jailed in Pisa, Pound was charged with treason. Then Pound was diagnosed as being mentally unfit to face charges.

The finding that he was mentally ill caused Pound to be locked up as a patient in St. Elizabeth’s Hospital in the Washington DC area for the next 13 years. In spite of his severe prejudices against Jewish bankers and his active embrace of fascism during the war years, Pound continued to carry on very lively interactions with his formidable circle of poets, essayists and novelists.

Pound’s circle included James Joyce, Ernest Hemingway, and T.S. Eliot. All these writers wrote works that won a Nobel Prize for Literature. These and many other authors benefited from Pound’s encouragement and mentorship. In 1948 Eustace Mullins joined Pound’s circle. Mullins was introduced to the famous poet and scholar through Pound’s wife, Dorothy Shakespeare,

When he first met Pound, Mullins was an art school student and a veteran of the US Air Force. He had already published some short pieces in the British journal, Social Creditor. Mullins remembered Pound’s place of forced residence as “a hideous, urine-soaked madhouse in Washington D.C.” As their visits became increasingly regular, Pound encouraged Mullins to conduct research into the history and activities of the Federal Reserve.

When Pound proposed the idea Mullins was unaware of the existence of the Federal Reserve. Nevertheless, Mullins threw himself into the project that he supported by combining his research with work as a book stacker at the Library of Congress. At the Library he befriended George Stimpson who was well known among Washington journalists and government officials for his wealth of knowledge and his ability to locate relevant research materials.

Stimpson happily worked with Mullins. He helped the aspiring author by guiding him into the primary and secondary literature illuminating many facets of the Federal Reserve’s history

Eustace Mullins Explores the Secrets of the Federal Reserve

An initial edition of the volume appeared in 1952 as Mullins on the Federal Reserve. Another edition with added information was published in 1954. The text has been republished many times, sometimes in different editions under the title Secrets of the Federal Reserve. The text is organized around both thematic and chronological facets.

Mullins lays out the history of the Federal Reserve with considerable attention to the institution’s roots and origins. The author emphasizes several strands of continuity showing the links of the Federal Reserve to the banking establishments of Europe but especially those of Great Britain and Germany.

Mullins characterizes the Federal Reserve as the most powerful institution in the United States whose influence grew so that “it gradually superseded the popular elected government of the United States.” The power of the Fed and its core facet, the Federal Reserve Bank of New York, is said to have become so formidable because the agency operates in secrecy without any genuine form of accountability to any public institution. The NY Fed combines the power of secrecy with the enormous power to create new currency and to set interest rates becoming in the process “the most gigantic trust on earth.”

Mullins makes the case that the financial district known as the City of London exercised enormous influence over the activities of the Federal Reserve and many of the large Wall Street banks. Mullins wrote, “London is the world’s financial centre, because it commands enormous sums of capital created at its command by the Federal Reserve Board of the United States.”

Mullins is conscientious in presenting many citations to back up his observations and interpretations. He cites, for instance the New York Times on January of 1920 where it states, “The Federal Reserve is a fount of credit not capital.” The manipulation of credit, however, can greatly affect the industrial economy by affecting the ability of manufacturers and farmers to produce.

Mullins emphasizes throughout the text how events are often engineered to strengthen the hand of the Lords of Credit in the matrix of society’s operations. In referring, for instance, to a secret banker’s plan to crash the stock market in 1929, Mullins expressed a view that could as easily describe the growing suspicion in 2020. Could it be that the lockdowns of businesses and workers were purposely engineered to strengthen the hands of the Lords of Credit whose main platform is the Federal Reserve Bank of New York?

Mullins explains that sometimes “bankers paralyse the industrial energies of the country” in order to highlight and strengthen “their tremendous powers” over the financial and business organization of the American economy. Mullins’ observation that “panic is an instrument of [financial] power” is another statement with obvious relevance to the current crisis.

As have many authors since, Mullins emphasizes the importance of a top-secret meeting on Jekyll Island in the state of Georgia in 1910. At this meeting Paul Warburg essentially took the intellectual lead in creating a plan for a Central Bank in the United States. Such an institution was long contemplated and promoted but it had been stopped repeatedly, most famously be Andrew Jackson. Jackson’s political career culminated in his winning the US presidency between 1829 and 1837.

Warburg left his family banking business in Hamburg Germany in 1902. He joined the Wall Street Office of Kuhn Loeb, a Wall Street House that helped finance the Bolshevik Revolution in Russia. Mullins devotes much effort to describing the complex of alliances and rivalries that characterized banking before and after the founding of the Fed.

Weaving throughout these networks of financial activity were the banking operations of the Rothschild family. Mullins leaves no doubt that the operations of the Rothschild family of bankers were extensive, elaborate and very influential.

In the nineteenth century the Rothschild banking establishment gradually wove its operations into those of large segments of Europe’s royal and aristocratic establishments. Mullins emphasizes the genesis of the close business relationship between the Rothschild banking clan and a London-based US company, George Peabody and Company.

Peabody’s bank was passed on to a father and son team, Junius Spencer Morgan and John Pierpont Morgan. In the days of the Fed’s founding and even today, the name of J.P. Morgan is synonymous with New York banking. Mullins explains how the Rothschild bankers kept a fairly low profile in New York by conducting much of their American business largely through the financial organizations associated with the name and reputation of J.P. Morgan.

Mullins outlines the role of the Federal Reserve in the funding of two world wars. Many of the topics covered in Secrets of the Federal Reserve were later pursued in much more detail in the prolific writings of Antony C. Sutton.

Most of Sutton’s volumes describe the role of Wall Street in helping to bring about many of world history’s major turning points during the twentieth century. These turning points include Wall Street’s funding of the rise of the National Socialist government in Germany in the 1930s and the role of Wall Street in financing the Bolshevik Revolution and the business activities of the Soviet Union.

The capacity of the New York Bank of the Federal Reserve to create vast quantities of credit to finance wars, often with the same bankers funding competing sides in conflicts, provided the key to the creation of huge fortunes. The funding of both sides in war can be seen as an early form of hedging one’s bets. This kind of high impact intervention through banking sometimes created huge leverage for a very small number of people to steer history towards preconceived destinations.

As Mullins explains it, the Federal Reserve was founded in extreme secrecy and often employs deceptive tactics to misrepresent its true nature. As Mullins sees it, for instance, the creation of the twelve regional banks was a ploy to gain political acceptance for the Central Bank’s core entity, the Federal Reserve Bank of New York. Mullins explains, “the other eleven banks were so many expensive mausoleums erected to salve local pride and quell the Jacksonian fears of the hinterland.”

The ability of Wall Street bankers to invoke the credit creating powers of the New York Fed forms a key aspect of the frequent military adventurism of the US government. This military adventurism continued full force even after the United States became the world’s largest debtor nation after 1990. How large has been the role of the US Fed in building up the US national debt together with the tens of trillions missing from the books of the US Defense Department?

The Israel Lobby and the Federal Reserve

Much of the military adventurism of the United States especially after 9/11 was directed into invasions of Muslim-majority countries that threaten a particular view of Israel as a dominant power in its region and in the world. Why would it be that the Federal Reserve is any less involved in creating the available credit for the waging of wars in the twenty-first century than it was in creating the wars of the twentieth century?

In his authorship of The Secrets of the Federal Reserve, Mullins seems largely oblivious to the role in world history of Zionism and the genesis of Israel. His main attention lay elsewhere. As I read his text, he accurately conveyed how the large Jewish influence in the banking institution of Europe, including the influence of the Rothschild consortium, was extended into Wall Street including the Federal Reserve.

While Mullins does not shy aware from dealing with the Jewish component of the story he set out to tell, I don’t think he belabours this subject or becomes aggressively polemical about it. Certainly the same cannot be said of some of his critics whose condemnations of Mullins can sometimes be extremely polemical.

Mullins might have made more of the identity politics prevailing throughout the twentieth century. The sensibilities of the dominant Christian constituency in the United States probably influenced the decisions of many customers shopping for banking services. Quite likely some of them would have been more comfortable dealing with firms identified with names like J.P. Morgan, Rockefeller and Mellon rather than Warburg, Greenspan or Fink. Times, however, have changed.

Some of the more severe prejudices seem to have subsided around the time that Sandy Weill combined his Travellers Insurance Company with Citicorp to create Citigroup. This merger helped create the political momentum leading to the elimination of the Glass-Steagall Act in 1999. With Glass-Steagall’s elimination, Citigroup tried to become a giant department store of varied financial services. In its inner sanctums, however, Citigroup developed a preoccupation with derivatives that continues yet.

In the twenty-first century it happened that some of the cosmetic overlays were removed that had previously been imposed to disguise the large representation of Jews in Wall Street banking, including in the Federal Reserve Bank of New York. For good or bad, usury has become a core features of how the contemporary world is organized. Some reckoning with the ethnic inheritances attending usury are therefore inescapable, especially when dealing with the some of the most dramatic displays of usury on steroids in Wall Street institutions.

Where I see the need to draw a line in the sand is not on the question of the ethnicity of Wall Street personnel. Rather this line in the sand involves the question of how power is used or abused at the domineering heights of our financial institutions. Generally speaking it is not a justifiable use of the Federal Reserve to produce credit that enables the waging of wars that are offensive rather than defensive in character.

The waging of war has long been one of the big bonanzas producing major windfalls for international bankers. In the twenty-first century so many of the wars involve the flexing of military might by the United States to advance the expansionary designs of the Israeli state. The US Federal Reserve has been part of the process of creating what some would consider wars for Israel in Iraq, Syria, Yemen and Iran.

Why are the money-generating powers of the secretive Federal Reserve being invoked to help fund wars for Israel and also to help shape public opinion to accept the US role in these wars of aggression. Especially sensitive is the further indebting of the American people to subsidize the production of propaganda aimed at persuading them to back wars for Israel. This propaganda is deemed necessary to deflate opposition to Israel’s actions including the ruthless dehumanizing treatment of Palestinian Arabs.

We have seen that the Federal Reserve Bank of New York was deeply engaged in 2008 in transferring tens of trillions into the coffers of its own member institutions and counterparties. What uses were made of this bailout produced through a dubious process of legalized financial larceny?

One way or another the Israel Lobby must be a prime beneficiary of the machinations of Wall Street and its money spigot, the Federal Reserve Bank of New York. This pattern of priority can easily be related to US federal funding of the Israel project as a higher priority in federal budgeting than even the basic needs of the domestic population of the United States. Black Lives Do Matter but why is it that the lives of Israel First Partisans seem to matter more than any other group?

This Israel Lobby has the power to prevent any critic of Israeli policies from gaining the nomination of a major US party to run for US president. The result is that, in election after election, Americans are offered a very limited choice between competitors who are equally supportive of Israel.

The Israel Lobby can intervene to prevent the leadership of opposition parties from adopting policies that emphasize equity in Israel-Palestinian relations. Through its campaign contributions, the Israel Lobby dominates the process of choosing and electing representatives in Congress. How much does it cost to buy the political obedience of most federal politicians? How much does it cost to replicate this feat in the state legislatures and even municipal governments?

Through the ownership and/or control of major media outlets, the Israel Lobby exerts major influence in determining the main outlines of much public discourse when it comes to US-Israeli relations and many related subjects. How could one calculate the amount of money it took to achieve this feat? How much of this money is directed into payments for compliance, in other words, bribery? In the post-Epstein era what is the role of bribery’s criminal cousin, namely backmail?

The Israel Lobby is deeply engaged with other lobbies in transforming the Internet from an open forum of public interaction and debate into a centrally controlled propaganda instrument. Prominent among the Internet’s most aggressive censors and thought police are Google, You Tube, Facebook, Twitter and the Anti-Defamation League of B’nai B’rith.

Through all kinds of interventions the Israel Lobby asserts significant forms of control over a broad array of institutions and operations including those of the judiciary, the universities, book publishing, magazine publishing, municipal governments, trade unions and cultural groups. The biggest and most influential cultural group of all is the Hollywood film industry. Not surprisingly there is little in its cinematic output that provides critical perspectives on Zionism and its emanations.

The injection of huge amounts of money are essential to the exercise of so much concerted influence over such a broad sweep of political, intellectual and cultural organizations. Where do the large quantities of money supporting the activities the Israel project come from? Why is it that so many of agencies of the Israel Lobby have the status of charitable organizations with the capacity to extend tax write-offs to donors? What is the relationship of the Israel Lobby to Wall Street and the Federal Reserve Bank of New York?

Even the act of asking such questions will be seen by some as heretical. There is, however, nothing wrong with looking into issues that have so much impact on the quality of our political discourse… so much impact on our capacity to live together with the civility and security we have been losing so quickly with the imposition of the economically crippling lockdowns.

It is no less legitimate to ask questions about the ethnic identity of those who benefit most from the US economy than it is to ask questions about what groups suffer the most from the deprivations of poverty. Wouldn’t it make sense to try to moderate the disparities beginning with processes of research and discussion?

In a book of the same name, former ADL Executive Director, Abe Foxman, has opened the discussion of Jews and Money. Foxman effectively counters the view that all Jews are rich. Foxman, of course, is correct in this assertion. All Jews are not rich. Some are outright poor. A fairly large number of Jews, however, are somewhat rich and a small minority of Jews are disproportionately invested with wealth and power. Jews are especially well represented in the billionaires club both within the United States and internationally.

Some of the wealthiest Jews are part of the Wall Street establishment including the Federal Reserve Bank of New York. Perhaps the time has come to begin retiring this, “the most gigantic trust on earth.” Perhaps it is time to retire some of the debt created over more than a century of putting private bankers in charge of dictating interest rates as well as creating debt-laden dollars. Perhaps the time has come to lessen the debt burden that is narrowing the life chances of so many people who have been funding the wars for Israel mounted in the wake of the 9/11 deception.

The severity of the crisis before us compel all thoughtful people of conscience to look beyond the redeployment of old institutions and old remedies for old problems that are different from the challenges facing us now. One of the most obvious ways to avert further calamity is to move away altogether from the empowerment of private bankers to massively expand national debts with compound interest charged to tax payers.

The alternative to this approach is to change the present means of creating new money. The creation of many banking systems similar to that of the Bank of Canada should be considered in the quest for the main ingredients of a global reset. The Bank of Canada brought about an almost-debt-free run of prodigious nation building before Pierre Trudeau bent the policies of his government to meet the impositions of the Bank of International Settlements.

===============================

How Central Banks Made the Covid Panic Worse

How Central Banks Made the Covid Panic Worse  By Kristoffer  Mousten Hansen, Mises Institute, 5 August 2020

Introduction

Historical events are complex phenomena, and monocausal explanations are therefore by definition wrong when explaining history. Many factors go into explaining why people and the world’s governments reacted as they did to the coronavirus. It is, however, my contention that examining the inflationary policies pursued by central banks and governments are fundamental to understanding how the current corona hysteria developed.

Calling it hysteria may sound harsh. When the coronavirus first started to draw attention back in February, and when most Western countries instituted extremely restrictive measures in March, one could make a plausible argument that the world was dealing with an unknown and seemingly catastrophic disease and that therefore extreme measures were justified. To be sure, this does not mean that the measures implemented were in any way effective, nor that the sacrifices imposed were morally justified; but there was at least an argument to be made.

At this point in time, however, the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC) has repeatedly cut the COVID-19 fatality rate, and it is now comparable to a bad year of the seasonal flu (see the useful aggregation of studies and reports by Swiss Propaganda Research). The glaring question therefore is: Why do governments across the West act as if they were still dealing with an unprecedented threat? It is no good to simply reply that what politicians really want is power and that they are just using coronavirus as an excuse for extending government control. While a plausible claim, it does not explain why vast majorities in most countries support whatever policies their rulers have thought good. Given the extreme restrictions placed on social and economic life and the mendacious, ever shifting narrative used to justify them, one would think that there would be widespread opposition after four months. So why is there practically none?

Inflation in the Age of Corona

We can better understand this strange phenomenon if we consider the inflationary policies pursued by central banks across the world. I’ll here cleave to the old definition of the term inflation and the one still favored by Austrian school economists: an increase in the quantity of money. The rise in prices which is commonly referred to as inflation is simply the effect of such an increase. While the complexities of modern central banking can sometimes obscure the realities of the process, there can be no doubt that the last couple of months have seen very high levels of inflation.

Modern central banks are no longer content with the classic role of lender of last resort. As the financial system has evolved, central banks have assumed the role of market maker of last resort—that is, they have either implicitly or explicitly assumed the responsibility of making sure that there is always a buyer for financial assets—and first of all government bonds. Thus the Federal Reserve’s balance sheet has ballooned from just over $4 trillion at the beginning of March to now just below $7 trillion; the Bank of England’s has increased from about £580 billion in March to about £780 billion; and the European Central Bank has increased its holdings from about €4.6 trillion to about €6.3 trillion. The balance sheets of the largest central banks thus expanded by between 35 and 75 percent in about five months.

Inflated central bank balance sheets suggest inflation is coming, but actual inflation of the money supply naturally lags behind, since central bank purchases of bonds and securities do not necessarily result in an immediate expansion of the stock of money. The American money stock (measured by the monetary aggregate M2) grew from $15.5 trillion to $18.4 trillion (March–July 13), the British one from £2.45 trillion to about £2.67 trillion (January–May) and the euro area money stock from €12.4 trillion to almost €13.2 trillion (January–June). The annualized rates of inflation in the major monetary areas during the corona episode is then between about 13 (eurozone) and about 50 (USA) percent, well above the norm.1 If we look at the Austrian, “true” measure of the money supply (TMS) for the United States, we see a similar picture, as the TMS in June grew 34.5 percent year over year (YOY).

The Effects of the Present Inflation

Inflation is not an act of God; it is the outcome of a determined policy on the part of governments and central banks. Such a policy has both long-run and short-run effects, which brings us to the first and most obvious way in which inflation has fueled corona hysteria: by essentially putting freshly printed money at the disposal of governments, these latter have been able to first shut down their countries and then pose as saviors as they distributed largesse to workers and businesses. The states have often reimbursed the costs of furloughing employees, either directly or through (sometimes forgivable) loans to companies, or they have distributed generous unemployment benefits to the workers. This, and not any economic collapse, is the story behind the unprecedented spike in unemployment claims in the United States. The central bank has also created facilities to lend to municipal governments and the Main Street Lending Program to “support lending to small and medium-sized businesses and nonprofit organizations that were in sound financial condition before the onset of the COVID-19 pandemic.”

The effect of these programs and policies and others like them in other countries has been to mitigate the direct impact of government-imposed shutdowns. Businesses may have no revenues, but government aid and loans allow them to meet their contractual payments; workers may be unemployed, but generous unemployment subsidies allow them to maintain themselves comfortably; government support of furloughing schemes hides the true extent of unemployment caused by the shutdowns. And all this seemingly at no cost, since no one notices the inevitable dilution of the purchasing power of the monetary unit.

In the absence of these inflationary policies, the consequences of the shutdown would be much more immediately apparent. Workers would have to spend out of their saved cash and liquidate their savings, while businesses earning no revenues would start to default on their contractual payments. A drastic fall in the prices of real and financial assets would have resulted. The pressure to end the restrictions would have been much stronger. Instead, it looks to most people as if they can go on at their old standard of living indefinitely—or at least as long as they continue to receive their government checks. The economic effects of the shutdown are still the same, however: dislocation of the production structure and capital consumption on a vast scale, but these have been hidden—papered over by inflation and government support.

To the individual business owner and worker, the economic reality is hidden. Inflation leads to a fundamental disconnect with reality. Paul Cantor has previously described “the web of illusions endemic to the era of paper money” and how inflation destroys people’s sense of reality.2 In our case, inflationary monetary policy has hidden the costs of engaging in pandemic hysteria, and hence people do not—indeed, cannot—take account of economic realities when assessing the coronavirus and the shutdowns. Governments at all levels can continue to pose as saviors, inventing new mandates and restrictions to combat the nonexistent threat. Germophobes and busybodies can obsess over other people trying to go about their normal lives, since both the costs to them personally and to society as a whole are completely hidden. How many Karens would have the time to boss peaceful citizens around if they had to actually work to earn a living?

Eventually and pretty quickly, these policies will result in price inflation and a hollowing out of the standard of living. Not only has production been severely restricted, as seen in the drastic fall in US GDP figures; insofar as the newly printed money is used on unemployment compensation in different forms, it will quickly reach normal consumers and be spent on consumer goods. If the programs go on much longer, consumer price inflation, as a result of the fiat money inflation, cannot be far off. Once that happens, only increased rates of inflation can keep the programs going—for a time.

The Effects of the Inflationary System

The effects of the inflationary system as such are much more far-reaching than economic dislocation and destruction, however. Fiat money produced out of thin air by central bankers leads to a long-run change in social attitudes and personal character. Joseph Salerno in a stimulating paper discusses how hyperinflation leads to the destruction of personality,3 and following Guido Hülsmann,4

 

I would argue that fiat inflation entails the erosion of culture and character. This is perhaps most fully in evidence in Japan, where people have suffered under artificially low interest rates for decades. What are some of the consequences of an inflationary fiat standard and the culture it brings about, and what is the connection to the corona crisis? There is first of all a change in time preferences, as inflation leads to repressed interest rates and hence less incentive to save and invest. People’s time horizons change, as they increasingly discount long-run value creation and instead focus on present enjoyments and short-run yields. The changing role of central banks only intensifies this development. Instead of “lenders of last resort,” central banks are now “market makers of last resort.” That is to say, stock markets and bond prices cannot be allowed to fall, and it is the role of the banks to make sure they don’t. As a consequence, investors increasingly turn to the pursuit of short-run yields.

This change in time preference has effects beyond the market. Since a premium is placed on short-term thinking in market affairs, naturally people transfer the same attitude to their nonmarket pursuits. Present benefits and present dangers are both emphasized at the expense of future costs and benefits, respectively. It is not hard to see the connection to the virus: since there is a possibility that the virus may potentially be very dangerous, people get frightened and act to make the fear go away. No matter the future consequences of their actions, the present danger of the virus trumps all.

Closely connected to this change in time preferences is a skewed perception of reality. Inflation alters what constitutes successful action, since it is increasingly no longer productive endeavors but closeness to the source of inflation that determines the individual’s success in life. Since the ability of the central banks to create paper wealth seems virtually boundless, naturally people come to have unrealistic expectations of what is possible. Of course we can have a shutdown. We’ll have a central bank–fueled “v-shaped” recovery once it’s over. Of course governments can and should do whatever it takes to protect us from the virus. They can just finance spending with paper money for however long it takes. Whatever costs there are to these courses of action are hidden or far in the future.

Conclusion

There are many reasons for the corona crisis and the present almost total government control of the economy and society. But if we want to understand why states across the Western world have met virtually no resistance in their quest for power, we need to understand the role of inflation in enabling governments: directly through hiding the real costs and pain of the shutdowns, but also more fundamentally by distorting culture and personal character.

  • Trading Economics, www.tradingeconomics.com; Federal Reserve Bank of St. Louis, FRED, www.fred.stlouisfed.org.
  • Paul A. Cantor, “Hyperinflation and Hyperreality: Thomas Mann in Light of Austrian Economics,” Review of Austrian Economics7, no. 1 (1994): 3–29.
  • Joseph T. Salerno, “Hyperinflation and the Destruction of Human Personality,” Studia humana2, no. 1 (2013): 15–27.
  • Jörg Guido Hülsmann, “Cultural Consequences of Monetary Interventions,” Journal des économistes et des études humaines22, no. 1 (2016).?

Author:

Kristoffer Mousten Hansen

Kristoffer Mousten Hansen is a PhD candidate at the University of Angers and a Mises Institute Research Fellow.

======================

Welcome To The Crazed, Frantic Demise Of Finance Capitalism

 

Welcome To The Crazed, Frantic Demise Of Finance Capitalism  By Charles Hugh Smith, via OfTwoMinds blog, 20 July 2020

 The cognitive dissonance required to ignore the widening gap between the real economy and the fraud’s basic machinery–speculation funded by “money” conjured out of thin air–has reached a level of denial that can only be termed psychotic.

 When scams start unraveling, the scammers become increasingly frantic to maintain the illusion of legitimacy and the delusion of guaranteed gains that are the lifeblood of every scam. One sure sign that the flim-flam is about to collapse is the manic rise of FOMO, fear of missing out, as the scammers jam the Ponzi scheme’s stellar returns to new extremes.

What greedy human can resist guaranteed gains, especially of the enviously grandiose variety?

The greatest scam of the past century is unraveling before our eyes. I’m calling it finance capitalism as a general descriptor of the dominant form of what’s called “capitalism” because calling it what it actually is–a fraud that’s destroyed the foundations of our economy and society–is, well, a much more difficult sell than “capitalism,” which still has some faint echoes of the open markets, etc. that characterized traditional capitalism, which I call naive capitalism because it is incapable of differentiating between the parasitic, predatory finance version cloaking itself as “capitalism” and actual capitalism, in which capital is put at risk, markets are transparent, etc.

There are many labels for the distorted, corrupted “capitalism” that dominates our economy and society: I’ve long used state-cartel capitalism, others prefer monopoly capitalism or crony capitalism.

I now favor finance capitalism because the heart of the fraud is finance: printing “money” out of thin air without creating any value or any goods and services. If you can’t print “money,” then borrow it into existence–that’s just as profitable a fraud as printing it.

As I explained in Our Wile E. Coyote Economy: Nothing But Financial Engineering (June 11, 2020), the fairy tale that America has a truly capitalist economy no longer aligns with the reality that the U.S. economy is now a decaying billboard of “producing goods and services” behind which the real money is made in financial engineering, a.k.a. legalized fraud.

I’ve discussed this fraudulent distortion of capitalism for years:

Has “Financial Innovation” Capitalism Run its Course? (June 22, 2010)

When Capitalism Turns to Cannibalism (July 15, 2015)

What Makes You Think the Stock Market Will Even Exist in 2024? (July 6, 2020)

Just as Communism was a god that failed, finance capitalism is also a god that failed, an extreme version of crony-capitalism that is nothing more than a mechanism for concentrating wealth and power at the expense of everyone toiling in the real-world economy.

And if we understand this, then we also understand that with its stock buybacks, high-frequency trading and after-hours manipulation, the stock market is nothing more than finance capitalism’s primary mechanism for increasing the concentration of wealth.

How did outright fraud come to dominate our economy? The answer is simple: infinite greed plus the decline of gains from “real capitalism,” i.e. increasing productivity via producing goods and services. The appeal of something for nothing is irresistible when “money” can be printed / borrowed out of thin air and used to run a fraud that exploits human greed.

Like every good Ponzi scheme, those invested in the scam promote the fraud and cajole new marks to sink their cash into the “guaranteed gains” scheme because everyone already in the fraud will lose if there aren’t enough new marks joining to keep it from collapsing. That perfectly describes the entire financial media, the financial “industry” and everyone in it.

Unfortunately for everyone invested in the scam, all the “wealth” created by financial engineering / legalized fraud is fictitious, i.e. phantom. All Ponzi schemes collapse once the supply of greed-blinded marks dries up, and so the “solution” in our finance capitalism fraud is for the central bank, the Federal Reserve, to become the mark with an infinite checkbook: the Fed is busily conjuring “money” out of thin air to buy corporate junk bonds and other “assets” (ha-ha, as if these are actually worth anything–the joke’s on you) to prop up the Ponzi scheme.

This works until it doesn’t, of course. In the meantime, the folks running the fraud are pulling out all the stops to keep it from imploding–goosing the FOMO frenzy, printing and throwing trillions into the scam to maintain the illusion of legitimacy and the delusion of guaranteed gains and talking up the god-like powers of the Fed to prop up the fraud indefinitely.

Despite these massive manipulations, the cracks are increasingly visible. Volatility refuses to sink back to near zero, and the swings in the skimming machine, a.k.a. the stock market are becoming more extreme.

The cognitive dissonance required to ignore the widening gap between the real economy and the fraud’s basic machinery–speculation funded by “money” conjured out of thin air–has reached a level of denial that can only be termed psychotic.

All bubbles pop, all frauds implode, all scams collapse. That ominous clicking coming from behind the tattered billboard is the sound of dominoes falling.

As Mark, Jesse and I discuss in Salon #13: The “Phase Shift” everyone is worried about has already happened, the meteor triggering the demise of finance capitalism has already hit.

==========================

Previous articles

  • Central Banks Driving Gold  By Jim Rickards, for The Daily Reckoning, 2 July 2020
  • The Sneaky Covid War on Cash  By Viv Forbes, saltbushclub.com, 19 June 2020
  • The biggest experiment in money creation ever  By Peter Schiff, Via Zerohedge, 28 May 2020
  • 18 Signs That We Are Facing A Record Breaking Economic Implosion In 2020  By Michael Snyder, The Economic Collapse, 7 May 2020
  • The Real Reason Why the Government Shutdown Caused an Economic Collapse  By David Stockman, International Man, 25 April 2020
  • Losing Faith in Fiat, The Collapse is Underway  Greg Hunter interviews Michael Pento, 20 April 2020
  • A Debt Jubilee Is the Only Way to Avoid a Depression  By Michael Hudson, Unz Review, 14 April 2020
  • The Future Of What’s Called CapitalismBy Charles Hugh Smith, via Zerohedge, 24 January 2020
  • The Biggest Stock Market Melt Up In US HistoryBy Michael Snyder, Zerohedge, 21 January 2020
  • The Century Of Total War Coincided With The Century Of Central BankingVia The Mises Institute, 2 November 2019
  • Ludwig Von Mises explained the world’s adoption of faulty economics  By Richard Ebeling, The Heartland Institute, 8 September 2019
  • Billionaires, Bezos, And The Real Big Brother   By Eric Zuesse, via ConsortiumNews.com & Zerohedge, 30 August 2019
  • US Dollar’s Achilles heel, and gold to soar  By Dr. Jim Willie, 13 August 2019
  • Former Lehman Brothers chief economist warns ‘risk incentives’ could cause new crisis  By Adam Creighton, The Australian, 22 October 2018
  • Ten signs we’re heading for economic Armageddon  By Liam Dann, Herald News Business Editor, 11 February 2018
  • The Greatest Bubble Ever, Why You Better Believe It – Part 1 and 2  By  David Stockman via Contra Corner blog, ZeroHedge, 31 December 2017
  • This Is What A Pre-Crash Market Looks Like  By Michael Snyder, The Economic Collapse blog, 14 November 2017
  • The Economic End Game Continues  By Brandon Smith via Alt-Market.com, 5 November 2017
  • Get Ready for a World Currency by 2018  By Jay Syrmopoulos, 13 July 2017
  • Without Glass-Steagall America Will Fail  By Paul Craig Roberts, 10 June 2017
  • Creating another ‘crash of 1929’  By Jeff Thomas, Editor, International Man, 20 April 2017
  • Why Investors Deserve to Get Mauled  By Vern Gowdie, Daily Reckoning, 21 March 2017
  • Bubbles always burst, eventually  By Vern Gowdie, The Daily Reckoning, 16 March 2017
  • This Global Debt Bomb Is Ready To Explode  By Michael Snyder via The Economic Collapse blog, 14 March 2017
  • Great Political and Social Leaders Always Call Out Bankers  By Waking Times, 16 February 2017
  • What Will President Trump Do About The Central-Bank Cartel  By Thorstein Polleit, via The Mises Institute, 14 February 2017
  • The Deep State’s Doomsday Bug  By Bill Bonner, Bonner and Partners, 1 February
  • Only Glass-Steagall Can Save the U.S. from Another Epic Crash  By Pam Martens, 31 January 2017
  • This could be the biggest ‘black swan’ of 2017  By Nick Giambruno, International Man, 24 January 2017
  • Banks Owned or Controlled by the Rothschild Family  From HumansAreFree.com, 23 January 2017
  • The ‘Axis of Gold’ is launching an attack on the U.S. dollar  By Jim Rickards,   29 December 2016
  • rickards-the-global-elites-secret-plan-for-the-next-financial-crisis  By Jim Rickards, Editor, Currency Wars Alert, 28 October 2016
  • we-are-living-on-borrowed-money-time   By Vern Gowdie, The Daily Reckoning, 13 October 2016
  • deutsche-bank-in-dire-straights  From Zerohedge, 30 September 2016
  • big-banks-a-culture-of-crime  By Jeff Nielson, Bullion Bulls Canada, 30 September 2016
  • jim-rickards-there-will-be-a-war-on-gold  From Tekoa De Silve at Sprott Thoughts, 14 September 2016
  • supervisor-of-massive-fraud-at-wells-fargo-leaves-bank-with-125-million-bonus  From Zerohedge, 13 September 2016
  • The-end-game-of-central-banking-is-nigh  By David Stockman via Contra Corner blog, Zerohedge, 8  September 2016
  • Are Central Bankers Coming To A Bitter End  By Martin Armstrong via ArmstrongEconomics.com, Zerohedge, 30 August 2016
  • Pentagon Cannot Account For $6.5 Trillion Dollars  By Jay Syrmopoulos, Global Research, 17 August 2016
  • IMF, An Inheritance of Incompetence  By John Mauldin | Aug 13, 2016
  • Abolish the FOMC  By David Stockman, from Zerohedge, 11 August 2016
  • Memo To The Donald – 10 Great ‘Deals’ To Save America Before It’s Too Late  By David Stockman, via Zerohedge, 10 August 2016
  • The War on Cash is still being planned in the background  By Jim Rickards, Editor, Rickards’ Gold Speculator, from The Crux, 5 August 2016
  • IMF admits disastrous love affair with the euro and apologises for the immolation of Greece  By Ambrose Evans-Pritchard, The Telegraph, 31 July 2016
  • Central banks hell-bent on a currency debauch Lenin would love  By Maurice Newman, The Australian, 22 July 2016
  • Financial collapse, the trigger is inconsequential  By Jim Quinn, Zerohedge, 7 July
  • The global monetary system is collapsing  From Sean Goldsmith, Editor-in-Chief, Stansberry Research, 3 July 2016
  • Marc Faber, clear message to sick political elite  From Zerohedge, 29 June 2016
  • Australia faces danger as politicians ignore danger signs  By Maurice Newman, The Australian, 23 June 2016
  • Australian Labor’s amazing economic magic pudding  By Nick Cater, The Australian, 21 June 2019
  • During the Next Crisis, Entire Countries Will Go Bust  By Phoenix Capital, 16 June
  • Criminal Bankers Threaten Entire World Economy By Greg Hunter,  USAWatchdog, 25 May 2016
  • Keynes must die so the economy may live  By Llewellyn Rockwell, 24 May 2014
  • In praise of the gold standard  Via The Mises Institute, 16 May 2016
  • “A scramble for gold has begun”  By Jim Rickards, Editor, Currency Wars Alert, 22 April 2016
  • The Keynesian House Of Denial  By David Stockman, 19 April 2016 
  • Dick Smith retail chain failure gives capitalism a bad name  Article 20 March
  • China’s economic doomsday machine  By David Stockman, Zerohedge, 11 March 2016
  • The European Depression Was A Deliberate Act  From Zerohedge, 3 March 2016
  • Syria’s state-owned central banks  By ‘anonymous’, 18 February 2016
  • 22 Signs of global economic turmoil  By Michael Snyder, Zerohedge, 6 February 2016
  • Will Bitcoin of similar replace fiat currencies when confidence dies  By David Uren, The Australian, 29 January 2016
  • The deflation monster has arrived  By Chris Martenson, 17 January 2016
  • The Big Short, a must-see movie about Wall St  From ZeroHedge, 24 December 2015
  • Iceland shows how to treat criminal banksters  From Zerohedge, 25 October 2015
  • By David Stockman via Zerohedge, 17 Dec 2015
  • Bankers will be jailed in the next financial crisis  By Mike Kreiger, Zerohedge, 16 September 2015
  • Marc Faber warnings  Interview with Mark Faber, Zerohedge, 3 September 2015
  • Global financial crash, 12 signs  By Michael Snyder, 13 August 2015
  • How a glitch nearly crashed the global financial system
  • The bankruptcy of the planet accelerates
  • “Central banks are out of control”
  • How a glitch nearly crashed the global financial system  From Zerohedge, 10 August
  • Most of the world’s banks are headed for collapse  By Doug Casey, 16 July 2015
  • How much of the Greek debt is legitimate  By Kurt Nimmo, 7 July 2015
  • Greek debt, ‘illegal, illegitimate, odious and unsustainable’  From Zerohedge, 18 June
  • The perils of populist democracy and debt  By Gary Johns, 17 June 2015
  • The FED knows the financial sun revolves around the financial earth  By James Rickards, The Daily Reckoning, 12 June 2015
  • Lessons for Australia are stark  By Henry Ergas, The Australian, 8 June 2015
  • The Perfect Storm Approaches  James Rickards, Contributing Editor, The Daily Reckoning, 3 June 2015
  • “Central banks are out of control”  By David Stockman, Zerohedge, 25 May 2015
  • Terminal phase of the global financial system  David Stockman interview, by Eric King, Contra Corner blog, 19 May 2015
  • Grexit jingle mail  By Charles Hugh-Smith, OfTwoMinds blog, Zerohedge, 16 May 2015
  • Massive bank crimes receive the usual token slap  From Zerohedge, 13 May 2015
  • Deutsch banks decade of ‘lying, cheating and stealing’  From Zerohedge, 6 May 2015
  • How this debt-addicted world could go the way of the Mayans  By Satyajit Das, MarketWatch, 28 April 2015
  • None dare call it a fraud, it’s just a ‘savings glut’  By David Stockman, 13 April 2015
  • “The UK economy is a ticking time bomb”  By Simon Black, Sovereign Man, 8 April
  • Banks will be obsolete within 10 years  By Simon Black, Sovereign Man, 5 April 2015
  • No Fed bets from the IMS  From Silver-Coin-Investor.com, 2 April 2015
  • USD dominance is dying rapidly  From Zerohedge, 26 March 2015
  • Austrian bank Black Swan  From Zerohedge, 16 March 2015
  • SWIFT and the de-dollarization axis  From Zerohedge, 10 Mar 2015
  • China’s fiscal cliff  By Ambrose Evans-Pritchard, The Telegraph, 6 Feb 2015
  • The real economy is about to implode  By Brandon Smith.  5 Mar 2015
  • EU financial suicide, extend and pretend  By Charles Hugh-Smith, 19 Feb
  • Financial Parasites and Debt Bondage  Interview, Prof Michael Hudson, 16 Feb 2015
  • Audit The Fed, And Shackle It Too  By David Stockman, Contra Corner, 13 Feb 2015
  • GREECE should exit the eurozone ASAP  By Alan Kohler, The Australian, 10 Feb 2015
  • Greece, the EU and crony capitalism By David Stockman, Contra Corner, 5 Feb 2015

Empires rise and fall. Why, and what’s next?

The US was the dominant world power after WWII but has been failing, compounded by lies and desperate plans for hegemony compounded by declining culture and values. Lies told about WWII and its aftermath all contribute to the current deception. Previous empires such as the UK and Roman empires failed in a similar manner.  Watch Russia and China ascend in unison. Many factors were and are involved such as those covered in this post.

Scroll down to read the most recent articles.  Links to previous articles  follow.

The Crimes of Nuremberg

The Crimes of Nuremberg  The Crimes of Nuremberg, The Good Citizen, 23 May 2024

Editor’s note: Several visuals are not shown in the text below.  Click on the link about to view them.

A philosophy major, communications major, and history major walk into a campus bar. The philosophy major orders three bourbons, and asks the communications major why he chose communications. “I want to be able to communicate effectively with others. I believe effective communication limits conflict and…” The philosophy major cuts him off by asking the history major the same question. “I believe nothing is more important than history, because if we don’t learn our history, then we’re doomed to…” Before he can finish, the philosophy major turns to the bartender and says, “Make it three doubles.” The bartender reaches for the bottle to top up their drinks and asks, “What’s your major then?” The philosophy major looks at the other three and says, “Psychology.”

You wouldn’t get it.

— Arthur Fleck

Rekneading Grey Matter

Calling for a Nuremberg 2 has been all the rage for the past few years. The term is often trending on social media for days. Unfortunately, the calls for a second instalment have been made by a thoroughly programmed, historically brainwashed Western populace, running public schooling software infected with Hollywood-scripted malware.

Your humble fluffy Ram scribe (brain still running Commodore software) called for a second Nuremberg in early 2022, before a dedicated debugging operation that required digging into history books published before the 1990s. The lies of the past twenty years, particularly the past five, prompted a curiosity tour that begged the question, “Did they just start lying about everything twenty years ago?” The quest invariably resulted in some version of, “Not twenty years ago, but more likely two thousand years ago.”

But let’s leave classical and early civilizational history for another time and stick to the past century, particularly the most significant historical event—the war that still leads to heated debates around the actions of “our side” and the moral and ethical inconsistencies used to justify horrific acts against civilian populations and unarmed combatants in the post-war years, transgressing the Geneva Conventions while making a mockery of any judicial process at Nuremberg.

I am not taking up the defense of Germany. I am taking up the defense of the truth. I do not know if the truth exists, and many people have made arguments to prove to me that it does not. But I know that lies exist. I know that systematic deformation of facts exists. We have lived for three years with a falsification of history. This falsification is skillful. It involves fantasies based on a conspiracy of imagined fantasies. …me, I believe stupidly in the truth. I even believe that it ends up triumphing over all.

— Maurice Bardèche
1948

“The past was erased, the erasure was forgotten.”

The 1990s was a transformative period for the information and communications industries. The U.S. Telecommunications Act of 1996 monopolized the radio, and television airwaves, leaving just five corporate conglomerates controlling all information by the end of the century.

Around this time the English language publishing monopolies of New York and London began blacklisting any manuscripts or authors (think David Irving) that exposed the prevailing propaganda and criminal cover-up of Allied behavior during the second world war while revealing that certain atrocities had been astronomically inflated—a fact later disclosed with some courageous inquiry by brave individuals after the fall of the Soviet Union. Even before this time many authors, historians, academics, and public figures had been imprisoned across Europe for daring to ask any questions about the official narrative of events.

Revisiting the timeline of historical revisionism around World War 2 atrocities is an exhausting undertaking, and worthy of a dedicated lengthy post. (See The Unz Review’s American Pravda series in the meantime) One could argue the revisionism began right away against the truth, and the “conspiracy” revisionists are seeking the truth that was buried by the real revisionists.

For those who believe national loyalties and ideology are irrelevant in service of truth, it’s an essential undertaking to revisit the revised revisionism. It generally requires one to dig into the most honest and accurate accounts of events. These are most often produced when memories are still fresh, first-hand witnesses are still living, and state or tribal propaganda, myths, and fabricated atrocities have yet to flourish and take root in the public consciousness. The books that represent these ideal conditions for truth were published in the first decades after the war. This is also when the first blacklistings and book bannings began.

One French author, in particular, dared expose the crimes of post-war Allied occupation of Europe in 1948 in the book Nuremberg or The Promised Land, before lies were cemented as truths. He was the first ‘truther’ (his own words to describe what he cared about most) to expose the sham trials at Nuremberg, the crimes of the Allies including France, and the atrocity propaganda around “Jewish extermination” attributed to the Nazis which is still a crime to question in 19 European countries to this day.

Maurice Bardèche’s Wikipravda page reads as you’d expect of someone who worked as a Professor under the German occupation and was a supporter of Francisco Franco, co-authoring a book on the Spanish Civil War and founding the “revisionist school” in the post-war years.

One of the absurd charges made by France at Nuremberg and other trials was that the Germans had tried to exterminate the French, or had “a will to exterminate the French.” Bardèche exposes this absurdity using logic, reason, and facts. His anger in this assertion and other lies produced by the French government rests with the fact that it would allow a future German historian to show that France lied, thereby tainting his nation and all Frenchmen.

Photo of Paris during the occupation when Germans “tried to exterminate the French”:

Photo of Paris today where hundreds of thousands of male occupiers camp in its plazas and at city hall. Officials are trying to “incentive them to leave” before the Olympics in August so Paris appears respectable to the world:

Bardèche writes:

One is propsing a future to us, one does so by condeming the past. It is into this future also that we want to see clearly. It is these principles that we would like to look at directly. For we already forsee that these new ethics refer to strange universe, a universe with something sick about it, an elastic universe where our eyes no longer recongize things.

Bardèche foresaw a future ruled by an international economic elite, that undermines nations, demonizes nationalism and civilian pride in nationality with no guarantees or respect for rights, and the political enforcement of laws against offenders who do not agree with this system, or even dare oppose it. Here he appears to be predicting our liberal democratic and neoliberal “rules-based order” with the rise of the European Union and its fashionable orthodoxies rooted in globalism, cosmopolitanism, and “democratic socialism” that labels nationalists as “far-right” heretics and “fascists.” Canada, Australia, and the United States are also firmly entrenched aboard this sinking ship that Bardèche predicted.

Regarding “the holocaust” a term that wasn’t yet used to describe alleged German “extermination camps” of Jews, Bardèche doesn’t deny them, he demands evidence of any kind to prove their existence to account for the figures, because he knew very well how war produces exaggerations and myths by victors to paint themselves as the righteous ones or liberators.

With any conflict, it becomes necessary before, during, and after the war to paint enemies in the darkest manner possible so that any crimes committed by victors look justified. On this front, the Allies over-delivered in the aftermath of the Second World War.

In the preceding years of any conflict, it’s essential to manufacture the consent of the populace who will send their young men to the slaughter. Creating conflict by rousing national fervor around the “evils” of the desirous enemies necessitates tall tales of “evil” actions, including war crimes, ethnic and racial hatreds, and a historically blood-thirty people with a crazy leader who has ambitions to conquer neighbors, enslave, subjugate, and exterminate innocents by any means at his disposal.

The victors have a monopoly on information and can tell the story of the conflict however they desire, often with an utter disregard for the truth. It is the job of historians to be unemotional, and staunchly objective while they comb over first-hand accounts, primary sources, official documents, and archives so that the truth comes to light. It is their only duty.

When historians are ignored, or in the case of the most competent and once-well-respected historian of World War Two—David Irving—they are smeared, blacklisted, arrested, and imprisoned for reporting from first-hand sources, then those myths and lies propagate as the masses bite their tongues in fear of retribution for daring to question anything. Public schools, entertainment, popular culture, documentarians, academics, and governments absorb those lies as truths and the past is erased.

Like David Irving after him, Bardèche was imprisoned for a year and fined 50,000 francs. Circulating copies of his book were collected and burned, it was banned from publication and to this day remains outlawed in France.

The lies were cemented in law, and 75 years later to question them will result in the same fate that befell Irving, David Icke, Maurice Bardèche, Fred Leuchter, and many others who simply wanted to learn the truth and share with others what they have learned—not because of political reasons, or “anti-semitism” but because they all wanted to live in a world where truth matters above all things.

The first of this group, Paul Rassinier, a history Professor of twenty-two years and editor of the resistance broadsheet The Fourth Republic became a prisoner at Buchenwald during the final year of the war when “extermination” should have been in overdrive. After the war he published his account of this famous German concentration camp, condemning the communist prisoners in charge of governing the camp as far worse than the SS officers, only “looking out for their own skin.” After touring Dachau and Mauthausen after the war, interviewing endless witnesses with either benign or contradicting testimony, and uncovering engineering and technological impossibilities, he began to question the official stories of “mass extermination” using “gas chambers” and “crematoriums.”

His first post-war book about his time in Buchenwald, and escape from a train of prisoners won him critical acclaim in France. But his second book The Lie of Ulysses daring to question the official narratives around extermination earned him labels as “fascist” and later the “father of holocaust denialism.” He was put on trial for his book in 1953 and spent two years defending his reputation before he was eventually acquitted.

In the face of heavy criticism from his own party, a socialist party in France that eventually expelled him, he continued to pursue the truth. While exposing the scam trials of German officers all around Germany by the West German government, he was barred from attending trials in Frankfurt (1963-1965) against Nazi officers and soldiers who were stationed at Auschwitz.

He argued that continuing war crimes trials were part of a Zionist and Communist strategy to divide and demoralize Europe. Rassinier cited the Zionist book L’Etat d’Israel (1930) by Kadmi Cohen to assert that Zionist and Jewish organizations were conspiring to use Nazi crimes to extort money to fund themselves and the State of Israel. In 1964, with The Drama of the European Jews, Rassinier (once a prisoner at Buchenwald in the final year of the war) concluded long before David Irving painstakingly sifted through British Intelligence intercepts of Auschwitz with not a single mention of atrocities, that there was never a policy of extermination by Nazi Germany.

Rassinier’s books were eventually translated into English, the most well-known not published until 1977 under the title Debunking The Genocide Myth. By this time the holocaust industry was well underway with its well-positioned gatekeepers controlling popular media, public education, and Hollywood cinema, ensuring that the lies became truth and that the past was erased and the erasure was forgotten.

In Germany after 1945, there were millions of biographies but there was no history. When the nation was cut in four, its history was fragmented by the political division, censorship, coverup and fear of criticizing the USA and France. No intelligent public opinion was formed on the subject because no expression of it was allowed. The occupation of Germany resulted in an occupied mentality, which attempted to subject reason to unreasoning discipline.

— James Bacque
Other Losses: An Investigation Into the Mass Deaths of German Prisoners of War after World War Two

Revanche

It’s human nature to seek revenge, but the vengeance that mirrors the atrocities of the accused undermines the scales of justice so that one monster transfers his monstrosities to his enemies. The last monster standing gets to rewrite history, cover their crimes, and showcase their retribution as “fairness” and “justice” to “prevent future crimes.” The conquered must always “learn their lesson” from the victors.

None of this ugliness and hypocrisy of war, molding attitudes of conquest or liberation is possible without effective propaganda to rally minds around a unifying goal. Official historians never cease in reminding the world of Nazi Minister of Propaganda Joseph Goebbels, and his psychological campaigns on the German people, but curiously they never speak about his British and American doppelgangers.

Before the American government began fluoridating drinking water and toothpaste (at the behest of dentists paid by Alcoa Steel Inc. who needed somewhere to dump their thousands of tons of Sodium Flouride poison, a byproduct of steel production) to calcify pineal glands and spiritually destroy Americans, the people were stubbornly isolationist. Before both World Wars, Americans wanted nothing to do with the conflicts of European Kingdoms or nations. In 1939, Americans were by a factor of nearly nine out of ten, decidedly America First.

Things had to change, but minds don’t change on their own. Psychological operations began in earnest using atrocity propaganda to manufacture consent for conflict in the way it’s still used today. The British had their version of Goebbels in Lord Robert Vansittart. In a series of radio broadcasts, Vansittart delivered hysteria and paranoia around “German evil and viciousness” claiming historically rooted atrocities went back over two thousand years. Roosevelt privately took a liking to his hate-mongering propaganda and implored OSS chief William Donovan to rebroadcast them on American radio.

Around the same time, Theodore N. Kaufman published Germany Must Perish! advocating for the forced sterilization of the German people to achieve “world peace.” The book was used as reverse propaganda by the Nazis to show that the Jewish people were plotting against them which as we all know is completely false anti-semitic propaganda (kauf kauf).

March 24, 1933

No propaganda campaign is complete without a little help from Hollywood. Roosevelt’s adviser Henry Morgenthau set up a quasi-governmental agency called the Writers’ War Board, where film director Rex Stout, also an author of popular detective novels, hand-picked other writers of sensationalist popular fiction to contribute to the Board.

The OSS propaganda arm, Office of War Information worked closely with the Board to publish articles asserting that four generations of German leaders were guided by, “adoration of force as the only arbiter, and skulduggery as the supreme technique in human affairs.” According to the WWB, it was necessary for Americans to hate the Germans to “establish the world on a basis of peace.”

The editor of the New Yorker weekly was Clifton Fadiman who served as Stout’s right-hand man in publishing paranoid delusions around the German threat. Fadiman stated that there was “only one way to make a German understand and that’s to kill them, and even then I think they don’t understand.”

The WWB advised radio stations on propaganda programming and began recruiting editors and columnists from other popular periodicals to do their bidding while promoting a book entitled Is Germany Incurable? by a “noted psychiatrist” of the time. They pushed author Louis Nizer of another book, What to Do with Germany onto the same radio programs, who advocated for trying and hanging hundreds of thousands of Germans while enslaving the rest in “labor battalions” and yet claimed that this still wouldn’t be enough to cure Germany’s “lust for war.” One of the most popular broadcasters pushing the Board’s “Hate Germany” fluff was Walter Winchell (born Isadore Lipschitz) who expressed to millions of listeners that Germany was like a snake, and “a rattlesnake never deserves another chance.”

British propaganda poster, 1940.

When there’s no actual direct physical threat to the homeland, a good propaganda campaign fabricates one. In this case, British intelligence forged documents to convince the Americans of an imminent Nazi threat in South America. The British aimed to create a narrative that the Nazis were gaining a foothold in South America and had plans to invade the United States. British authorities arrested South American diplomats. One poor bastard was purportedly detained with “secret documents” showing Colombian ties to the Nazis to strengthen the illusion of a Nazi infiltration into South American countries, further fueling American fears. No such threats existed.

“We Weren’t ‘Evil’ Like The Nazis”

The Geneva Conventions have always been subject to interpretation and only applicable to those the victors chose to apply them. Given Allied actions against civilians during the conflict, including the fire bombings of Dresden, Hamburg, Berlin, Cologne, Frankfurt, Leipzig, Munich, Nuremberg, Stuttgart, Kassel, Würzburg, Darmstadt, Bremen, Hanover, Essen, and Duisburg, the allies were always going to excuse themselves from its standards.

The first Geneva Convention was in 1864 and outlined the treatment of prisoners of war. The thinking was that kingdoms who signed on would guarantee protections for their cannon fodder, ensuring that mandatory cannon fodder enlistments continued, and young soldiers didn’t organize against their nobility and their dreams of capturing a few more meters of soil. The general idea was that the wounded would be treated impartially and fairly, and those who surrendered were guaranteed protection.

Article 12 stated that “…wounded and sick soldiers who are out of the battle should be humanely treated, and in particular should not be killed, injured, tortured, or subjected to biological experimentation.” No mention of biological experimentation on civilians in peacetime.

The Nuremberg Trials, which began in November 1945 and concluded in 1946, are often depicted as the epitome of post-war justice. As with most history written by victors in the concealment of the truth, the trials were a confluence of injustice, witness manipulation, intimidation, threats, maltreatment, and torture with an atmosphere that seemed more predisposed to vengeance than to impartial justice.

Contrary to popular belief the post-war trials of German officers were not a single event held at Nuremberg. Only the United States and IMT (International Military Tribunal of 21 Nazi Leaders) show trials were held in this city. In contrast, the Soviets held their own, with no public record (summary executions or Gulags?). The British held their own in Hamburg, Luneberg, and Italy between 1945 and 1949. France delayed their trials of German generals (1951) and Oradour Massacre soldiers (1958), though the latter were all eventually pardoned. Trials by American rump state West Germany continued at a dozen major cities around the country from 1950 until the late 1970s.

Of the thousands of defendants over those decades, only 21 Nazi leaders were selected for the IMT, with a lot of what David Irving calls “horsetrading” of Nazi individuals going on behind the scenes among Allies seeking their version of justice, privately or publicly. Hundreds of Nazi and SS officers were permitted to escape Germany via the rat lines through Italy, with help from the OSS (precursor to the CIA), the Vatican, and friendly nations like Argentina. The American’s Operation Paperclip sent hundreds of intelligence officers into Germany embedded in army divisions to track down and recruit Nazi scientists, engineers, physicists, and anyone of military strategic importance. More Nazis were hired by the American war department after the conflict than were put on trial at Nuremberg by a factor of seven-five.

While hosting show trials, horsetrading officers among allies, and smuggling those chosen Nazi scientists and engineers through Operation Paperclip to the U.S., the remaining German POWs were kept in various camps managed by the partitioned allied zones. The United States had over 200 camps in its zone, though France took over a few after 1945, while some 1600 POW camps were scattered across French territory once managed by the Americans before also being handed over to the French. French witnesses at several camps watched as the Americans looted the supplies from camp hospitals before departing, taking generators, medicine, and food rations, often leaving the French with nothing to manage the prisoners or themselves.

According to James Bacque’s 1989 bombshell book Other Losses, conditions in camps were harsh. Food was withheld and from the summer of 1945 through 1948 it is estimated that a million German POWs perished from starvation and disease in the hands of distinguished American General and future President Dwight Eisenhower. Under the horrendous failure called the Morgenthau Plan, a “denazification” precursor to the more charitable and pragmatic Marshall Plan, the order of the day was revenge, through suffering, starvation, and death.

In France, in January 1946, just over half a million men were nominally at work for the armies or the civilian economy. Most of these, underfed, badly clothed, weak, worked at far less than normal efficiency. Another 124,000 were so sick they couldn’t work. When 600 dying men fell off the train at Buglose near Bordeaux in the summer of 1945 before the shocked population of the village, 87 men were in such bad shape that the two-kilometer hike to the camp killed them.

According to the testimony of a German POW survivor called Hanz T. who left Bad Kreutznach at age 18, making him 12 when the conflict first began, he was shuttled with other young German prisoners for France, still wearing shorts and barefoot after being snatched from a hospital recovery room:

I only had one piece of ID showing my birthdate, 1927. I thought they might release me if they thought I was only 16, so I changed the seven to a nine, but it made no difference.

There was a real shortage of food. When the peas arrived, they were divided and once they had been shared out some were still left. Everyone counted and if we had six each, then we’d wait till we got six and a half.

Food was so scarce that people were usually sick and when you got sick they took you to hospital. When people were taken to hospital you never saw them come back. Of the hundred thousand prisoners at Rennes there was certainly a percentage who died which would make a fair number. But I’ve never been able to find a cemetery. We never saw the Red Cross, nobody came to inspect us until two years later, to bring us blankets. That was the first time they came, in 1947.

Between 1945 and 1948 anywhere from 165,000-315,000 German POWs died in French captivity, and that wasn’t the worst the Allies could do. There are endless stories of French farmers and civilians helping German POWs with potatoes, milk, vegetables, and fruits, and even French guards bringing food from home for the starving Germans, many of whom were just teenagers.

The death rate in French camps averaged around one-third, while in British and Canadian camps holding German POWs, the rate was only marginally lower in the year after the war. Prisoners starved for most of 1945, often going weeks between meals. Medical treatment and hospitals were better staffed in the camps in these zones, with some Germans receiving life-saving treatment. The Germans in this zone remember “The Tommies” treating them “like comrades” and far better than the Americans or French, but it wasn’t always keeping with the Geneva Conventions and starvation and disease were still rampant just after the war.

American camps were by far the worst, with Morgenthau’s plan for retribution German prisoners starved, and were provided no shelter, or blankets. It was all hidden under a myth of a “World Food Shortage” proclaimed at the time, despite this not affecting Canadian and British camps.

The death rate at the American camp at Reinberg was 40% in the year after the war with many prisoners dying in muddy holes they were forced to dig for their shelter. The perimeter fence around the camp stretched for nine kilometers. Prisoners would throw rocks over the fence to passing civilians with charcoal notes wrapped around the rocks written on canvas or cotton begging for potatoes, salt, and even water. Unlike prisoners in British and Canadian camps, American camp POWs weren’t permitted mail service, tents, bunks, or daily rations. The Americans (and French) lied about the death rate of prisoners, lowballing it to the International Red Cross and German town officials (now “denazified” public servants) by a factor of 30 times!

Within a few years, to doubt the Small Number had become an implied treachery, for any good German who doubted the Americans was ipso facto an enemy of both states. So the Americans were in effect forgiven without even being accused.

A general who knew Eisenhower well wrote in 1945 that Eisenhower was using “practically Gestapo methods” against the Germans. That general had written to his wife that the Germans were the only decent people in Europe, and that “we are destroying the only semi-modern state in Europe so that Russia can swallow it whole.”

His name was George S. Patton.

For all his prejudices, Patton represented to a high degree the honor of the army and the basic generosity of the American people. He made this very plain in a reply to a question put to him: “In all these talks [to the troops] I emphasized the necessity for the proper treatment of prisoners of war, both as to their lives and property. My usual statement was … ‘Kill all the Germans you can but do not put them up against a wall and kill them. Do your killing while they are still fighting. After a man has surrendered, he should be treated exactly in accordance with the Rules of Land Warfare, and just as you would hope to be treated if you were foolish enough to surrender. Americans do not kick people in the teeth after they are down.”

Patton openly deplored Eisenhower’s anti-German policies. Soon after, they killed him too.

Nuremberg was a fantastic desecration of the ideals of Western Civilization, and an appalling miscarriage of justice…a misuse of evidence for vicious ends, all of which will someday be exposed as a shocking travesty of high legal and moral principles.

— Henry M. Adams
Prof. of History, University of California

The Last Battle

As early as 1943 the discussion of what to do with German officers was broached by anglosphere allies. Churchill wanted summary executions with no trials and attempted to maneuver FDR toward the same position that he held privately but not publicly. This perspective was grounded in a desire to avoid the complexities and potential embarrassments of a public trial, which could unearth inconvenient truths, including Churchill’s sponsors (who for many years made sure his five servants and manor house were paid on an MP’s salary) at the World Zionist Organization.

In 1944, during the Second Quebec Conference, Churchill drafted a proposal, sometimes referred to as the “shot on sight” list, which advocated for the immediate execution of top German figures upon their identification and capture, something young students of Western history are more likely to associate with “evil Nazi behavior” and not the allies they are brainwashed to revere. FDR was initially on board with the proposal, but the following year his successor Truman decided against the summary execution proposal and instead supported the idea of a formal trial.

According to David Irving in a book tour speech promoting his book Nuremberg: The Last Battle:

Truman (a grandmaster freemason like his predecessor) facing the ruins of post-war Europe and the daunting task of rebuilding in a way that gave his new empire the upper hand over the Soviets, decided that perhaps shooting people without trial wasn’t the best look for the shiny new superpower on the block. Nuremberg was a chance for the Allies to paint themselves as all victors do—righteous and judicious liberators, bringing the light of legal ethics to the dark deeds of the Nazis, all while ensuring the proceedings were scripted tightly enough to keep the Allies’ dark behavior from any scrutiny.

So, before the first trials at Nuremberg the British and the Americans got to work rigging them so they would eventually resemble nothing more than show trials. The establishment of the London Charter in August 1945, which defined the jurisdiction and laws under which the Nuremberg Trials would proceed, declared actions as criminal post-factum, making the trials a classic case of ex post facto law. This meant that the defendants were tried for laws that were not in effect at the time their alleged crimes were committed—a stark violation of the principle of legality as defined by the maxim “nullum crimen, nulla poena sine lege” (no crime, no punishment without a law).

Additionally, the Charter explicitly removed defenses that are normally available in criminal trials, such as the tu quoque (you too) argument, which could allow defendants to argue that the prosecuting powers had engaged in similar actions, which the Allies most definitely had, from the firebombing at Dresden and dozens of other civilian populated cities with no strategic military targets, resulting in nearly half a million German civilian deaths. Preventing the tu quoque argument ensured that allied atrocities would not be admissible as a defense, or ever brought up in court. This was the strategic significance as it curtailed any discussion of the Allies’ wartime conduct, ensuring that the focus remained solely on the actions of the Axis powers.

Removing tu quoque was also a convenience to expunge the open hypocrisies of Britain and France who declared war on Germany when Hitler invaded Poland from the west, while completely ignoring Stalin’s pact with the guilty parties to carve up Poland simultaneously from the east. If Poland was “off limits” for the British and French in keeping with the tragedy that was the Versailles Treaty, why was Stalin allowed to invade and slaughter 22,000 Poles (Katyn Massacre) from the east? Poland wasn’t just a useful tool for the Soviets, they were played by the British, French, and Americans before, during, and after the war. Before 1939 Poland was by no means innocent, given their atrocities against ethnic Germans (50k+) in Danzig, formerly East Prussia in the inter-war years. More on that in another post.

Mass graves of Polish Officers slaughtered by Soviets ~22,000 (discovered by the Germans in 1943).

The physical and psychological conditions under which the defendants were held were abhorrent. Held in cells with broken windows throughout the harsh German winter, the accused faced severe physical duress that hampered their ability to contribute effectively to their defenses. This treatment was coupled with psychological tactics aimed at breaking their spirit. Letters written by defendants to their families were routinely intercepted and never delivered, isolating them further and severing their remaining ties to the outside world.

Witness tampering and intimidation were a matter of policy with OSS officers threatening to prosecute and hang Germans who didn’t testify against their commanding officers. Conversely, defense witnesses were harangued and in some cases disappeared so they wouldn’t appear in court. Carl Hoff, who could have provided testimony favorable to the defense, was instead declared mentally unfit and hidden away in a psychiatric facility to prevent his appearance in court. This tactic was exposed only when Field Marshal Milch, determined to bring Hoff’s testimony forward, challenged and reversed the decision, highlighting the lengths to which the prosecution would go to secure a conviction.

Rear Admiral Eberhardt Godt was intimidated into testifying against Grand Admiral Karl Dönitz. Godt was approached by American interrogators and coerced to testify falsely against Dönitz. When Godt refused to comply with the demands, he was threatened with execution if he did not cooperate.

The Nuremberg Trials were marred by significant procedural flaws, ethical violations, and a pervasive atmosphere of retribution.

The American judge, Edward L. Van Roden, one of three members of an American Army commission established to investigate claims of prisoner maltreatment found: “…all but two of the Germans, in the 139 cases investigated had been kicked in the testicles beyond repair. This was standard procedure with American investigators.”

Lower-ranking officers were assured of amnesty if they testified against the higher ranks, only to have their “amnesty” withdrawn after sealing a conviction and then using their testimony against them for a conviction.

Mock trials were arranged when prisoners refused to cooperate, with faux death sentences passed, then one final offer of “reprieve” if they confessed. Many were threatened with being handed over to the Russians if they didn’t cooperate. Some had their wives and children threatened by depriving them of their ration cards.

The treatment of the defendants and the conduct of the trials blatantly flouted the Geneva Conventions’ rules regarding the treatment of prisoners of war. By reclassifying German prisoners as “discharged enemy personnel,” the Allies circumvented these international laws, affording themselves greater leeway to impose harsher treatments and sidestep the protections that the Geneva Conventions afforded, such as the proper constitution of a court and the fair trial guarantees.

The selective prosecution at Nuremberg was evident in the charges brought against the defendants. The Allies focused exclusively on the crimes committed by the Nazis, with no corresponding scrutiny of their actions or those of other Axis powers. This selective justice was further compounded by the exclusion of any substantive examination of Soviet actions during the war, particularly the Katyn massacre, which was conveniently omitted from the trials’ scope, with one of the four “justices” overseeing the proceedings, a communist Soviet.

The manipulation of the trials extended to the evidence presented in court. Documents were selectively provided to the defense, and in many cases, critical evidence that could exonerate the defendants was withheld. This was not merely an oversight but a deliberate strategy to weaken the defense’s case, exemplifying a biased approach to the supposed pursuit of justice.

To call for a Nuremberg 2 today, is therefore to call for nothing but sham trials and a perversion of justice. It would be like asking some hospital administrators and government officials to stand trial, while torturing some Walgreens pharmacists, Pfizer interns, and urgent care clinicians into testifying against them to save their own skin, with the real criminals laughing at the proceedings.

The biggest difference between the two?

There was no war during Covid—though I have called it part of a Silent War on humanity—yet thousands more people are walking free who are guilty of (iatro)genocide than ever wore a Nazi uniform. These people have killed at least 20 million, with millions more awaiting a grim fate, figures only Mao and Stalin could match.

The returns of the second great engineered European brother war have been trickling in for decades.

How did the “victors” end up faring? Have you been to France? Have you tried to stroll Paris’ 9th, 10th, 11th, 19th, and 20th Arrondissimonts at night? How about the ghettos or Banlieues as a white woman, alone? Have you seen the state of the American empire? Have you tried to stroll through Birmingham, Watford, Bradford, Luton, Rotherham, Manchester, or East London without mistaking them for Islamabad or Bombay?

What about the nation that Britain and France declared war on Germany to save? They threw Poland (and all of East Europe) to the Bolshevik rats and sold them out for fifty years rendering the entire justifications for the slaughter moot. Half of Germany rotted under the boot of the DDR during this time, setting the stage for the next mass European brother sacrifice, another banker war.

How about Germany today after two decades run by a DDR communist witch?

If this is what “liberating” Europe looks like then perhaps Brits, French, and Germans should be camping out in front of the Academy of Fine Arts in Vienna to search for their next leaders.

Having buried the historical truths contributing to the rise of The Third Reich (it wasn’t just Versailles), they are making a redux of history all but inevitable.

The ‘strong man’ pendulum always swings back. And the next time it does, those invented fantasies that manifested atrocity propaganda against the last strong men may on a second serving finally come to fruition.

And who will the last victors have to blame for this, if not for the lies they attempted to rebuild the destroyed nations upon, in a now shattered fantastical fiction of its conjuring?

In the end, after all those assertions of “exterminating an entire race” war crimes, bloodlust, and painting the Nazis as the greatest evil to ever walk the earth, what happened to their fearless leader?

What happened to the most evil mustachioed man to lead these evil people?

There is zero evidence backing the official story that he killed himself in that bunker.

There is significant evidence that he escaped on a U-boat and lived another decade near Bariloche, Argentina with other Nazi Officers, including Joseph Mengele, coming and going by water plane from his sheltered lakeside retreat.

You might recall that thought experiment involving a time machine and killing Hitler to prevent the Second World War to save millions of lives. Every normie programmed by public school American history books that are better suited for fire kindling proclaims with a self-smug smile they’d use that time machine to kill Hitler and save the world. All their normie friends nod in agreement.

Britain and the U.S. wouldn’t have let that man who wanted to “conquer the world,” and who “gassed six bazillion Jews and cremated their bodies after turning their fat into soap and their skin into lampshades,” escape and live freely in Argentina for another decade, would they?

Of course not, they weren’t “evil” like the Nazis.

(Click CC for English Subtitles)

References (All out of print…why?)

Bacque, James. Other Losses: An Investigation Into the Mass Deaths of German Prisoners of War after World War Two. Toronto: Stoddart Publishing Co. Limited, 1989.

Bardeche, Maurice. Nuremberg or The Promised Land. Paris: Les Sept Couleurs, 1948.

Irving, David. Nuremberg: The Last Battle. London: Focal Point Publications, 1985.

Rassinier, Paul. Drama of the European Jews. Los Angeles: Institute for Historical Review, 1975.

================================

Secret CIA collusion inside Ukraine EXPOSED in blistering new report

Secret CIA collusion inside Ukraine EXPOSED in blistering new report 1 March 2024

The New York Times came out with a bombshell article on Sunday detailing the past ten years of CIA active warfare from within Ukraine against Russia.

From building 12 CIA bases within the country, to instructing on sabotage inside Russia to providing targeting intelligence… pic.twitter.com/IbJvV2IjJU — Ron Paul (@RonPaul) February 26, 2024

The New York Times disclosed yesterday that the CIA built “12 Secret Spy Bases” in Ukraine, waging a shadow war against Russia for the past decade. After a U.S.-supported violent coup toppled Ukraine’s democratically elected government, CIA Director John Brennan visited Kyiv… pic.twitter.com/DWluhJIKUq

Zero Hedge highlights:
Among the biggest revelations is that the program was established a decade ago and spans three different American presidents. The Times says the CIA program to modernize Ukraine’s intelligence services has “transformed” the former Soviet state and its capabilities into “Washington’s most important intelligence partners against the Kremlin today.”

Robert F. Kennedy was a voice of reason amid the recent revelations: “The CIA was building spy bases in Ukraine along the Russian border starting in 2014. I wonder how we would respond if Russia or China built spy bases on the US/Mexico border.
With all their information gathering and newly trained operatives, they couldn’t wind down conflict between Ukraine and Russia. In fact, it seems the CIA only made matters worse.” The CIA was building spy bases in Ukraine along the Russian border starting in 2014. I wonder how we would respond if Russia or China built spy bases on the US/Mexico border. With all their information gathering and newly trained operatives, they couldn’t wind down conflict… pic.twitter.com/3Q6aGyqUHF

— Robert F. Kennedy Jr (@RobertKennedyJr) February 26, 2024
CNN knows 2 great ways to keep liberals and parts of the US “left” on board with funding the war in Ukraine:
1) Assure them that CIA spying bases in Ukraine are very important;
2) Convince them that the US arms industry is benefiting.
They know liberal politics and values. https://t.co/HVD8pHeccX

— Glenn Greenwald (@ggreenwald) February 26, 2024
The Kyiv Independent attempted to legitimize the need for the secret CIA bases: The Central Intelligence Agency (CIA) has supported a network of a dozen bases in Ukraine that are “increasingly at risk” if Republicans continue to block $61 billion in
funding for Kyiv, the New York Times (NYT) reported on Feb. 25.
The network of bases is the result of a decade of relationship-building between the CIA and Ukraine, according to the NYT, which conducted 200 interviews with current and former intelligence officials in Ukraine, Europe, and the U.S. for the article

=========================

The Desperate Failing Plan for a New American Century

From The Truth Comes to Light, 7 February 2024

 The Desperate Failing Plan for a New American Century – Truth Comes to Light

 The Desperate Failing Plan for a New American Century

They are few and we are many, and they must be stopped. 

The Desperate Failing Plan for a New American Century  by Greg ReeseThe Reese Report, February 7, 2024

Editor’s note: Click on the link above to view a PDF copy that shows several diagrams.

On January 16th of 1991, as the Soviet Union was collapsing and the cold war coming to an end, George H.W. Bush publicly announced a new campaign of American dominance which he called, the New World Order.

“This is an historic moment. We have in this past year made great progress in ending a long era of conflict and Cold War. We have before us the opportunity to forge for ourselves and for future generations a new world order, a world where the rule of law, not the law of the jungle, governs the conduct of nations. When we are successful, and we will be, we have a real chance at this new world order, an order in which a credible United Nations can use its peacekeeping role to fulfill the promise and vision of the UN’s founders.”

~ George H.W. Bush

Vladimir Putin told Oliver Stone that in the year 2000 he asked President Clinton if Russia could join NATO, which he said made the American delegation very nervous. They were not interested in world peace. They had different plans.

In 1997 the Project for the New American Century was founded by William Kristol and Victoria Nuland’s husband, Robert Kagan. In September of 2000 they published their agenda entitled; “Rebuilding America’s Defenses” which outlined an ambitious and aggressive plan to achieve world dominance, starting in the Middle East and ending with Russia. The document acknowledged the fact that their world domination efforts would “trouble American allies” and could therefore be a long process “absent some catastrophic and catalyzing event – like a new Pearl Harbor.”

A year after publishing this, two thousand people were murdered in the World Trade Center and blamed on a small terrorist group created by the C.I.A.. And with this catastrophic and catalyzing event, the plan for a new American century went into action.

“About ten days after 9/11, I went through the Pentagon. And one of the generals called me and he says, we’ve made the decision we’re going to war with Iraq. This was on or about the 20th of September. I said, We’re going to war with Iraq, Why? He said, I don’t know. So I came back to see him a few weeks later, and by that time we were bombing in Afghanistan. I said, Are we still going to war with Iraq? And he said, it’s worse than that, he said, I just got this down from upstairs meeting in the secretary of defense office today. And he said, this is a memo that describes how we’re going to take out seven countries in five years, starting with Iraq and then Syria, Lebanon, Libya, Somalia, Sudan and finishing off… Iran.”

~ General Wesley K. Clark

George H.W. Bush’s son, George W., began a propaganda campaign to sell the American public on overthrowing Iraq. Spinning lies about Weapons of Mass Destruction.

“I take the threat very seriously. I take the fact that he develops weapons of mass destruction very seriously.

Either you are with us or you are with the terrorists.”

~ George W. Bush

When the lies became obvious, George W. made jokes while revelling in the blood of the innocent.

Secretary of State, Madeleine Albright, said that murdering millions of Iraqi children was worth it.

Lesley Stahl:

“We have heard that a half a million children have died. I mean, that’s more children than died in Hiroshima. And, you know, is the price worth it?”

Madeleine Albright:

“I think this is a very hard choice. But the price we think the price is worth it.”

The power hungry cabal, made up of close-knit families who practice multi-generational child abuse and mass mind control, began overthrowing sovereign nations. And murdering innocent civilians became the new norm for U.S. foreign policy. But their plan for global domination was failing, and starting in 2020 with the COVID scam, they began targeting U.S. citizens.

They have become desperate, and they are going for broke. Slaughtering innocent Palestinians to spark a war with Iran, and sacrificing the people of Ukraine to hopelessly take on Russia.

These inbred families are getting old and they are fighting for their lives. There is too much at stake for them to ever give up which makes them more dangerous than ever. But they are few and we are many, and they must be stopped.

===================

Doug Casey On What Really Happened In 2023 And What Comes Next

Doug Casey On What Really Happened In 2023 And What Comes Next  Authored by Doug Casey via InternationalMan.com, 28 December 2023

International Man: As we approach the end of the year, let’s take a step back, look at the Big Picture, and put 2023 into perspective so we can better understand what may come next.

Significant financial, economic, political, cultural, and geopolitical developments occurred in 2023.

On the cultural front, 2023 may be the year that the tide started to shift against the woke insanity.

BlackRock’s Fink dropped ESG. Woke movies continue to bomb at theaters. Bud Light, Target, and Disney continue to feel the pain of deliberately alienating their customer base.

What’s your take on the cultural developments in 2023?

Doug Casey: There are always reactions to major trends. These things are worth noting, but considering the virulence of the woke movement, the reaction has been tepid. There’s always a rearguard fighting for things as they are. And that’s wonderful because the Wokesters want to overturn the entire culture much the same way as the Jacobins overturned it in revolutionary France, the Bolsheviks overturned the culture in Russia, the Red Guards in China, or Pol Pot did in Cambodia.

The Wokesters are potentially just as dangerous because their way of thinking is everywhere in the West.

They’re similar to the movements I’ve just mentioned in that they’re stridently against free speech, free thought, free markets, tradition, and limited government—nothing new there. But they’ve weaponized gender and race as well. They’re virulent, humorless, and puritanical. They see themselves as the wave of the future, but they’ve only repackaged the notions of Marx, Lenin, Stalin, and Hitler.

My view is that the Wokesters hate humanity and hate themselves. They’re dishonest, arrogant, and entitled. Look at the current scandal involving the diversity-hire presidents at Harvard, Penn, and MIT. They’re shameful embarrassments. The fact their boards of trustees installed these fools shows how deep the rot goes.

The Woke have ingrained psychological/spiritual aberrations.

They don’t just control academia, finance, entertainment, and the media. They also dominate the State’s apparatus. Which means they basically have the law on their side.

Perhaps ESG is being de-emphasized by Blackrock, the new vampire squid, but that’s only because they fear losing money more than they value their beliefs. The more pernicious DEI remains a major cultural trend.

Where will it end?

Wokism is more than a passing fad. There’s a good chance it will end with a violent confrontation between people who have culturally conservative views and those who want to destroy Western Civilization and upset the nature of society as we know it.

International Man: 2023 was a year of major geopolitical developments.

It became evident to even the mainstream media that the war in the Ukraine was not going well for NATO.

There was also the Hamas attack and the Israeli invasion of Gaza.

Azerbaijan defeated Armenia to reclaim a long-disputed territory.

Saudi Arabia welcomed Syria back into the Arab League, ended the war in Yemen, restored diplomatic relations with Iran, joined the BRICS countries, and expanded its economic ties with China.

These are just a few of the most prominent geopolitical events of 2023.

What do you make of the geopolitical situation and where things are heading?

Doug CaseyThe end of US hegemony over the world in all areas is becoming obvious. The world resents being bullied and controlled by Washington, DC.

They realize that the US government is bankrupt and is living entirely on printed money. Its military is bloated and more expensive than the US can afford.

While it’s bloated, it’s also being gutted, unable to recruit new soldiers and sailors. It’s easy to see why that’s the case. They see pointless wars fomented everywhere. The type of people who traditionally join the military are disgusted by the woke memes circulating through the services. White males, who have always been the backbone of the military, are appalled at being actively discriminated against.

US hegemony is ending financially, economically, and militarily.

It’s obvious when you see that Biden and Harris, two utterly incompetent, ineffectual fools, are the nominal heads of the government. Not to mention all the degraded and psychologically damaged people in the cabinet. Of course, nobody has any respect for the US anymore.

The US hegemony of the last hundred years is on its way out. And as the old order changes, there are going to be upsets. The US will leave a vacuum that will be filled by other forces.

In fact, the US Government is the biggest danger to the world today. It’s not providing order. By sticking its nose into everyone else’s business everywhere, it’s promoting chaos. Its 800+ bases around the world are provocations. The carrier groups that it has wandering around are sitting ducks with today’s technology. The US is the main source of risk in the world, not safety.

US military spending is really just corporate welfare for the five big “defense” corporations, which build weapons suited for fighting the last war or maybe the war before the last war. For instance, a missile frigate or destroyer guarding a carrier might carry 100 vertically-launched anti-aircraft missiles at $2 million each. Each missile might succeed in shooting down a $10,000 drone. But what happens when the enemy launches 200 drones at once? The chances are the US loses a $2 billion destroyer, if not a carrier.

The US government is finding that they’re not only disliked but disrespected by countries and people all over the world. They’re increasingly viewed as a paper tiger. Or the Wizard of Oz. When they lose the fear factor, it’s game over.

International Man: In 2023, the US continued the trend of more political polarization.

What were the most consequential events on the US political front, and what do you think comes next?

Doug Casey: Let me reemphasize that the Jacobins who control Washington, DC, have the same psychological makeup as past revolutionaries I’ve mentioned.

These people are incapable of changing their minds or reforming. I think they’ll do absolutely anything they can to retain power.

Meanwhile, traditional Americans in red states see that Trump is being railroaded with lawfare to derail his campaign. They’re angrier than ever, justifiably. The red people and the blue people really hate each other at this point—and can’t talk to each other.

The country has been completely demoralized as traditional values have been washed away. It’s now very unstable.

The coming election, should we actually have one, will be not just a political but a cultural contest. Culture wars are especially dangerous in the midst of a financial collapse and economic collapse.

International Man: The projected annual interest expense on the federal debt hit $1 trillion for the first time in 2023.

Americans are still paying for the rampant currency debasement during the Covid hysteria as the price of groceries, insurance, rent, and most other things continued to rise in 2023.

It looks like a recession is on the horizon.

What are your thoughts on economic developments in 2023 and your outlook for the months ahead?

Doug Casey: As an amateur student of history, it seems to me that the US has been moving away from the founding principles that made it unique for over a hundred years. I’m 77. I’ve watched it happen firsthand for much of that time.

The trend has been accelerating.

The country is heading towards a massive crisis because it’s lost its philosophical footing. The result is going to be a really serious depression. I call it the Greater Depression.

The spread between the haves who live in multi-million dollar houses and the have-nots who live in tents isn’t new. After all, Jesus said, “The poor you will always have with you.” What’s new is that the middle class is being impoverished. What’s left of the middle class is deeply in debt—student debt, credit card debt, car loan debt, mortgage debt. And if they’re not lucky enough to have a house with mortgage debt, they’re renting. And rents have gone up so rapidly that if the average guy has an unforeseen $500 expense, he can’t pay it.

That augurs poorly for consumption. It’s said, idiotically, that the American economy rests on consumption. It’s idiotic because it should be said that it rests on production. But I’m not sure the US produces that much anymore.

Most of the people who “work” basically sit at desks and shuffle papers. Few actively create real wealth.

On top of that, the country is vastly over-financialized.

The bond market has already largely collapsed, but it can get a lot worse as interest rates head back up to the levels that they were in the early 1980s and beyond.

Much lower stock prices are in the cards, both because of high interest rates and because people won’t be consuming such massive quantities of corporate produce.

The real estate market rests on a foundation of debt. It can easily go bust as interest rates go up. We’re already seeing this with office buildings across the country. And, of course, these office buildings are financed by banks. Banks are going to see a lot of defaults on loans they’ve made.

Meanwhile, bank capital invested in bonds has eroded because bond prices fall in proportion to the degree rise in interest rates, which have gone from close to zero to 5% or 6%. If banks had to mark their loans and capital investments to the market, most would already be bankrupt.

Can the government paper all these things over by printing yet more money? I suppose.

But at some point very soon, the dollar will lose value very rapidly; it will be treated like a hot potato. They’re caught between a rock and a hard place.

International Man: This year, we saw the price of gold hit a record high, uranium reached $81.25 per pound, and Bitcoin more than doubled as it entered a new bull market. Meanwhile, the S&P 500 is up around 21% year to date as of writing.

What are your thoughts on what happened in the financial markets in 2023 and what could come next?

Doug Casey: Unfortunately, the US central bank, the Fed, has a gigantic amount of influence over the markets.

They can employ “quantitative easing,” which means printing money—and “quantitative tightening,” which means decreasing the money and artificially raising interest rates.

They have many hundreds of Ph.D. economists on staff, but all these people operate on phony Keynesian theories of the way the world works. The consequences of building an economic system on a foundation of paper money and gigantic amounts of debt are potentially catastrophic.

At this point, the economy’s on the razor edge. If they push the print button and hold it down too long, we could go into a runaway inflation. Or, to tamp down inflation, they might raise interest rates and contract the money supply, which might set off a 1929-style credit collapse.

We’re caught between Scylla and Charybdis at this point. And I don’t believe it’s a question of a soft landing or a hard landing. It’s a question of how devastating the crash landing will be.

I hope they can wring one more cycle out of all this because I personally prefer good times to bad times, even if they’re artificial good times, because the bad times are going to be very real.

=====================

A massive explosion of truth just happened worldwide

A massive explosion of truth just happened worldwide 13 December 2023

An unprecedented ‘nuclear truth explosion’ occurred in the United States, with worldwide impact, forever changing the face of the earth. It is, however, not the kind of explosion we all expect when using the word ‘nuclear’, but it’s impact worldwide is even greater than any typical A-bomb. Let me explain what happened…

There are three men in our world, that have an impact on humanity unlike anybody else in history. They have the power to steer a vast portion of the human race in a good or a bad direction. And no, they are not presidents of any country. Their influence is way greater than politics.

I am talking about Elon Musk, Tucker Carlson and Joe Rogan. Nobody on the face of the earth has a greater influence on mankind, than these three combined. Each of them has a worldwide audience of hundreds of millions of people, giving them more power than the
mainstream media. To give you an idea of their atomic media power:
? A recent broadcast of Tucker Carlson reached 427 million people, which means that one out of every 14 people in the world saw it!
? Joe Rogan has 3 billion views on YouTube alone, not including his Spotify, Rumble, and X accounts.

? Elon Musk boasts 166 million followers on X, making him one of the largest social media profiles in the world. Together these three men reach a vast portion of the entire world population, on an
ongoing basis. And they just launched something that forever changes the course of humanity…

All three of these world influencers brought the notorious ALEX JONES onto their platform, and turned the eyes of the entire world onto him. Joe Rogan interviewed Alex Jones. Tucker Carlson interviewed Alex Jones. Elon Musk reinstated Alex Jones on X. Why is that a ‘nuclear truth explosion’ of unprecedented
proportions? Alex Jones is the ‘father of conspiracy theories’. Whoever says conspiracy theory, says Alex Jones. He was mocked for decades. Nobody believed him, so to speak. He was censored on all sides. The masses dismissed his crazy reporting as ridiculous nonsense, fit for lunatics and idiots. In recent years, however, all those so-called conspiracy theories have turned out to be true,
one by one. Be it about vaccines, a globalist elite, weather manipulation, child trafficking, media mind control,… you name it.
Every single conspiracy theory formulated during the past decades, has been proven to be true.

This worldwide revealing of unprecedented truth is called the ‘Great Awakening’. Mankind is finally beginning to open its eyes to reality, much to the terror of the criminal elites, who are desperately trying to prevent the truth from reaching more people. But they have fatally failed. Because what just happened? The father of all conspiracies, Alex Jones, is being vindicated and promoted worldwide by some of the world’s most influential personalities,
Carlson, Rogan and Musk. By doing this, they are telling the world:
LISTEN TO THIS MAN! HE WAS RIGHT ALL ALONG!THE CONSPIRACY THEORIES ARE TRUE! WAKE UP! The nuclear blast of awakening this is sending all across the earth is unheard of. Millions of people will begin to pay attention to the truth, for the first time in their life. The ripple effect will be incalculable.
And that’s not all they have been doing. Elon Musk has been using the world’s most powerful social media platform to wake up mankind as never before. Here are some of the profound truths Elon Musk has been exposing to hundreds of millions of people, on X:
? The pandemic was a criminal operation, orchestrated by a criminal network of so called ‘elites’.

? The US government, CIA and FBI are complicit in censoring truth about the pandemic vaccines. ? There is a global network of multi-billionaires who have an agenda to control the world. ? The World Health Organization wants to establish global tyranny under the
guise of health emergencies. ? The World Economic Forum is a criminal organization, with an agenda to control the world.
? The mainstream news media lies to the public, in order to push the agenda of the billionaires who own these news agencies.
? There is a worldwide network of child trafficking called PizzaGate, where millions of kids are sold to politicians etc. for sexual abuse.
? Climate change is a hoax, created to have an excuse for submitting the world to global tyranny. And much more… Elon Musk has purchased Twitter and turned it into X, for the sole purpose of exposing the diabolical agenda of world tyranny, effectively shattering the mind-control grip of the elites over hundreds of millions of people. Tucker Carlson and Joe Rogan have been doing the same. Step by step they are removing the blindfold from mankind and they confirm that everything which was revealed by millions of truth tellers, independent journalists, courageous researchers, and all kinds of heroes of humanity, is true.
What is happening on in our world, is beyond our wildest dreams, and we haven’t seen the best of it yet. The world will see the truth. Humanity will wake up. The thick dark veil of deception that
has been covering the world population for centuries, is being lifted.

We are witnessing the greatest transformation in all of human history. The dark age of deception will end, and a bright future is dawning with glorious hope at the horizon. I encourage everyone to keep sharing truth, spread our documentaries, support the good
warriors of this world, do every effort in your ability to assist this incredible awakening of humankind to truth and a better world.
There will still be some dark times, as the forces of evil will desperately try to save themselves and attempt to succeed with their diabolical agendas, yet it will all serve to defeat them even more severely. However, the attempts will be real and we must brace ourselves for the impact of the final battles ahead. In the midst of the darkest storms that will rage over this world, we must keep
hold of the sure hope of a new day that is dawning and the light that is increasingly spreading over humanity. Never give up. Never back down. Lift up your head, and welcome the glorious dawn of a
better world.

We are all part of this epic transformation. We all play a role. All our voices combined create this worldwide roar of truth, thundering through the airwaves, pounding on the deaf eardrums of a hypnotized human race, slowly but steadily penetrating even the most unwilling minds. We are breaking through and the sound of truth will become a clash that will shatter the walls of darkness and pave the way for humanity to enter a future we never knew could exist.

If you are able to, then please help us rebuild our platform after being censored, for the second time. With your help we can continue spreading hope and truth to the world. Use this link to support us. Thank you so much!

===================

Putin Warns ‘Globalist Terrorist’ Klaus Schwab His ‘Days Are Numbered’

Putin Warns ‘Globalist Terrorist’ Klaus Schwab His ‘Days Are Numbered’  By Baxter Dmitry, 6 October 2023

World Economic Forum (WEF) founder Klaus Schwab is a “globalist
terrorist” who is “holding humanity to ransom”, according to Russian
President Vladimir Putin who warned the elite that their New World Order has failed and their “days are numbered.”

Russian President Vladimir Putin delivered a speech on October 5 at the plenary session of the 20th meeting of the Valdai International Discussion Club in Sochi and emphasized the tectonic and irreversible shifts taking place in the global order.
According to Putin, globalists including Schwab and his close advisors are “legitimate military targets” because they have been actively attempting to seize power illegally via a globalist coup d’etat.

Sixteen years ago, at the 2007 Munich Security Conference, Putin told Western leaders that the natural type of international system is multipolarity, clearly showing that Russia would oppose the creation of a New World Order based on the international liberal rules-based-order aggressively pushed by the globalist elite and
their liberal politicians in Western democracies. The moment of truth has come, according to Putin, and the global elite’s plans for a
New World Order are receding in front of our eyes while a new multipolar world, in which traditional cultures retain their heritage within their own borders, is rising like a phoenix.

Putin Outlines Six Civilizational Principles For the Post-NWO World
During his Valdai speech, Putin outlined six principles Russia wants to adhere to and offers other nations to join it. Via Sputnik:
“First, we want to live in an open, interconnected world, in which no one will ever try to erect artificial barriers to people’s communication, their creative realization, and prosperity. There must be a barrier-free environment,” Putin said.

The second principle is the diversity of the world, which should not only be preserved, but should also be the foundation of universal development.

The third principle, according to the Russian head of state, is maximum representativeness: “No one has the right or can rule the world for others or on behalf of others. The world of the future is a world of collective decisions,” the president emphasized.Fourth is universal security and lasting peace that takes into account the interests of great states and small countries equally. To achieve this, it is important to free international relations from the bloc mentality and the dark legacy of the colonial era and Cold War, according to Putin.

The fifth principle is justice for all: “The era of exploitation of anyone – I have already said this twice – is a thing of the past. Countries and peoples are clearly aware of their interests and capabilities and are ready to rely on themselves, and this multiplies their strength. Everyone must be provided with access to the benefits of
modern development,” Putin emphasized.

The sixth principle is equality: no one should be forced to obey those who are richer or more powerful at the cost of their own development and national interests, according to the Russian president.

“The ‘civilizational model’ referred to in Putin’s speech seems anchored on ‘principles’ – such as non-colonial relations; non-patronizing attitudes; respectful of diversity rooted in the diverse traditions – that will require a huge work to generate
new shared international norms,” according to Paolo Raffone, a strategic analyst and director of the CIPI Foundation in Brussels.
“The Western ‘rules-based liberal international order’ is unilateral, and it could be imposed in a specific time in history leveraging on the power and prominence of a small group of colonial powers that after the liberal model crisis and civil war (1914-1945) has been inherited by a distant but super-powerful country (US).“
In a nutshell, I can say that the ‘civilizational model’ approach probably aims at structuring a shared world ‘software,’ while the ‘liberal rules-based order’ has been aiming at building an imposed ‘hardware’ defended by ‘rules’ serving the financial
and military hegemony.”

===========================

The unipolar UK/US/European empires are dying; a multipolar world is rising fast based on BRICS

This interview SGT 50-minute Report with Harley Schlanger from the excellent Larouche Organisation (laroucheorganisation.com) explains the big geo-political picture that the past and present unipolar empires from Europe, in particular the UK and the US, were built by subduing every country that stood in their path of destruction and coercion.  Russia and China stood up against these colonisers, now joined by some 40 other countries in their BRICS organisation that is creating a new fair world based on trade, respect and sovereignty.  In recent days 5 African countries’ militaries have ousted their colonial governments to restore genuine democracy.  The local populations are ecstatic. Now the US Deep State, Democrats and large corporations are in rapid decline and trying every evil trick to retain their hegemony including fires and directed energy weapons.

SGT Report: Panic in the City of London! – Harley Schlanger – Video | Opinion – Conservative | Before It’s News (beforeitsnews.com)

Prigozhin’s Gambit—Treason by any other name

Prigozhin’s Gambit—Treason by any other name  By Scott Ritter, 25 June 2023

In the 1997 Disney animated musical fantasy film, Hercules, there is a particularly catchy number, Zero to Hero, which describes the rise of the star of the film from a clumsy boy into a strong and capable man. In the span of less than 24 hours, Yevgeny Prigozhin, the public face of the Wagner Group, a Russian private military contractor with shadowy ties to Russian military intelligence, has flipped the script of this ashes to diamonds tale, transforming an organization that had, through virtue of its impressive battlefield performance, become a legendary symbol of Russian patriotism and strength, into a discredited band of disgruntled traitors seeking the violent overthrow of the constitutional government of Russian on behalf of nations who seek the strategic defeat and ultimate destruction of Russia.

If Disney were to write a song about Prigozhin and Wagner today, it would be called Hero to Zero.

Let there be no doubt in anyone’s mind—Yevgeny Prigozhin has become a witting agent of Ukraine and the intelligence services of the collective West. And while there may be those within Wagner who have been unwittingly drawn into this act of high treason through deception and subterfuge, in the aftermath of Russian President Vladimir Putin’s address to the Russian nation on June 24, and Yevgeny Prigozhin’s impolitic reply, there can be no doubt that there are only two sides in this struggle—the side of constitutional legitimacy, and the side of unconstitutional treason and sedition. Anyone who continues to participate in Prigozhin’s coup has aligned themselves on the wrong side of the law and have themselves become outlaws.

Having taken Wagner down this unfortunate path, one needs to examine the motivations—stated and otherwise—that could prompt such a dangerous course of action. First and foremost, Prigozhin’s gambit must be looked at for what it is—an act of desperation. For all its military prowess, Wagner as a fighting force is unsustainable for any period without the logistical support of the Russian Ministry of Defense. The fuel that powers Wagner’s vehicles, the ammunition that gives its weapons their lethality, the food that nourishes its fighters—all comes from the very organization that Prigozhin has set his sights on usurping. This reality means that to succeed, Prigozhin would need to rally sufficient support behind his cause capable of not only sustaining his gambit but offsetting the considerable power of the Russian Ministry of Defense and the Russian Federation which, if left intact, would be able to readily defeat the forces of Wagner in any large-scale combat.

In short, Prigozhin is looking to create a so-called “Moscow Maidan” designed to replicate the success of the events of early 2014 in Kiev, where the constitutionally elected government of President Victor Yanukovych was toppled from power through violence and force of will that was orchestrated by Ukrainian nationalists supported by the US and Europe. The fantasy of a “Moscow Maidan” has been at the center of the strategy of the collective West and their Ukrainian proxy from the very start. Premised on the notion of a weak Russian president propped up by a thoroughly corrupt oligarch class, the idea of creating the conditions for the rise of sufficient domestic unrest capable of bringing down the Putin government like a proverbial house of cards was the primary objective of the sanctions regime imposed by the West after the initiation of the Special Military Operation (SMO) on February 24, 2022. The failure of the sanctions to generate such a result compelled the collective West to double-down on the notion of collapsing the Russian government, this time using a military solution. The British Prime Minister pressured his Ukrainian counterpart to forgo a negotiated settlement to the conflict that was ready to be signed in Istanbul on April 1, 2022, and instead engage in a protracted war with Russia fueled by tens of billions of dollars’ worth of military and financial assistance designed to inflict military losses on Russia sufficient to trigger domestic unrest—the elusive “Moscow Maidan.”

This effort likewise failed.

Failing to create the conditions conducive for the collapse of domestic support for Putin and the Ukrainian conflict by pressuring Russia from without, the collective West began working to create the conditions for bringing down Russia by sowing internal seeds of dissention. This strategy hinged on a very sophistical information warfare scheme which simultaneously sought to suppress and discredit narratives which sustained the official position of the Russian government, while building up covert agents of influence within social media outlets deemed to be influential amongst the Russian public. Using these channels, the pro-Ukrainian practitioners of information war began promulgating narratives intended to highlight the failings of the Russian government and, more specifically, persons close to President Putin who were affiliated with the SMO. By focusing their angst on what these channels were highlighting as the “failures” of the SMO, the information warfare practitioners were able to wrap themselves in the mantle of “patriotism,” claiming only to be looking out for the best interests of “Mother Russia,” all the while denigrating the character of the constitutional government.

There were several compelling narratives that were used by these information warfare specialists to serve as the foundation of their attack on Putin’s Russia. One of the more popular was grounded in the mythology of “2014” and the early resistance to the Ukrainian nationalists who sought to impose their policies of cultural and linguistic genocide on the ethnic Russian population of the Donbas. Let there be no doubt—the fighting that took place in the initial months and years of the Donbas conflict was difficult and bloody, and those who rallied to the cause of the ethnic Russians of the Donbas deserve tremendous credit for their courage and resilience in the face of a dangerous enemy. But this resistance also served to foster a sense of entitlement among the early leaders and participants of this resistance which often transformed into resentment against Russia and its president, Vladimir Putin, for abandoning the citizens of the Donbas to their own fate. The combination of resentful entitlement turned into hostility after the initiation of the SMO, when these “originals” took umbrage at whet they deemed to be the inadequate intervention on the part of the Russian government and the perceived incompetence of the Russian military. Characters such as Igor Girkin (perhaps better known by his nom de guerre, Strelkov) and Russell “Texas” Bentley perfected the art of “patriotic” criticism which, intentionally or not, was used by Russia’s enemies to further the notion of a weak and ineffective Russian government vulnerable to intervention by “real” Russian patriots who were concerned about “corruption” and “inefficiency” in the Putin regime. The pro-Ukrainian information warfare outlets were able to help magnify these “patriotic” voices of dissent by disseminating their message using Telegram and YouTube channels.

An expansion on the theme of “betrayed patriot” involves the Wagner Group itself and is pertinent to the present matter. The origins of the private military contract company, Wagner, are murky, but appear to be linked to the events of 2014 in the Donbas and the need for the Russian government to create a vehicle for the provision of relevant military expertise and material to the ethnic Russian resistance in the Donbas that would not conflict with Russian constitutional prohibitions against the deployment of regular Russian Army personnel on foreign soil. From its inception, Wagner was an adjunct of Russian Military Intelligence (GRU), and responsive to the commands of the Russian General Staff. This placed Wagner in the shadowy space between being an official agent of government policy and an independently-funded private military contractor.

Following the initiation of the SMO, the role played by Wagner in the Donbas conflict expanded, transitioning from an advisory capacity to major combatant by expanding the scope and scale of the Wagner presence. Wagner grew into a Corps-sized formation equipped with heavy weapons, including armor and artillery, as well as fixed-wing fighter aircraft, and was assigned responsibility for a section of the frontlines which included the twin-salt mining towns of Soledar and Bakhmut, both of which had been heavily fortified by the Ukrainian military. The bloody fighting for the Soledar-Bakhmut complex, which became known by the sobriquet “the meatgrinder,” helped transform Wagner into a legendary combat force in the minds of most Russians, and elevated Prigozhin’s profile considerably.

Wagner achieved its well-deserved martial reputation largely because it was able to operate independent of the suffocating bureaucracy of the Russian military. Thus liberated, Wagner was able to best exploit the experience and skill of its veteran fighters, streamlining command and control and tactical decision-making to enable Wagner to seize and maintain operational initiative, allowing Wagner to dominate the battlefield. While Wagner had operational independence, it received its operational tasking from the Russian General Staff, which also provided Wagner with the weapons, ammunition, fuel, and other logistical sustainment necessary to carry out its assigned mission.

The legal status of Wagner was secure so long as the territory it operated on was not Russian. This changed, however, in the aftermath of the September 2022 referendum which saw the Donbas transition from being an independent entity to being part of Russia. Wagner was able to maintain its unique status during the political transition of the Donbas to full Russian constitutional control, but once this transition was completed, sometime in early 2023, reality came home to roost. Logistical requisitions, which used to be treated as special requests approved as part of the general support provided by Russia to the Donbas, were not treated as part of the routine logistical establishment of the Russian ministry of Defense. From a practical standpoint, this meant that the quantities of ammunition, especially in terms of artillery shells, was cut back to reflect the “norm” used to support military formations of a similar size. Wagner tactics, however, were contingent upon the ability to support their operations with overwhelming fire support. Denied the quantities of ammunition they were used to receiving, Wagner’s assault detachment began to take heavy casualties, prompting Prigozhin to initiate a public feud with both Shoigu and Gerasimov, whom he accused of incompetence and corruption.

Prigozhin’s antics, which were played out in intimate detail on social media, caught the attention of pro-Ukrainian information warfare specialists, who began promoting the narrative of Prigozhin—a former convict with zero political experience—assuming a leadership position in Russia. Prigozhin himself seemed to feed off this notion. While publicly denying any such ambition, Prigozhin continued his public trolling of Shoigu and Gerasimov. The vitriol became so intense that Putin was compelled to summon both men to the Kremlin, where they were read the riot act by an irate Russian President and told in no uncertain terms to cease and desist or pay the consequences. Putin also at this time had Shoigu step back from being the overseer of Wagner logistical support, instead turning that task over to General Sergey Surovikin, a senior military commander overseeing the air component of the SMO.

In retrospect, this was a mistake, as it only reinforced the notion in Prigozhin’s mind that if he made a big enough scene, Putin would yield to his desires.

At some point in time, Prigozhin appears to have gone off the rails completely. Even after the presidential intervention, Prigozhin continued his public feud with both Shoigu and Gerasimov, at one point threatening to pull Wagner out of Bakhmut before that battle was concluded. Prigozhin went out of his way to promote himself as a frontline commander, appearing in videos he published on Telegram visiting the Wagner fighters on the frontline, often under fire, and then contrasting this with what Prigozhin articulated as the timid behavior of Shoigu and Gerasimov, whom Prigozhin mocked for managing the SMO from the safety of bunkers far from the zone of conflict.

At some point in time Prigozhin’s antics caught the attention of Ukrainian intelligence, and their British and US counterparts. The narcissistic need for attention, coupled with grandiose notions of self-importance, made Prigozhin an ideal candidate for recruitment by a hostile foreign intelligence service. A financial component—basic greed—can be added to this behavioral model as well. In addition to seeking to bring Wagner under the operational control of the Ministry of Defense through the rationing of ammunition, Defense Minister Shoigu announced that Wagner fighters would have to sign legally binding contracts with the Russian Minister of Defense to allow them to continue to serve in their capacity as a combat unit. The reason for this was the constitutional ban on private military companies operating on Russian soil. The Russian government was willing to turn a blind eye to this legality while the battle for Bakhmut raged, but once the “meatgrinder” shut down, and Wagner was withdrawn from the front for a period of well-deserved rest and refitting, the Ministry of Defense announced that before Wagner could resume its combat operations (Prigozhin indicated that Wagner would return to fighting around August 5), its fighters and commanders would have to sign contracts. The deadline for signing contracts was set for July 1.

According to Prigozhin, the military council of commanders—the real leaders of Wagner—refused to allow these contracts to be signed. Wagner and Shoigu were heading for a confrontation. Wagner was, during this time, building upon the good will of the Russian people that had been earned in the bloody fighting for Bakhmut. Wagner was engaged in an unprecedented public relations campaign designed to imprint on the Russian people the heroic status its fighters enjoyed, all the while seeking to recruit new fighters into it ranks. The success of this public relations campaign only reinforced in the mindset of Prigozhin the notion that he and Wagner were more popular amongst the Russian people than were Shoigu, Gerasimov, and the Russian Ministry of Defense.

The collusion between Prigozhin and the Ukrainians, while unproven at this juncture, appears obvious in retrospect. One of the key indicators is the decision by the Ukrain